The life of William now Lord Arch-Bishop of Canterbury, examined. Wherein his principall actions, or deviations in matters of doctrine and discipline (since he came to that sea of Canturbury) are traced, and set downe, as they were taken from good hands, by Mr. Robert Bayley, a learned pastor of the Kirk of Scotland, and one of the late commissioners sent from that Nation. Very fitting for all judicious men to reade, and examine, that they may be the better able to censure him for those thing [sic] wherein he hath done amisse. Reade and judge.
         Ladensium autokatakrisis, the Canterburians self-conviction
         Baillie, Robert, 1599-1662.
      
       
         
           1643
        
      
       Approx. 368 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 82 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2009-03 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A67904
         Wing B462
         ESTC R22260
         99871680
         99871680
         130835
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A67904)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 130835)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Thomason Tracts ; 12:E72[3], 12:E72[4])
      
       
         
           
             The life of William now Lord Arch-Bishop of Canterbury, examined. Wherein his principall actions, or deviations in matters of doctrine and discipline (since he came to that sea of Canturbury) are traced, and set downe, as they were taken from good hands, by Mr. Robert Bayley, a learned pastor of the Kirk of Scotland, and one of the late commissioners sent from that Nation. Very fitting for all judicious men to reade, and examine, that they may be the better able to censure him for those thing [sic] wherein he hath done amisse. Reade and judge.
             Ladensium autokatakrisis, the Canterburians self-conviction
             Baillie, Robert, 1599-1662.
          
           [22], 131, [1]; [18], 17-38, 41-48, 51-70 [i.e. 80], [2]; 37, [1] p.
           
             Printed for N B,
             London :
             in the yeare of Grace. 1643.
          
           
             Anonymous. By Robert Baillie.
             Lysimachus Nicanor = John Corbet.
             A reissue, with cancel title page, of: Ladensium autokatakrisis, the Canterburians self-conviction.
             "A large supplement of the Canterburian self-conviction" (Wing B462) has separate pagination and register, and separate title page dated 1641; "A postscript of the personate Iesuite Lysimachus Nicanor" (caption title), a reply to "The epistle congratulatorie of Lysimachus Nicanor of the Societie of Jesu, to the Covenanters in Scotland", has separate pagination and register.
             Second p. 80 misnumbered 70.
             Errata leaf bound before the postscript.
             "The life of William now Lord Arch-Bishop of Canterbury, examined" is identified elsewhere as Wing L2040.
             Annotation on Thomason copy: "Octob: 24".
             Reproduction of the original in the British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Laud, William, 1573-1645 -- Controversial literature -- Early works to 1800.
           Nicanor, Lysimachus, 1603-1641. -- Epistle congratulatorie of Lysimachus Nicanor of the Societie of Jesu, to the Covenanters in Scotland -- Controversial literature.
           Church of England -- Controversial literature -- Puritan authors -- Early works to 1800.
           Church and state -- England -- Early works to 1800.
           Arminianism -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2000-00 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2001-12 Apex CoVantage
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2002-02 TCP Staff (Michigan)
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2002-02 TCP Staff (Michigan)
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2002-03 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           THE
           LIFE
           OF
           WILLIAM
           Now
           Lord
           Arch-Bishop
           of
           CANTERBVRY
           ,
           EXAMINED
           .
        
         
           Wherein
           his
           principall
           Actions
           ,
           or
           Deviations
           in
           matters
           of
           Doctrine
           and
           Discipline
           (
           since
           he
           came
           to
           that
           Sea
           of
           Canturbury
           )
           are
           traced
           ,
           and
           set
           downe
           ,
           as
           they
           were
           taken
           from
           good
           hands
           ,
           by
           Mr.
           
             Robert
             Bayley
          
           ,
           a
           Learned
           Pastor
           of
           the
           Kirk
           of
           Scotland
           ,
           and
           one
           of
           the
           late
           Commissioners
           sent
           from
           that
           Nation
           .
        
         
           Very
           fitting
           for
           all
           judicious
           men
           to
           reade
           ,
           and
           examine
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           be
           the
           better
           able
           to
           censure
           him
           for
           those
           thing
           wherein
           he
           hath
           done
           amisse
           .
        
         
           Reade
           and
           Judge
           .
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           for
           
             N
             B
          
           in
           the
           Yeare
           of
           Grace
           .
           1643.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           Summa
           Capitum
           .
        
         
           THE
           Preface
           showeth
           the
           unreasonablenesse
           of
           this
           new
           warre
           ,
           That
           we
           have
           committed
           nothing
           against
           the
           late
           pacification
           :
           That
           compasson
           ,
           hope
           ,
           and
           all
           reason
           call
           now
           for
           peace
           at
           home
           ;
           that
           at
           〈◊〉
           we
           may
           get
           some
           order
           of
           our
           enemies
           abroad
           ,
           That
           the
           Canterburian
           faction
           deserves
           not
           so
           well
           of
           England
           ,
           that
           armes
           in
           their
           favour
           ought
           to
           be
           taken
           against
           Scotland
           :
           We
           offer
           to
           instruct
           their
           insupportable
           crimes
           by
           their
           owne
           writs
           :
           If
           armes
           be
           needlesly
           taken
           in
           so
           evill
           a
           cause
           ,
           they
           cannot
           but
           end
           in
           an
           untimous
           repentance
           :
           In
           this
           nick
           of
           time
           very
           poore
           wits
           without
           presumption
           may
           venture
           to
           speake
           even
           to
           Parliaments
           :
           The
           obstinate
           silence
           of
           the
           
             English
             Divines
          
           is
           prodigious
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             The
             delineation
             of
             the
             whole
             subsequent
             Treatise
             .
          
           
             OVR
             Adversars
             decline
             to
             answere
             our
             first
             and
             chiefe
             challenge
             :
             The
             scope
             of
             this
             writ
             ,
             All
             our
             plea
             is
             but
             one
             cleare
             syllogisme
             ,
             the
             Major
             whereof
             is
             the
             sentence
             of
             our
             Iudge
             ,
             the
             Minor
             ,
             the
             confession
             
             of
             our
             party
             ,
             the
             conclusion
             a
             cleare
             and
             necessar
             consequence
             from
             these
             two
             premisses
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             The
             Canterburians
             avowed
             Arminianisme
             .
          
           
             ARminianisme
             ,
             is
             a
             great
             and
             dangerous
             innovation
             of
             our
             Religion
             :
             King
             James
             his
             judgement
             therof
             :
             the
             great
             increase
             of
             Arminianisme
             in
             Scotland
             by
             Canterburies
             meanes
             :
             King
             Charles
             his
             name
             stolne
             by
             Canterburie
             ,
             to
             the
             defence
             of
             Arminianisme
             :
             the
             Irish
             Church
             infected
             with
             Arminianisme
             by
             Canterburie
             :
             the
             Canterburians
             in
             England
             teach
             the
             first
             and
             second
             article
             of
             Arminius
             :
             Why
             King
             James
             stiled
             Arminians
             Atheists
             :
             they
             teach
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             article
             :
             Also
             the
             fifth
             :
             the
             Arminians
             in
             England
             advanced
             :
             their
             opposites
             disgraced
             and
             persecuted
             :
             Canterburie
             and
             his
             fellowes
             ,
             contrare
             to
             the
             Kings
             Proclamation
             ,
             goe
             on
             boldly
             to
             print
             ,
             let
             be
             to
             preach
             Arminian
             tenets
             :
             A
             demonstration
             of
             
               Canterburies
               Arminianisme
            
             in
             the
             highest
             degree
             :
             they
             make
             Arminianisme
             consonant
             to
             the
             articles
             of
             England
             ,
             and
             so
             not
             contrare
             to
             the
             Proclamation
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             The
             Canterburians
             professed
             affection
             towards
             the
             pope
             and
             popery
             in
             grosse
             .
          
           
             ONce
             they
             were
             suspected
             of
             Lutheranisme
             ,
             but
             at
             last
             Poperie
             was
             found
             their
             marke
             :
             To
             make
             way
             for
             their
             designes
             ,
             they
             cry
             downe
             the
             Popes
             Antichristianisme
             :
             They
             are
             content
             to
             have
             the
             Popes
             authoritie
             
             set
             up
             againe
             in
             England
             :
             their
             mind
             to
             the
             Cardinalat
             :
             they
             affect
             much
             to
             be
             joined
             with
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             as
             shee
             stands
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IIII.
             The
             Canterburians
             joine
             with
             Rome
             in
             her
             grossest
             idolatries
             .
          
           
             IN
             the
             middes
             of
             their
             denyalls
             ,
             yet
             they
             avow
             their
             giving
             of
             religious
             adoration
             ,
             to
             the
             very
             stock
             or
             stone
             of
             the
             altar
             :
             As
             much
             adoration
             of
             the
             elements
             they
             grant
             as
             the
             Papists
             require
             :
             In
             the
             matter
             of
             images
             their
             full
             agreement
             with
             Rome
             .
             About
             relicts
             they
             agree
             with
             Papists
             :
             they
             come
             neere
             to
             the
             invocation
             of
             Saints
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             The
             Canterburians
             avow
             their
             embracing
             of
             the
             popish
             heresies
             and
             grossest
             errours
             .
          
           
             THey
             joine
             with
             Rome
             in
             setting
             up
             traditions
             in
             prejudice
             of
             Scripture
             :
             In
             the
             doctrine
             of
             faith
             ,
             justification
             ,
             fulfilling
             of
             the
             Law
             ,
             merit
             ,
             they
             are
             fully
             Popish
             :
             In
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             behold
             their
             Poperie
             :
             they
             are
             for
             the
             reerection
             of
             Monasteries
             ,
             and
             placing
             of
             Monks
             and
             Nunnes
             therein
             as
             of
             old
             :
             How
             neere
             they
             approach
             to
             Purgatorie
             and
             prayer
             for
             the
             dead
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             Anent
             their
             Superstitions
             .
          
           
             FEW
             of
             all
             Romes
             superstitions
             are
             against
             their
             stomack
             :
             They
             embrace
             the
             grossest
             not
             only
             of
             their
             privat
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             their
             publick
             superstitions
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
             The
             Canterburians
             embrace
             the
             Messe
             it selfe
             .
          
           
             THey
             cry
             downe
             so
             farre
             as
             they
             can
             all
             preaching
             :
             They
             approve
             the
             masse
             both
             for
             word
             and
             matter
             :
             The
             Scotish
             Liturgie
             is
             much
             worse
             then
             the
             English
             :
             Many
             alterations
             into
             the
             Scotish
             ,
             specially
             about
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             consecration
             ,
             the
             Sacrifice
             ,
             the
             Communion
             .
          
        
         
           
             CAP.
             ULT.
             The
             Canterburian
             maximes
             of
             Tyrannie
             .
          
           
             THE
             tyrannous
             usurpation
             of
             the
             Canrerburians
             ,
             are
             as
             many
             and
             heavie
             as
             these
             of
             the
             Romish
             Clergie
             :
             King
             Charles
             bates
             all
             tyrannie
             the
             Canterburians
             flatter
             him
             in
             much
             more
             power
             then
             ever
             he
             will
             take
             :
             they
             enable
             the
             〈◊〉
             without
             advice
             of
             the
             church
             ,
             to
             do
             in
             allEcclesiasticall
             affairs
             what
             he
             thinks
             meet
             :
             They
             give
             to
             the
             King
             power
             to
             doe
             in
             the
             State
             what
             ever
             he
             will
             without
             the
             advice
             of
             his
             Parliament
             :
             In
             no
             imaginable
             case
             they
             will
             have
             the
             greatest
             tyrants
             resisted
             :
             What
             they
             give
             to
             Kings
             is
             not
             for
             any
             respect
             they
             have
             to
             Majestie
             ,
             but
             for
             their
             owne
             ambitious
             and
             covetous
             ends
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           The
           chiefe
           witnesses
           which
           in
           
             the
             following
             action
             are
             brought
             in
             to
             〈◊〉
             .
          
        
         
           
             WIlliam
             Lad
          
           Archbishop
           of
           Canterbury
           in
           his
           speach
           before
           the
           〈◊〉
           -
           〈◊〉
           ,
           in
           his
           relation
           of
           his
           conference
           with
           〈◊〉
           Fisher
           ,
           is
           it
           was
           the
           
           last
           yeare
           amplified
           and
           reprinted
           by
           the
           Kings
           direction
           :
           In
           
             Andrewes
             opuscula
             posthuma
          
           ,
           set
           out
           by
           him
           ,
           and
           dedicated
           to
           the
           King.
           
        
         
           B.
           
             Whyt
             of
             Eli
          
           in
           his
           treatise
           vpon
           the
           Sabbath
           ,
           and
           his
           answere
           to
           the
           lawlesse
           Dialogue
           .
        
         
           B.
           Montagu
           of
           Chichester
           in
           his
           answer
           to
           the
           gagger
           ,
           in
           his
           appeale
           ,
           in
           his
           antidiatribae
           ,
           in
           his
           apparatus
           ,
           in
           his
           origines
           .
        
         
           
             B.
             Hall
          
           of
           Exeter
           ,
           in
           his
           old
           Religion
           set
           out
           with
           his
           owne
           apologie
           ,
           and
           the
           apologie
           of
           his
           friends
           M.
           Chomley
           ,
           and
           M.
           Butterfield
           :
           In
           his
           remedie
           of
           profainnesse
           :
        
         
           
             Peter
             Heylen
          
           Chaplane
           in
           ordinar
           in
           his
           answer
           to
           Burton
           set
           out
           ,
           as
           he
           sayes
           ,
           by
           the
           command
           of
           authority
           ,
           as
           a
           full
           and
           〈◊〉
           Reply
           to
           be
           expected
           ,
           against
           all
           the
           exceptions
           which
           commonly
           are
           taken
           at
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterbury
           his
           actions
           ,
           in
           his
           antidotum
           Lincolinense
           subscribed
           by
           Canterburies
           Chaplane
           .
        
         
           
             D.
             Pottar
          
           ,
           Chaplane
           in
           ordinar
           ,
           in
           his
           charity
           mistaken
           ,
           as
           he
           prints
           ,
           at
           the
           command
           of
           authority
           .
        
         
           
             D.
             Laurence
          
           chaplane
           in
           ordinar
           ,
           in
           his
           sermon
           preached
           before
           the
           King
           ,
           and
           printed
           at
           the
           command
           of
           authority
           .
        
         
           D.
           poklingtoun
           in
           his
           Sunday
           no
           Sabbath
           ,
           in
           his
           
             altare
             Christianum
          
           ,
           subscribed
           by
           
             Canterburies
             Chaplane
          
           .
        
         
           
             Christopher
             Dow
          
           in
           his
           answere
           to
           Burton
           ,
           subscribed
           by
           
             Canterburies
             Chaplane
          
           .
        
         
           Couzine
           in
           his
           devotions
           ,
           the
           fourth
           edition
           ,
           subscribed
           by
           the
           B.
           of
           London
           his
           owne
           hand
           .
           
           Chounaeus
           
             in
             his
          
           collectiones
           Thelogicae
           ;
           
             dedicated
             to
             my
             L.
             of
          
           Canterburie
           ,
           
             and
             subscribed
             by
             his
             Chaplane
          
           .
        
         
           Shelfoord
           
             in
             his
             five
             pious
             Sermons
             ,
             printed
             at
          
           Cambridge
           ,
           
             by
             the
             direction
             of
             the
          
           Vice-chanceler
           D.
           Beel
           ,
           
             set
             out
             with
             a
             number
             of
             Epigrames
             Latine
             &
             English
             ,
             by
             divers
             of
             the
             university
             fellowes
             ,
             defended
             yet
             still
             by
          
           Heylene
           ,
           and
           〈◊〉
           ,
           
             in
             their
             bookes
             ,
             which
          
           Canterbury
           
             hath
             approved
          
           .
        
         
           Anronie
           Stafford
           
             in
             his
             female
             glory
             ,
             printed
             at
          
           London
           ,
           
             and
             not
             withstanding
             of
             all
             the
             challenges
             ,
             made
             against
             it
             ,
             yet
             still
             defended
             by
          
           Heylene
           &
           Dow
           
             in
             their
             approved
             writs
          
           .
        
         
           William
           Wats
           
             in
             his
             sermon
             of
             apostolicall
             mortification
             .
          
        
         
           Giles
           Widowes
           
             in
             his
             schismaticall
          
           Puritan
           .
        
         
           Edward
           Boughen
           
             in
             his
             Sermon
             of
             order
             and
             〈◊〉
             .
          
        
         
           Mr.
           Sp.
           of
           Queenes
           Colledge
           in
           Cambridge
           ,
           in
           his
           Sermon
           of
           Confession
           .
        
         
           Samuel
           Hoards
           
             an
             his
             sermon
             at
             the
          
           Metropoliticall
           visitation
           .
        
         
           Mr.
           Tedders
           
             in
             his
             sermon
             ,
             at
             the
          
           visitation
           
             of
             the
             B.
             of
          
           Norwitch
           ,
           all
           subscribed
           by
           the
           hands
           of
           my
           L.
           of
           Canterburies
           Chaplane
           ,
           Bray
           ,
           Oliver-Baker
           ,
           
             or
             some
             others
          
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           PREFACE
        
         
           IT
           is
           fallen
           out
           much
           beside
           our
           expectation
           
           that
           the
           storme
           of
           war
           should
           now
           againe
           begin
           to
           blow
           ,
           when
           we
           did
           esteeme
           that
           the
           mercy
           of
           GOD
           ,
           and
           justice
           of
           our
           Prince
           had
           setled
           our
           Land
           in
           a
           firme
           Peace
           for
           many
           generations
           ,
           at
           least
           for
           many
           days
           ,
           and
           ever
           while
           some
           appearance
           of
           provocation
           should
           have
           arisen
           from
           us
           ,
           for
           the
           kindling
           of
           〈◊〉
           wrath
           of
           our
           enraged
           enemies
           ;
           whose
           fury
           though
           we
           know
           well
           not
           to
           be
           quite
           extinguished
           ,
           yet
           we
           did
           surely
           think
           itwould
           not
           break
           forth
           in
           haste
           in
           any
           publick
           and
           open
           flame
           ,
           till
           some
           new
           matter
           had
           bin
           furnished
           ,
           or
           some
           probable
           colour
           of
           a
           new
           quarrell
           could
           have
           beene
           alledged
           against
           us
           .
        
         
           When
           we
           have
           scattered
           that
           cloud
           of
           calumnies
           ,
           
           which
           bytheir
           〈◊〉
           and
           pens
           they
           had
           spread
           abroad
           of
           our
           rebellion
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           odious
           crimes
           ,
           when
           by
           our
           frequent
           supplications
           ,
           informations
           ,
           〈◊〉
           ,
           declarations
           ,
           and
           other
           writs
           ,
           we
           have
           cleared
           〈◊〉
           the
           justice
           of
           our
           cause
           ,
           the
           innecency
           of
           our
           proceedings
           to
           all
           the
           ingenuous
           mindes
           of
           the
           I
           le
           ,
           and
           to
           so
           many
           of
           our
           neighbour
           nations
           ,
           as
           have
           bin
           desirous
           to
           〈◊〉
           of
           our
           affairs
           ;
           when
           our
           gracious
           and
           just
           Prince
           ,
           in
           the
           very
           heat
           of
           his
           wrath
           〈◊〉
           alone
           by
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           ,
           even
           while
           armes
           were
           in
           his
           
           hand
           ,
           hath
           beene
           moved
           with
           the
           unanimous
           consent
           of
           all
           his
           English
           Counsel
           ,
           of
           all
           his
           Commanders
           &
           whole
           army
           ,
           to
           acknowledge
           us
           good
           and
           loyall
           subjects
           :
           And
           after
           a
           full
           hearing
           of
           our
           cause
           in
           his
           campe
           to
           professe
           his
           satisfaction
           ,
           to
           pronounce
           us
           free
           of
           those
           crimes
           which
           before
           were
           falsly
           blazed
           of
           us
           ,
           to
           send
           us
           all
           home
           in
           peace
           ,
           with
           the
           tokens
           of
           his
           favor
           ,
           with
           the
           hearty
           embracements
           of
           that
           army
           which
           came
           against
           us
           for
           our
           ruine
           :
           When
           we
           in
           a
           generall
           assembly
           of
           our
           Church
           ,
           with
           the
           kwowledge
           &
           full
           consent
           of
           his
           Majesties
           highCommissioner
           &
           whole
           〈◊〉
           have
           justified
           our
           opposition
           to
           the
           innovation
           of
           our
           Religion
           &
           Lawes
           by
           the
           Prelates
           ,
           our
           excommunication
           of
           them
           therefore
           ,
           the
           renewing
           of
           our
           Covenant
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           our
           Ecclesiasticall
           proceedings
           ;
           when
           our
           States
           in
           Parliament
           were
           going
           on
           in
           a
           sweet
           harmony
           to
           confirm
           the
           weaknesses
           &
           set
           right
           the
           disorders
           of
           our
           Estate
           ,
           and
           that
           no
           farther
           then
           cleare
           equity
           ,
           reason
           ,
           law
           ,
           yea
           the
           very
           words
           of
           the
           pacificatory
           edict
           did
           permit
           ;
           when
           our
           whole
           people
           were
           minding
           nothing
           but
           quietnesse
           ,
           having
           cast
           their
           〈◊〉
           under
           the
           feet
           of
           our
           reconciled
           King
           ,
           put
           all
           their
           castles
           &
           canons
           in
           his
           hand
           ,
           without
           any
           security
           ,
           but
           the
           royall
           Word
           ,
           &
           received
           heartily
           all
           those
           fugitives
           who
           had
           taken
           armes
           in
           the
           Prelates
           cause
           ,
           against
           theirCountry
           ,
           having
           no
           other
           mind
           ,
           but
           to
           sit
           down
           with
           joy
           ,
           and
           go
           about
           our
           own
           long
           neglected
           businesse
           ;
           praising
           God
           ,
           &
           blessing
           the
           King
           :
           The
           martiall
           minds
           among
           us
           ,
           panting
           for
           languor
           to
           be
           imployed
           over
           sea
           ,
           for
           the
           honor
           of
           the
           crown
           ;
           in
           spending
           their
           bloud
           against
           the
           insolent
           enemies
           of
           his
           Majesties
           house
           .
           While
           these
           are
           our
           onely
           thoughts
           ,
           It
           was
           more
           then
           marveilous
           to
           us
           
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           the
           dumbe
           and
           obscure
           whisperings
           ,
           and
           at
           once
           the
           loud
           blasts
           ,
           the
           open
           threats
           of
           a
           new
           more
           terrible
           &
           cruell
           war
           then
           before
           should
           come
           to
           our
           ears
           ,
           that
           our
           Castles
           should
           be
           filled
           with
           strangers
           ,
           be
           provided
           with
           extraordinary
           victuals
           and
           munition
           ,
           〈◊〉
           against
           a
           present
           assault
           ,
           or
           long
           siege
           :
           Many
           of
           our
           Nobles
           tempted
           to
           leave
           our
           cause
           ;
           numbers
           of
           assays
           made
           to
           break
           the
           unity
           of
           all
           our
           Estates
           :
           And
           at
           last
           our
           Parliament
           commanded
           to
           arise
           ,
           the
           commissioners
           therof
           ,
           after
           a
           long
           &
           wearisome
           journy
           to
           Court
           ,
           for
           the
           clearing
           of
           some
           surmised
           mistakes
           about
           moods
           &
           forms
           of
           proceeding
           ,
           refused
           presence
           :
           A
           〈◊〉
           in
           England
           indicted
           (
           as
           the
           rumour
           goeth
           )
           to
           〈◊〉
           that
           nation
           ,
           our
           dearest
           neighbors
           ,
           with
           whom
           our
           cause
           is
           common
           ,
           to
           imploy
           their
           means
           and
           armes
           against
           us
           ,
           that
           so
           our
           old
           nationall
           and
           immort
           all
           wars
           may
           be
           renewed
           to
           make
           sport
           to
           Prelates
           ,
           &
           a
           bridge
           for
           the
           
             Spaniard
             or
             French
          
           to
           come
           over
           sea
           and
           sit
           downe
           masters
           of
           the
           whole
           I
           le
           ,
           when
           both
           nations
           by
           mutuall
           wounds
           are
           disabled
           for
           defence
           against
           the
           force
           of
           〈◊〉
           enemy
           ,
           so
           potent
           as
           either
           France
           or
           Spain
           are
           this
           day
           of
           themselvs
           ,
           without
           the
           assistance
           which
           too
           like
           shall
           be
           made
           them
           by
           the
           Papists
           of
           the
           I
           le
           ,
           and
           many
           moe
           ,
           who
           will
           not
           faile
           to
           joyne
           for
           their
           own
           ends
           with
           any
           apparent
           victor
           .
        
         
           We
           admire
           how
           it
           is
           possible
           that
           intestine
           armes
           
           without
           any
           necessity
           should
           be
           taken
           up
           at
           this
           season
           when
           all
           the
           forces
           the
           whole
           〈◊〉
           can
           spare
           are
           most
           earnestly
           called
           for
           ,
           by
           the
           tears
           of
           his
           Majesties
           only
           sister
           ,
           by
           the
           bloud
           and
           long
           desolation
           of
           her
           most
           miserable
           Subjects
           ,
           by
           the
           captivity
           and
           banishment
           of
           all
           〈◊〉
           hopefull
           Children
           ,
           Prince
           Charles
           ,
           lying
           daily
           under
           
           the
           hazard
           of
           the
           French
           Kings
           mercie
           at
           〈◊〉
           ,
           〈◊〉
           Prince
           Robert
           of
           the
           Emperors
           at
           Vienne
           ,
           the
           rest
           of
           that
           royall
           bloud
           lying
           so
           many
           yeares
           with
           their
           Mother
           ;
           〈◊〉
           in
           a
           strange
           Country
           :
           Pitty
           would
           command
           us
           to
           put
           up
           all
           our
           homeward
           quarrels
           ,
           though
           they
           were
           both
           great
           and
           many
           ,
           let
           be
           to
           〈◊〉
           any
           ,
           where
           〈◊〉
           reall
           can
           be
           sound
           :
           Yea
           ,
           hope
           would
           allure
           us
           to
           try
           〈◊〉
           ,
           if
           ever
           ,
           our
           Armes
           on
           those
           spitefull
           Nations
           ,
           the
           hereditary
           enemies
           of
           our
           Religion
           and
           of
           our
           Ile
           ,
           when
           〈◊〉
           hath
           made
           them
           contemptible
           by
           the
           cleere
           successe
           he
           giveth
           daily
           〈◊〉
           every
           one
           that
           riseth
           against
           them
           :
           Bannier
           with
           a
           wing
           of
           the
           Swedish
           Army
           ,
           dwelling
           in
           spite
           of
           the
           Emperor
           all
           this
           yeare
           in
           the
           heart
           of
           his
           Countries
           ,
           a
           part
           of
           Weymers
           forces
           with
           a
           little
           helpe
           from
           France
           triumphing
           on
           the
           Rhene
           ,
           for
           all
           that
           
             Baviere
             ,
             Culen
          
           ,
           the
           
             Emperor
             or
             Spaniard
          
           can
           doe
           against
           them
           :
           That
           very
           strong
           and
           great
           Armado
           all
           utterly
           crushed
           in
           our
           eyes
           by
           the
           Hollanders
           alone
           ,
           without
           the
           assistance
           of
           any
           :
           The
           very
           French
           ,
           not
           the
           best
           sea-men
           ,
           having
           lately
           beaten
           oftner
           then
           once
           the
           Spanish
           navies
           in
           the
           Mediterran
           ,
           the
           
             Spanish
             Empire
          
           labouring
           of
           a
           dangerous
           fever
           both
           at
           home
           and
           abroad
           ,
           the
           Portugallians
           in
           spite
           of
           Philip
           ,
           crowning
           
             Iohn
             of
             Braganza
          
           for
           their
           King
           ,
           the
           Catalonians
           putting
           themselves
           in
           subjection
           to
           the
           
             French
             Crown
             ,
             Naples
          
           and
           West-flanders
           brangling
           ,
           the
           Fleet
           of
           the
           States
           almost
           domineering
           in
           the
           Westindian
           seas
           .
           Shall
           we
           alone
           sit
           still
           for
           ever
           ?
           shal
           we
           send
           always
           〈◊〉
           but
           base
           contemtible
           &
           derided
           〈◊〉
           to
           these
           〈◊〉
           Princes
           ?
           shal
           we
           feed
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           with
           their
           scornfull
           promises
           ,
           which
           so
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           have
           sound
           ,
           to
           our
           great
           disgrace
           ,
           〈◊〉
           false
           ?
           
           yea
           ,
           rather
           then
           to
           beat
           them
           by
           that
           aboundance
           of
           power
           which
           we
           have
           ,
           if
           God
           will
           give
           us
           an
           heart
           to
           imploy
           it
           ,
           rather
           then
           to
           pull
           downe
           those
           tyrants
           who
           have
           shed
           rivers
           of
           Protestants
           bloud
           ,
           who
           have
           long
           troden
           on
           the
           persons
           of
           our
           nearest
           friends
           ,
           &
           in
           the
           ,
           on
           our
           honour
           !
           Is
           it
           now
           meet
           we
           should
           choose
           to
           goe
           kill
           one
           another
           ,
           alone
           for
           the
           bearing
           vp
           of
           Prelats
           tailes
           ,
           and
           that
           of
           Prelates
           as
           unworthy
           of
           respect
           as
           any
           that
           ever
           wore
           a
           Mytre
           .
           Let
           our
           kindred
           ,
           let
           our
           friends
           ,
           let
           all
           the
           Protestant
           churches
           perish
           ,
           let
           our
           own
           lives
           &
           estates
           run
           never
           so
           evident
           an
           hazard
           ,
           yet
           the
           〈◊〉
           pride
           must
           be
           borne
           vp
           ,
           their
           furious
           desire
           of
           〈◊〉
           must
           be
           satiate
           ;
           all
           their
           Mandamus
           in
           these
           dominiōs
           must
           be
           executed
           with
           greater
           severity
           &
           rigour
           then
           those
           of
           their
           brethren
           are
           this
           day
           in
           Italy
           or
           Spaine
           ,
           or
           those
           of
           their
           grand-father
           at
           Rome
           .
        
         
           To
           us
           surely
           it
           is
           a
           strange
           Paradox
           ,
           that
           a
           Parliament
           
           of
           England
           so
           wise
           ,
           grave
           ,
           equitable
           a
           Court
           ,
           as
           inall
           bygon
           times
           it
           hathever
           proved
           ,
           should
           be
           thought
           in
           danger
           at
           any
           time
           ,
           let
           be
           now
           to
           be
           induced
           by
           any
           allurement
           ,
           by
           any
           terrour
           ,
           to
           submit
           themselves
           as
           Vallets
           and
           pages
           to
           the
           execution
           of
           the
           lusts
           ,
           the
           furies
           and
           outragious
           counsels
           of
           Canterbury
           and
           his
           dependers
           ,
           for
           they
           know
           much
           better
           then
           we
           ,
           that
           the
           maine
           greevances
           both
           of
           their
           Church
           and
           state
           ,
           have
           no
           other
           originall
           ,
           no
           other
           fountaine
           ,
           on
           Earth
           but
           those
           men
           .
           Who
           other
           but
           they
           have
           keeped
           our
           most
           gracious
           Prince
           at
           a
           distance
           from
           the
           countrey
           almost
           ever
           since
           he
           came
           to
           the
           Crowne
           ?
           For
           whose
           cause
           have
           Parliaments
           these
           many
           yeares
           bin
           hindred
           to
           meet
           ,
           and
           when
           they
           have
           met
           ,
           beene
           quickly
           raised
           ,
           to
           the
           unspeakable
           griefe
           and
           prejudice
           of
           the
           whole
           land
           ,
           
           &
           of
           all
           our
           friends
           abroad
           .
           By
           whose
           connivence
           is
           it
           that
           the
           idolatrous
           chappels
           of
           both
           the
           Queens
           in
           the
           most
           conspicuous
           places
           of
           the
           Court
           are
           so
           gorgeous
           &
           much
           frequented
           ?
           Whose
           tolerance
           is
           it
           that
           at
           London
           three
           masse-priests
           are
           to
           be
           found
           for
           one
           Minister
           ,
           that
           three
           hundreth
           of
           them
           reside
           in
           the
           city
           in
           ordinar
           ,
           &
           six
           thousand
           at
           least
           in
           the
           country
           ;
           If
           ye
           trust
           the
           Iesuits
           Catalogues
           to
           Rome
           ?
           Whence
           comes
           their
           immunity
           fro
           the
           laws
           ,
           who
           have
           set
           up
           cloisters
           for
           Monks
           and
           Nuns
           ,
           let
           be
           houses
           for
           open
           Masses
           in
           divers
           cities
           of
           the
           Kings
           dominions
           ?
           Why
           is
           our
           correspondence
           with
           the
           Pope
           no
           more
           secret
           ,
           but
           our
           Agents
           avowedly
           sent
           to
           Rome
           ,
           &
           his
           
             holinesse
             Nuntioes
          
           received
           here
           in
           state
           ,
           &
           that
           such
           ones
           as
           in
           publik
           writs
           have
           lately
           defamed
           with
           unspeakable
           reproaches
           the
           person
           and
           birth
           of
           that
           most
           sacred
           Q.
           Elizabeth
           .
           Such
           actions
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           long
           permission
           of
           such
           abominations
           doe
           they
           flow
           from
           any
           other
           but
           his
           Grace
           ,
           the
           head
           and
           heart
           of
           the
           Cabbin
           Counsel
           ?
           Did
           any
           other
           but
           he
           and
           his
           creatures
           ,
           his
           legs
           and
           armes
           hinder
           alwayes
           our
           effectuall
           allyance
           with
           the
           
             Swedes
             &
             French
          
           ,
           when
           their
           armies
           did
           most
           flourish
           in
           Germany
           for
           the
           relief
           of
           the
           oppressed
           churches
           ?
           Why
           was
           that
           poore
           Prince
           the
           King
           of
           Boheme
           to
           his
           dying
           day
           kept
           from
           any
           considerable
           helpe
           from
           Britaine
           ?
           How
           was
           these
           young
           princes
           the
           other
           year
           permitted
           to
           take
           the
           fields
           with
           so
           small
           forces
           ,
           that
           a
           very
           meanpower
           of
           a
           silly
           commander
           beat
           them
           both
           ,
           tooke
           the
           〈◊〉
           captive
           ,
           and
           put
           the
           other
           in
           his
           slight
           to
           an
           evide
           at
           hazard
           of
           his
           life
           :
           Who
           moved
           that
           innocent
           Prince
           ,
           after
           his
           〈◊〉
           ,
           to
           take
           so
           strainge
           a
           〈◊〉
           as
           
             the
             world
          
           now
           speaks
           of
           ,
           and
           
           when
           he
           was
           engadged
           ,
           who
           did
           betray
           both
           his
           purpose
           and
           person
           to
           the
           French
           King
           ,
           could
           any
           without
           the
           Cabbine
           understand
           the
           convey
           of
           such
           matters
           ,
           and
           within
           that
           〈◊〉
           does
           any
           come
           without
           his
           graces
           permission
           ?
           Is
           not
           that
           man
           the
           evident
           author
           of
           all
           the
           Scotish
           broyles
           ?
           Are
           not
           his
           letters
           extant
           ,
           his
           holy
           hands
           〈◊〉
           of
           the
           Scotish
           service
           to
           be
           seen
           ,
           his
           other
           writtes
           also
           are
           in
           our
           hands
           ,
           making
           manifest
           that
           the
           beginning
           and
           continuance
           of
           that
           cursed
           worke
           hath
           no
           spring
           without
           his
           braine
           ?
           When
           the
           King
           himselfe
           after
           ripe
           advisement
           and
           all
           about
           him
           both
           English
           and
           Scots
           had
           returned
           in
           peace
           ,
           who
           incontinent
           did
           change
           the
           face
           of
           the
           Court
           and
           revive
           that
           fire
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           heart
           of
           the
           Prince
           and
           all
           his
           good
           Subjects
           was
           once
           closse
           dead
           .
        
         
           That
           a
           〈◊〉
           of
           England
           will
           not
           only
           let
           such
           
           a
           man
           and
           his
           complices
           goe
           free
           ,
           but
           to
           serve
           his
           humour
           ,
           will
           be
           content
           to
           ingadge
           their
           lives
           and
           estates
           for
           the
           overthrow
           and
           inslaving
           of
           us
           their
           best
           neighbors
           ,
           that
           over
           our
           carcases
           a
           path-way
           may
           be
           made
           for
           Bishops
           now
           ,
           and
           at
           once
           for
           the
           Pope
           and
           Spaniard
           to
           tred
           on
           the
           neck
           both
           of
           their
           bodies
           &
           souls
           ,
           we
           cannot
           beleeve
           .
           Yet
           if
           any
           such
           things
           should
           be
           propounded
           (
           for
           what
           darenot
           effronted
           impudence
           attempt
           )
           we
           would
           require
           that
           sage
           Senat
           before
           they
           passe
           any
           bloudy
           sentence
           of
           war
           against
           us
           to
           consider
           a
           little
           the
           quality
           of
           that
           party
           for
           whose
           cause
           they
           take
           armes
           ,
           we
           offer
           to
           instruct
           to
           the
           full
           satisfaction
           of
           the
           whole
           world
           offree
           &
           imprejudicate
           minds
           ,
           not
           by
           fleeing
           reports
           ,
           not
           by
           probable
           likelihoods
           ,
           not
           by
           the
           sentences
           of
           the
           gravest
           and
           most
           solemne
           judicatories
           of
           this
           land
           ,
           our
           two
           last
           generall
           assemblies
           &
           late
           parliament
           ,
           who
           at
           far
           greater
           
           length
           &
           with
           more
           mature
           advisement
           did
           cognosce
           of
           those
           causes
           ,
           then
           ever
           any
           Assembly
           or
           Parliament
           amongst
           us
           ,
           since
           the
           first
           founding
           of
           our
           Church
           and
           Kingdome
           did
           resolve
           upon
           any
           matter
           whatsoever
           :
           All
           those
           means
           of
           probation
           we
           shall
           set
           aside
           and
           take
           us
           alone
           to
           the
           mouth
           of
           our
           very
           adversaries
           .
           If
           by
           their
           owne
           testimony
           we
           make
           it
           evident
           ,
           that
           beside
           books
           ,
           ceremonies
           ,
           and
           Bishops
           which
           make
           the
           proper
           and
           particular
           quarrell
           of
           this
           nationall
           Kirk
           against
           them
           ,
           they
           are
           guilty
           of
           grosse
           Arminianisme
           ,
           plain
           Popery
           ,
           and
           of
           setting
           up
           of
           barbarous
           tyrannie
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           common
           quarrell
           of
           the
           Kirk
           of
           England
           ,
           of
           all
           the
           reformed
           Kirks
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           men
           who
           delite
           not
           to
           live
           and
           die
           in
           the
           fetters
           of
           slavery
           .
           If
           we
           demonstrate
           ,
           not
           so
           much
           by
           their
           preachings
           and
           practises
           amongst
           us
           ,
           〈◊〉
           by
           their
           maximes
           printed
           with
           〈◊〉
           among
           your selves
           ,
           which
           to
           this
           day
           ,
           though
           oft
           pressed
           thereto
           ,
           they
           have
           never
           recanted
           .
           If
           we
           shew
           that
           yet
           still
           they
           stifly
           avow
           all
           the
           articles
           of
           Arminius
           ,
           a
           number
           of
           the
           grossest
           abominations
           of
           Popery
           ,
           specially
           the
           authority
           of
           the
           sea
           of
           Rome
           ,
           that
           they
           vrge
           conclusions
           which
           will
           〈◊〉
           you
           without
           any
           〈◊〉
           ,
           so
           much
           as
           by
           a
           verball
           protestation
           ,
           not
           onely
           to
           give
           way
           unto
           any
           iniquitie
           whatsoever
           ,
           either
           in
           kirk
           or
           state
           ,
           whereto
           they
           can
           get
           stolen
           the
           pretext
           of
           the
           Kings
           name
           ;
           but
           also
           to
           lay
           downe
           your
           neck
           under
           the
           yoke
           of
           the
           King
           of
           Spaine
           ,
           if
           once
           he
           had
           any
           footting
           in
           this
           I
           le
           ,
           without
           any
           farther
           resistance
           ;
           though
           in
           your
           church
           by
           force
           that
           Tyrant
           should
           set
           up
           the
           Latine
           Messe
           in
           place
           of
           the
           Bible
           ,
           and
           in
           your
           state
           for
           your
           
             Magna
             Charta
          
           and
           acts
           of
           Parliament
           ,
           the
           lawes
           of
           Castile
           ,
           though
           in
           your
           eyes
           he
           should
           destroy
           the
           whole
           race
           of
           the
           royall
           family
           ,
           though
           
           the
           remainder
           of
           the
           Nobility
           and
           Gentry
           in
           the
           land
           should
           be
           sent
           over
           by
           him
           ,
           some
           to
           worke
           in
           fetters
           in
           his
           Mines
           of
           Peru
           ,
           Others
           in
           chaynes
           to
           row
           all
           their
           dayes
           in
           his
           gallayes
           in
           the
           Mediterrane
           ,
           for
           all
           these
           or
           any
           other
           imaginable
           acts
           of
           tyrannie
           that
           could
           escape
           the
           wicked
           head
           of
           any
           mad
           Nero
           ,
           of
           any
           monstrous
           Caligula
           ;
           these
           men
           doe
           openly
           take
           upon
           them
           to
           perswade
           that
           no
           kind
           of
           resistance
           for
           defence
           can
           be
           made
           by
           the
           whole
           States
           of
           a
           land
           ,
           though
           sitting
           in
           Parliament
           ,
           with
           a
           most
           harmonious
           consent
           ,
           no
           more
           nor
           the
           Jewes
           might
           have
           done
           against
           Nabuchadnezer
           ,
           or
           the
           Christians
           of
           old
           against
           the
           Pagane
           Emperours
           ,
           or
           the
           Greek
           Church
           this
           day
           against
           the
           grand
           Signieur
           in
           Constantinople
           ,
           that
           all
           our
           forbeares
           both
           English
           and
           Scots
           in
           their
           manifold
           bickerings
           against
           the
           misleaders
           of
           their
           Princes
           ,
           against
           the
           tyrannizing
           factions
           of
           Court
           ,
           were
           ever
           Traytors
           and
           Rebels
           ,
           and
           ought
           to
           have
           losed
           their
           heads
           and
           lands
           for
           their
           presumption
           to
           defend
           their
           liberties
           ,
           against
           the
           intolerable
           insolencies
           of
           a
           pack
           of
           runigat
           Villanes
           ,
           and
           for
           their
           boldnesse
           ,
           to
           fasten
           the
           tottering
           Crowne
           upon
           the
           head
           of
           their
           Kings
           :
           all
           such
           Services
           of
           our
           Antecessours
           to
           King
           and
           Country
           ,
           were
           treacherous
           insurrections
           .
        
         
           If
           for
           all
           these
           their
           crimes
           I
           make
           speak
           before
           you
           no
           
           other
           witnesses
           then
           their
           〈◊〉
           tongues
           ,
           J
           trust
           there
           shall
           not
           remain
           in
           your
           minds
           the
           least
           shadow
           of
           any
           scruple
           to
           believe
           my
           allegations
           ,
           nor
           in
           your
           wils
           the
           least
           inclination
           to
           joine
           with
           the
           counsels
           of
           so
           polluted
           and
           self
           -
           〈◊〉
           persons
           :
           And
           if
           to
           men
           whose
           open
           profession
           in
           their
           printed
           bookes
           ,
           let
           be
           secret
           practises
           ,
           leades
           to
           so
           wicked
           ends
           so
           far
           contrare
           to
           the
           glorie
           of
           God
           ,
           to
           the
           honour
           and
           safety
           of
           our
           King
           ,
           to
           
           the
           well
           of
           us
           all
           ,
           whether
           in
           Soule
           ,
           body
           ,
           〈◊〉
           ,
           children
           ,
           or
           any
           thing
           that
           is
           deare
           to
           〈◊〉
           ,
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           lead
           your
           armes
           against
           us
           ;
           we
           believe
           the
           Lord
           of
           〈◊〉
           ,
           the
           righteous
           Judge
           would
           be
           〈◊〉
           to
           you
           ,
           and
           make
           hundreds
           of
           your
           〈◊〉
           in
           so
           〈◊〉
           a
           cause
           〈◊〉
           before
           ten
           of
           ours
           :
           Or
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           the
           profound
           and
           unsearchable
           pleasure
           of
           the
           God
           of
           Armi
           s
           ,
           to
           make
           you
           for
           a
           time
           a
           scourge
           to
           beat
           us
           ,
           for
           our
           manifold
           transgressions
           ,
           yet
           when
           yee
           had
           obtained
           all
           the
           Prelats
           〈◊〉
           ,
           when
           wee
           for
           our
           other
           sins
           were
           tred
           under
           your
           〈◊〉
           ,
           we
           would
           for
           all
           that
           hope
           to
           die
           with
           great
           comfort
           〈◊〉
           courage
           ,
           as
           defenders
           of
           the
           truth
           of
           God
           ,
           of
           the
           liberties
           and
           lawes
           of
           our
           〈◊〉
           ,
           of
           the
           true
           good
           and
           honour
           of
           the
           〈◊〉
           and
           Royall
           Familie
           :
           All
           which
           as
           wee
           take
           it
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           most
           wicked
           and
           unnaturall
           〈◊〉
           that
           ever
           this
           Isle
           did
           〈◊〉
           ,
           〈◊〉
           manifestly
           〈◊〉
           :
           yet
           certainly
           ,
           we
           could
           not
           but
           leave
           in
           our
           Testament
           to
           you
           our
           unjust
           oppressors
           the
           legacie
           of
           an
           untimous
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           ;
           for
           when
           yee
           have
           killed
           thousands
           of
           us
           ,
           and
           banished
           the
           rest
           out
           of
           the
           Isle
           ,
           when
           on
           the
           back
           of
           our
           departure
           ,
           your
           sweet
           〈◊〉
           the
           Bishops
           have
           brought
           the
           Pope
           upon
           you
           and
           your
           children
           ;
           when
           a
           French
           or
           Spanish
           invasion
           doth
           threaten
           you
           with
           a
           slavish
           conquest
           ;
           will
           yee
           not
           then
           all
           ,
           and
           above
           all
           our
           gracious
           Prince
           regrate
           ,
           that
           he
           hath
           beene
           so
           evill
           advised
           ,
           as
           to
           have
           put
           so
           many
           of
           his
           brave
           Subjects
           to
           the
           cruell
           sword
           ,
           who
           were
           very
           able
           &
           most
           willing
           to
           haue
           done
           him
           noble
           service
           against
           these
           forraine
           usurpers
           ?
           Would
           not
           at
           such
           a
           time
           ,
           that
           is
           too
           likely
           to
           be
           at
           hand
           ,
           if
           our
           Prelates
           advises
           now
           be
           followed
           ,
           both
           his
           Majestie
           ,
           and
           all
           of
           you
           who
           shall
           〈◊〉
           in
           life
           ,
           he
           most
           earnest
           recallers
           not
           onely
           of
           your
           
           owne
           Country-men
           ,
           (
           many
           thousands
           whereof
           yee
           know
           have
           lately
           by
           Episcopall
           tyranny
           beene
           cast
           out
           from
           their
           〈◊〉
           ,
           as
           far
           as
           to
           the
           worlds
           end
           ,
           among
           the
           savadge
           Americans
           )
           but
           also
           the
           reliques
           of
           our
           ruine
           from
           their
           banishment
           ,
           with
           as
           great
           diligence
           as
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Fergus
           the
           second
           ,
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           this
           land
           did
           recall
           our
           ancestors
           ,
           when
           by
           the
           fraud
           and
           force
           of
           a
           wicked
           faction
           they
           were
           the
           most
           part
           killed
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           sent
           over
           Sea
           in
           banishment
           .
           It
           were
           better
           by
           much
           ,
           before
           the
           remedilesse
           stroke
           be
           given
           ,
           to
           be
           well
           advised
           ,
           then
           out
           of
           time
           to
           sigh
           ,
           when
           the
           millions
           of
           lost
           lives
           ,
           when
           the
           happinesse
           of
           our
           true
           Religion
           ,
           when
           the
           liberties
           of
           both
           the
           nations
           ,
           once
           thrown
           away
           by
           our
           owne
           hands
           ,
           can
           not
           againe
           bee
           recovered
           .
        
         
           To
           the
           end
           therefore
           that
           such
           lamentable
           inconveniences
           
           may
           be
           eshewed
           ,
           and
           your
           Honors
           the
           more
           animate
           to
           deny
           your
           power
           to
           those
           ,
           who
           now
           possibilie
           may
           crave
           to
           have
           it
           abused
           against
           us
           without
           cause
           ,
           beside
           numbers
           of
           pressing
           reasons
           ,
           wherewith
           I
           doubt
           not
           every
           wise
           man
           amongst
           you
           is
           come
           well
           enough
           〈◊〉
           from
           his
           owne
           considerations
           ,
           and
           which
           J
           trust
           shall
           be
           further
           presented
           in
           plenty
           by
           these
           of
           our
           Nation
           ,
           who
           have
           ever
           beene
           at
           the
           head
           of
           our
           affaires
           ,
           whom
           God
           hath
           still
           enabled
           to
           cleare
           the
           justice
           and
           necessitie
           of
           all
           our
           proceedings
           hitherto
           ,
           to
           the
           minds
           of
           all
           ,
           save
           our
           infatuat
           adversaries
           ,
           whom
           superstition
           and
           rage
           hath
           blinded
           .
           If
           it
           might
           be
           your
           Honours
           pleasure
           when
           all
           the
           rest
           have
           ended
           ,
           I
           could
           wish
           that
           euen
           vnto
           me
           ,
           a
           little
           audience
           were
           given
           :
           my
           zeale
           to
           the
           truth
           of
           God
           ,
           to
           the
           peace
           of
           this
           Isle
           ,
           to
           the
           honour
           of
           our
           deare
           and
           gratious
           Soveraigne
           ,
           imboldeneth
           
           me
           to
           offer
           even
           my
           little
           myte
           of
           information
           .
           This
           is
           a
           period
           of
           time
           ,
           when
           the
           obstinate
           silence
           of
           those
           who
           are
           most
           obliged
           by
           their
           places
           and
           gifts
           to
           speake
           ,
           must
           open
           the
           mouths
           of
           sundrie
           ,
           who
           are
           not
           by
           much
           so
           able
           ;
           verie
           babes
           ,
           yea
           stones
           must
           finde
           a
           tongue
           when
           Pharisees
           deny
           their
           testimonie
           to
           CHRIST
           :
           `
           Dumbe
           men
           will
           get
           words
           when
           a
           father
           ,
           when
           a
           King
           ,
           let
           bee
           a
           whole
           kingdome
           ,
           by
           the
           wickednesse
           of
           a
           few
           ,
           is
           put
           in
           extreme
           perrill
           of
           ruine
           :
           An
           Asse
           will
           finde
           〈◊〉
           when
           the
           devouring
           sword
           of
           an
           Angel
           if
           drawne
           against
           the
           Master
           .
           Nothing
           more
           common
           in
           the
           Roman
           Annals
           ,
           then
           the
           speaches
           of
           very
           Oxen
           ,
           before
           any
           calamitie
           of
           the
           Common-wealth
           :
           The
           claiking
           of
           Geese
           did
           at
           a
           time
           preserve
           the
           〈◊〉
           :
           Amiclae
           was
           lost
           by
           too
           much
           silence
           :
           The
           neglect
           of
           the
           voice
           of
           a
           Damosel
           ,
           the
           contempt
           of
           Cassandraes
           warning
           ,
           the
           casting
           of
           her
           in
           bands
           ,
           for
           her
           true
           but
           unpleasant
           speach
           ,
           did
           bring
           the
           Trojane
           horse
           within
           the
           wals
           ,
           and
           with
           it
           the
           quick
           ruine
           both
           of
           the
           city
           and
           Kingdome
           .
        
         
           J
           hope
           then
           that
           the
           greatnesse
           of
           my
           undertaking
           
           may
           〈◊〉
           me
           a
           little
           audience
           :
           for
           J
           offer
           to
           make
           you
           all
           see
           with
           your
           owne
           eyes
           ,
           and
           heare
           with
           your
           owne
           eares
           the
           Canterburians
           to
           declare
           by
           their
           owne
           tongues
           ,
           and
           write
           downe
           under
           their
           own
           hands
           their
           cleare
           mindes
           ,
           to
           bring
           in
           our
           Church
           Arminianisme
           ,
           and
           compleet
           Popery
           ,
           and
           in
           our
           State
           a
           slavery
           no
           lesse
           then
           Turkish
           .
           If
           yee
           finde
           that
           I
           prove
           my
           offer
           ,
           I
           trust
           I
           may
           bee
           consident
           of
           your
           Wisedomes
           ,
           that
           though
           Cicero
           himselfe
           ,
           and
           with
           him
           Demosthenes
           as
           a
           second
           ,
           and
           Orpheus
           with
           the
           〈◊〉
           of
           his
           tongue
           and
           harp
           ,
           as
           a
           third
           
           marrow
           ,
           should
           come
           to
           perswade
           ,
           yet
           that
           none
           of
           you
           shall
           ever
           bee
           moved
           by
           all
           their
           oratorie
           ,
           to
           espouse
           the
           quarrels
           of
           so
           unhappy
           men
           .
           If
           I
           faile
           in
           my
           faire
           undertaking
           ,
           let
           me
           bee
           condemned
           of
           temeritie
           ,
           and
           no
           houre
           of
           your
           leasure
           be
           ever
           again
           imployed
           ,
           in
           taking
           notice
           of
           any
           more
           of
           my
           complaints
           :
           But
           till
           my
           vanity
           bee
           found
           ,
           I
           will
           expect
           assuredly
           from
           your
           Honours
           one
           hearing
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           but
           to
           waken
           many
           an
           able
           wit
           ,
           and
           nimble
           pen
           ,
           in
           that
           your
           venerable
           House
           of
           Convocation
           ;
           Numbers
           there
           ,
           if
           they
           would
           speake
           their
           knowledge
           ,
           could
           tell
           other
           tales
           then
           ever
           I
           heard
           in
           an
           out-corner
           of
           the
           Isle
           ,
           farre
           from
           the
           secrets
           of
           State
           ,
           and
           all
           possibilitie
           of
           intelligence
           how
           many
           affaires
           in
           the
           World
           doe
           goe
           .
        
         
           It
           is
           one
           of
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           how
           many
           
           of
           the
           English
           Divines
           can
           at
           this
           time
           be
           so
           dumbe
           ,
           who
           could
           well
           ,
           if
           they
           pleased
           ,
           paint
           out
           before
           your
           eyes
           with
           a
           Sun-beame
           all
           the
           crimes
           Ispeake
           of
           〈◊〉
           that
           head
           and
           members
           .
           It
           is
           strange
           that
           the
           pilloring
           of
           some
           few
           ,
           that
           the
           slitting
           of
           Bastwickes
           and
           〈◊〉
           nose
           ,
           the
           branding
           of
           Prinnes
           cheeke
           ,
           the
           cutting
           of
           Lightouns
           eares
           ,
           the
           scourging
           of
           Lylburne
           through
           the
           City
           ,
           the
           close
           keeping
           of
           Lincolne
           ,
           and
           the
           murthering
           of
           others
           by
           famine
           ,
           colde
           ,
           vermine
           ,
           stinke
           ,
           and
           other
           miseries
           in
           the
           caves
           and
           vaults
           of
           the
           Bishops
           houses
           of
           inquisition
           ,
           should
           bind
           up
           the
           mouthes
           of
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           learned
           .
           〈◊〉
           wont
           not
           in
           the
           dayes
           of
           hottest
           persecution
           ,
           in
           the
           very
           Marian
           times
           ,
           to
           be
           so
           scant
           of
           faithfull
           witnesses
           to
           the
           truth
           of
           Christ
           ,
           we
           can
           not
           now
           conjecture
           what
           is
           become
           of
           that
           zeale
           to
           the
           true
           Religion
           ,
           
           which
           we
           are
           persivaded
           lyes
           in
           the
           heart
           of
           many
           thousands
           in
           that
           gracious
           Kirk
           ;
           we
           trust
           indeed
           that
           this
           long
           lurking
           ,
           and
           too
           too
           long
           silence
           of
           the
           Saints
           there
           ,
           shall
           breake
           out
           at
           once
           in
           some
           hundreths
           of
           trumpets
           and
           lampes
           ,
           shining
           and
           shouting
           ,
           to
           the
           joy
           of
           all
           the
           reformed
           Churches
           ,
           against
           the
           campe
           of
           these
           enemies
           to
           God
           ,
           and
           the
           King
           ;
           that
           quickly
           it
           may
           be
           so
           ,
           behold
           I
           here
           first
           upon
           all
           hazards
           doe
           breake
           my
           pitcher
           ,
           doe
           hold
           out
           my
           lampe
           ,
           and
           blow
           my
           trumpet
           before
           the
           Commissioners
           of
           the
           whole
           Kingdome
           ,
           offering
           to
           convince
           that
           prevalent
           faction
           by
           their
           owne
           mouth
           ,
           of
           Arminianisme
           ,
           Poperie
           ,
           and
           tyrannie
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           The
           main
           scope
           and
           delineation
           
             of
             the
             subsequent
             Treatise
          
           .
           CHAP.
           I.
           
        
         
           OUr
           Adversaries
           are
           
           very
           unwilling
           to
           suffer
           to
           appeare
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           any
           further
           debate
           betwixt
           them
           and
           us
           ,
           but
           what
           is
           proper
           unto
           our
           Church
           ,
           &
           doth
           arise
           from
           the
           Service
           Book
           ,
           Canons
           ,
           &
           Episcopacie
           ,
           which
           they
           have
           pressed
           upon
           us
           with
           violence
           ,
           against
           all
           Order
           Ecclesiasticall
           and
           Civill
           :
           In
           the
           mean
           time
           ,
           lest
           they
           become
           the
           sacrifices
           of
           the
           publike
           hatred
           of
           others
           ,
           in
           a
           subtle
           Sophistication
           they
           labour
           to
           hide
           the
           〈◊〉
           wrongs
           and
           assronts
           which
           they
           have
           done
           openly
           to
           the
           Reformed
           Religion
           ,
           to
           the
           Churches
           of
           ENGLAND
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           Reformed
           Churches
           
           in
           the
           main
           and
           most
           materiall
           questions
           debated
           against
           the
           Papists
           ever
           since
           the
           reformation
           :
           for
           such
           as
           professe
           themselves
           our
           enemies
           ,
           and
           are
           most
           busie
           to
           stirre
           up
           our
           gracious
           Prince
           to
           armes
           against
           us
           ,
           do
           wilfully
           dissemble
           their
           knowledg
           of
           any
           other
           controversie
           betweene
           them
           and
           us
           ,
           but
           that
           which
           properly
           concerneth
           us
           ,
           and
           rubbeth
           not
           upon
           any
           other
           Church
           .
           In
           this
           their
           doing
           the
           Judicious
           may
           perceive
           their
           manifold
           deceit
           ,
           whereby
           they
           would
           delude
           the
           simple
           ,
           and
           many
           wittie
           worldlings
           do
           deceive
           themselves
           :
           First
           ,
           they
           would
           have
           the
           world
           to
           think
           that
           wee
           obstinately
           refuse
           to
           obey
           the
           Magistrate
           ,
           in
           the
           point
           of
           things
           indifferent
           ,
           And
           therefore
           unnecessarily
           ,
           and
           in
           a
           foolish
           precisenesse
           draw
           upon
           ourselves
           the
           wrath
           of
           the
           King.
           Secondly
           ,
           when
           in
           our
           late
           Assemblies
           ,
           the
           order
           of
           our
           Church
           is
           made
           known
           ,
           and
           the
           seeds
           of
           superstition
           ,
           heresie
           ,
           idolatrie
           and
           antichristian
           tyranny
           are
           discovered
           in
           the
           service
           Booke
           and
           Canons
           ,
           they
           wipe
           their
           mouth
           ,
           they
           say
           ,
           No
           such
           thing
           is
           meant
           ;
           and
           that
           wee
           may
           upon
           the
           like
           occasion
           blame
           the
           service
           Booke
           of
           England
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           when
           by
           the
           occasion
           of
           the
           former
           quarrellings
           ,
           their
           palpable
           Poperie
           and
           Arminianisme
           are
           set
           before
           their
           eyes
           ,
           and
           their
           perverse
           intentions
           ,
           desires
           ,
           and
           endeavours
           ,
           of
           the
           change
           of
           Religion
           and
           lawes
           are
           upon
           other
           grounds
           then
           upon
           the
           service
           Booke
           and
           Canons
           objected
           against
           them
           ;
           they
           stop
           their
           eares
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           shut
           their
           mouths
           ,
           and
           answer
           nothing
           .
           This
           challenge
           they
           still
           decline
           and
           misken
           ;
           they
           will
           not
           let
           it
           be
           heard
           ,
           let
           bee
           to
           answer
           to
           it
           ;
           And
           
           for
           to
           make
           out
           their
           tergiversation
           ,
           for
           to
           dash
           away
           allutterly
           this
           our
           processe
           ,
           they
           have
           bin
           long
           plying
           their
           great
           engine
           ;
           and
           at
           last
           have
           wrought
           their
           yondmost
           myne
           to
           that
           perfection
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           now
           ready
           to
           spring
           under
           our
           wals
           .
           By
           their
           flattering
           calumnies
           they
           have
           drawne
           the
           Prince
           againe
           to
           arms
           ,
           for
           the
           overthrow
           of
           us
           their
           challengers
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           affrighting
           by
           the
           terrour
           of
           armies
           on
           foot
           all
           others
           elswhere
           ,
           from
           commencing
           any
           such
           action
           against
           them
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           us
           ,
           truly
           it
           were
           the
           greatest
           happinesse
           
           we
           do
           wish
           for
           out
           of
           Heaven
           ,
           to
           live
           peaceably
           in
           all
           submission
           and
           obedience
           ,
           under
           the
           wings
           of
           our
           gracious
           Soveraigne
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           to
           us
           a
           bitternesse
           as
           gall
           ,
           as
           wormwood
           ,
           as
           death
           to
           be
           necessitate
           to
           any
           contest
           ,
           to
           any
           contradictory
           tearms
           ,
           let
           be
           an
           armed
           defence
           ,
           against
           any
           whom
           hee
           is
           pleased
           to
           defend
           :
           Yea
           certainly
           ,
           it
           were
           the
           great
           joy
           of
           our
           hearts
           ,
           to
           receive
           these
           very
           men
           ,
           our
           mortall
           enemies
           ,
           into
           the
           arms
           of
           our
           affection
           ,
           upon
           any
           probable
           signes
           in
           them
           ,
           of
           their
           sincere
           griefe
           ,
           for
           the
           huge
           wrongs
           they
           have
           intended
           ,
           and
           done
           to
           their
           Mother
           church
           and
           Country
           .
           But
           when
           this
           felicity
           is
           denied
           ,
           and
           nothing
           in
           them
           doth
           yet
           appeare
           but
           induration
           ,
           and
           a
           malicions
           obstinacie
           ;
           going
           on
           madly
           through
           a
           desperate
           desire
           of
           revenge
           ,
           to
           move
           a
           very
           sweet
           Prince
           for
           their
           cause
           to
           shed
           his
           own
           bloud
           ,
           to
           rent
           his
           own
           bowels
           ,
           to
           cut
           off
           his
           own
           members
           ,
           what
           shall
           wee
           doe
           but
           complain
           to
           GOD
           ,
           and
           〈◊〉
           to
           the
           Worlds
           eyes
           the
           true
           cause
           of
           our
           sufferings
           ,
           the
           true
           grounds
           of
           this
           Episcopall
           warre
           ,
           or
           rather
           not
           Episcopall
           but
           
           Canterburian
           broyle
           ?
           for
           wee
           judge
           sundry
           Bishops
           in
           the
           Isle
           to
           be
           very
           free
           of
           these
           mischiefs
           ,
           and
           believe
           that
           divers
           of
           them
           would
           gladly
           demonstrate
           their
           innocency
           ,
           if
           so
           be
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterbury
           and
           his
           dependants
           ,
           were
           in
           any
           way
           to
           receive
           from
           the
           Kings
           justice
           some
           part
           of
           their
           deserveings
           .
        
         
           Howsoever
           ,
           that
           wee
           may
           give
           a
           testimony
           to
           the
           truth
           of
           GOD
           ,
           which
           wee
           are
           like
           at
           once
           to
           seale
           with
           our
           bloud
           ,
           wee
           will
           offer
           to
           the
           view
           of
           all
           Reformed
           Churches
           ,
           and
           above
           the
           rest
           to
           our
           neerest
           and
           sibbest
           sister
           of
           England
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           in
           a
           Table
           ,
           divers
           of
           these
           errours
           ,
           which
           our
           party
           first
           by
           craft
           and
           subtilty
           ,
           but
           now
           by
           extreame
           violence
           of
           fire
           and
           sword
           ,
           are
           labouring
           to
           bring
           upon
           us
           ;
           to
           the
           end
           that
           our
           deare
           brethren
           understanding
           our
           sufferings
           in
           the
           defence
           of
           such
           a
           cause
           ,
           may
           be
           the
           more
           willing
           at
           this
           time
           to
           contribute
           for
           our
           assistance
           from
           God
           ,
           the
           helpe
           of
           their
           earnest
           Prayers
           ,
           and
           for
           ever
           hereafter
           to
           condole
           with
           the
           more
           hearty
           compassion
           ,
           any
           misery
           which
           possibly
           may
           befall
           us
           ,
           in
           such
           a
           quarrell
           .
        
         
           Albeit
           truly
           our
           hopes
           are
           yet
           greater
           then
           our
           
           〈◊〉
           ,
           if
           we
           could
           become
           so
           happy
           as
           once
           to
           get
           our
           plea
           but
           entred
           before
           our
           Prince
           ;
           for
           wee
           can
           hardly
           conceive
           what
           in
           reason
           should
           hinder
           our
           full
           〈◊〉
           of
           a
           favourable
           decision
           from
           that
           Sacred
           mouth
           ,
           whose
           naturall
           equity
           the
           World
           knows
           in
           all
           causes
           whereof
           he
           is
           impartially
           informed
           ,
           since
           our
           whole
           action
           is
           nought
           but
           one
           formall
           argument
           ,
           whereof
           the
           Major
           is
           the
           verdict
           of
           our
           judge
           ,
           the
           Minor
           shall
           be
           the
           open
           and
           avowed
           
           Testimony
           of
           our
           party
           ,
           need
           wee
           feare
           that
           either
           our
           Judge
           or
           party
           will
           be
           so
           irrationall
           as
           to
           venture
           upon
           the
           deniall
           of
           a
           conclusion
           ,
           whereof
           both
           the
           premisses
           is
           their
           own
           open
           profession
           ?
        
         
           Our
           Major
           is
           this
           :
           Who
           ever
           in
           the
           Kings
           Dominions
           
           spreads
           abroad
           Popery
           or
           any
           doctrine
           opposite
           to
           the
           Religion
           and
           Laws
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           now
           established
           ,
           ought
           not
           to
           be
           countenanced
           ,
           but
           severely
           punished
           by
           the
           King.
           This
           Major
           the
           King
           hath
           made
           certaine
           to
           us
           in
           his
           frequent
           most
           solemne
           asseverations
           ,
           not
           only
           at
           his
           Coronation
           both
           here
           and
           in
           England
           ,
           in
           his
           Proclamations
           both
           here
           and
           there
           ,
           a
           but
           also
           in
           his
           late
           large
           Declaration
           ,
           oftimes
           giving
           out
           his
           resolution
           to
           live
           and
           die
           in
           the
           reformed
           Protestant
           Religion
           ,
           opposite
           to
           all
           Popery
           ;
           to
           maintaine
           his
           established
           Laws
           ;
           and
           in
           nothing
           to
           permit
           the
           enervating
           of
           them
           :
           Yea
           ,
           this
           resolution
           of
           the
           King
           is
           so
           peremptory
           ,
           
           and
           publikely
           avowed
           ,
           that
           Canterbury
           himselfe
           dare
           not
           but
           applaud
           thereto
           ;
           b
           in
           his
           
             Starre-chamber
             Speech
          
           ,
           who
           can
           see
           me
           more
           forward
           then
           hee
           for
           the
           great
           equity
           ,
           to
           punish
           condignely
           all
           who
           would
           but
           mint
           to
           bring
           in
           any
           popery
           in
           this
           Isle
           ,
           or
           assay
           to
           make
           any
           innovation
           in
           Religion
           or
           Lawes
           ?
           Wee
           believe
           indeed
           that
           the
           man
           doth
           but
           juggle
           with
           the
           World
           in
           his
           faire
           ambiguous
           generalities
           ,
           being
           content
           to
           inveigh
           as
           much
           against
           popery
           and
           innovation
           as
           we
           could
           wish
           ,
           upon
           hopes
           ever
           when
           it
           comes
           to
           any
           particular
           of
           the
           grossest
           popery
           wee
           can
           name
           ,
           by
           his
           subtile
           distinctions
           and
           disputations
           to
           slide
           out
           of
           our
           hands
           :
           But
           wee
           are
           perswaded
           what
           ever
           may
           be
           the
           juggling
           of
           sophisticating
           Bishops
           ,
           yet
           the
           magnanimous
           ingenuity
           ,
           the
           Royall
           integrity
           of
           our
           gracious
           Soveraigne
           is
           not
           compatible
           with
           such
           fraudulent
           equivocations
           ,
           as
           to
           proclaime
           his
           detestation
           of
           popery
           in
           generals
           ,
           and
           not
           thereby
           to
           give
           us
           a
           full
           assurance
           of
           his
           abhorring
           every
           particular
           ,
           which
           all
           the
           orthodox
           Preachers
           of
           this
           Isle
           since
           the
           Reformation
           ,
           by
           Queene
           Elisabet
           and
           King
           James
           allowance
           have
           ever
           condemned
           as
           popish
           errours
           .
           Our
           Major
           then
           wee
           trust
           may
           be
           past
           as
           unquestionable
           .
        
         
           Wee
           subjoine
           our
           Minor
           ,
           But
           so
           it
           is
           that
           Canterbury
           
           and
           his
           dependars
           ,
           men
           raised
           ,
           and
           yet
           maintained
           by
           him
           ,
           have
           openly
           in
           their
           printed
           bookes
           ,
           without
           any
           recantation
           or
           punishment
           to
           this
           day
           spread
           abroad
           in
           all
           the
           Kings
           dominions
           ,
           doctrines
           opposite
           to
           our
           Religion
           and
           lawes
           ,
           especially
           the
           most
           points
           of
           the
           grossest
           poperie
           .
           In
           reason
           all
           
           our
           bickering
           ought
           to
           be
           here
           alone
           .
           This
           Minor
           I
           offer
           to
           instruct
           ,
           and
           that
           by
           no
           other
           middes
           then
           the
           testimony
           of
           their
           own
           pens
           .
           If
           I
           doe
           so
           to
           the
           full
           satisfaction
           of
           all
           ,
           who
           know
           what
           are
           the
           particular
           heads
           of
           the
           reformed
           Religion
           ,
           and
           what
           the
           tenets
           of
           Popery
           opposite
           thereto
           ,
           what
           are
           the
           lawes
           standing
           in
           all
           the
           three
           dominions
           ,
           and
           what
           the
           contrary
           maximes
           of
           the
           Turkish
           empire
           ,
           where
           with
           Machiavelists
           this
           day
           every
           where
           are
           labouring
           to
           poyson
           the
           eares
           of
           all
           Christian
           Princes
           ,
           for
           enervating
           the
           laws
           and
           liberties
           of
           their
           Kinngdomes
           :
           I
           hope
           that
           reason
           and
           justice
           which
           stand
           night
           and
           day
           attending
           on
           either
           side
           of
           King
           Charles
           throne
           will
           not
           fail
           to
           perswade
           the
           chearfull
           embracement
           of
           the
           conclusion
           ,
           which
           
           follows
           by
           a
           cleare
           and
           naturall
           necessity
           ,
           from
           the
           forenamed
           premisses
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           Canterbury
           and
           his
           dependars
           in
           all
           the
           three
           dominions
           ought
           not
           to
           be
           countenanced
           by
           the
           King
           ,
           but
           severely
           punished
           :
           Let
           be
           that
           for
           their
           pastime
           a
           bloody
           and
           hazardous
           war
           should
           be
           raised
           in
           so
           unseasonable
           a
           time
           ,
           for
           the
           undoing
           of
           that
           countrie
           and
           Church
           which
           God
           hath
           honoured
           with
           the
           birth
           and
           baptisme
           ,
           both
           of
           his
           Majesties
           owne
           person
           ,
           and
           of
           his
           renowmed
           father
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           which
           both
           of
           them
           as
           all
           their
           hundreth
           and
           six
           glorious
           Predecessors
           ,
           are
           endebted
           before
           God
           ,
           and
           the
           World
           ,
           all
           their
           Prerogatives
           both
           of
           nature
           ,
           〈◊〉
           ,
           and
           estate
           ,
           so
           much
           as
           any
           Princes
           were
           ever
           to
           their
           mother
           Church
           and
           native
           country
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           CHAP.
           II.
           The
           Canterburians
           
             avowed
             Arminianisme
          
           .
        
         
           ARminianisme
           how
           great
           and
           dangerous
           an
           innovation
           of
           the
           reformed
           Religion
           it
           is
           ,
           
           we
           may
           learne
           by
           the
           late
           experiences
           of
           our
           neighbours
           ,
           when
           that
           weed
           began
           to
           spread
           among
           them
           .
           The
           States
           of
           Holland
           have
           declared
           in
           many
           passages
           of
           their
           Dordracen
           Synod
           ,
           that
           they
           found
           it
           a
           more
           ready
           meane
           to
           overthrow
           both
           their
           Church
           and
           State
           ,
           then
           all
           the
           engines
           ,
           policies
           ,
           armes
           which
           the
           Pope
           ,
           and
           Spaniard
           ,
           in
           any
           bygone
           time
           had
           used
           against
           them
           .
           The
           Church
           of
           France
           the
           other
           yeare
           ,
           when
           Amirot
           ,
           and
           Testard
           ,
           and
           some
           few
           of
           their
           Divines
           ,
           were
           but
           surmised
           to
           incline
           a
           little
           towards
           some
           small
           twigs
           of
           one
           article
           of
           Arminius
           ,
           was
           so
           affrighted
           ,
           that
           they
           rested
           not
           till
           in
           a
           generall
           Assembly
           at
           Alenzon
           ,
           they
           did
           run
           together
           for
           the
           extinguishing
           of
           the
           first
           sparkes
           as
           it
           were
           of
           a
           common
           fire
           .
           When
           
             P.
             Baro
          
           in
           Cambridge
           began
           to
           run
           a
           little
           on
           this
           rock
           ,
           how
           carefull
           was
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterbury
           and
           the
           Bishops
           then
           in
           their
           meeting
           at
           Lambeth
           for
           the
           crushing
           of
           that
           Cockatrice
           in
           the
           〈◊〉
           when
           that
           serpent
           again
           in
           the
           same
           place
           began
           to
           set
           np
           the
           nose
           in
           the
           writtes
           of
           Thomson
           ,
           how
           carefull
           was
           the
           Bishops
           then
           by
           the
           hand
           of
           their
           brother
           of
           Salisbury
           Doctor
           Abbots
           to
           cut
           of
           the
           head
           of
           that
           monster
           ?
           But
           what
           speake
           wee
           of
           the
           Churches
           reformed
           ?
           The
           very
           Synagogue
           of
           Rome
           whose
           conscience
           
           is
           enlarged
           as
           the
           Hell
           to
           swallow
           downe
           the
           vilest
           morsels
           of
           the
           most
           lewd
           errours
           that
           Antichrist
           can
           present
           ,
           yet
           did
           they
           sticke
           much
           at
           this
           bone
           ,
           when
           the
           Jesuit
           Molina
           began
           to
           draw
           out
           these
           dregs
           of
           Pelagianisme
           from
           the
           long
           neglected
           pits
           of
           some
           obscure
           Schoolmen
           ,
           what
           clamours
           were
           raised
           there
           ,
           not
           only
           by
           Alvarez
           and
           his
           followers
           ,
           but
           also
           by
           numbers
           of
           Prelats
           and
           some
           great
           Princes
           ,
           till
           the
           credit
           of
           the
           Jesuits
           in
           the
           Court
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           the
           wisdome
           of
           the
           Consistory
           prognosticating
           a
           new
           rent
           in
           their
           Church
           did
           procure
           from
           the
           Pope
           a
           peremptory
           injunction
           of
           silence
           to
           both
           sides
           ,
           on
           all
           highest
           paines
           :
           hoping
           if
           the
           Dominicans
           mouthes
           were
           once
           stopped
           ,
           that
           the
           Jesuits
           by
           their
           〈◊〉
           arts
           ,
           and
           silent
           policies
           would
           at
           last
           worke
           out
           their
           intended
           point
           ,
           which
           indeed
           since
           that
           time
           ,
           they
           have
           wel-neare
           fully
           gained
           .
        
         
           But
           to
           King
           Charles
           eye
           no
           evidence
           useth
           to
           be
           
           so
           demonstrative
           ,
           as
           that
           which
           commeth
           from
           the
           learned
           hand
           of
           his
           blessed
           Father
           .
           Would
           wee
           know
           how
           gracious
           a
           plant
           Arminianisme
           and
           the
           dressers
           of
           it
           will
           prove
           in
           England
           ,
           or
           any
           where
           else
           ,
           advise
           with
           King
           James
           ,
           who
           after
           full
           tryall
           and
           long
           consultation
           about
           this
           emergent
           ,
           with
           the
           Divines
           of
           his
           Court
           ,
           especially
           the
           late
           Archbishop
           Abbots
           ,
           gave
           out
           at
           last
           his
           Decree
           in
           print
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           Latine
           ,
           not
           only
           for
           a
           present
           declaration
           to
           the
           States
           of
           Holland
           ,
           of
           his
           minde
           against
           Vorstius
           ,
           and
           a
           cleere
           confession
           of
           his
           Faith
           in
           those
           points
           to
           the
           Christian
           World
           ,
           but
           above
           all
           to
           remayne
           a
           perpetuall
           Register
           for
           his
           Heires
           and
           
           Succ
           essors
           ,
           of
           his
           faithfull
           advise
           ,
           if
           after
           his
           death
           〈◊〉
           Kingdomes
           should
           be
           ever
           in
           danger
           to
           be
           〈◊〉
           with
           that
           wicked
           seed
           .
        
         
           In
           that
           Treatise
           ,
           his
           Majesty
           doth
           first
           a
           avow
           all
           them
           to
           be
           grosse
           Lyers
           ,
           who
           do
           not
           blush
           to
           affirme
           that
           any
           of
           the
           Arminian
           Articles
           ,
           even
           that
           most
           plausible
           one
           of
           the
           Saints
           〈◊〉
           are
           consonant
           with
           the
           Doctrine
           or
           Articles
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           .
           b
           He
           styleth
           Bertius
           for
           such
           a
           slander
           ,
           a
           very
           impudent
           and
           brazen-faced
           man.
           Secondly
           ,
           c
           Hee
           pronounceth
           these
           Doctrines
           of
           Arminius
           to
           be
           Heresies
           lately
           revived
           and
           damnable
           to
           the
           Hels
           from
           whence
           they
           come
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           d
           That
           Bertius
           for
           the
           very
           title
           of
           his
           booke
           ,
           The
           Saints
           apostasie
           deserved
           burning
           Fourthly
           ,
           e
           That
           Arminius
           and
           his
           Scholars
           were
           to
           be
           reputed
           pests
           ,
           enemies
           to
           God
           ,
           proud
           ,
           〈◊〉
           ,
           hereticall
           ,
           Atheists
           .
           Fifthly
           ,
           f
           Hee
           affirmeth
           that
           their
           toleration
           would
           not
           faile
           to
           bring
           upon
           the
           heads
           of
           their
           Tolerators
           let
           be
           favourers
           ,
           Gods
           malediction
           ,
           an
           evill
           report
           ,
           slander
           and
           infamy
           with
           all
           the
           Churches
           abroad
           ,
           and
           certaine
           Schisme
           ,
           Division
           and
           Tumults
           at
           home
           .
           Shall
           wee
           then
           make
           any
           doubt
           of
           King
           Charles
           full
           contentment
           ,
           that
           wee
           avow
           Arminianisme
           ,
           to
           be
           such
           a
           dangerous
           innovation
           of
           our
           Religion
           as
           the
           reformed
           Churches
           abroad
           ,
           and
           his
           Father
           at
           home
           hath
           taught
           us
           to
           count
           it
           where
           ever
           it
           is
           found
           .
        
         
           
           Notwithstanding
           this
           bitter
           root
           amongst
           us
           was
           setting
           up
           the
           head
           of
           late
           very
           boldly
           in
           all
           the
           prime
           places
           of
           our
           Kingdome
           ,
           wee
           have
           had
           since
           the
           reformation
           many
           bickerings
           about
           the
           Church
           
           Government
           and
           Ceremonies
           ,
           but
           in
           matters
           of
           Doctrine
           neverany
           Controversie
           was
           knowne
           ,
           till
           some
           yeares
           agoe
           a
           favourable
           aire
           from
           the
           mouth
           of
           Doctour
           Lad
           at
           Court
           began
           to
           blow
           upon
           these
           unhappy
           seeds
           of
           Arminius
           .
           No
           sooner
           was
           those
           Southwinds
           sensible
           in
           our
           climate
           ,
           but
           at
           once
           in
           S.
           
             Andrews
             ,
             Edinburg
             ,
             Aberdeen
          
           ,
           and
           about
           Glasgow
           ,
           that
           weed
           began
           to
           spring
           amaine
           .
           Doctour
           Wederburn
           in
           the
           new
           Colledge
           of
           Saint
           Andrews
           did
           stuffe
           his
           Dictates
           to
           the
           young
           Students
           in
           Divinity
           with
           these
           errours
           .
           This
           man
           upon
           the
           feares
           of
           our
           Churches
           censure
           ,
           having
           fled
           the
           Countrey
           ,
           was
           very
           tenderly
           embraced
           by
           his
           Grace
           at
           Court
           and
           well
           rewarded
           with
           a
           faire
           Benefice
           in
           England
           ,
           for
           his
           labours
           :
           But
           to
           the
           end
           his
           talents
           should
           not
           lye
           hid
           ,
           although
           a
           man
           very
           unmeet
           either
           for
           preaching
           or
           government
           ,
           hee
           was
           sent
           downe
           tous
           ,
           without
           the
           knowledge
           of
           our
           Church
           ,
           by
           Canterburies
           only
           favour
           ,
           to
           be
           Bishop
           of
           Dumblane
           ,
           for
           this
           purpose
           mainly
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           
             Royall
             Chappell
          
           ,
           whereof
           that
           Bishop
           is
           alwayes
           Dean
           ,
           hee
           might
           in
           despite
           of
           all
           our
           Presbyteries
           weave
           out
           the
           web
           he
           had
           begun
           in
           Saint
           Andrews
           .
           So
           quickly
           there
           was
           erected
           a
           society
           of
           twenty
           foure
           Royall
           Chaplains
           ,
           who
           were
           thought
           fittest
           of
           the
           whole
           Clergie
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           ,
           to
           be
           allured
           with
           hopes
           of
           favour
           from
           Court
           ,
           to
           preach
           to
           the
           State
           the
           Deans
           Arminian
           tenets
           .
           In
           Edinburgh
           ,
           Master
           Sydserfe
           did
           peartly
           play
           his
           part
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           reward
           of
           his
           boldnesse
           ,
           had
           cast
           in
           his
           lap
           in
           a
           trace
           the
           Deanry
           of
           
             E.
             dinburgh
          
           ,
           the
           Bishoprick
           of
           Brechen
           ,
           and
           last
           of
           〈◊〉
           ,
           with
           full
           hopes
           in
           a
           short
           time
           of
           an
           Archbishops
           
           cloake
           .
           In
           the
           North
           ,
           Doctour
           Forbes
           the
           only
           Father
           of
           the
           most
           of
           those
           who
           fell
           away
           from
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           our
           Church
           ,
           came
           too
           good
           speed
           in
           his
           evill
           labours
           ,
           and
           for
           his
           pains
           was
           honoured
           with
           the
           first
           seate
           in
           the
           new
           erected
           Chaire
           of
           our
           principall
           Citie
           .
           Others
           about
           Glasgow
           made
           their
           preaching
           of
           the
           Arminian
           errours
           the
           pathway
           to
           their
           assured
           advancement
           .
           In
           our
           generall
           Assembly
           wee
           found
           that
           this
           cockle
           was
           comming
           up
           apace
           in
           very
           many
           furrows
           of
           our
           field
           :
           Some
           of
           it
           we
           were
           forced
           ,
           albeit
           to
           our
           great
           griefe
           ,
           to
           draw
           up
           and
           cast
           〈◊〉
           the
           dyke
           ,
           which
           at
           once
           was
           received
           and
           replanted
           in
           England
           ,
           in
           too
           good
           a
           soyle
           .
        
         
           Wee
           confesse
           ,
           that
           it
           happened
           not
           much
           beside
           
           our
           expectation
           ,
           that
           our
           Arminians
           after
           the
           censure
           of
           our
           Church
           should
           at
           Court
           have
           beene
           too
           graciously
           received
           and
           sheltered
           in
           the
           Sanctuary
           of
           his
           Grace
           at
           Lambeth
           ;
           But
           ,
           this
           indeed
           ,
           did
           and
           doth
           still
           astonish
           us
           all
           ,
           that
           any
           should
           have
           been
           so
           bold
           as
           to
           have
           stolne
           King
           Charles
           name
           to
           a
           printed
           Declaration
           ,
           wherein
           not
           only
           our
           generall
           Assembly
           is
           condemned
           for
           using
           any
           censure
           at
           all
           against
           any
           for
           the
           crime
           of
           Arminianisme
           :
           g
           But
           also
           Arminius
           Articles
           are
           all-utterly
           slighted
           and
           pronounced
           to
           be
           of
           so
           obscure
           &
           intricate
           a
           nature
           that
           both
           our
           Assembly
           was
           too
           peart
           to
           make
           any
           determination
           about
           them
           ,
           and
           that
           many
           of
           our
           number
           were
           altogether
           unable
           by
           any
           teaching
           ever
           to
           winne
           so
           much
           as
           to
           the
           understanding
           of
           
           the
           very
           questions
           :
           h
           Yea
           ,
           those
           Articles
           are
           avowed
           to
           be
           consonant
           ,
           and
           in
           nothing
           to
           be
           opposite
           to
           the
           confession
           of
           our
           Church
           ,
           and
           are
           freely
           absolved
           of
           all
           poperie
           .
           i
           Because
           indeed
           (
           for
           this
           is
           the
           onely
           reason
           )
           some
           learned
           papists
           finde
           divers
           of
           Arminius
           points
           to
           bee
           so
           absurd
           that
           their
           stomacks
           cannot
           away
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           some
           of
           the
           Lutheran
           divines
           agree
           with
           the
           Arminians
           in
           certaine
           parcels
           of
           some
           of
           their
           Articles
           :
           They
           must
           bee
           strangers
           in
           these
           questions
           ,
           who
           are
           ignorant
           in
           how
           many
           things
           the
           Dominicans
           and
           all
           Papists
           agree
           with
           Arminius
           ,
           and
           in
           how
           many
           the
           Lutherans
           disagree
           from
           him
           .
           However
           wee
           were
           and
           are
           amazed
           to
           see
           Canterbury
           so
           malapeart
           ,
           as
           to
           proclaime
           in
           the
           Kings
           name
           ,
           beside
           many
           other
           strange
           things
           ,
           the
           Articles
           of
           Arminius
           ,
           to
           bee
           so
           far
           above
           the
           capacitie
           of
           our
           generall
           Assembly
           ,
           that
           it
           deserves
           a
           Royall
           reproofe
           for
           minting
           to
           determine
           any
           thing
           in
           them
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           are
           no
           wayes
           contrarie
           to
           the
           doctrine
           of
           onr
           Church
           ,
           neither
           any
           ways
           popish
           ,
           and
           that
           for
           a
           reason
           ,
           which
           will
           exeeme
           from
           the
           note
           of
           Poperie
           every
           errour
           which
           is
           so
           grosly
           absurd
           ,
           that
           some
           learned
           Papists
           are
           forced
           to
           contradict
           it
           ;
           or
           some
           grosse
           Lutheran
           can
           get
           his
           throat
           extended
           to
           swallow
           it
           downe
           .
        
         
         
           This
           boldnesse
           cannot
           in
           any
           reason
           be
           imputed
           
           to
           our
           gracious
           Soveraigne
           :
           For
           how
           is
           it
           possible
           that
           he
           upon
           any
           tolerable
           information
           ,
           should
           ever
           have
           suffered
           himselfe
           to
           be
           induced
           to
           write
           ,
           or
           speak
           in
           such
           a
           straine
           of
           these
           thinge
           ,
           which
           so
           lately
           by
           his
           learned
           Father
           was
           declared
           in
           print
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           Latine
           to
           be
           no
           lesse
           then
           heresies
           worthy
           of
           burning
           ;
           yea
           ,
           damnable
           to
           the
           very
           infernall
           pit
           whence
           ,
           as
           he
           sayes
           ,
           they
           did
           first
           come
           up
           .
           Neither
           is
           it
           like
           that
           these
           sentences
           come
           from
           the
           heart
           of
           Doctor
           Balcanquel
           the
           penman
           of
           them
           ;
           for
           he
           was
           a
           member
           of
           Dort
           Synod
           ,
           and
           brought
           up
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           Scotland
           ,
           the
           man
           is
           not
           unseene
           in
           the
           Popish
           Tenets
           ;
           How
           is
           it
           possible
           that
           his
           conscience
           should
           absolve
           the
           Arminian
           errours
           of
           all
           Popery
           ,
           and
           all
           contrarietie
           to
           the
           Scottish
           confession
           .
           May
           any
           be
           so
           uncharitable
           ,
           as
           to
           suspect
           his
           late
           promotion
           in
           Durham
           ,
           hath
           altered
           so
           soon
           his
           minde
           ?
           Sure
           not
           long
           since
           ,
           both
           in
           England
           and
           Scotland
           ,
           hee
           did
           desire
           to
           be
           esteemed
           by
           his
           friends
           ,
           one
           of
           those
           whom
           Canterbury
           did
           maligne
           ,
           and
           hold
           downe
           for
           his
           certain
           and
           known
           resolutions
           ,
           and
           reputed
           abilities
           to
           oppose
           his
           Graces
           Arminian
           ,
           and
           Popish
           innovations
           .
           His
           Majesty
           being
           certainly
           cleer
           of
           this
           imputation
           ,
           and
           readily
           also
           Balcanquel
           ,
           the
           Amanuense
           ,
           on
           whom
           can
           the
           fault
           ly
           but
           Canterbury
           ,
           the
           directors
           back
           ?
           For
           the
           world
           knowes
           ,
           that
           on
           his
           shoulders
           for
           common
           alone
           ,
           the
           King
           doth
           devolve
           the
           trust
           of
           all
           Bookish
           and
           Ecclesiasticall
           affaires
           that
           concerne
           him
           ,
           that
           at
           his
           commandement
           〈◊〉
           hath
           written
           in
           the
           Kings
           name
           that
           part
           at
           the
           least
           of
           the
           declaration
           ,
           which
           patronizeth
           the
           
           Arminian
           persons
           and
           cause
           ,
           we
           doe
           not
           conjecture
           but
           demonstrate
           by
           the
           constant
           and
           avowed
           course
           of
           his
           Graces
           carriage
           in
           advancing
           Arminianisme
           at
           all
           occasions
           ;
           in
           all
           the
           Kings
           Dominions
           .
        
         
           That
           this
           may
           appeare
           ,
           consider
           his
           practises
           ,
           
           not
           so
           much
           amongst
           us
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Irish
           Church
           ,
           where
           yet
           his
           hand
           is
           very
           nimble
           ,
           to
           set
           these
           ungracious
           plants
           ,
           and
           to
           nippe
           off
           all
           the
           overspreading
           branches
           of
           any
           tree
           that
           may
           overtop
           them
           :
           For
           who
           else
           in
           a
           moment
           ,
           hath
           advanced
           Doctor
           Bramble
           ,
           not
           only
           to
           the
           sea
           of
           Derrie
           ,
           but
           to
           the
           Kings
           〈◊〉
           Generall
           ?
           Who
           sent
           Doctor
           Chappell
           first
           to
           the
           University
           of
           Dublin
           ,
           and
           then
           to
           his
           Episcopall
           chair
           ?
           Who
           holds
           〈◊〉
           the
           head
           of
           that
           Orthodox
           Primat
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           who
           kyth
           any
           zeale
           there
           to
           the
           trueth
           of
           God
           ;
           Who
           caused
           not
           onely
           refuse
           the
           confirmation
           of
           these
           Arminian
           Articles
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           in
           the
           last
           Parliament
           ,
           but
           threatned
           also
           to
           burne
           them
           by
           the
           hand
           of
           the
           Hangman
           ?
           Whose
           invention
           are
           these
           privy
           Articles
           ,
           which
           his
           creature
           Derry
           presents
           to
           divers
           ,
           who
           take
           Orders
           from
           his
           holy
           hands
           ?
           Wee
           will
           passe
           these
           and
           such
           other
           effects
           ,
           which
           the
           remote
           rayes
           of
           his
           Graces
           countenance
           doe
           produce
           in
           so
           great
           a
           distance
           ;
           Onely
           behold
           !
           How
           great
           an
           increase
           that
           unhappy
           plant
           hath
           made
           there
           in
           England
           ,
           where
           his
           eye
           is
           neerer
           to
           view
           ,
           and
           his
           hand
           to
           water
           it
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           25
           yeare
           ,
           at
           the
           very
           instant
           of
           King
           James
           
           death
           ,
           Doctor
           Montague
           ,
           with
           Doctor
           Whites
           approbation
           ,
           did
           put
           to
           the
           Presse
           all
           the
           Articles
           of
           Arminius
           
           in
           the
           same
           termes
           ,
           with
           the
           same
           arguments
           and
           most
           injurious
           calumniations
           of
           the
           Orthodox
           Doctrine
           ,
           as
           Spalato
           and
           the
           Remonstrants
           had
           done
           a
           little
           before
           ,
           but
           with
           this
           difference
           ,
           that
           where
           those
           had
           dipped
           their
           pens
           in
           inke
           Doct.
           Montagu
           doeth
           write
           with
           vinegar
           and
           gall
           ,
           in
           every
           other
           line
           ,
           casting
           out
           the
           venome
           of
           his
           bitter
           spirit
           ,
           on
           all
           that
           commeth
           in
           his
           way
           ,
           except
           they
           be
           fowles
           of
           his
           own
           feather
           ;
           for
           oft
           when
           hee
           speakes
           of
           
             Jesuites
             ,
             Cardinals
             ,
             Popes
          
           ,
           hee
           anoints
           his
           lips
           with
           the
           sweetest
           honey
           ,
           and
           perfumes
           his
           breath
           with
           the
           most
           cordiall
           tablets
           .
           If
           any
           doe
           doubt
           of
           his
           full
           Arminianisme
           ,
           let
           them
           cast
           up
           his
           Appeale
           and
           see
           it
           cleerely
           ,
           k
           in
           the
           first
           and
           second
           Article
           of
           Election
           and
           Redemption
           ,
           hee
           avoweth
           his
           aversenesse
           from
           the
           doctrine
           of
           Lambeth
           and
           Dort
           which
           teacheth
           ,
           that
           God
           from
           eternity
           did
           elect
           us
           to
           grace
           and
           salvation
           ,
           not
           for
           any
           consideration
           of
           our
           faith
           ,
           workes
           or
           any
           thing
           in
           us
           as
           causes
           ,
           respects
           or
           conditions
           antecedent
           to
           that
           decree
           ,
           but
           onely
           of
           his
           meere
           mercy
           ;
           And
           that
           from
           this
           Election
           all
           our
           faith
           ,
           works
           ,
           and
           perseverance
           doe
           flow
           as
           effects
           .
           Hee
           calleth
           this
           the
           private
           fancie
           of
           the
           Divines
           of
           Dort
           ,
           opposite
           to
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           :
           For
           this
           assertion
           he
           〈◊〉
           the
           Synod
           of
           Lambeth
           ,
           as
           teachers
           
           of
           desperate
           doctrine
           ,
           and
           would
           father
           this
           foule
           imputation
           ;
           but
           very
           falsely
           on
           the
           conference
           at
           
             Hampton
             Court.
          
           l
           Againe
           hee
           avoweth
           positively
           that
           faith
           goeth
           before
           Election
           ,
           and
           that
           to
           all
           the
           lost
           race
           of
           Adam
           alike
           ,
           Gods
           mercy
           in
           Christ
           is
           propounded
           till
           the
           parties
           free-will
           ,
           by
           believing
           or
           mis-believing
           ,
           make
           the
           disproportion
           antecedent
           to
           any
           divine
           either
           election
           ,
           or
           reprobation
           .
        
         
           One
           of
           the
           reasous
           why
           King
           Iames
           stiled
           Arminius
           
           disciples
           atheists
           ,
           was
           because
           their
           first
           article
           of
           conditionall
           election
           did
           draw
           them
           by
           an
           inevitable
           necessitie
           to
           the
           maintenance
           of
           Vorstian
           impiety
           :
           For
           make
           mee
           once
           Gods
           Eternall
           decree
           posterior
           ,
           and
           dependant
           from
           faith
           ,
           repentance
           ,
           perseverance
           ,
           and
           such
           works
           ,
           which
           they
           make
           slow
           from
           the
           free
           will
           of
           changeable
           men
           ;
           that
           Decree
           of
           God
           will
           be
           changeable
           ,
           it
           will
           be
           a
           separable
           accident
           in
           him
           ;
           God
           will
           bee
           a
           composed
           substance
           of
           subject
           ,
           and
           true
           accidents
           ,
           no
           more
           an
           absolute
           simple
           essence
           ,
           and
           so
           no
           more
           God.
           Vorstius
           ingenuitie
           in
           professing
           this
           composition
           is
           not
           misliked
           by
           the
           most
           learned
           of
           the
           
             Belgick
             Arminians
          
           ,
           who
           use
           not
           as
           many
           of
           the
           English
           ,
           to
           deny
           the
           cleare
           consequences
           of
           their
           doctrine
           ,
           if
           they
           be
           necessary
           ,
           though
           never
           so
           absurd
           .
           However
           in
           this
           very
           place
           Montagu
           maintaines
           very
           Vorstian
           atheisme
           as
           expresly
           as
           any
           can
           do
           making
           the
           divine
           
           essence
           to
           be
           finite
           ,
           his
           omni-presence
           not
           to
           be
           in
           substance
           ,
           but
           in
           providence
           ,
           m
           and
           so
           making
           God
           to
           be
           no
           God.
           This
           thought
           long
           agoe
           by
           learned
           Featly
           objected
           in
           print
           to
           Montagu
           ,
           lyes
           still
           upon
           him
           without
           any
           clearing
           .
           Certainly
           our
           Arminians
           in
           Scotland
           were
           begun
           both
           in
           word
           and
           writ
           to
           undertake
           the
           dispute
           for
           all
           that
           Vorstius
           had
           printed
           :
           I
           speak
           what
           I
           know
           ,
           and
           have
           felt
           oft
           to
           my
           great
           pains
           .
        
         
           Arminianisme
           is
           a
           chaine
           ,
           any
           one
           linke
           whereof
           ,
           
           but
           specially
           the
           first
           ,
           will
           draw
           all
           the
           rest
           ;
           yet
           see
           the
           other
           also
           expressed
           by
           Montagu
           .
           In
           the
           Articles
           of
           Grace
           and
           Freewill
           ,
           not
           only
           hee
           goes
           cleare
           with
           the
           Arminians
           ,
           teaching
           that
           Mans
           will
           hath
           ever
           a
           faculty
           to
           resist
           ,
           and
           oft
           times
           according
           to
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           actually
           doth
           resist
           ,
           reject
           ,
           frustrate
           ,
           and
           overcome
           the
           most
           powerfull
           acts
           of
           the
           spirit
           and
           grace
           of
           God
           ,
           even
           those
           which
           are
           employed
           about
           regeneration
           ,
           sanctification
           ,
           justification
           ,
           perseverance
           .
           n
           Not
           onely
           doth
           hee
           thus
           far
           proceed
           ,
           but
           also
           hee
           avowes
           that
           all
           the
           difference
           which
           is
           betwixt
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           and
           Rome
           ,
           in
           this
           head
           of
           freewill
           ,
           is
           in
           nothing
           materiall
           ,
           o
           and
           really
           long
           agoe
           to
           be
           ended
           and
           agreed
           amongst
           the
           most
           judicious
           and
           sober
           of
           both
           the
           sides
           .
        
         
         
           For
           the
           fifth
           of
           perseverance
           hee
           is
           as
           grosse
           as
           any
           
           either
           Remonstrant
           or
           Molinean
           Jesuite
           ,
           professing
           ,
           that
           no
           man
           in
           this
           life
           can
           have
           more
           assurance
           not
           to
           fall
           away
           both
           totally
           and
           finally
           from
           all
           the
           grace
           he
           gets
           ,
           then
           the
           devils
           p
           had
           once
           in
           Heaven
           ,
           and
           Adam
           once
           in
           Paradise
           .
        
         
           Behold
           the
           Arminian
           ensigne
           fairly
           now
           displayed
           
           in
           England
           by
           the
           hands
           of
           Montagu
           and
           White
           ,
           under
           the
           conduct
           of
           Doctor
           Lad
           Bishop
           of
           Saint
           Davids
           ,
           even
           then
           the
           President
           ,
           the
           chiefe
           in
           Ecclesiasticall
           affaires
           of
           the
           Duke
           of
           Buckinghams
           secret
           councell
           .
           At
           the
           first
           sight
           of
           this
           black
           banner
           a
           number
           of
           brave
           Champions
           got
           to
           their
           armes
           ;
           pulpits
           over
           all
           England
           rang
           ,
           presses
           swate
           against
           the
           boldnesse
           of
           that
           but
           small
           handfull
           then
           of
           courtizing
           Divines
           .
           Their
           crafty
           leader
           seeing
           the
           sloud
           of
           opposition
           ,
           and
           finding
           it
           meet
           for
           a
           little
           to
           hold
           in
           ,
           and
           fold
           up
           his
           displayed
           colours
           ,
           did
           by
           the
           Duke
           his
           patron
           perswade
           the
           expediencie
           of
           that
           policy
           ,
           which
           the
           Jesuites
           had
           immediately
           before
           ,
           for
           that
           same
           very
           designe
           moved
           the
           Roman
           consistory
           to
           practice
           .
           Hee
           obtained
           a
           Proclamation
           ,
           commanding
           silence
           on
           both
           sides
           ,
           discharging
           all
           preaching
           ,
           all
           printing
           in
           these
           controversies
           ,
           astricting
           to
           the
           cleare
           ,
           plaine
           and
           very
           Grammaticall
           sense
           of
           the
           Articles
           of
           England
           in
           these
           points
           ,
           without
           all
           further
           deductions
           .
           By
           this
           meanes
           his
           intentions
           were
           much
           promoved
           ,
           open
           avowers
           of
           Arminianisme
           were
           by
           publique
           authority
           so
           
           exempted
           from
           any
           censure
           ,
           a
           reall
           libertie
           was
           thus
           proclamed
           over
           all
           the
           land
           ,
           for
           any
           who
           pleased
           to
           embrace
           Arminianisme
           without
           oppotion
           .
        
         
           Hereby
           in
           two
           or
           three
           years
           the
           infection
           spread
           
           so
           far
           and
           broad
           ,
           that
           the
           Parliament
           was
           forced
           in
           the
           28.
           to
           make
           the
           encrease
           of
           Arminianisme
           their
           chiefe
           grievance
           to
           his
           Majestie
           ;
           But
           at
           that
           time
           Doctor
           Lad
           was
           growne
           greater
           .
           He
           had
           mounted
           up
           from
           the
           Bath
           to
           London
           ,
           and
           to
           make
           a
           shew
           there
           in
           Parliament
           of
           his
           power
           in
           the
           eie
           of
           all
           the
           complainers
           ,
           he
           raised
           up
           Montagu
           to
           the
           Episcopall
           Chaire
           of
           his
           own
           Diocesan
           ,
           Doctor
           Carleton
           ,
           who
           had
           lately
           chastised
           him
           in
           print
           for
           his
           Arminian
           appeale
           .
           D.
           White
           his
           other
           〈◊〉
           ,
           that
           all
           great
           spirits
           might
           be
           encouraged
           to
           run
           the
           wayes
           which
           Doct.
           Lad
           pointed
           out
           to
           them
           ,
           in
           despight
           of
           these
           Parliamentarie
           Remonstrants
           ,
           was
           advanced
           from
           Bishoprick
           to
           Bishoprick
           ,
           till
           death
           at
           the
           step
           of
           Elie
           did
           interrupt
           the
           course
           of
           his
           promotion
           ,
           that
           to
           Wren
           a
           third
           violent
           follower
           of
           his
           Arminian
           Tenets
           ,
           way
           might
           bee
           made
           for
           to
           clime
           up
           the
           remaining
           steps
           of
           the
           ladder
           of
           his
           Honours
           .
           Now
           to
           the
           end
           〈◊〉
           the
           world
           may
           know
           ,
           that
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterbury
           doth
           nothing
           blush
           at
           the
           advancement
           of
           such
           men
           ,
           heare
           what
           a
           publique
           testimony
           of
           huge
           worth
           and
           deserving
           ,
           hee
           causeth
           his
           Herauld
           
             Peter
             〈◊〉
          
           to
           proclame
           to
           that
           Triumvirat
           ,
           not
           onely
           at
           his
           own
           directions
           ,
           (
           for
           that
           moderate
           answer
           of
           Heylens
           is
           the
           
             Iusto
             volumine
          
           which
           his
           G.
           did
           promise
           to
           the
           world
           in
           his
           Starre-chamber
           speech
           )
           but
           also
           in
           name
           of
           authority
           ,
           if
           Heylen
           
           lie
           not
           ,
           who
           sayes
           ,
           He
           writes
           that
           book
           at
           the
           commandement
           of
           the
           State
           :
           There
           ,
           after
           the
           cryasse
           of
           Canterburies
           owne
           extraordinary
           prayses
           q
           the
           renowme
           of
           his
           three
           Underleaders
           ,
           is
           loudly
           sounded
           as
           of
           plain
           Non-suches
           r
           .
        
         
           All
           these
           his
           graces
           favours
           to
           his
           followers
           would
           
           have
           been
           the
           more
           tolerable
           ,
           if
           he
           would
           have
           permitted
           his
           Orthodox
           opposites
           to
           have
           had
           some
           share
           in
           their
           Princes
           affection
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           to
           have
           lived
           in
           peace
           in
           their
           own
           places
           .
           But
           behold
           ,
           all
           that
           crosses
           his
           way
           must
           downe
           ,
           were
           they
           the
           greatest
           Bishops
           in
           the
           Dominions
           .
           For
           who
           else
           wrought
           the
           〈◊〉
           Archbishop
           so
           farre
           out
           of
           the
           Kings
           Grace
           ,
           that
           he
           remained
           some
           yeers
           before
           his
           death
           well-neere
           confined
           to
           his
           house
           at
           Lambeth
           ?
           Who
           hath
           caused
           to
           cage
           up
           in
           the
           Tower
           that
           great
           and
           learned
           Bishop
           of
           Lincolne
           ?
           what
           ever
           else
           may
           be
           in
           the
           man.
           What
           fray
           makes
           that
           worthy
           Primate
           Vsher
           ,
           to
           foretell
           oft
           to
           his
           friends
           his
           expectation
           ,
           to
           be
           sent
           over
           Sea
           ,
           to
           die
           a
           Pedant
           teaching
           boys
           for
           his
           bread
           ,
           by
           the
           persecution
           of
           this
           faction
           whose
           ways
           he
           avows
           to
           many
           ,
           doth
           tend
           to
           manifest
           Arminianisme
           ,
           and
           Popery
           .
           This
           their
           resolution
           to
           persecute
           with
           
           all
           extremity
           ,
           every
           one
           who
           shall
           mint
           to
           print
           or
           preach
           any
           thing
           against
           Arminianisme
           ,
           they
           avow
           it
           openly
           not
           only
           by
           deeds
           (
           for
           why
           else
           was
           Master
           
           Butter
           the
           Stationer
           cast
           by
           Canterbury
           in
           the
           Fleet
           for
           printing
           Bishop
           Davenants
           letter
           to
           Bishop
           Hall
           against
           some
           passage
           of
           Arminianisme
           at
           the
           Authors
           direction
           ,
           as
           we
           see
           it
           set
           down
           by
           Huntley
           in
           his
           Breviat
           ?
           )
           but
           even
           in
           open
           print
           ,
           for
           when
           Master
           Burton
           complains
           to
           the
           King
           that
           hee
           was
           silenced
           by
           Canterbury
           ,
           for
           expounding
           of
           his
           ordinary
           text
           ,
           Rom.
           8
           
             Whom
             God
             hath
             predestinate
             ,
             those
             he
             hath
             called
             ,
          
           and
           applying
           it
           to
           the
           present
           Pelagianisme
           and
           Popery
           of
           the
           
             Arminians
             ,
             Christopher
             Dow
          
           s
           approved
           by
           Canterburies
           Chaplain
           ,
           and
           
             Peter
             Helyn
          
           directed
           to
           speak
           by
           Canterbury
           himselfe
           doth
           not
           stand
           to
           affirme
           ,
           that
           this
           was
           a
           cause
           well
           deserving
           all
           the
           sufferings
           hee
           complained
           of
           .
        
         
           Could
           any
           here
           but
           expect
           of
           his
           Graces
           wisedome
           
           and
           loyalty
           ,
           when
           his
           solicitude
           appeareth
           to
           disgrace
           and
           punish
           ,
           without
           respect
           of
           persons
           ,
           all
           who
           in
           contempt
           ,
           as
           he
           saith
           ,
           of
           the
           Kings
           Proclamation
           will
           not
           desist
           from
           the
           publike
           oppugning
           of
           Arminianisme
           ,
           that
           on
           the
           other
           hand
           the
           Preachers
           and
           Printers
           for
           Arminianisme
           according
           to
           that
           same
           Proclamation
           should
           be
           put
           to
           some
           order
           ?
           yet
           this
           is
           so
           farre
           neglected
           ,
           that
           all
           who
           are
           so
           affected
           ,
           
             Cousins
             ,
             Colines
             ,
             Beal
          
           in
           CAMBRIDGE
           ,
           Potter
           
           and
           Jackson
           in
           OXFORD
           ,
           and
           many
           more
           prime
           Doctours
           in
           both
           Universities
           ,
           in
           the
           Citie
           ,
           in
           the
           Court
           ,
           and
           over
           all
           the
           Land
           ,
           boldly
           give
           out
           their
           mind
           to
           all
           they
           meet
           with
           for
           the
           advancement
           of
           the
           new
           way
           ;
           yea
           boldnesse
           in
           running
           those
           paths
           hath
           beene
           knowne
           to
           have
           beene
           the
           high
           way
           in
           all
           the
           three
           Dominions
           these
           yeeres
           bygone
           to
           certain
           promotion
           in
           many
           men
           ,
           who
           to
           the
           Worlds
           eyes
           had
           no
           other
           singular
           eminencie
           of
           any
           good
           parts
           .
        
         
           But
           that
           his
           Graces
           tramping
           upon
           the
           Kings
           Proclamation
           may
           bee
           yet
           the
           more
           evident
           ,
           behold
           how
           hee
           doth
           daily
           dispense
           both
           with
           his
           owne
           pen
           and
           those
           also
           of
           his
           Friends
           to
           write
           and
           print
           for
           Arminianisme
           ,
           what
           they
           please
           .
           White
           being
           taxed
           by
           Master
           Burton
           for
           his
           subscription
           to
           Montagues
           Appeale
           ,
           is
           so
           farre
           from
           the
           least
           retractation
           ,
           that
           the
           fift
           Article
           of
           Apostasie
           and
           uncertainty
           of
           salvation
           which
           Master
           Burton
           did
           single
           out
           of
           all
           Montagues
           errours
           as
           most
           opposite
           to
           Christian
           comfort
           ,
           hee
           maintaines
           it
           in
           his
           owne
           Answer
           to
           the
           Dialogue
           ;
           but
           as
           the
           custome
           now
           is
           under
           the
           covert
           of
           some
           Fathers
           name
           ,
           at
           great
           length
           with
           much
           bitternesse
           ,
           and
           casts
           out
           without
           provocation
           in
           his
           Treatise
           of
           the
           Sabbath
           ,
           the
           first
           and
           second
           Article
           :
           t
           Master
           Dow
           and
           Schelfoord
           use
           the
           same
           plainnesse
           .
           Yea
           ,
           in
           the
           one
           and
           thirtieth
           yeare
           that
           Faction
           was
           so
           malepeart
           as
           to
           set
           out
           the
           Historicall
           Narration
           by
           one
           Aileward
           wherein
           all
           the
           Articles
           of
           Arminius
           at
           length
           with
           these
           false
           and
           bitter
           Calumniations
           of
           our
           Doctrine
           ,
           which
           are
           usually
           chanted
           and
           rechanted
           
           by
           the
           Remonstrants
           are
           not
           onely
           set
           downe
           as
           truths
           ,
           but
           also
           fathered
           upon
           the
           first
           reformers
           and
           Martyrs
           of
           England
           .
           That
           Booke
           when
           it
           had
           beene
           out
           a
           while
           was
           called
           in
           ,
           not
           because
           the
           doctrines
           were
           false
           ,
           not
           because
           the
           story
           was
           forged
           ,
           as
           that
           learned
           Knight
           Sir
           
             Vmphrey
             Lyne
          
           by
           the
           ocular
           inspection
           of
           that
           originall
           manuscript
           did
           since
           demonstrate
           ,
           but
           the
           onely
           reason
           of
           the
           calling
           of
           it
           backe
           ,
           as
           his
           Grace
           makes
           Heylen
           declare
           to
           us
           ,
           was
           ,
           the
           dinne
           and
           clamour
           which
           Mr.
           Burton
           ,
           then
           one
           of
           the
           Ministers
           of
           London
           ,
           made
           against
           it
           .
           w
        
         
           Conterbury
           himselfe
           is
           nothing
           afraid
           to
           lend
           his
           owne
           hand
           to
           pull
           downe
           any
           thing
           that
           seemes
           crosse
           to
           Arminianisme
           .
           The
           certainty
           of
           Salvation
           ,
           the
           assurance
           of
           Election
           ,
           is
           such
           an
           eye-sore
           ,
           that
           to
           have
           it
           away
           ,
           hee
           stands
           not
           with
           his
           owne
           hand
           to
           cut
           and
           mangle
           the
           very
           Liturgie
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           otherwise
           a
           sacred
           peace
           ,
           and
           a
           
             noli
             me
             tangere
          
           in
           England
           in
           the
           smallest
           points
           ,
           were
           they
           never
           so
           much
           by
           any
           censured
           of
           errour
           :
           yet
           if
           any
           clause
           crosse
           Arminianisme
           or
           Poperie
           ,
           his
           grace
           doth
           not
           spare
           without
           dinne
           to
           expurge
           it
           ,
           did
           it
           stand
           in
           the
           most
           eminent
           places
           thereof
           in
           the
           very
           morning
           prayers
           for
           the
           Kings
           person
           .
           Here
           was
           this
           clause
           fixed
           since
           the
           reformation
           (
           who
           are
           the
           Father
           of
           thine
           elect
           and
           their
           seed
           )
           this
           seemed
           to
           bee
           a
           publike
           profession
           that
           it
           was
           not
           unlawfull
           for
           King
           Charles
           to
           avow
           his
           certainty
           and
           perswasion
           that
           God
           was
           his
           Father
           ,
           and
           hee
           his
           adopted
           Childe
           elected
           to
           salvation
           .
           His
           grace
           could
           not
           endure
           any
           longer
           such
           a
           scandalous
           speech
           to
           bee
           uttered
           ,
           
           but
           with
           his
           own
           hand
           scrapeth
           it
           out
           .
           Being
           challenged
           for
           it
           by
           Master
           Burton
           ,
           and
           the
           out-cryes
           of
           the
           people
           ,
           he
           confesseth
           the
           fact
           ;
           only
           for
           excuse
           ,
           bringeth
           three
           reasons
           of
           which
           you
           may
           judge
           :
           x
           First
           ,
           he
           saith
           ,
           It
           was
           done
           in
           his
           Predecessours
           time
           :
           Doth
           not
           this
           make
           his
           presumption
           the
           more
           intolerable
           ,
           that
           any
           inferiour
           Bishop
           living
           at
           the
           very
           eare
           of
           the
           Archbishop
           ,
           should
           mint
           to
           expurge
           the
           Liturgie
           ?
           Secondly
           ,
           Hee
           pretends
           the
           Kings
           command
           for
           his
           doing
           .
           Doth
           not
           this
           encrease
           his
           guiltinesse
           ,
           that
           hee
           and
           his
           followers
           are
           become
           so
           wicked
           and
           irrespective
           ,
           as
           to
           make
           it
           an
           ordinary
           pranke
           ,
           to
           cast
           their
           owne
           misdeeds
           upon
           the
           broad
           back
           of
           the
           Prince
           ?
           Dare
           hee
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           King
           commanded
           any
           such
           thing
           
             motu
             proprio
          
           ?
           Did
           hee
           command
           that
           expunction
           without
           any
           information
           ,
           without
           any
           mans
           advise
           ?
           Did
           any
           King
           of
           England
           ever
           assay
           to
           expurge
           the
           publike
           Bookes
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           without
           the
           advise
           of
           his
           Clergie
           ?
           Did
           ever
           King
           Charles
           meddle
           in
           any
           Church
           matter
           of
           far
           lesse
           importance
           without
           Doctour
           Lads
           counsell
           ?
           The
           third
           excuse
           ,
           That
           the
           King
           then
           had
           no
           seed
           :
           How
           is
           this
           pertinent
           ?
           May
           not
           a
           childlesse
           man
           say
           in
           his
           prayers
           ,
           that
           God
           is
           the
           Father
           of
           the
           Elect
           ,
           and
           of
           their
           seed
           ,
           though
           himselfe
           as
           yet
           have
           no
           seed
           ?
           But
           the
           true
           cause
           of
           his
           anger
           against
           this
           passage
           of
           the
           Liturgie
           ,
           seemeth
           to
           have
           been
           none
           other
           then
           this
           Arminian
           conclusion
           ;
           that
           all
           faith
           of
           election
           in
           particular
           ,
           of
           personall
           adoption
           or
           salvation
           ,
           is
           nought
           but
           presumption
           .
           That
           this
           is
           his
           Graces
           faith
           ,
           may
           appear
           by
           his
           Chaplains
           hand
           ,
           at
           that
           base
           and
           false
           story
           of
           Ap-Evan
           by
           Studley
           ,
           
           wherein
           are
           bitter
           invectives
           against
           all
           such
           perswasions
           as
           puritanick
           delusions
           ,
           y
           yea
           ,
           hee
           is
           contented
           that
           Chouneus
           should
           print
           over
           and
           over
           again
           his
           unworthy
           collections
           ,
           not
           onely
           subscribed
           by
           his
           chaplain
           ,
           but
           dedicated
           to
           himself
           ,
           wherein
           salvation
           is
           avowed
           to
           be
           a
           thing
           unknown
           ,
           and
           whereof
           no
           man
           can
           have
           any
           further
           ,
           or
           should
           wish
           for
           any
           more
           then
           a
           good
           hope
           .
           z
           And
           if
           any
           desire
           a
           cleare
           confession
           ,
           behold
           himselfe
           in
           those
           
             opuscula
             posthuma
          
           of
           Andrewes
           ,
           which
           hee
           setteth
           out
           to
           the
           world
           after
           the
           mans
           death
           ,
           and
           dedicates
           to
           the
           King
           ;
           avowing
           that
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           doth
           maintaine
           no
           personall
           perswasion
           of
           predestination
           ,
           which
           Tenet
           Cardinall
           Peroun
           had
           objected
           as
           presumption
           .
           *
           White
           also
           in
           his
           answer
           to
           the
           dialogue
           ,
           makes
           mans
           election
           a
           mysterie
           ,
           which
           God
           hath
           so
           hid
           in
           his
           secret
           counsell
           that
           no
           man
           can
           in
           this
           life
           come
           to
           any
           knowledge
           ,
           let
           bee
           assurance
           of
           it
           ,
           at
           great
           length
           from
           the
           ninety
           seventh
           page
           to
           the
           hundred
           and
           third
           ,
           and
           that
           most
           plainly
           .
        
         
           But
           to
           close
           this
           Chapter
           passing
           a
           number
           of
           evidences
           ,
           
           I
           bring
           but
           one
           more
           which
           readily
           may
           bee
           demonstrative
           ,
           though
           all
           other
           were
           laid
           aside
           .
           By
           the
           Lawes
           and
           practises
           of
           England
           ,
           a
           Chaplains
           licencing
           of
           a
           booke
           for
           the
           presse
           is
           taken
           for
           his
           Lord
           the
           Bishops
           deed
           :
           So
           Heylen
           approven
           by
           Canterbury
           teacheth
           in
           his
           Antidotum
           ,
           a
           and
           for
           this
           there
           is
           reason
           ,
           for
           the
           
           Lawes
           give
           authority
           of
           licencing
           to
           no
           chaplaine
           ,
           but
           to
           their
           Lords
           alone
           ,
           who
           are
           to
           be
           answerable
           for
           that
           which
           their
           servant
           doth
           in
           their
           name
           .
           Also
           the
           chaplaine
           at
           the
           licencing
           receives
           the
           principall
           subscribed
           copie
           ,
           which
           hee
           delivereth
           to
           his
           Lord
           ,
           to
           bee
           laid
           up
           in
           his
           episcopall
           Register
           .
           
             William
             Bray
          
           ,
           one
           of
           Canterburies
           Chaplaines
           ,
           subscribed
           
             〈◊〉
             collectiones
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           as
           consonant
           to
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           &
           meet
           for
           the
           presse
           .
           The
           authour
           dedicated
           the
           treatise
           to
           my
           L.
           of
           Canterbury
           ,
           it
           was
           printed
           at
           London
           1636.
           into
           this
           booke
           ,
           the
           first
           article
           ,
           which
           by
           the
           confession
           of
           all
           sides
           ,
           draws
           with
           it
           all
           the
           rest
           ,
           is
           set
           downe
           in
           more
           plain
           and
           foul
           tearmes
           then
           Molina
           or
           any
           Jesuite
           ;
           sure
           I
           am
           then
           
             Arminius
             ,
             Vorstius
          
           ,
           or
           any
           their
           followers
           ever
           did
           deliver
           ,
           b
           teaching
           in
           one
           These
           those
           three
           grosse
           errours
           .
           1.
           
           That
           mens
           faith
           ,
           repentance
           ,
           perseverance
           ,
           are
           the
           true
           causes
           of
           their
           Salvation
           ;
           as
           Misbeleefe
           ,
           Impenitencie
           ,
           Apostasie
           are
           of
           Damnation
           :
           Doth
           Bellarmine
           goe
           so
           farre
           in
           his
           Doctrine
           of
           justification
           and
           merit
           ?
           2.
           
           That
           those
           sinnes
           are
           no
           lesse
           the
           true
           causes
           of
           reprobation
           then
           of
           damnation
           .
           3.
           
           That
           mens
           faith
           ,
           repentance
           ,
           perseverance
           are
           no
           lesse
           the
           true
           causes
           of
           their
           eternall
           election
           ,
           then
           misbeliefe
           or
           other
           sinnes
           of
           their
           temporall
           damnation
           .
           Let
           charity
           suppone
           that
           his
           grace
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           his
           numerous
           and
           weightie
           imployments
           hath
           been
           forced
           to
           neglect
           the
           reading
           of
           a
           booke
           of
           this
           nature
           ,
           though
           dedicate
           to
           himselfe
           ,
           albeit
           it
           is
           well
           known
           that
           his
           watchfull
           eye
           is
           fixed
           upon
           nothing
           more
           then
           
           Pamphlets
           which
           passes
           the
           presse
           upon
           Doctrines
           now
           controverted
           ,
           yet
           his
           grace
           being
           publikly
           upbraided
           ,
           for
           countenancing
           of
           this
           book
           by
           Doctor
           Bastwick
           in
           the
           face
           of
           the
           Starre-chamber
           ,
           and
           being
           advertised
           of
           its
           dedication
           to
           himselfe
           ,
           of
           the
           errours
           contained
           in
           it
           ,
           yea
           of
           injuries
           against
           the
           King
           of
           the
           deepest
           staine
           ,
           as
           these
           which
           strooke
           at
           the
           very
           roote
           of
           his
           supremacie
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           favour
           of
           Bishops
           .
           When
           in
           such
           a
           place
           Canterbury
           was
           taxed
           for
           letting
           his
           name
           stand
           before
           a
           Booke
           that
           wounded
           the
           Kings
           Monarchicall
           government
           at
           the
           very
           heart
           ,
           and
           did
           transferre
           from
           the
           Crowne
           to
           the
           Miter
           one
           of
           its
           fairest
           diamonds
           which
           the
           King
           and
           his
           Father
           before
           him
           did
           ever
           love
           most
           dearely
           ,
           no
           Charity
           will
           longer
           permit
           us
           to
           believe
           ,
           but
           his
           Grace
           would
           without
           further
           delay
           lend
           some
           two
           or
           three
           spare
           howers
           to
           the
           viewing
           of
           such
           a
           piece
           which
           did
           concerne
           the
           King
           and
           himselfe
           so
           neerely
           .
           Having
           therefore
           without
           all
           doubt
           both
           seen
           &
           most
           narrowly
           sifted
           all
           the
           corners
           of
           that
           small
           Treatise
           ,
           and
           yet
           been
           so
           farre
           from
           reproving
           the
           Authour
           ,
           from
           censuring
           the
           licencer
           ,
           his
           Chaplain
           ,
           from
           calling
           in
           the
           booke
           ,
           from
           expurging
           any
           one
           jot
           that
           was
           in
           it
           ,
           that
           the
           Treatise
           the
           second
           time
           is
           put
           to
           the
           presse
           at
           London
           with
           the
           same
           licence
           ,
           the
           same
           dedication
           ,
           no
           letter
           of
           the
           points
           in
           question
           altered
           :
           May
           wee
           not
           conclude
           with
           the
           favour
           of
           all
           reasonable
           men
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterburies
           expresse
           minde
           to
           have
           his
           owne
           name
           prefixed
           ,
           and
           his
           chaplaines
           hand
           subjoined
           to
           the
           grossest
           errours
           of
           Arminius
           ,
           and
           so
           to
           professe
           openly
           his
           contempt
           of
           the
           Kings
           
           Proclamation
           ,
           for
           the
           pretended
           violation
           where
           ,
           of
           he
           causeth
           stigmatize
           ,
           mutilat
           ,
           fine
           excessively
           ,
           imprison
           for
           time
           of
           life
           ,
           very
           vertuous
           gentle-men
           ,
           both
           Divines
           ,
           Lawyers
           ,
           Physitians
           ,
           &
           of
           other
           faculties
           .
        
         
           What
           there
           can
           be
           said
           for
           his
           graces
           apologie
           
           nothing
           commeth
           in
           my
           mind
           ,
           except
           one
           alledgeance
           ,
           that
           the
           point
           in
           hand
           crosseth
           not
           the
           proclamation
           ,
           discharging
           toproceed
           in
           those
           questions
           beyond
           the
           Grammaticall
           construction
           and
           literall
           sense
           of
           the
           articles
           of
           England
           .
           The
           Authour
           indeed
           in
           the
           Epistle
           dedicatory
           avowes
           to
           his
           grace
           that
           the
           These
           alledged
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           his
           Booke
           doth
           perfectly
           agree
           with
           the
           English
           Articles
           ,
           in
           the
           very
           first
           and
           literall
           sense
           ,
           whereof
           the
           Proclamation
           speaketh
           ,
           c
           And
           to
           this
           assertion
           the
           Licencers
           hand
           is
           relative
           as
           to
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           booke
           :
           but
           of
           this
           miserable
           apologie
           ,
           which
           yet
           is
           the
           onely
           one
           which
           I
           can
           imagine
           possible
           ,
           this
           will
           be
           the
           necessary
           issue
           ,
           that
           the
           grosse
           lie
           ,
           which
           good
           King
           James
           put
           upon
           the
           bold
           brow
           of
           impudent
           Bertius
           ,
           for
           his
           affirming
           that
           one
           article
           of
           the
           Saints
           apostasie
           ,
           let
           bee
           other
           more
           vile
           Arminian
           Tenets
           ,
           was
           consonant
           with
           the
           Articles
           of
           England
           ,
           must
           bee
           throwne
           back
           from
           Bertius
           on
           the
           Kings
           face
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           as
           disgracefull
           a
           way
           as
           it
           was
           first
           given
           :
           Montague
           and
           White
           ,
           with
           his
           graces
           permission
           ,
           did
           give
           that
           venerable
           Prince
           long
           agoe
           the
           lie
           at
           home
           in
           English
           ,
           affirming
           the
           perfect
           agreeance
           of
           the
           Arminian
           apostasie
           with
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           England
           .
           But
           this
           afront
           contents
           not
           his
           
           Grace
           except
           the
           barbarous
           medicine
           ,
           under
           the
           shelter
           of
           his
           Archiepiscopall
           name
           belie
           his
           Majesty
           over
           sea
           ,
           and
           over
           the
           whole
           world
           ,
           where
           the
           Latine
           is
           understood
           .
           Beside
           this
           shamefull
           inconvenience
           ,
           another
           dangerous
           evill
           will
           necessarily
           follow
           from
           this
           apologie
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           the
           Arminian
           doctrine
           may
           not
           onely
           be
           tollerat
           in
           England
           ,
           which
           yet
           if
           King
           James
           bee
           trusted
           ,
           cannot
           faile
           to
           draw
           downe
           upon
           England
           a
           curse
           from
           God
           ,
           shame
           from
           abroad
           ,
           horrible
           schisme
           at
           home
           ,
           but
           also
           since
           their
           grossest
           Articles
           are
           declared
           in
           print
           and
           in
           Latine
           ,
           under
           the
           shadow
           of
           Canterburies
           name
           ,
           to
           be
           fully
           consonant
           to
           the
           very
           literall
           sense
           of
           the
           Articles
           of
           England
           ,
           all
           the
           members
           of
           that
           Church
           may
           bee
           compelled
           presently
           without
           more
           delay
           to
           embrace
           those
           doctrines
           ;
           and
           that
           any
           manis
           permitted
           in
           England
           ,
           to
           believe
           in
           peace
           the
           Antiarminian
           Articles
           ,
           wherein
           
             Queene
             Elisabet
          
           and
           King
           James
           did
           live
           and
           die
           ,
           it
           is
           of
           meere
           favour
           and
           the
           Princes
           mercy
           ,
           who
           readily
           by
           the
           Arch-bishops
           intercession
           is
           diverted
           from
           pressing
           the
           profession
           of
           those
           articles
           ;
           according
           to
           the
           first
           and
           most
           literall
           sense
           ,
           which
           now
           is
           clearly
           avowed
           to
           be
           after
           Arminius
           ;
           yea
           ,
           Molina
           his
           mind
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           
             CHAP.
             III.
          
           The
           Canterburians
           professd
           affection
           towards
           the
           Pope
           and
           Popery
           in
           grosse
           .
        
         
           IT
           was
           the
           opinion
           of
           many
           among
           us
           for
           a
           
           long
           time
           ,
           that
           the
           innovating
           faction
           did
           minde
           no
           more
           nor
           Arminianisme
           ,
           but
           at
           once
           ,
           those
           who
           touched
           their
           pulse
           neerer
           ,
           did
           finde
           a
           more
           high
           humour
           working
           in
           their
           veines
           .
           With
           Arminius
           errours
           they
           began
           incontinent
           to
           publish
           other
           Tenets
           ,
           which
           to
           all
           meere
           Arminians
           were
           ridiculous
           follies
           .
           The
           elements
           of
           the
           Lords
           Supper
           began
           by
           them
           to
           bee
           magnified
           ,
           above
           the
           common
           phrase
           of
           protestant
           Divines
           ,
           a
           corporall
           presence
           of
           Christs
           humanitie
           in
           and
           about
           the
           elements
           to
           bee
           glanced
           at
           ,
           a
           kind
           of
           omnipresence
           of
           Christs
           flesh
           to
           bee
           preached
           ,
           a
           number
           of
           adorations
           before
           those
           elements
           ,
           and
           all
           that
           was
           neere
           them
           ,
           both
           the
           altar
           ,
           bason
           ,
           chalice
           ,
           and
           chancell
           to
           bee
           urged
           ;
           many
           new
           ceremonies
           ,
           which
           for
           many
           yeares
           had
           beene
           out
           of
           use
           ,
           to
           bee
           taken
           in
           ,
           a
           great
           bitternesse
           of
           spirit
           ,
           against
           all
           who
           ran
           not
           after
           these
           new
           guises
           to
           appeare
           .
           This
           made
           us
           thinke
           they
           intended
           to
           step
           over
           from
           Arminius
           to
           Luther
           .
           In
           this
           conception
           wee
           were
           somewhat
           
           confirmed
           ,
           considering
           their
           earnest
           recommendation
           ,
           to
           the
           reading
           of
           young
           Students
           the
           late
           Lutheran
           Divines
           ,
           such
           as
           
             Hutter
             ,
             Meisner
             ,
             Gerard
          
           ,
           with
           their
           crying
           down
           ,
           both
           in
           private
           and
           publike
           ,
           of
           
             Calvine
             ,
             Beza
             ,
             Martyr
             ,
             Bucer
             ,
          
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           famous
           Writers
           both
           ancient
           and
           late
           of
           the
           French
           and
           Belgicke
           Churches
           .
           Their
           giving
           it
           out
           also
           that
           their
           martyred
           Reformers
           ,
           
             Cranmer
             ,
             Ridley
             ,
             Latimer
          
           ,
           were
           of
           Luthers
           Schoole
           ,
           and
           from
           him
           had
           learned
           those
           things
           ,
           wherein
           the
           English
           Church
           did
           differ
           from
           the
           other
           Reformed
           of
           Calvines
           framing
           .
           But
           most
           of
           all
           ,
           by
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterburies
           great
           diligence
           under-hand
           ,
           to
           promove
           and
           reward
           that
           late
           negotiation
           of
           Master
           Duries
           with
           the
           Churches
           over
           Sea
           ,
           for
           the
           extenuating
           of
           the
           Lutheran
           errours
           ,
           and
           procuring
           with
           their
           Churches
           ,
           not
           only
           a
           syncretisme
           ,
           which
           all
           good
           men
           did
           ever
           pant
           for
           ,
           but
           also
           a
           full
           peace
           in
           tearms
           so
           generall
           ,
           so
           ambiguous
           ,
           so
           slippery
           ,
           that
           are
           very
           suspitious
           to
           many
           ,
           other
           wayes
           very
           peaceable
           mindes
           .
        
         
           This
           I
           speak
           without
           any
           intention
           of
           putting
           the
           least
           note
           of
           blame
           either
           upon
           the
           person
           or
           pains
           of
           Master
           Durie
           ,
           or
           any
           of
           the
           Divines
           of
           either
           side
           ,
           who
           have
           been
           ready
           to
           declare
           their
           inclination
           ,
           and
           employ
           their
           labours
           towards
           that
           more
           desired
           then
           hoped
           for
           union
           of
           the
           Protestant
           Churches
           ,
           whom
           evill
           instruments
           have
           keeped
           too
           too
           long
           asunder
           in
           a
           lamentable
           ,
           dangerous
           ,
           and
           disgracefull
           distraction
           .
           Master
           Duries
           labours
           in
           this
           kind
           were
           ever
           by
           mee
           
           esteemed
           worthy
           of
           great
           prayse
           ,
           honour
           ,
           and
           reward
           :
           I
           wished
           alwayes
           in
           my
           heart
           to
           them
           a
           most
           happy
           successe
           ever
           rejoycing
           when
           in
           any
           of
           his
           informations
           ,
           I
           did
           perceive
           the
           lest
           step
           of
           advancement
           .
        
         
           My
           remarke
           only
           is
           upon
           the
           malice
           of
           the
           Canterburians
           ,
           who
           to
           their
           wicked
           designe
           of
           re-uniting
           to
           Rome
           ,
           and
           so
           overthrowing
           all
           the
           Protestant
           Churches
           ,
           doe
           most
           perversly
           abuse
           as
           all
           ,
           whatsoever
           at
           any
           time
           hath
           falne
           from
           the
           pen
           of
           any
           Reformed
           Writer
           ,
           tending
           towards
           mutuall
           peace
           or
           moderation
           ,
           so
           especially
           the
           negotiations
           which
           of
           old
           or
           late
           ,
           hath
           beene
           in
           hand
           for
           the
           drawing
           of
           us
           and
           the
           Lutherans
           ,
           into
           one
           body
           :
           These
           Treaties
           whether
           for
           a
           full
           agreement
           ,
           or
           a
           friendly
           toleration
           ,
           are
           laid
           by
           them
           as
           the
           principall
           ground-stones
           of
           their
           negotiation
           with
           Rome
           ,
           for
           to
           them
           both
           the
           persons
           and
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Lutherans
           are
           more
           odious
           than
           these
           of
           the
           Papists
           ,
           as
           you
           will
           see
           it
           hereafter
           demonstrate
           from
           the
           Writs
           of
           Forbes
           and
           Kellet
           ;
           so
           that
           all
           the
           countenance
           they
           have
           showne
           hitherto
           towards
           the
           negotiations
           of
           our
           peace
           with
           the
           Lutherans
           did
           not
           proceed
           from
           any
           true
           affection
           ,
           they
           carried
           either
           to
           the
           men
           or
           to
           their
           negotiation
           in
           it selfe
           :
           but
           their
           ayme
           mainly
           was
           to
           have
           these
           Treaties
           abused
           as
           plausible
           means
           to
           advance
           their
           own
           greater
           designe
           .
           This
           for
           a
           time
           ,
           while
           their
           mysteries
           lay
           vailed
           ,
           was
           not
           well
           perceived
           :
           the
           most
           of
           men
           did
           suspect
           no
           more
           in
           all
           their
           seeming
           favours
           towards
           the
           Lutheran
           party
           ,
           then
           that
           a
           kind
           of
           Lutheranisme
           had
           beene
           there
           uttermost
           intension
           ,
           hoping
           
           that
           the
           motion
           of
           their
           violent
           minds
           might
           have
           consisted
           here
           ,
           without
           any
           further
           progresse
           .
        
         
           But
           it
           was
           not
           long
           ,
           while
           every
           common
           eye
           did
           
           observe
           their
           bowle
           to
           roll
           much
           beyond
           that
           〈◊〉
           .
           They
           published
           incontinent
           a
           number
           of
           the
           Romish
           errours
           ,
           which
           to
           the
           Lutherans
           were
           ever
           esteemed
           deadly
           poyson
           ,
           the
           Popish
           Faith
           ,
           the
           Trident'ne
           Justification
           ,
           merit
           of
           Works
           ,
           Works
           of
           Sup
           〈◊〉
           ,
           Doctrinall
           Traditions
           ,
           
             Limbus
             Patrum
          
           ,
           the
           sacrifice
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           Adoration
           of
           Images
           ,
           Monastick
           Vows
           ,
           Abbeys
           and
           Nunneries
           ,
           the
           authority
           of
           the
           Pope
           ,
           a
           re-union
           with
           Rome
           as
           shee
           stands
           .
           Finding
           it
           so
           ,
           wee
           were
           driven
           to
           this
           conclusion
           ,
           that
           as
           ordinarily
           the
           spirit
           of
           defection
           doth
           not
           permit
           any
           Apostates
           to
           rest
           in
           any
           midde
           tearme
           ,
           but
           carrieth
           them
           along
           to
           the
           extreams
           of
           some
           palpable
           madnesse
           ,
           to
           some
           strong
           delusion
           for
           the
           recompence
           of
           the
           first
           degrees
           of
           their
           fall
           from
           the
           love
           of
           the
           Truth
           ,
           so
           also
           our
           Faction
           was
           carried
           quite
           beyond
           the
           bounds
           both
           of
           Arminius
           and
           Luther
           ,
           yea
           of
           their
           owne
           so
           much
           once
           beloved
           Cassander
           and
           Spalato
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           Lists
           of
           that
           which
           they
           were
           wont
           to
           call
           moderation
           ,
           to
           drinke
           of
           the
           vilest
           abominations
           ,
           and
           the
           lowest
           dregs
           of
           the
           golden
           Cup
           of
           that
           Romish
           Whore
           :
           For
           now
           Canterburie
           and
           his
           followers
           ,
           are
           not
           ashamed
           to
           proclaime
           in
           print
           their
           affection
           to
           popery
           both
           in
           grosse
           and
           retail
           .
           Let
           no
           man
           in
           this
           cast
           up
           to
           me
           any
           slander
           till
           hee
           have
           heard
           and
           considered
           the
           probation
           of
           my
           alleageance
           .
        
         
         
           
           Popery
           is
           a
           body
           of
           parts
           ,
           if
           not
           innumerable
           ,
           
           yet
           exceeding
           many
           .
           Their
           is
           scarce
           any
           member
           great
           or
           smal
           in
           this
           monster
           ,
           wherto
           the
           faction
           hath
           not
           kythed
           too
           passionate
           a
           love
           .
           But
           for
           shortnesse
           ,
           I
           will
           shew
           first
           their
           affection
           to
           the
           whole
           masse
           of
           Popish
           errours
           ,
           their
           respect
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Pope
           the
           head
           thereof
           ,
           than
           in
           particular
           to
           the
           most
           principall
           and
           abominable
           parts
           of
           that
           Chaos
           .
           As
           for
           the
           whole
           of
           that
           confused
           lumpe
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           winne
           the
           more
           easily
           to
           the
           embracement
           of
           it
           ,
           they
           cast
           downe
           in
           the
           entry
           the
           chiefe
           wall
           ,
           they
           remove
           the
           mayne
           impediment
           ,
           whereby
           Protestants
           were
           ever
           keeped
           there
           from
           .
           What
           ever
           wee
           speake
           of
           some
           very
           few
           private
           men
           ,
           yet
           all
           Protestant
           Churches
           without
           exception
           made
           ever
           the
           Popes
           Antichristianisme
           ,
           their
           chiefe
           bulwarke
           to
           keepe
           all
           their
           people
           from
           looking
           backe
           towards
           that
           Babylonish
           Whore.
           No
           Church
           did
           make
           greater
           state
           of
           that
           Fort
           than
           the
           English
           ,
           and
           no
           man
           in
           that
           Church
           more
           than
           King
           Charles
           blessed
           Father
           .
           Hee
           was
           not
           content
           himselfe
           to
           believe
           and
           avow
           the
           Pope
           that
           great
           Antichrist
           ,
           but
           also
           with
           Arguments
           invincible
           drawn
           mainly
           from
           some
           passages
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           cleared
           now
           as
           light
           ,
           by
           the
           Commentary
           of
           the
           Popes
           practices
           ,
           to
           demonstrate
           to
           all
           Neighbour
           Princes
           and
           States
           of
           Christendome
           in
           a
           monitory
           Treatise
           this
           beliefe
           ,
           for
           that
           expresse
           end
           ,
           that
           from
           this
           truth
           cleerly
           proved
           ,
           they
           might
           not
           only
           see
           the
           necessity
           hee
           had
           to
           keepe
           himselfe
           and
           his
           Subjects
           for
           evermore
           from
           returning
           to
           Rome
           ,
           but
           
           they
           also
           by
           this
           one
           argument
           might
           be
           forced
           to
           cast
           off
           the
           yoke
           of
           the
           Pope
           ,
           when
           they
           saw
           him
           clothed
           with
           the
           garments
           of
           Antichrist
           .
           It
           was
           the
           the
           continuall
           song
           of
           all
           the
           Bishops
           and
           Clergie
           in
           England
           ,
           till
           Doctor
           Lad
           got
           absolute
           credit
           wjth
           the
           Duke
           of
           Buckingham
           ,
           that
           the
           Popes
           Antichristianisme
           was
           an
           engine
           of
           such
           efficacie
           as
           was
           able
           of
           it selfe
           alone
           ,
           if
           well
           manadged
           to
           overthrow
           the
           wals
           of
           Rome
           .
           For
           this
           I
           give
           but
           two
           witnesses
           ,
           two
           late
           English
           Bishops
           both
           of
           them
           deponing
           before
           all
           England
           to
           King
           James
           and
           hee
           accepting
           their
           testimony
           ,
           a
           Abbots
           of
           Salisbury
           in
           his
           dedicatory
           Epistle
           to
           King
           James
           before
           his
           treatise
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           and
           Downame
           of
           Derry
           in
           the
           first
           paragraph
           b
           of
           his
           booke
           dedicated
           also
           to
           K.
           James
           upon
           that
           same
           subject
           .
           Notwithstanding
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterburyi
           For
           making
           the
           way
           to
           Rome
           more
           smooth
           ,
           spareth
           not
           to
           cause
           raze
           downe
           to
           the
           earth
           this
           fort
           .
           Montague
           and
           White
           his
           non-such
           Divines
           ,
           as
           wee
           heard
           them
           stiled
           at
           his
           Graces
           direction
           by
           his
           
             Herauld
             Heylene
          
           ,
           will
           have
           the
           Kings
           unanswerable
           arguments
           proponed
           by
           him
           even
           to
           sorreine
           Princes
           ;
           not
           onely
           counted-weak
           but
           〈◊〉
           frensies
           .
           This
           word
           doth
           feately
           cite
           from
           their
           Appeale
           .
           c
           
             Christopher
             Dow
          
           is
           licentiat
           by
           Canterbury
           ,
           
           to
           affirme
           that
           howsoever
           our
           Divines
           at
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Reformation
           in
           the
           heat
           of
           dispute
           did
           upbraid
           the
           Pope
           with
           antichristianisme
           ,
           yet
           now
           that
           heat
           being
           cooled
           ,
           the
           matter
           to
           men
           in
           their
           sober
           bloud
           appeares
           doubtfull
           ,
           d
           his
           Graces
           Herauld
           appointed
           to
           speake
           for
           his
           Lord
           by
           the
           State
           ,
           doth
           correct
           this
           simple
           dow
           and
           puts
           the
           matter
           out
           of
           all
           doubt
           ,
           assuring
           by
           good
           scripturall
           proofe
           ,
           by
           a
           text
           miserably
           abused
           ,
           that
           the
           pope
           is
           not
           ,
           was
           not
           ,
           and
           cannot
           bee
           Antichrist
           .
           e
           And
           that
           in
           this
           matrer
           there
           may
           hereafter
           betwixe
           rhe
           Canterburians
           and
           Rome
           remaine
           no
           shadow
           of
           Controversie
           ,
           their
           man
           Shelfoord
           ,
           comes
           home
           to
           Bellarmine
           ,
           well
           nere
           in
           omnibus
           :
           making
           Antichrist
           one
           single
           man
           ;
           a
           Jew
           preaching
           formall
           blasphemies
           against
           Christs
           natures
           and
           person
           thre
           yeeres
           and
           an
           halfe
           ,
           killing
           by
           his
           hands
           Enoch
           and
           Elias
           ,
           and
           least
           any
           footstep
           of
           this
           belief
           should
           ever
           appeare
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           
             England
             ;
             Canterbury
          
           confesseth
           that
           the
           place
           of
           the
           publick
           liturgie
           wherein
           it
           was
           imported
           ,
           was
           changed
           by
           his
           own
           hand
           .
           g
        
         
         
           This
           scarre-crow
           being
           set
           aside
           ,
           at
           once
           the
           
           Pope
           ,
           the
           Cardinals
           and
           all
           their
           Religion
           began
           to
           looke
           with
           a
           new
           face
           .
           Anent
           the
           Pope
           they
           tell
           us
           first
           ,
           h
           that
           the
           reformers
           did
           him
           pittiful
           wrong
           in
           spoiling
           him
           ,
           not
           onely
           of
           those
           things
           he
           had
           usurped
           ,
           but
           of
           many
           priviledges
           which
           were
           his
           owne
           by
           due
           right
           ,
           and
           should
           have
           beene
           left
           to
           him
           untouched
           .
           Againe
           they
           will
           have
           us
           to
           believe
           ,
           that
           the
           See
           of
           Rome
           was
           truely
           Peters
           Apostolick
           Chaire
           ,
           that
           Peter
           was
           truely
           a
           Prince
           among
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           that
           the
           Pope
           is
           i
           Peters
           onely
           successour
           ,
           that
           within
           the
           bounds
           of
           his
           owne
           Patriarchat
           hee
           is
           a
           Prince
           ,
           hee
           is
           a
           Monarch
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           that
           order
           and
           unity
           doe
           necessarily
           require
           one
           Bishop
           to
           have
           the
           inspection
           and
           superioritie
           ouer
           all
           Bishops
           ,
           and
           that
           this
           prerogative
           by
           good
           Ecclesiasticall
           right
           is
           due
           to
           the
           Pope
           .
           k
           Fourthly
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           authoritie
           which
           the
           English
           Bishops
           have
           this
           day
           ,
           specially
           his
           Grace
           
           of
           Canterbury
           ,
           is
           derived
           to
           them
           from
           the
           Pope
           and
           Peters
           Chaire
           ,
           That
           if
           this
           derivation
           could
           not
           be
           clearlie
           demonstrate
           ,
           the
           Clergie
           of
           England
           might
           justly
           refuse
           all
           obedience
           to
           their
           Bishops
           jurisdiction
           .
           l
           Fifthly
           ,
           that
           divers
           of
           the
           late
           Popes
           have
           beene
           very
           good
           men
           ,
           yea
           ,
           among
           the
           best
           of
           men
           ,
           that
           those
           of
           them
           who
           have
           beene
           verie
           monsters
           of
           men
           ,
           yet
           for
           that
           veneration
           which
           their
           high
           and
           eminent
           place
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           doth
           require
           all
           the
           stiles
           of
           Honour
           in
           Justice
           is
           due
           to
           them
           ,
           even
           holinesse
           it selfe
           
             in
             abstracto
          
           ,
           that
           to
           refuse
           them
           this
           ,
           or
           their
           other
           titles
           is
           but
           brain-sick
           puritanisme
           .
           m
        
         
         
           Sixthly
           ,
           That
           the
           dignity
           of
           the
           Episcopall
           office
           specially
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           his
           eminencie
           was
           as
           far
           above
           the
           dignitie
           of
           the
           Emperors
           and
           Kings
           ,
           as
           the
           soule
           is
           above
           the
           body
           ,
           or
           God
           above
           the
           creature
           ,
           yea
           ,
           that
           the
           stile
           of
           GOD
           was
           but
           the
           Popes
           due
           :
           n
           Seventhly
           ,
           that
           Emperours
           and
           Kings
           dld
           but
           their
           duety
           in
           giving
           reverence
           ;
           yea
           ,
           adoration
           unto
           the
           Pope
           with
           great
           summes
           of
           money
           by
           way
           of
           tribute
           :
           o
           Eighthly
           ,
           that
           the
           temporall
           Principalities
           which
           the
           Pope
           enjoyeth
           this
           Day
           in
           Italie
           ,
           or
           elsewhere
           are
           buthis
           just
           possessions
           ,
           which
           none
           ought
           to
           envy
           him
           :
           p
           Ninthly
           ,
           that
           the
           restitution
           of
           the
           Popes
           ancient
           authority
           in
           England
           ,
           and
           yeelding
           unto
           him
           all
           the
           power
           that
           this
           day
           he
           hath
           in
           Spaine
           or
           France
           ,
           would
           bee
           many
           wayes
           advantageous
           ,
           and
           in
           nothing
           prejudiciall
           to
           the
           
           King
           :
           q
           10
           The
           old
           constitution
           of
           the
           Emperour
           ,
           whereby
           all
           the
           westerne
           clergie
           is
           so
           farre
           subjected
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           that
           without
           him
           they
           are
           disabled
           to
           make
           any
           Ecclesiasticall
           law
           ,
           and
           obliged
           to
           receive
           for
           lawes
           what
           hee
           doth
           enjoyne
           ,
           was
           very
           reasonable
           :
           yea
           ,
           if
           the
           King
           would
           be
           pleased
           to
           command
           all
           the
           Church
           men
           in
           his
           dominions
           to
           be
           that
           far
           subject
           to
           the
           Pope
           ,
           they
           would
           be
           unreasonable
           to
           refuse
           present
           obedience
           :
           r
           Onely
           by
           all
           meanes
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterburies
           prerogative
           behoved
           to
           bee
           secured
           ,
           his
           ancient
           right
           to
           the
           patriarchat
           of
           the
           whole
           Isle
           of
           Britaine
           behoved
           to
           be
           made
           cleare
           ,
           that
           to
           his
           rod
           the
           whole
           clergie
           of
           the
           Isle
           might
           submit
           their
           shoulders
           ,
           as
           to
           their
           spirituall
           head
           and
           Monarch
           ,
           from
           whom
           to
           Rome
           there
           could
           bee
           no
           appeale
           ,
           s
           in
           any
           cause
           which
           concerned
           onely
           the
           Churches
           of
           the
           Kings
           dominions
           ;
           for
           in
           causes
           more
           universall
           of
           the
           whole
           Catholicke
           Church
           ,
           willingly
           they
           are
           contented
           that
           the
           Patriarch
           of
           Britaine
           and
           all
           others
           should
           submit
           to
           their
           grand
           
           Apostollcke
           father
           of
           Rome
           .
           t
           Every
           one
           of
           these
           pontificall
           positions
           since
           the
           midst
           of
           Henry
           the
           eights
           raigne
           ,
           would
           have
           beene
           counted
           in
           England
           great
           paradoxes
           ,
           yet
           now
           all
           of
           them
           are
           avowed
           by
           Canterburie
           himselfe
           ,
           in
           that
           very
           booke
           which
           the
           last
           〈◊〉
           at
           the
           Kings
           direction
           hee
           set
           〈◊〉
           ,
           for
           to
           satisfie
           the
           world
           anent
           their
           suspition
           of
           his
           Popery
           ,
           or
           else
           by
           D.
           Montagu
           in
           his
           bookes
           yet
           unrepealed
           ,
           and
           cleanged
           of
           all
           suspition
           of
           Poperie
           by
           M.
           Dow
           ,
           under
           the
           seale
           of
           his
           Graces
           licensing
           servant
           .
        
         
           This
           much
           for
           the
           Pope
           .
           About
           the
           Cardinalls
           they
           tell
           us
           that
           their
           office
           is
           an
           high
           and
           eminent
           
           dignity
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ;
           for
           the
           which
           their
           persons
           are
           to
           be
           handled
           with
           great
           reverence
           and
           honour
           ,
           w
           that
           their
           office
           is
           a
           〈◊〉
           due
           to
           high
           graces
           and
           〈◊〉
           ,
           that
           some
           of
           them
           though
           the
           greatest
           enemies
           that
           ever
           the
           reformed
           Churches
           have
           felt
           ,
           such
           as
           〈◊〉
           that
           spent
           all
           his
           time
           in
           opposing
           the
           truth
           and
           advancing
           Antichristianisme
           ,
           and
           Barromaeus
           x
           a
           bloudy
           persecutor
           of
           our
           religion
           and
           one
           of
           the
           fathers
           of
           Trent
           ,
           that
           even
           such
           men
           are
           so
           full
           of
           grace
           and
           piety
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           a
           great
           fault
           in
           any
           Protestant
           to
           break
           so
           much
           as
           a
           jest
           on
           their
           rid
           hattes
           .
        
         
           Where
           the
           head
           and
           shoulders
           are
           so
           much
           
           affected
           it
           is
           hard
           to
           restraine
           charity
           from
           the
           
           〈◊〉
           of
           the
           body
           .
           These
           good
           men
           vent
           their
           passion
           no
           lesse
           towards
           the
           body
           of
           the
           present
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           then
           towards
           the
           Pope
           and
           the
           Cardinails
           .
           For
           first
           his
           grace
           avowes
           over
           and
           over
           againe
           that
           the
           Papists
           and
           we
           are
           of
           one
           and
           the
           same
           religion
           ,
           that
           to
           speake
           otherwaies
           ,
           as
           the
           Liturgie
           of
           England
           did
           all
           King
           Iames
           dayes
           ,
           were
           a
           matter
           of
           very
           dangerous
           consequent
           ,
           and
           therefore
           he
           consesseth
           his
           helping
           that
           part
           of
           the
           liturgie
           which
           puts
           a
           note
           of
           infamy
           upon
           the
           Popish
           religion
           ,
           least
           that
           note
           should
           fall
           upon
           our
           owne
           religion
           which
           with
           the
           Popish
           is
           but
           all
           one
           .
           y
           2.
           
           They
           will
           have
           us
           to
           understand
           though
           wee
           and
           the
           Papists
           differ
           in
           some
           things
           ,
           yet
           that
           this
           very
           day
           there
           is
           no
           schisme
           betwixt
           Papists
           and
           Protestants
           ,
           that
           Protestants
           keepe
           union
           and
           communion
           with
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           in
           all
           things
           required
           for
           the
           essence
           of
           a
           true
           Church
           and
           necessary
           for
           salvation
           ,
           that
           though
           they
           communicate
           not
           with
           some
           of
           her
           doctrines
           and
           practices
           ,
           yet
           this
           marres
           not
           the
           true
           union
           and
           communion
           of
           the
           two
           Churches
           both
           in
           faith
           and
           〈◊〉
           .
           That
           these
           who
           passe
           harder
           censures
           upon
           Rome
           are
           but
           zelots
           in
           whom
           too
           much
           zeale
           hath
           burnt
           up
           all
           wisedome
           and
           charity
           .
           z
           3.
           
           That
           the
           points
           wherein
           the
           two
           Churches
           doe
           differ
           are
           such
           as
           prejudge
           not
           the
           
           Salvation
           of
           either
           party
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           not
           foundamentall
           ,
           and
           albeit
           they
           were
           so
           :
           yet
           the
           truths
           that
           the
           Papists
           doe
           maintaine
           are
           of
           force
           to
           hinder
           all
           the
           evill
           that
           can
           come
           from
           their
           errours
           .
           &
           4.
           
           That
           the
           Popish
           errours
           ,
           let
           bee
           to
           bee
           fundamentall
           ,
           are
           of
           so
           small
           importance
           as
           they
           doe
           not
           prejudge
           either
           faith
           ,
           hope
           ,
           or
           charity
           ,
           let
           be
           salvation
           .
        
         
         
           a
           Fistly
           ,
           That
           a
           generall
           repentance
           for
           all
           unknowne
           sinnes
           is
           sufficient
           to
           secure
           the
           salvation
           not
           only
           of
           these
           who
           have
           lived
           and
           died
           in
           the
           Popish
           tenets
           before
           the
           Councell
           of
           Trent
           ,
           but
           even
           to
           this
           day
           not
           onely
           their
           people
           ,
           but
           their
           most
           learned
           Clergie
           ,
           Popes
           ,
           Cardinalls
           ,
           Jesuits
           ,
           living
           and
           dying
           in
           their
           bitter
           oppositions
           and
           persecutions
           of
           Protestants
           ,
           are
           in
           no
           hazard
           of
           damnation
           ,
           though
           they
           never
           come
           to
           any
           particular
           acknowledgement
           of
           their
           sinfull
           opinions
           or
           practises
           following
           thereupon
           .
           b
           Sixtly
           ,
           They
           teach
           us
           that
           Papists
           may
           not
           in
           reason
           
           bee
           stiled
           either
           idolaters
           ,
           or
           hereticks
           ,
           or
           shismaticks
           .
           His
           grace
           in
           that
           great
           large
           folio
           set
           our
           the
           last
           yeare
           ,
           to
           declare
           to
           the
           world
           the
           farthest
           that
           his
           minde
           could
           bee
           drawen
           for
           to
           oppose
           Popery
           ,
           is
           not
           pleased
           to
           my
           memory
           ,
           in
           his
           most
           vehement
           oppositions
           to
           lay
           to
           then
           charge
           any
           of
           these
           three
           crimes
           ,
           neither
           doe
           I
           remember
           in
           all
           the
           search
           my
           poore
           lecture
           hath
           made
           ,
           that
           any
           of
           his
           favourits
           in
           their
           writtes
           these
           twelve
           yeares
           bygone
           hath
           layed
           to
           the
           charge
           of
           Rome
           in
           
           earnest
           ,
           either
           idolatry
           heresie
           or
           shisme
           ,
           but
           by
           the
           contrary
           hath
           absolved
           them
           clearly
           in
           formall
           tearmes
           all
           those
           three
           crimes
           .
           c
           Of
           idolatry
           because
           they
           teach
           not
           the
           giving
           of
           〈◊〉
           to
           any
           image
           or
           any
           creature
           ,
           d
           Of
           heresie
           ,
           because
           their
           errours
           taketh
           no
           part
           of
           the
           foundation
           away
           ,
           but
           are
           onely
           excesses
           and
           additions
           consisting
           with
           all
           〈◊〉
           trueth
           .
           e
           Of
           shisme
           ,
           because
           they
           goe
           on
           in
           the
           practice
           of
           their
           forbeares
           without
           introducing
           
           any
           late
           novations
           .
           7.
           
           They
           declare
           it
           were
           very
           good
           wee
           had
           present
           peace
           with
           Rome
           as
           shee
           stands
           ,
           her
           errors
           being
           but
           in
           opinions
           which
           charity
           ought
           to
           tolerate
           ,
           that
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           would
           gladly
           embrace
           this
           peace
           ,
           that
           Cassander
           and
           the
           like
           who
           further
           this
           reconciliation
           are
           the
           men
           of
           the
           world
           most
           worthy
           of
           praise
           ,
           that
           the
           Jesuits
           and
           Calvinists
           both
           puritanes
           who
           hinder
           this
           peace
           are
           the
           most
           flagitious
           and
           intollerable
           f
           persons
           of
           this
           age
           .
           All
           this
           and
           much
           more
           of
           such
           stuffe
           you
           may
           see
           printed
           not
           onely
           with
           allowance
           but
           with
           applause
           by
           the
           chiefe
           of
           that
           faction
           his
           Grace
           himselfe
           ,
           Montagow
           the
           first
           of
           the
           three
           none-suches
           ,
           Pottar
           in
           that
           his
           much
           beloved
           piece
           put
           out
           as
           hee
           saith
           at
           the
           command
           of
           authoritie
           .
           
           g
           Shelfoord
           in
           his
           pious
           sermons
           printed
           by
           the
           university
           of
           Cambridge
           Presse
           at
           the
           direction
           of
           the
           Vice-chancellour
           ,
           D.
           Beel
           dedicated
           to
           the
           Lord
           Keeper
           of
           England
           ,
           adorned
           with
           many
           triumphing
           Epigrammes
           both
           Latine
           and
           English
           by
           a
           number
           of
           the
           Fellows
           ,
           and
           although
           called
           in
           ,
           yet
           no
           censure
           to
           this
           day
           for
           all
           the
           eomplaints
           against
           it
           ,
           to
           our
           hearing
           hath
           beene
           put
           either
           on
           the
           Author
           or
           Printer
           ,
           or
           Licencer
           ,
           or
           Adorners
           or
           any
           Doctrine
           contained
           therein
           ,
           but
           the
           worst
           that
           Burton
           could
           pick
           out
           of
           it
           ,
           is
           all
           defended
           by
           Dow
           and
           Heylen
           ,
           at
           his
           Graces
           speciall
           direction
           ,
           and
           subscribed
           licence
           ,
           as
           we
           shall
           heare
           anon
           .
        
         
           I
           hope
           now
           that
           all
           true
           Protestants
           pondering
           the
           passages
           I
           have
           brought
           ,
           besides
           many
           moe
           ,
           wherewith
           themselves
           from
           their
           owne
           readings
           are
           acquainted
           ,
           will
           not
           onely
           absolve
           my
           alledgeances
           of
           rashnesse
           and
           slander
           ,
           but
           also
           wonder
           at
           the
           incredible
           boldnesse
           of
           those
           men
           ,
           who
           in
           these
           times
           wherein
           the
           Prince
           and
           State
           are
           by
           so
           many
           and
           deep
           tyes
           obliged
           ,
           and
           according
           to
           their
           obligations
           hath
           so
           oft
           declared
           themselves
           passionately
           zealous
           for
           the
           maintainance
           of
           Protestant
           orthodoxie
           ,
           that
           yet
           they
           should
           bee
           so
           peart
           as
           to
           print
           in
           the
           
           royall
           city
           ,
           and
           that
           after
           the
           long
           and
           great
           grumblings
           of
           the
           people
           and
           formal
           challenges
           of
           divers
           of
           the
           learned
           to
           reprint
           their
           clear
           affection
           to
           the
           Pope
           and
           Cardinalls
           ,
           and
           the
           whole
           Romish
           religion
           ,
           albeit
           truely
           this
           their
           ventorious
           boldnesse
           seemes
           not
           more
           marveilous
           then
           their
           ingenuity
           commendable
           :
           For
           they
           have
           said
           nothing
           for
           the
           Pope
           ,
           or
           Rome
           ,
           but
           that
           which
           conscience
           would
           pouse
           any
           man
           upon
           all
           hazards
           to
           avow
           ,
           who
           was
           so
           perswaded
           in
           the
           particular
           heeds
           of
           controversies
           betwixt
           Papists
           and
           Protestants
           ,
           as
           they
           confesse
           themselves
           to
           be
           ;
           to
           the
           end
           therefore
           that
           we
           may
           see
           the
           former
           strange
           enough
           passages
           not
           to
           have
           dropped
           from
           their
           pennes
           by
           any
           inadvertance
           ,
           but
           upon
           plaine
           designe
           and
           deliberate
           purpose
           ,
           we
           will
           set
           downe
           in
           the
           next
           roome
           the
           affection
           they
           professe
           to
           the
           speciall
           heads
           of
           Popery
           ,
           very
           consonant
           to
           that
           which
           they
           have
           already
           said
           of
           that
           which
           wee
           count
           the
           whole
           lumpe
           and
           universall
           masse
           〈◊〉
           Antichristianisme
           .
           The
           speciall
           heads
           of
           Popery
           are
           moe
           then
           I
           have
           leasure
           to
           relate
           ,
           or
           you
           can
           have
           patience
           to
           heare
           enumerate
           .
           Take
           notice
           therefore
           but
           of
           some
           prime
           articles
           which
           Protestants
           use
           most
           to
           detest
           in
           Papists
           ,
           foure
           by
           name
           ;
           their
           idolatries
           ,
           their
           heresies
           ,
           their
           superstitions
           ,
           their
           abomination
           of
           desolation
           the
           masse
           .
           If
           from
           their
           owne
           mouths
           I
           make
           cleare
           that
           in
           these
           foure
           they
           joyne
           with
           Rome
           against
           us
           ,
           it
           is
           like
           none
           hereafter
           shall
           wonder
           of
           any
           thing
           that
           yet
           they
           have
           done
           or
           said
           for
           the
           advancement
           of
           the
           popish
           party
           ,
           and
           the
           subverting
           of
           the
           Protestant
           Churches
           either
           at
           
           home
           ,
           or
           over
           sea
           ,
           but
           rather
           embrace
           their
           sobriety
           and
           moderation
           ,
           who
           being
           minded
           ,
           as
           they
           professe
           ,
           doe
           not
           breake
           out
           in
           many
           moe
           both
           words
           and
           deeds
           ,
           for
           the
           destroying
           of
           the
           Protestant
           schisme
           ,
           and
           bringing
           all
           backe
           to
           the
           Catholick
           Apostolick
           mother
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           unto
           the
           feet
           of
           his
           Holinesse
           the
           vicar
           of
           Christ
           ,
           the
           successor
           of
           Peter
           ,
           under
           whose
           obedience
           our
           holy
           and
           blessed
           antecestors
           did
           live
           and
           die
           .
        
      
       
         
           CHAP.
           IIII.
           The
           Canterburians
           joine
           with
           
             Rome
             in
             her
             grossest
             idolatries
          
           .
        
         
           THE
           acts
           of
           Romes
           Idolarry
           be
           many
           and
           various
           :
           None
           more
           open
           to
           the
           eie
           of
           beholders
           then
           these
           five
           ,
           their
           adorations
           of
           altars
           ,
           
           images
           ,
           relicts
           ,
           sacramentall
           bread
           ,
           and
           Saints
           departed
           :
           For
           the
           first
           ,
           their
           worshipping
           of
           the
           stocke
           or
           stone
           of
           the
           altar
           ;
           if
           wee
           would
           impute
           it
           unto
           the
           Canterburians
           ,
           they
           will
           deny
           it
           alluterly
           ,
           and
           avow
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           well
           worship
           God
           before
           the
           altar
           ,
           but
           to
           worship
           the
           altar
           it selfe
           ,
           to
           give
           to
           it
           that
           worship
           which
           is
           done
           before
           it
           ,
           to
           give
           to
           it
           any
           religious
           worship
           any
           〈◊〉
           ,
           any
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           any
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           any
           adoration
           ,
           they
           dodetest
           it
           ,
           as
           palpable
           idolatry
           .
           So
           his
           Grace
           ,
           so
           Pocklingtoune
           ,
           so
           Heylene
           ,
           so
           Lawrence
           ,
           so
           〈◊〉
           do
           oft
           professe
           :
           But
           that
           you
           may
           see
           how
           little
           faith
           
           those
           mens
           prorestations
           doe
           deserve
           ,
           and
           that
           all
           may
           know
           either
           their
           desperate
           equivocating
           ,
           or
           else
           their
           spirit
           of
           giddinesse
           ,
           which
           makes
           them
           say
           and
           unsay
           the
           same
           things
           in
           the
           same
           pages
           ;
           consider
           all
           of
           the
           five
           named
           authors
           ,
           for
           all
           their
           deniall
           ,
           printing
           with
           approbation
           and
           applause
           as
           much
           worshipping
           and
           adoration
           even
           of
           the
           altar
           ,
           as
           any
           Papists
           this
           day
           living
           will
           require
           .
        
         
           Begin
           with
           his
           Grace
           ,
           you
           shall
           finde
           him
           in
           his
           Star-chamber
           speech
           ,
           for
           all
           his
           deniall
           ,
           yet
           avowing
           within
           the
           bounds
           of
           two
           pages
           ,
           once
           ,
           twice
           ,
           thrice
           ,
           a
           the
           giving
           of
           worship
           to
           the
           altar
           ,
           and
           that
           such
           worship
           ,
           which
           is
           grounded
           upon
           that
           place
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           
             Venite
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           which
           we
           suppose
           none
           will
           deny
           to
           be
           divine
           adoration
           :
           But
           we
           must
           understand
           ,
           that
           the
           King
           ,
           and
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           here
           ,
           as
           in
           all
           things
           must
           bear
           the
           blame
           of
           his
           graces
           faults
           ,
           that
           the
           King
           and
           his
           most
           noble
           Knights
           of
           the
           Garter
           must
           bee
           patrons
           to
           this
           practice
           ,
           and
           the
           English
           Liturgie
           the
           enjoiner
           of
           it
           :
           But
           his
           Grace
           and
           those
           that
           have
           the
           government
           of
           the
           Church
           must
           bee
           praised
           for
           their
           moderation
           ,
           in
           not
           urging
           this
           practice
           upon
           all
           their
           brethren
           .
           b
           D.
           Pocklingtoune
           with
           his
           Graces
           licence
           ,
           〈◊〉
           the
           bending
           of
           the
           body
           and
           the
           prostration
           even
           to
           it
           .
           
           〈◊〉
           comes
           up
           at
           last
           to
           his
           Masters
           backe
           ,
           and
           tels
           us
           that
           the
           adoration
           before
           the
           altar
           ,
           is
           the
           honour
           of
           the
           altar
           it selfe
           ,
           and
           that
           falling
           downe
           and
           kissing
           of
           the
           altar
           ;
           for
           the
           honouring
           of
           the
           altar
           was
           a
           very
           commendable
           practice
           .
           c
           Laurence
           as
           he
           prints
           with
           Canterburies
           licence
           ,
           but
           undoubtedly
           by
           an
           impudent
           lie
           ,
           at
           the
           Kings
           speciall
           commandement
           ,
           doth
           maintaine
           not
           onely
           veneration
           ,
           but
           religious
           worshipping
           adoration
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           and
           all
           ,
           d
           not
           only
           by
           a
           relative
           and
           transient
           worship
           as
           he
           speakes
           ,
           e
           but
           also
           ,
           which
           is
           a
           degree
           of
           madnesse
           ,
           beyond
           any
           thing
           that
           ever
           I
           have
           marked
           in
           any
           〈◊〉
           ,
           he
           will
           have
           a
           Divine
           adoration
           given
           to
           the
           altar
           it selfe
           without
           any
           relation
           ,
           or
           mentall
           abstraction
           ;
           because
           of
           the
           union
           of
           Christs
           body
           with
           it
           ,
           which
           sits
           there
           as
           in
           a
           chaire
           of
           Estate
           even
           as
           without
           scruple
           or
           relations
           ,
           or
           mentall
           abstractions
           wee
           give
           to
           the
           humane
           nature
           of
           Christ
           ,
           for
           that
           personall
           union
           of
           the
           Godhead
           with
           it
           ,
           Divine
           adoration
           whereof
           in
           it selfe
           it
           is
           not
           capable
           .
           f
        
         
         
           For
           the
           adoration
           of
           the
           communion
           elements
           ,
           
           which
           Protestants
           count
           an
           Idolatrie
           so
           horrible
           ,
           that
           for
           it
           alone
           they
           would
           not
           faile
           to
           separate
           from
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           though
           she
           had
           no
           other
           fault
           ,
           g
           their
           minde
           is
           plaine
           by
           the
           practice
           which
           his
           Grace
           maketh
           〈◊〉
           in
           his
           State
           answer
           to
           defend
           ,
           we
           doe
           passe
           their
           adoration
           in
           the
           act
           of
           communicating
           ,
           〈◊〉
           wee
           thinke
           it
           strange
           to
           see
           men
           who
           once
           were
           counted
           moderate
           and
           wise
           ,
           by
           the
           touch
           of
           his
           Graces
           panton
           ,
           to
           become
           so
           insolent
           ,
           as
           to
           hisse
           and
           hout
           at
           the
           doctrine
           and
           practice
           of
           the
           best
           reformed
           Churches
           ,
           as
           vile
           and
           monstruous
           ,
           h
           who
           in
           the
           act
           of
           receiving
           hath
           thought
           meet
           to
           sit
           or
           stand
           ,
           rather
           than
           to
           kneele
           .
           We
           speake
           onely
           of
           these
           their
           new
           adorations
           ,
           which
           against
           the
           constant
           practice
           of
           the
           English
           Church
           they
           are
           now
           begun
           to
           use
           ,
           without
           the
           act
           of
           receiving
           a
           number
           of
           low
           cringes
           towards
           these
           elements
           ,
           when
           they
           take
           the
           paten
           in
           their
           hand
           ,
           a
           low
           inclinabo
           before
           the
           bread
           ,
           when
           they
           set
           it
           downe
           ,
           another
           ;
           when
           they
           take
           up
           the
           chalice
           ,
           a
           third
           ;
           when
           they
           setit
           downe
           a
           fourth
           .
           i
           That
           these
           avowed
           adorations
           before
           the
           elements
           ,
           without
           the
           act
           of
           receiving
           ,
           
           are
           directed
           by
           them
           ,
           not
           only
           as
           they
           say
           to
           the
           person
           of
           Christ
           ,
           whom
           they
           make
           there
           essentially
           present
           ,
           but
           also
           unto
           the
           elements
           themselves
           ;
           we
           prove
           it
           by
           no
           other
           reason
           but
           their
           former
           confession
           .
           Their
           adoration
           before
           the
           altar
           is
           done
           as
           they
           confesse
           unto
           the
           altar
           ,
           much
           more
           their
           adoration
           before
           the
           elements
           ,
           without
           the
           act
           of
           receiving
           must
           bee
           unto
           the
           elements
           :
           For
           I
           hope
           they
           will
           bee
           loath
           to
           affirme
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           in
           the
           altar
           any
           worthinesse
           or
           aptitude
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           cause
           imaginable
           ,
           which
           can
           make
           it
           capable
           of
           adoration
           ,
           but
           the
           same
           causes
           are
           in
           the
           elements
           in
           a
           farre
           higher
           degree
           :
           The
           relation
           to
           Christs
           Body
           and
           Person
           ,
           which
           they
           make
           the
           only
           foundation
           of
           those
           worships
           being
           much
           more
           true
           ,
           more
           neare
           ,
           more
           cleare
           in
           the
           elements
           ,
           then
           in
           the
           altar
           ,
           howsoever
           the
           Popish
           prostrations
           ,
           and
           adorations
           ,
           before
           the
           hostie
           ,
           which
           to
           all
           Protestants
           are
           so
           abominable
           idolatries
           ,
           are
           absolved
           by
           these
           men
           ;
           not
           onely
           by
           the
           clearing
           of
           Papists
           of
           all
           idolatry
           every
           where
           ,
           but
           particularly
           by
           their
           impatience
           ,
           to
           have
           the
           adoration
           of
           the
           elements
           to
           be
           called
           Popish
           .
           For
           in
           our
           book
           of
           Canons
           when
           in
           the
           copie
           sent
           up
           to
           the
           King
           ,
           the
           adoration
           of
           the
           bread
           ,
           Chap.
           6.
           was
           styled
           by
           our
           Bishops
           the
           Popish
           adoration
           ,
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterburie
           on
           the
           margine
           with
           his
           owne
           hand
           directeth
           to
           scrape
           out
           the
           word
           Popish
           ,
           as
           we
           can
           shew
           in
           the
           authentick
           manuscript
           of
           that
           booke
           now
           in
           our
           hands
           .
        
         
           Concerning
           images
           ,
           behold
           their
           assertions
           ,
           first
           
           they
           tell
           us
           that
           the
           pullers
           downe
           of
           images
           ,
           out
           of
           their
           Churches
           ,
           were
           but
           lowns
           and
           knaves
           ,
           pretending
           
           
           
           
           
           onely
           religion
           to
           their
           prophane
           covetousnesse
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           truly
           iconoclasticke
           and
           iconomachian
           hereticks
           .
           k
           2.
           
           That
           those
           who
           doe
           pull
           downe
           or
           breake
           ,
           or
           offereth
           any
           indignity
           to
           a
           crosse
           ,
           to
           a
           crucifix
           ,
           to
           a
           Saints
           image
           ,
           are
           but
           madfooles
           ,
           that
           those
           injures
           reflect
           upon
           Christ
           and
           the
           Saints
           ;
           and
           are
           revenged
           sundry
           times
           with
           plagues
           from
           heaven
           .
           l
           3.
           
           That
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           ,
           (
           they
           take
           that
           Church
           commonly
           by
           a
           hudge
           mistake
           ,
           for
           their
           owne
           prevalent
           faction
           therein
           )
           doth
           not
           onely
           keepe
           innumerable
           images
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           the
           Saints
           in
           the
           most
           eminent
           and
           conspicuous
           places
           of
           their
           Sanctuaries
           ,
           but
           also
           daily
           erect
           a
           number
           of
           new
           long
           and
           large
           ones
           ,
           very
           curiously
           dressed
           ,
           and
           that
           heerein
           they
           have
           reason
           to
           rejoice
           and
           glory
           ,
           above
           all
           other
           reformed
           Churches
           .
           m
           4.
           
           That
           these
           their
           manifold
           images
           they
           use
           not
           onely
           for
           ornament
           ,
           but
           also
           
           to
           bee
           bookes
           to
           the
           Laicks
           ,
           both
           for
           their
           instruction
           and
           kindling
           of
           their
           affections
           to
           piety
           ,
           zeale
           ,
           charity
           ,
           imitation
           of
           the
           Saints
           ;
           n
           5.
           
           That
           towards
           the
           Images
           of
           Christ
           and
           the
           Saints
           ,
           the
           hearts
           of
           the
           Godly
           ought
           to
           bee
           affected
           with
           a
           pious
           devotion
           ,
           with
           a
           religious
           reverence
           ,
           and
           that
           this
           reverence
           may
           very
           lawfully
           bee
           expressed
           ,
           with
           an
           outward
           religious
           adoration
           ;
           yea
           ,
           prostration
           before
           the
           Image
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           before
           the
           altar
           ,
           with
           the
           eies
           of
           the
           adorer
           fixed
           upon
           the
           Image
           ;
           o
           6.
           
           That
           the
           Popish
           distinction
           of
           duleia
           and
           latreia
           is
           good
           ,
           and
           well
           grounded
           ,
           that
           the
           onely
           abuse
           of
           Images
           is
           the
           worshipping
           of
           them
           with
           latreia
           ;
           that
           the
           Papists
           are
           free
           of
           this
           fault
           ,
           that
           all
           their
           practice
           here
           is
           but
           iconoduly
           ,
           not
           idolatrie
           ,
           that
           all
           our
           controversie
           with
           them
           about
           the
           worshipping
           of
           relicts
           ,
           and
           so
           much
           more
           of
           images
           ,
           (
           for
           to
           images
           ,
           they
           professe
           a
           farre
           lesse
           respect
           then
           to
           reliques
           )
           is
           but
           the
           toying
           of
           children
           ,
           the
           striving
           about
           shadowes
           ,
           that
           long
           agoe
           
           both
           sides
           ,
           are
           really
           agreed
           ,
           though
           some
           for
           their
           owne
           pride
           and
           greed
           delight
           to
           keep
           this
           contraversie
           about
           ambiguous
           words
           still
           upon
           foot
           .
           p
        
         
           Concerning
           reliques
           they
           teach
           first
           that
           the
           
           〈◊〉
           of
           them
           about
           in
           cloaths
           by
           devout
           people
           is
           tollerable
           .
           q
           Next
           that
           those
           bones
           or
           that
           dust
           of
           the
           deceased
           Saints
           ought
           justly
           to
           bee
           put
           in
           a
           casse
           of
           silke
           or
           of
           gold
           that
           they
           may
           bee
           well
           hung
           about
           our
           necke
           and
           oft
           kissed
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           bee
           layed
           up
           amongst
           our
           most
           pretious
           jewels
           .
           r
           3.
           
           That
           in
           those
           reliques
           there
           is
           〈◊〉
           found
           so
           much
           grace
           ,
           holinesse
           ,
           vertue
           ,
           that
           all
           who
           touches
           them
           are
           sanctified
           by
           that
           touch
           .
           s
           4.
           
           That
           to
           these
           relicts
           a
           great
           honour
           yea
           a
           relative
           
           worship
           is
           due
           albeit
           not
           a
           latria
           or
           divine
           adoration
           .
           t
           Fifthly
           ,
           That
           pilgramages
           to
           the
           places
           where
           those
           relicts
           stand
           are
           very
           expedient
           ,
           that
           Protestants
           doe
           reprove
           onely
           these
           pilgramages
           towards
           the
           Churches
           of
           the
           Saints
           which
           are
           made
           for
           greed
           or
           superstition
           ,
           that
           Papists
           doe
           disallow
           all
           such
           as
           well
           as
           we
           w
           6.
           
           That
           all
           the
           controversie
           which
           here
           remaines
           betwixt
           Papists
           and
           Protestants
           is
           about
           just
           nothing
           even
           about
           goates
           woll
           and
           the
           shadow
           of
           an
           Asse
           .
           x
        
         
           About
           the
           invocation
           of
           Saints
           whereof
           the
           learned
           of
           the
           Papists
           are
           so
           ashamed
           that
           they
           disavow
           their
           owne
           practice
           thereof
           y
           yet
           our
           men
           tell
           us
           first
           that
           the
           Saints
           in
           heaven
           are
           truely
           our
           mediators
           with
           God
           of
           intercession
           ,
           as
           Chtist
           is
           of
           redemption
           .
           z
           Againe
           ,
           that
           wee
           ought
           carefully
           to
           keepe
           the
           Saints
           festivalls
           ,
           to
           this
           end
           ,
           that
           wee
           may
           be
           partakers
           of
           their
           intercession
           .
           a
           3.
           
           That
           albeit
           for
           common
           their
           intercession
           bee
           universall
           ,
           yet
           that
           sundry
           times
           they
           descend
           to
           particulars
           :
           They
           remember
           the
           estates
           of
           their
           friends
           and
           acquaintance
           as
           they
           left
           at
           it
           their
           death
           ,
           they
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           are
           informed
           of
           many
           new
           particulars
           by
           the
           Angels
           which
           hath
           been
           upon
           earth
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           Saints
           which
           after
           their
           death
           hath
           newly
           come
           to
           the
           heaven
           ,
           and
           that
           according
           to
           their
           particular
           informations
           they
           frame
           their
           intercession
           .
           a
        
         
           4.
           
           o
           If
           we
           were
           certaine
           that
           the
           Saints
           in
           heaven
           knew
           our
           estate
           it
           were
           no
           fault
           at
           all
           but
           very
           expedient
           to
           make
           our
           prayers
           to
           them
           that
           they
           might
           interceed
           with
           Christ
           for
           us
           .
           And
           though
           we
           bee
           not
           certaine
           of
           their
           knowledge
           ,
           yet
           all
           the
           fault
           that
           is
           in
           our
           prayers
           to
           them
           is
           onely
           some
           idlenesse
           and
           curiosity
           but
           no
           impiety
           at
           all
           .
           b
           5.
           
           That
           none
           ought
           to
           reprove
           our
           prayers
           unto
           our
           Angel
           keeper
           .
           c
        
         
           The
           Saint
           in
           heaven
           which
           the
           Papists
           doe
           most
           idolize
           is
           our
           blessed
           Virgine
           to
           whom
           it
           is
           well
           knowne
           they
           give
           much
           more
           false
           worship
           ,
           then
           true
           to
           the
           whole
           Trinity
           ,
           concerning
           her
           the
           Canterburians
           affirme
           first
           ,
           that
           she
           is
           created
           in
           another
           way
           then
           any
           of
           the
           race
           of
           Adam
           ,
           that
           God
           did
           meditate
           fifty
           ages
           upon
           the
           worke
           of
           her
           perfect
           creation
           ,
           that
           she
           did
           live
           all
           her
           daies
           without
           mortall
           sin
           
           yea
           without
           all
           actuall
           sinne
           ,
           yea
           without
           all
           originall
           .
           d
           That
           she
           is
           now
           advanced
           above
           all
           the
           Angels
           to
           the
           highest
           created
           perfection
           that
           is
           possible
           to
           be
           daughter
           ,
           mother
           ,
           and
           spouse
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           that
           her
           very
           body
           is
           already
           translated
           to
           the
           heavens
           .
           e
           3.
           
           That
           God
           hath
           made
           her
           to
           bee
           true
           Lady
           and
           Empresse
           of
           the
           Catholike
           Church
           ,
           of
           all
           the
           earth
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           heaven
           ,
           and
           that
           all
           these
           honours
           shee
           hath
           obtained
           by
           her
           due
           deservings
           and
           merits
           .
           f
           4.
           
           That
           all
           the
           Angels
           and
           Saints
           in
           Heaven
           ,
           let
           bee
           men
           upon
           earth
           are
           obliged
           to
           adore
           her
           ,
           and
           bow
           their
           soules
           unto
           her
           .
           g
           5.
           
           That
           shee
           knoweth
           all
           thinges
           perfectly
           heere
           
           beneath
           upon
           the
           earth
           :
           For
           in
           the
           face
           of
           God
           in
           the
           glasse
           of
           the
           Trinity
           shee
           doth
           behold
           all
           creatures
           .
           h
           6.
           
           That
           it
           is
           but
           prophane
           puritans
           who
           refuse
           to
           say
           the
           
             Ave
             Maries
          
           and
           to
           follow
           the
           example
           of
           their
           pious
           predecessors
           who
           wont
           so
           to
           pray
           .
           i
           7.
           
           That
           the
           devotions
           of
           the
           present
           Monks
           ,
           Nunnes
           ,
           and
           Princes
           ,
           who
           have
           enrolled
           their
           names
           in
           the
           sodality
           of
           the
           Virgin
           Mary
           is
           worthy
           of
           imitation
           .
           k
           8.
           
           That
           the
           old
           pious
           ceremony
           of
           burning
           of
           wax
           candels
           in
           all
           the
           Churches
           of
           England
           through
           the
           whole
           cleare
           day
           of
           her
           purification
           ought
           to
           be
           renewed
           .
           l
           9.
           
           That
           the
           Christians
           obtained
           that
           famous
           victory
           over
           the
           Turkes
           in
           Lepanto
           by
           her
           intercession
           at
           their
           prayers
           with
           Christ
           her
           sonne
           .
           m
           All
           this
           his
           Grace
           hath
           permitted
           under
           his
           eye
           to
           bee
           printed
           at
           London
           without
           any
           censure
           ,
           and
           when
           
           this
           doctrine
           was
           challenged
           by
           Burton
           ,
           hee
           was
           rewarded
           with
           the
           losse
           of
           his
           eares
           and
           perpetuall
           prison
           .
           The
           booke
           which
           he
           inveighed
           against
           let
           bee
           to
           bee
           recalled
           ,
           is
           openly
           excused
           in
           Print
           at
           his
           Graces
           direction
           as
           containing
           no
           evill
           but
           only
           innocent
           retorications
           .
           n
           Yea
           M.
           Dow
           with
           his
           Graces
           licence
           pronounceth
           that
           booke
           to
           bee
           free
           of
           all
           Popery
           ,
           and
           that
           upon
           this
           reason
           ,
           because
           the
           author
           professeth
           his
           tracing
           the
           steps
           of
           Doctor
           Montagu
           whom
           all
           England
           must
           know
           to
           be
           above
           all
           suspition
           of
           Popery
           .
        
      
       
         
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             The
          
           Canterburians
           
             avow
             their
             embracing
          
           of
           the
           Popish
           heresies
           and
           grossest
           errours
           .
        
         
           THE
           nature
           of
           heresie
           is
           so
           subtilized
           by
           our
           faction
           ,
           that
           so
           farre
           as
           in
           them
           lies
           ,
           it
           is
           now
           quite
           evanished
           in
           the
           aire
           ,
           and
           no
           more
           heresies
           are
           to
           be
           found
           on
           the
           earth
           .
           With
           the
           Socinian
           
           Remonstrants
           ,
           they
           exeeme
           all
           〈◊〉
           controverted
           this
           day
           among
           any
           Christians
           ,
           from
           being
           the
           Subject
           of
           heresie
           :
           For
           they
           tell
           us
           ,
           that
           the
           beleefe
           of
           the
           doctrines
           uncontroverted
           by
           all
           is
           sufficient
           for
           salvation
           .
           a
           And
           howsoever
           some
           of
           them
           will
           bee
           content
           to
           count
           the
           
             Socinian
             Arianisme
          
           and
           Macedonianisme
           to
           bee
           true
           heresies
           ;
           yet
           ,
           as
           we
           shew
           before
           ,
           and
           all
           of
           them
           do
           clearethe
           Popish
           errors
           of
           this
           imputation
           .
           Alwayes
           not
           to
           strive
           for
           words
           ,
           our
           assertion
           is
           ,
           that
           the
           grossest
           of
           the
           Roman
           errours
           which
           in
           the
           common
           stile
           of
           Protestants
           ,
           wont
           to
           goe
           for
           heresies
           ,
           are
           maintained
           by
           the
           Canterburians
           for
           Catholick
           truths
           .
           For
           to
           〈◊〉
           this
           ,
           cast
           over
           the
           bookes
           of
           Bellarmine
           ,
           and
           see
           if
           his
           grossest
           tenets
           bee
           not
           by
           them
           embraced
           .
           In
           his
           first
           tome
           ,
           his
           errours
           about
           the
           Scriptures
           imperfection
           ,
           and
           doctrinall
           traditions
           ,
           seemes
           to
           be
           most
           weighty
           .
           In
           his
           second
           ,
           besides
           these
           already
           named
           ,
           his
           defence
           of
           the
           monastick
           vowes
           of
           
             Limbus
             Patrum
          
           and
           Purgatory
           are
           very
           palpable
           .
           In
           the
           third
           ,
           his
           ascribing
           too
           little
           to
           the
           Sacraments
           of
           the
           old
           Testament
           ,
           and
           too
           much
           to
           the
           Sacraments
           of
           the
           new
           ,
           his
           making
           all
           infants
           in
           baptisme
           to
           bee
           regenerate
           ,
           and
           all
           nonbaptised
           to
           bee
           damned
           ,
           his
           corporall
           presence
           of
           Christs
           body
           on
           the
           altar
           ,
           his
           sacrifice
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           auricular
           confession
           ,
           extreame
           unction
           ,
           are
           very
           grosse
           corruptions
           .
           In
           the
           last
           tome
           ,
           his
           errours
           about
           faith
           ,
           justification
           ,
           merit
           ,
           free-will
           ,
           are
           among
           the
           chiefe
           .
           In
           all
           those
           ,
           consider
           how
           farre
           our
           party
           is
           long
           agoe
           declined
           to
           the
           left
           hand
           .
        
         
         
           Begin
           with
           Scripture
           and
           traditions
           :
           The
           reformed
           
           Churches
           in
           the
           harmony
           of
           their
           confessions
           lay
           all
           down
           one
           common
           ground
           ,
           for
           their
           mutuall
           consent
           ;
           the
           Scripures
           absolute
           perfection
           ,
           without
           the
           helpe
           of
           any
           doctrinall
           tradition
           :
           Hogh
           me
           once
           this
           pillar
           ,
           the
           whole
           edifice
           of
           the
           reformation
           must
           fall
           .
           To
           batter
           downe
           this
           fort
           ,
           the
           Papists
           plant
           two
           Engines
           :
           One
           that
           there
           is
           divers
           Apostolicke
           and
           ancient
           traditions
           ,
           both
           rituall
           and
           dogmaticall
           ,
           which
           beside
           Scripture
           with
           a
           divine
           faith
           must
           be
           firmely
           beleeved
           :
           An
           other
           ,
           that
           Scripture
           must
           not
           be
           taken
           in
           any
           sense
           by
           us
           ,
           but
           〈◊〉
           wherein
           the
           ancient
           Fathers
           of
           the
           Church
           have
           understood
           it
           ,
           or
           the
           present
           Church
           do
           take
           it
           .
           In
           both
           these
           very
           dangerous
           corruptions
           our
           party
           joines
           with
           Rome
           :
           They
           glory
           b
           and
           triumph
           above
           all
           other
           reformed
           Churches
           ,
           that
           they
           doe
           embrace
           doctrinall
           traditions
           ,
           for
           which
           in
           Scripture
           there
           is
           no
           ground
           ;
           And
           of
           this
           kinde
           they
           reckon
           out
           some
           of
           great
           importance
           ;
           such
           as
           are
           ,
           the
           baptisme
           of
           infants
           ,
           the
           sanctifying
           of
           the
           Sabboth
           ,
           the
           Apostles
           Creed
           ,
           the
           giving
           of
           the
           cup
           to
           the
           people
           ,
           praying
           in
           a
           knowne
           tongue
           ,
           our
           knowledge
           of
           Scripture
           to
           be
           Scripture
           ,
           the
           names
           and
           number
           of
           the
           Canonicall
           bookes
           and
           their
           distinction
           from
           Apocrypha
           ,
           of
           this
           kinde
           they
           maintaine
           
           large
           as
           many
           as
           Rome
           .
           For
           at
           the
           first
           word
           they
           speake
           to
           us
           of
           six
           hundreth
           .
           c
           Among
           these
           traditions
           ,
           which
           wee
           must
           embrace
           with
           an
           undoubted
           faith
           :
           They
           reckon
           up
           the
           authority
           of
           Bishops
           above
           Priests
           ,
           prostration
           before
           the
           altars
           ,
           worshipping
           towards
           the
           East
           ,
           crosse
           in
           Baptisme
           ,
           crossing
           of
           our
           faces
           at
           all
           occasions
           ,
           the
           standing
           of
           a
           crucifix
           upon
           the
           altar
           ,
           and
           what
           else
           they
           please
           to
           urge
           ,
           for
           which
           they
           can
           get
           no
           Scripture
           warrant
           .
           To
           this
           head
           they
           referre
           the
           very
           customes
           of
           the
           Popish
           Church
           in
           latter
           times
           ,
           for
           which
           they
           have
           no
           syllable
           in
           any
           writer
           let
           bee
           in
           any
           Father
           :
           d
           Yea
           ,
           all
           the
           injunctions
           of
           the
           
           Bishops
           must
           bee
           Ecclesiastick
           traditions
           ,
           whereto
           the
           conscience
           must
           submit
           no
           lesse
           then
           to
           the
           precepts
           of
           God.
           e
           In
           the
           meane
           time
           Scripture
           must
           bee
           stiled
           the
           booke
           of
           hereticks
           ,
           f
           a
           Lesbian
           〈◊〉
           g
           In
           no
           controversies
           no
           not
           in
           Sermons
           any
           use
           may
           bee
           made
           of
           it
           ,
           except
           so
           farre
           as
           wee
           can
           backe
           our
           deductions
           from
           Scripture
           ,
           by
           consent
           of
           the
           ancient
           Fathers
           ,
           or
           present
           Church
           .
           h
        
         
         
           In
           our
           most
           important
           controversies
           anent
           faith
           ,
           
           justification
           ,
           fulfilling
           of
           the
           Law
           ,
           merite
           ,
           &c.
           they
           teach
           first
           ,
           that
           faith
           is
           no
           more
           but
           a
           bare
           knowledge
           ,
           and
           naked
           assent
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           nature
           of
           it
           there
           is
           no
           confidence
           ,
           no
           application
           at
           all
           ,
           that
           the
           soules
           confidence
           and
           application
           of
           Gods
           promises
           ,
           are
           the
           acts
           onely
           of
           hope
           and
           charity
           ,
           that
           justifying
           faith
           is
           the
           Catholicke
           faith
           ,
           a
           generall
           assent
           to
           the
           articles
           of
           the
           Apostolicke
           Creed
           ,
           that
           particular
           personall
           applying
           faith
           ,
           is
           but
           presumption
           and
           fantasie
           .
           i
           Againe
           ,
           they
           teach
           that
           justification
           is
           ascribed
           by
           the
           Apostle
           to
           faith
           onely
           ,
           by
           way
           of
           beginning
           inchoative
           ,
           because
           assent
           to
           the
           truth
           of
           God
           ,
           is
           that
           first
           vertue
           which
           the
           chaine
           of
           all
           other
           vertues
           ,
           whereby
           wee
           are
           compleatly
           
           justified
           ,
           for
           common
           ,
           doth
           follow
           .
           k
           3.
           
           That
           Charity
           is
           the
           forme
           of
           Faith
           ,
           and
           that
           to
           it
           ,
           the
           act
           of
           Justification
           is
           much
           more
           reasonably
           ascribed
           then
           to
           faith
           .
           l
           4.
           
           That
           Saint
           Pauls
           justification
           whereby
           wee
           stand
           before
           the
           barre
           of
           God
           is
           nought
           ,
           but
           our
           conversion
           and
           sanctification
           by
           our
           inherent
           righteousnesse
           .
           m
           5.
           
           That
           
           the
           fulfilling
           of
           Gods
           Law
           to
           us
           in
           this
           life
           is
           both
           possible
           and
           easie
           ,
           that
           if
           God
           did
           command
           us
           any
           thing
           which
           were
           impossible
           ,
           hee
           should
           bee
           both
           unjust
           and
           a
           tyrant
           .
           n
        
         
         
           6.
           
           That
           not
           onely
           manyidoelfulfill
           the
           Law
           without
           all
           mortall
           sinne
           ,
           but
           sundry
           also
           doe
           supererogat
           by
           doing
           more
           then
           is
           commanded
           ,
           by
           performing
           the
           counsels
           of
           perfection
           ,
           of
           chastity
           ,
           poverty
           ,
           and
           obedience
           :
           o
           7.
           
           That
           our
           good
           workes
           doe
           truely
           deserve
           and
           merit
           eternall
           life
           :
           p
           8.
           
           That
           our
           obeying
           the
           counsels
           of
           perfection
           doe
           purchase
           a
           degree
           of
           glory
           above
           the
           ordinary
           happinesse
           ,
           q
           All
           this
           lately
           is
           printed
           by
           the
           faction
           ,
           neither
           that
           onely
           ,
           but
           (
           which
           to
           us
           seemeth
           marvellous
           )
           when
           great
           popular
           grumblings
           and
           sundry
           publicke
           challenges
           hath
           beene
           made
           against
           the
           authours
           of
           such
           writs
           .
           These
           whom
           Canterburie
           
           hath
           employed
           to
           apologise
           for
           the
           worlds
           full
           satisfaction
           ,
           hath
           not
           yet
           beene
           pleased
           to
           disavow
           any
           of
           those
           writers
           ,
           nor
           to
           expresse
           the
           least
           signe
           of
           their
           indignation
           against
           any
           of
           their
           abominations
           ,
           r
           but
           rather
           by
           sweetning
           all
           with
           excuses
           seeme
           to
           vent
           their
           desire
           to
           have
           all
           swallowed
           downe
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Sacraments
           ,
           from
           Bellarmins
           
           third
           tombe
           ,
           they
           tell
           us
           first
           ,
           that
           the
           sacraments
           of
           the
           old
           testamenr
           differ
           from
           the
           new
           ,
           that
           the
           one
           confers
           grace
           ,
           the
           other
           foresignes
           grace
           to
           bee
           conferred
           ,
           that
           the
           same
           distinction
           must
           be
           holden
           betwixt
           Iohns
           and
           Christs
           baptimse
           .
           s
           2.
           
           They
           tell
           us
           that
           all
           baptised
           infants
           as
           well
           reprobat
           as
           elect
           are
           in
           baptisme
           truely
           regenerat
           ,
           sanctified
           ,
           
           justified
           ,
           and
           put
           in
           that
           state
           wherein
           if
           those
           who
           are
           reprobate
           and
           thereafter
           damned
           should
           die
           ,
           they
           would
           be
           infallibly
           saved
           .
           t
           And
           on
           the
           ot
           her
           hand
           they
           avow
           that
           all
           those
           who
           die
           in
           their
           infancy
           without
           baptisme
           ,
           by
           whatsoever
           misse
           ,
           by
           whosoevers
           fault
           ,
           are
           certainly
           damned
           so
           farre
           as
           men
           can
           judge
           :
           For
           baptisme
           is
           the
           onely
           ordnary
           meane
           which
           God
           hath
           appointed
           for
           their
           salvation
           ,
           which
           failing
           ,
           salvation
           must
           be
           lost
           ,
           except
           we
           would
           dreame
           of
           extraordinary
           miracles
           of
           the
           which
           we
           have
           no
           warrant
           .
           w
           3.
           
           That
           the
           manifold
           ceremonies
           of
           Papists
           in
           baptisme
           and
           all
           other
           sacraments
           are
           either
           to
           be
           embraced
           as
           pious
           
           ancient
           rites
           ,
           or
           no
           to
           be
           stood
           upon
           as
           being
           only
           ceremoniall
           toyes
           .
           x
           For
           their
           tenets
           in
           the
           sacrament
           of
           the
           supper
           ,
           wee
           shall
           speake
           anone
           of
           them
           in
           the
           head
           of
           the
           masse
           .
           4.
           
           They
           tell
           us
           that
           our
           dispute
           about
           the
           five
           bastard
           sacraments
           is
           a
           plaine
           logomachy
           .
           y
           5.
           
           They
           tell
           us
           that
           not
           only
           infants
           after
           their
           baptisme
           but
           even
           men
           baptised
           in
           perfect
           age
           who
           before
           baptisme
           gave
           a
           sufficient
           count
           of
           their
           faith
           ,
           yet
           they
           may
           not
           bee
           esteemed
           full
           Christians
           while
           they
           have
           received
           confirmation
           by
           the
           imposition
           of
           hands
           ,
           and
           that
           alone
           by
           a
           Bishop
           .
           z
           About
           the
           orders
           ,
           they
           tell
           us
           that
           they
           agree
           with
           Papists
           in
           their
           number
           ,
           that
           the
           reason
           why
           they
           want
           their
           Acolits
           ,
           sub-deacons
           and
           the
           rest
           ,
           is
           but
           their
           Churches
           poverty
           :
           zz
           Which
           can
           scarce
           well
           maintaine
           the
           two
           
           orders
           of
           Priests
           and
           Deacons
           .
           But
           which
           in
           their
           questions
           is
           worst
           of
           all
           ,
           they
           side
           here
           with
           the
           Papists
           in
           giving
           to
           all
           the
           Protestant
           Churches
           a
           wound
           which
           our
           enemies
           proclame
           to
           be
           mortall
           ,
           fatall
           ,
           incurable
           .
           They
           tie
           the
           conferring
           of
           ordours
           by
           a
           full
           divine
           right
           to
           the
           office
           of
           Bishops
           ,
           they
           avow
           that
           the
           lawfull
           use
           of
           all
           ordination
           and
           outward
           ecclesiasticke
           jurisdiction
           is
           by
           God
           put
           in
           the
           hands
           of
           their
           persons
           alone
           .
           Other
           reformed
           Kirkes
           therefore
           wanting
           Bishops
           ,
           their
           Ministers
           must
           preach
           ,
           celebrate
           the
           Sacraments
           ,
           administer
           discipline
           not
           only
           without
           a
           lawfull
           warrand
           ,
           but
           also
           against
           the
           ordinance
           of
           God.
           When
           they
           are
           put
           in
           minde
           of
           this
           great
           wound
           given
           by
           them
           to
           all
           other
           reformed
           Churches
           ,
           they
           either
           strive
           to
           cover
           it
           with
           the
           fig-tree
           leaves
           of
           an
           imagined
           case
           of
           necessity
           which
           never
           was
           ,
           or
           else
           plainely
           to
           passe
           over
           it
           as
           immedicable
           .
           No
           marvaile
           if
           the
           Bishops
           of
           England
           refuse
           to
           admit
           without
           a
           new
           ordination
           ,
           these
           who
           has
           beene
           ordained
           in
           Holland
           or
           France
           ,
           and
           they
           make
           no
           scruple
           to
           admit
           without
           new
           orders
           ,
           these
           who
           has
           beene
           ordained
           at
           Rome
           .
           &c.
           6.
           
           In
           Matrimony
           they
           will
           keepe
           not
           only
           the
           Popish
           Sacramentall
           words
           and
           signes
           ,
           the
           Popish
           times
           of
           Lent
           and
           other
           dismall
           daies
           ,
           except
           the
           Bishops
           give
           their
           dispensation
           ,
           but
           also
           they
           will
           have
           the
           
           whole
           matrimoniall
           causes
           ruled
           by
           the
           Popes
           〈◊〉
           ,
           yea
           ,
           which
           is
           more
           ,
           they
           avow
           that
           the
           Cannon-law
           by
           Acts
           of
           Parliament
           yet
           unrepealled
           stands
           in
           vigour
           amongst
           them
           .
           a
        
         
           Except
           in
           some
           few
           things
           which
           are
           directly
           opposit
           to
           some
           late
           lawes
           of
           the
           land
           and
           that
           Cannon-law
           they
           will
           have
           extendit
           as
           far
           downe
           as
           the
           very
           Councell
           of
           Basile
           .
           b
           And
           as
           far
           up
           as
           the
           constitutions
           of
           the
           first
           Popes
           .
           c
           Which
           divers
           of
           the
           Papists
           themselves
           acknowledge
           to
           bee
           supposititious
           ,
           yet
           our
           men
           will
           defend
           them
           all
           ,
           and
           with
           them
           the
           Canons
           
             ofthe
             
               of
               the
            
          
           Apostles
           ,
           the
           constitutions
           of
           Clemence
           and
           all
           such
           trash
           .
           d
        
         
         
           In
           the
           sacrament
           of
           pennance
           they
           〈◊〉
           first
           ,
           that
           auricular
           confession
           was
           evill
           abolished
           ,
           and
           is
           very
           expedient
           to
           be
           restored
           .
           e
           2.
           
           That
           God
           hath
           given
           a
           judiciall
           power
           of
           absolution
           to
           every
           Priest
           ,
           which
           every
           one
           of
           the
           people
           is
           obliged
           to
           make
           use
           of
           ,
           especially
           before
           the
           communion
           by
           confessing
           to
           the
           Priest
           all
           their
           sins
           without
           the
           concilement
           of
           any
           .
           f
           3.
           
           That
           God
           in
           the
           Heaven
           will
           certainly
           follow
           the
           sentence
           of
           the
           Priest
           absolving
           on
           earth
           .
           g
           4.
           
           Beside
           a
           private
           confessor
           ,
           it
           were
           very
           expedient
           to
           have
           in
           every
           congregation
           
           a
           publick
           penitentiarie
           ,
           who
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           Lent
           on
           ashe-wednesday
           might
           in
           the
           Kirk
           sit
           in
           his
           reclinatory
           ,
           and
           sprinkling
           dust
           on
           the
           head
           of
           every
           parishioner
           ,
           enjoyn
           them
           their
           Lent-pennance
           ,
           whereby
           they
           may
           truly
           satisfie
           Gods
           judgement
           for
           their
           sins
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           end
           of
           lent
           or
           Shrif-thursday
           before
           Pasche
           give
           his
           absolution
           to
           those
           who
           have
           fully
           satisfied
           .
           h
           Extreame
           unction
           ,
           if
           reports
           
           may
           be
           trusted
           ,
           is
           already
           in
           practice
           among
           them
           ,
           but
           howsoever
           ,
           they
           avow
           in
           Print
           their
           satisfaction
           with
           the
           Papists
           in
           this
           point
           ,
           if
           so
           be
           the
           ceremony
           be
           no
           made
           absolutely
           necessary
           .
           i
        
         
           Anent
           the
           Monastick
           life
           ,
           consider
           how
           farre
           our
           
           men
           are
           from
           Popery
           ,
           they
           tell
           us
           first
           ,
           that
           the
           putting
           downe
           of
           the
           Monasteries
           in
           England
           by
           Henry
           the
           eight
           ,
           let
           be
           by
           other
           Protestant
           Princes
           else-where
           ,
           was
           a
           worke
           exceeding
           impious
           ,
           and
           very
           prejudiciall
           both
           to
           the
           Church
           and
           Crowne
           :
           k
           2.
           
           That
           the
           Monks
           for
           the
           paterne
           of
           their
           orders
           have
           the
           Prophets
           and
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           specially
           Iohn
           the
           Baptist
           :
           l
           3.
           
           That
           their
           habits
           to
           their
           very
           tree-shoone
           hath
           Scripture
           warrant
           :
           m
           4.
           
           That
           the
           Virgine
           Mary
           was
           truely
           a
           Nunne
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Nunnes
           this
           day
           are
           much
           to
           
           bee
           commended
           for
           the
           following
           of
           her
           paterne
           :
           n
           5.
           
           That
           the
           present
           
             Carthusians
             ,
             Franciscans
          
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Fraternities
           are
           very
           good
           and
           holy
           people
           ,
           worthy
           in
           their
           very
           orders
           of
           Monastick
           life
           of
           our
           imitation
           :
           o
           6.
           
           That
           their
           barefooted
           processions
           through
           the
           streets
           ,
           that
           their
           Canonicall
           houres
           of
           devotion
           ,
           at
           midnight
           in
           their
           Cloisters
           ,
           that
           in
           great
           festivall
           Eves
           ,
           their
           going
           at
           Mid-night
           ,
           with
           confluence
           of
           people
           to
           Towne-churches
           is
           all
           commendable
           service
           .
           p
        
         
         
           In
           the
           head
           of
           Purgatorie
           and
           prayer
           for
           the
           
           dead
           ,
           thus
           farre
           long
           agoe
           are
           they
           proceeded
           ,
           first
           ,
           they
           avow
           openly
           
             Limbus
             Patrum
          
           ,
           telling
           us
           ,
           that
           the
           Saints
           before
           Christ
           were
           not
           onely
           not
           in
           heaven
           ,
           but
           truely
           in
           an
           infernall
           place
           ,
           even
           in
           a
           lake
           ,
           where
           in
           one
           nooke
           the
           godly
           were
           in
           peace
           ,
           and
           the
           wicked
           in
           torments
           ,
           that
           Abrahams
           bosome
           was
           here
           ,
           betweene
           which
           and
           hell
           a
           certaine
           gulfe
           made
           but
           a
           tolerable
           distance
           ,
           that
           
             Iacob
             ,
             Samuel
          
           ,
           and
           David
           ,
           and
           other
           of
           the
           ancients
           were
           mourned
           for
           at
           their
           death
           ,
           because
           their
           soules
           went
           not
           to
           heaven
           ,
           but
           truely
           to
           a
           kind
           of
           hell
           :
           their
           minde
           in
           these
           things
           ,
           as
           their
           custome
           is
           ,
           they
           propone
           in
           the
           words
           of
           some
           Father
           ,
           that
           by
           the
           shelter
           of
           their
           authoritie
           they
           may
           keep
           off
           their
           owne
           head
           the
           indignation
           of
           the
           people
           :
           q
           Again
           they
           tell
           us
           that
           Christ
           before
           he
           opened
           heavens
           gate
           to
           any
           soule
           ,
           he
           went
           first
           downe
           ,
           and
           loosed
           the
           soules
           in
           prison
           :
           yea
           ,
           if
           yee
           beleeve
           
             M.
             Maxwell
          
           (
           who
           hath
           written
           much
           for
           the
           drawing
           of
           our
           Church
           the
           factions
           way
           )
           hee
           went
           downe
           to
           the
           lowest
           hells
           ,
           and
           delivered
           thence
           a
           number
           of
           Pagans
           such
           as
           
             Aristotle
             ,
             Plato
             ,
             Socrates
          
           ,
           and
           a
           world
           of
           mo
           :
           
           r
           .
           Our
           maine
           pillers
           against
           purgatory
           they
           hew
           downe
           with
           the
           popish
           axes
           :
           when
           wee
           reason
           that
           Scripture
           makes
           no
           mention
           of
           any
           third
           place
           betwixt
           Hell
           and
           Heaven
           ;
           they
           reply
           ,
           that
           there
           are
           many
           things
           whereof
           Scripture
           makes
           no
           mention
           .
           When
           we
           reason
           that
           Scripture
           makes
           mention
           expressely
           of
           two
           places
           for
           soules
           after
           death
           ,
           they
           use
           the
           popish
           distinction
           ,
           that
           after
           the
           resurrection
           there
           is
           but
           two
           eternall
           places
           ,
           but
           that
           before
           the
           resurrection
           there
           may
           be
           three
           temporall
           :
           s
           4.
           
           When
           papists
           urge
           upon
           us
           prayer
           for
           the
           dead
           ,
           they
           will
           not
           contradict
           them
           ;
           yea
           ,
           they
           commend
           oblations
           in
           the
           Lords
           Supper
           ,
           and
           prayers
           there
           for
           the
           dead
           in
           particular
           .
           t
        
      
       
         
         
           CHAP.
           6.
           
           Anent
           their
           Superstitions
           .
        
         
           IN
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           the
           Canterburians
           use
           to
           professe
           corruptions
           of
           two
           kinds
           ,
           errours
           and
           
           superstitions
           ;
           as
           for
           heresies
           or
           Idolatries
           ,
           they
           are
           loath
           that
           any
           such
           crimes
           should
           be
           laid
           to
           the
           charge
           of
           their
           mother
           church
           ,
           how
           many
           ,
           and
           how
           grievous
           errors
           they
           finde
           Rome
           guilty
           of
           ,
           they
           had
           need
           to
           declare
           ;
           for
           in
           the
           most
           of
           those
           wherein
           the
           protestants
           place
           the
           chief
           of
           the
           Romish
           errours
           ,
           you
           have
           heard
           them
           plainly
           take
           their
           part
           ,
           readily
           it
           will
           prove
           no
           otherwise
           when
           wee
           come
           downe
           to
           trie
           them
           in
           the
           particular
           heads
           ,
           wherein
           papists
           are
           reputed
           most
           superstitious
           .
        
         
           The
           superstitions
           which
           in
           papists
           are
           most
           remarked
           in
           their
           private
           carriage
           are
           these
           four
           :
           In
           their
           frequent
           saining
           of
           themselves
           with
           the
           signe
           of
           the
           crosse
           :
           In
           wearing
           about
           their
           neck
           a
           crucifix
           or
           some
           such
           toy
           of
           an
           image
           or
           relique
           :
           In
           saying
           their
           praiers
           on
           their
           beads
           :
           In
           abstaining
           from
           flesh
           on
           friday
           ,
           wednesday
           ,
           lent
           ,
           or
           some
           great
           festivalls
           Eave
           ;
           Our
           men
           are
           farre
           from
           disproving
           of
           any
           of
           these
           practises
           .
           For
           the
           first
           ,
           they
           avow
           that
           saining
           with
           the
           signe
           of
           the
           crosse
           at
           rising
           or
           lying
           down
           ,
           at
           going
           out
           or
           comming
           in
           ,
           at
           lighting
           of
           candles
           ,
           closing
           of
           windowes
           ,
           or
           any
           such
           action
           is
           not
           only
           a
           pious
           and
           profitable
           ceremony
           ,
           but
           a
           very
           Apostolicke
           tradition
           .
           a
           2.
           
           They
           avow
           
           expressely
           the
           carrying
           of
           these
           holy
           trincats
           about
           their
           neck
           ,
           in
           cases
           of
           silver
           or
           gold
           .
           b
           3.
           
           The
           saying
           of
           their
           prayers
           ;
           yea
           ,
           their
           
             Ave
             Maries
          
           upon
           their
           beeds
           is
           to
           them
           an
           holy
           〈◊〉
           worthy
           of
           praise
           and
           imitation
           .
           c
           4.
           
           Wednesday
           ,
           Friday
           ,
           and
           Lent-fasts
           ,
           are
           to
           them
           not
           only
           lawdable
           practises
           of
           the
           ancient
           Church
           ,
           but
           also
           traditions
           come
           from
           Christ
           and
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           which
           for
           Religions
           cause
           all
           are
           obliged
           to
           embrace
           .
           d
        
         
           The
           popish
           publick
           superstitions
           are
           very
           many
           ,
           
           but
           of
           these
           which
           that
           whole
           Church
           doth
           allow
           ,
           very
           few
           comes
           to
           my
           minde
           which
           stand
           much
           against
           the
           stomack
           of
           our
           men
           :
           Those
           that
           come
           first
           to
           my
           thoughts
           are
           all
           pleasantly
           digested
           ;
           
           Protestants
           wont
           to
           deride
           the
           popish
           conceats
           of
           their
           holy
           ground
           ,
           of
           their
           consecrate
           walls
           ,
           and
           the
           sanctuarie
           of
           their
           Chancels
           ,
           their
           turnings
           towards
           the
           East
           ,
           their
           manifold
           toyes
           in
           Baptisme
           ,
           and
           the
           Lords
           supper
           joyned
           with
           the
           sacramentall
           Elements
           ,
           their
           gesticulations
           in
           time
           of
           publicke
           service
           ,
           their
           hallowing
           above
           the
           Sabboth
           a
           multitude
           of
           Festivals
           ,
           their
           pilgrimages
           ,
           their
           processions
           ,
           and
           many
           such
           their
           practises
           .
           In
           this
           behold
           the
           minde
           of
           our
           men
           ,
           they
           tell
           us
           first
           that
           Kirk-yards
           by
           prayers
           ,
           and
           conspersion
           of
           holy
           water
           must
           be
           made
           holy
           ground
           ;
           that
           before
           these
           episcopall
           consecrations
           ,
           no
           Christian
           buriall
           may
           bee
           made
           therein
           ,
           but
           after
           that
           the
           Bishop
           hath
           used
           the
           pontificall
           ceremonies
           thereupon
           ,
           no
           Heretick
           ,
           no
           Schismaticke
           ,
           no
           Excommunicate
           person
           may
           bee
           brought
           there
           ,
           no
           worldly
           ,
           no
           common
           action
           there
           performed
           without
           the
           profanation
           of
           the
           holy
           place
           .
           e
           Again
           they
           shew
           us
           that
           the
           church
           by
           the
           bishops
           anointing
           some
           stones
           thereof
           with
           oyl
           and
           sprinkling
           others
           with
           water
           ,
           and
           using
           from
           the
           Roman
           pontificall
           some
           mo
           prayers
           ,
           some
           mo
           ceremonies
           upon
           it
           ,
           becomes
           a
           ground
           more
           holy
           :
           That
           before
           these
           consecrations
           though
           the
           people
           of
           God
           for
           many
           yeares
           have
           met
           into
           a
           Church
           for
           divine
           service
           ,
           yet
           it
           is
           no
           more
           holy
           than
           a
           〈◊〉
           ,
           a
           〈◊〉
           ,
           a
           tolbooth
           ;
           but
           after
           these
           consecrations
           there
           is
           such
           holinesse
           in
           the
           walls
           ,
           that
           even
           when
           there
           is
           no
           divine
           service
           ,
           men
           at
           their
           comming
           in
           ,
           and
           going
           out
           must
           adore
           and
           all
           the
           time
           
           of
           their
           presence
           stand
           discovered
           ,
           and
           never
           so
           much
           as
           sit
           downe
           were
           the
           service
           never
           so
           long
           ,
           except
           upon
           great
           infirmitie
           .
           f
           3.
           
           That
           the
           Chancell
           and
           the
           Altar
           must
           not
           onely
           bee
           dedicate
           with
           prayers
           and
           unctious
           ,
           but
           with
           lighted
           Candles
           ,
           burning
           Incense
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           such
           toyes
           ;
           that
           it
           must
           bee
           divided
           from
           the
           Church
           with
           vailes
           to
           keep
           not
           only
           the
           bodies
           ,
           but
           the
           eyes
           of
           the
           Laicks
           from
           beholding
           the
           arke
           and
           throne
           wherein
           the
           body
           of
           the
           Sonne
           of
           God
           doth
           sit
           ,
           as
           in
           a
           chaire
           of
           state
           ,
           that
           none
           but
           Priests
           must
           enter
           there
           ,
           &
           that
           with
           their
           triple
           low
           adorations
           at
           their
           approaching
           :
           That
           it
           is
           a
           favor
           for
           the
           King
           or
           the
           Emperour
           to
           win
           near
           that
           place
           for
           the
           short
           time
           of
           
           his
           offering
           .
           g
           4.
           
           That
           none
           of
           the
           ceremonies
           of
           the
           popish
           baptism
           ,
           neither
           their
           salt
           ,
           their
           spitle
           ,
           nor
           exsufflation
           are
           superstitious
           .
           h
           5.
           
           That
           a
           number
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           of
           the
           Masse
           toyes
           ,
           which
           yet
           are
           not
           in
           practise
           in
           England
           ,
           yea
           all
           the
           guises
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           which
           can
           be
           proven
           to
           be
           ancient
           are
           all
           to
           be
           embraced
           .
           i
           6.
           
           That
           who
           ever
           in
           the
           publick
           prayers
           hath
           their
           face
           toward
           the
           North
           ,
           South
           ,
           and
           West
           ,
           must
           be
           publickly
           called
           upon
           to
           turne
           themselves
           ever
           towards
           the
           East
           .
           k
           7.
           
           That
           in
           the
           Church
           not
           onely
           in
           the
           time
           of
           prayer
           ,
           but
           at
           the
           reading
           of
           the
           ten
           commands
           ,
           all
           must
           fal
           on
           their
           knees
           ,
           but
           when
           the
           creed
           is
           read
           all
           must
           stand
           upright
           on
           their
           feet
           ,
           when
           the
           epistle
           commeth
           ,
           all
           may
           sit
           downe
           ,
           but
           when
           the
           gospell
           beginneth
           ,
           all
           must
           again
           arise
           ,
           during
           the
           time
           of
           sermon
           all
           must
           stand
           discovered
           .
           That
           to
           these
           and
           all
           such
           pious
           practises
           we
           are
           oblidged
           by
           the
           sole
           example
           of
           the
           bishops
           or
           some
           sew
           of
           them
           ,
           even
           before
           the
           inacting
           of
           any
           Law
           ,
           either
           of
           church
           or
           state
           .
           l
           8.
           
           That
           the
           conscience
           is
           oblidged
           not
           only
           to
           keep
           religiously
           the
           greater
           festivities
           of
           
             Yule
             ,
             pasch
             ,
             pentecost
          
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           which
           are
           immediately
           referred
           to
           the
           honour
           of
           the
           Trinitie
           ,
           but
           also
           a
           number
           of
           the
           festivals
           of
           the
           blessed
           Virgin
           ,
           of
           the
           Saints
           and
           Angels
           :
           Those
           must
           not
           
           bee
           polluted
           with
           any
           worke
           or
           secular
           affaire
           ,
           as
           wee
           desire
           to
           bee
           helped
           by
           these
           glorified
           persons
           intercession
           .
           m
           Yet
           
             Christs
             Sunday
          
           must
           bee
           no
           Sabboth
           ;
           bowling
           ,
           balling
           ,
           and
           other
           such
           games
           may
           well
           consist
           with
           all
           the
           holinesse
           it
           hath
           ;
           yea
           ,
           no
           law
           of
           God
           ,
           no
           ancient
           Canon
           of
           the
           Church
           doth
           discharge
           shearing
           of
           Corne
           ,
           taking
           of
           fish
           ,
           or
           much
           other
           husband
           labour
           upon
           that
           day
           ;
           but
           by
           the
           contrary
           acts
           both
           of
           church
           &
           State
           do
           warrand
           such
           labour
           ;
           yea
           ,
           there
           is
           so
           great
           Jewish
           superstition
           in
           the
           Land
           about
           
             Christs
             Sunday
          
           ,
           that
           all
           preachers
           must
           bee
           obliged
           in
           their
           very
           pulpits
           to
           proclame
           the
           new
           book
           of
           sports
           ,
           for
           incouragement
           of
           the
           people
           to
           their
           gaming
           's
           ,
           when
           the
           short
           houre
           of
           divine
           service
           is
           ended
           ,
           and
           that
           under
           no
           lesse
           paine
           than
           ejection
           from
           the
           Ministerie
           .
           n
           9.
           
           Pilgrimages
           to
           Saints
           Reliques
           ,
           and
           bare-footed
           processions
           to
           their
           Churches
           are
           preached
           and
           printed
           .
           o
           Those
           Throats
           which
           are
           so
           wide
           as
           
           to
           swallow
           downe
           all
           these
           it
           seemes
           they
           will
           not
           make
           great
           bones
           in
           all
           the
           other
           trash
           which
           in
           the
           
             Romish
             Church
          
           we
           challenge
           as
           superstitious
           .
        
      
       
         
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
             The
          
           Canterburians
           embrace
           the
           Masse
           it selfe
           .
        
         
           OF
           all
           the
           pieces
           of
           popery
           ,
           there
           is
           none
           so
           much
           beloved
           by
           papists
           ,
           nor
           so
           much
           hated
           by
           Protestants
           ,
           as
           the
           Masse
           ,
           since
           the
           reformation
           of
           Religion
           ,
           the
           Masse
           hath
           ever
           beene
           counted
           the
           great
           wall
           of
           division
           ,
           keeping
           the
           parties
           asunder
           ,
           who
           ever
           could
           free
           that
           ditch
           ,
           whose
           stomack
           could
           digest
           that
           morsell
           ,
           no
           man
           of
           either
           side
           was
           wont
           to
           make
           any
           doubt
           of
           his
           name
           ,
           but
           that
           with
           consent
           of
           all
           ,
           hee
           might
           passe
           for
           a
           true
           papist
           ;
           and
           no
           waies
           in
           any
           reason
           stand
           for
           a
           moment
           longer
           in
           the
           catalogue
           of
           protestants
           :
           If
           then
           I
           bee
           able
           to
           demonstrate
           the
           Canterburians
           minde
           to
           be
           for
           the
           Masse
           ,
           I
           hope
           no
           
           man
           of
           any
           understanding
           and
           equity
           will
           require
           of
           me
           any
           further
           proofe
           of
           their
           popery
           ,
           but
           with
           good
           leave
           of
           all
           I
           may
           end
           my
           taske
           ,
           having
           set
           upon
           the
           head
           therof
           this
           cape-stone
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           mouth
           of
           both
           sides
           reformed
           and
           Romish
           ,
           preaching
           ,
           and
           the
           Masse
           goe
           for
           reall
           opposites
           ,
           the
           
           affection
           of
           Papists
           to
           their
           Masse
           maketh
           them
           value
           our
           preaching
           at
           the
           lesser
           rate
           ;
           the
           affection
           of
           Protestants
           to
           preaching
           ,
           maketh
           the
           Masse
           to
           them
           the
           lesse
           lovely
           :
           Our
           faction
           to
           make
           roome
           for
           the
           Masse
           so
           farre
           as
           they
           dare
           ,
           so
           fast
           as
           they
           can
           ,
           are
           crying
           downe
           preaching
           .
           They
           tell
           us
           first
           ,
           that
           much
           of
           the
           preaching
           which
           now
           is
           at
           London
           ,
           and
           over
           England
           is
           not
           the
           word
           of
           God
           ,
           but
           of
           the
           Devill
           ,
           a
           because
           indeed
           the
           best
           and
           most
           zealous
           preachers
           in
           their
           sermons
           doe
           oft
           taxe
           Arminianisme
           and
           Popery
           ,
           and
           the
           waies
           whereby
           his
           Grace
           is
           in
           use
           to
           advance
           both
           :
           This
           to
           him
           and
           his
           followers
           is
           doctrinall
           Puritanisme
           ,
           much
           worse
           than
           disciplinarie
           ;
           yea
           ,
           it
           is
           sedition
           taught
           by
           the
           Devill
           :
           2.
           
           They
           tell
           us
           ,
           that
           the
           most
           of
           preachers
           ,
           though
           voyd
           of
           the
           former
           fault
           ,
           are
           so
           ignorant
           ,
           idle
           ,
           impertinent
           ,
           clamorous
           fellowes
           ,
           that
           their
           silence
           were
           much
           more
           to
           be
           wisht
           than
           their
           speech
           .
           b
           Because
           indeed
           grave
           and
           gracious
           Ministers
           are
           not
           either
           able
           or
           willing
           to
           stuffe
           their
           Sermons
           with
           secular
           learning
           ,
           and
           imploy
           extraordinarie
           paines
           for
           to
           gather
           together
           a
           Masse
           of
           tinkling
           words
           ,
           as
           Andrewes
           was
           ,
           and
           his
           admirers
           
           are
           wont
           to
           doe
           ,
           for
           to
           spoyle
           preaching
           of
           that
           life
           ,
           spirit
           ,
           and
           power
           ,
           which
           ought
           to
           shine
           into
           it
           .
           3.
           
           That
           the
           preaching
           which
           themselves
           approve
           and
           praise
           ,
           is
           but
           sermonizing
           in
           pulpits
           ,
           no
           necessary
           part
           of
           the
           Ministeriall
           charge
           ,
           but
           a
           practice
           to
           bee
           used
           of
           some
           few
           of
           singular
           learning
           &
           eloquence
           ,
           and
           that
           only
           at
           rare
           and
           extraordinary
           times
           ,
           as
           the
           Bishop
           ,
           or
           the
           Star-chamber
           Court
           shall
           be
           pleased
           to
           give
           licence
           .
           c
           4.
           
           That
           the
           onely
           ordinary
           ,
           profitable
           ,
           and
           necessary
           preaching
           which
           God
           hath
           appoynted
           ,
           and
           the
           Church
           laid
           upon
           the
           backe
           of
           Pastours
           ,
           as
           their
           charge
           for
           which
           their
           tithes
           and
           stipends
           is
           due
           to
           them
           ,
           is
           nothing
           but
           the
           distinct
           and
           cleare
           reading
           of
           the
           Service
           Booke
           .
           d
           As
           for
           sermonizing
           in
           pulpits
           ,
           when
           so
           it
           is
           permitted
           ,
           it
           ought
           to
           be
           very
           short
           ,
           and
           after
           the
           popish
           form
           ,
           without
           any
           prayer
           at
           all
           ,
           either
           before
           or
           after
           :
           That
           the
           custome
           of
           English
           preachers
           ,
           who
           before
           Sermon
           pray
           for
           the
           help
           of
           the
           Spirit
           of
           God
           to
           
           themselves
           and
           their
           hearers
           ,
           or
           after
           Sermon
           crave
           grace
           to
           practice
           what
           hath
           beene
           spoken
           is
           all
           but
           idle
           ;
           yea
           ,
           intollerable
           novations
           to
           bee
           abolished
           :
           e
           Neither
           this
           onely
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           most
           able
           Pastors
           are
           not
           to
           bee
           suffered
           so
           much
           as
           in
           their
           private
           studies
           to
           recommend
           their
           soules
           to
           God
           in
           their
           owne
           words
           ,
           but
           in
           their
           very
           private
           prayers
           ,
           are
           to
           bee
           tyed
           precisely
           to
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Service
           Booke
           .
           f
           5.
           
           That
           the
           sermonizing
           which
           themselves
           permit
           ,
           must
           bee
           in
           the
           greatest
           Townes
           in
           the
           most
           solemne
           times
           but
           once
           a
           day
           ,
           that
           the
           practice
           of
           hearing
           two
           Sermons
           in
           one
           day
           is
           to
           be
           corrected
           ,
           that
           one
           in
           a
           month
           is
           abundant
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           English
           Canons
           doe
           require
           .
           g
        
         
         
           6.
           
           That
           over
           all
           England
           ,
           Lecturers
           whose
           Sermons
           wont
           to
           be
           the
           farre
           best
           ,
           must
           be
           presently
           silenced
           ,
           as
           those
           whose
           calling
           the
           Canons
           Ecclesiasticall
           of
           England
           cannot
           permit
           .
           h
           In
           a
           word
           ,
           that
           Sermons
           are
           the
           great
           occasion
           of
           the
           division
           and
           heart-burnings
           ,
           which
           now
           trouble
           the
           Church
           and
           State
           ,
           of
           the
           presumption
           and
           pride
           ,
           and
           most
           sins
           among
           the
           people
           :
           That
           therefore
           it
           were
           verie
           good
           to
           returne
           to
           the
           old
           fashion
           in
           the
           dayes
           of
           popery
           ,
           before
           the
           19.
           yeare
           of
           Henry
           the
           eighth
           ,
           where
           there
           was
           none
           ,
           or
           but
           few
           preachings
           ,
           that
           this
           is
           the
           only
           means
           to
           reduce
           the
           land
           to
           that
           old
           honest
           simplicitie
           ,
           equitie
           ,
           pietie
           ,
           and
           happinesse
           ,
           which
           was
           in
           our
           Antecessors
           dayes
           ;
           i
           even
           to
           that
           old
           blindnesse
           ,
           wherein
           of
           necessity
           ,
           wee
           must
           give
           our
           soule
           to
           bee
           led
           by
           
           the
           light
           of
           Sir
           John
           the
           Priest
           ,
           our
           Father
           Confessor
           ,
           for
           all
           this
           behold
           on
           the
           margine
           their
           expresse
           declaration
           .
        
         
           Preaching
           being
           thus
           far
           cryed
           down
           ,
           there
           will
           be
           
           the
           lesse
           adoe
           to
           get
           up
           the
           Masse
           :
           For
           the
           word
           of
           the
           Masse
           is
           so
           lovely
           to
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           delighted
           to
           stile
           their
           Service
           Booke
           by
           that
           name
           .
           k
           And
           least
           wee
           should
           thinke
           that
           it
           is
           but
           with
           the
           word
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           reconciled
           ,
           they
           shew
           us
           next
           ,
           that
           they
           find
           no
           fault
           with
           the
           very
           matter
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           if
           you
           will
           give
           unto
           it
           a
           charitable
           ,
           and
           benigne
           interpretation
           .
           l
           Neither
           here
           doe
           they
           stand
           ,
           but
           goe
           on
           to
           tell
           us
           ,
           yet
           more
           of
           their
           minde
           ,
           that
           if
           transubstantiation
           onely
           were
           removed
           from
           the
           Masse
           ,
           they
           would
           make
           no
           question
           ,
           for
           any
           thing
           it
           hath
           beside
           .
           And
           this
           ,
           but
           most
           falsly
           ,
           they
           give
           out
           for
           King
           James
           judgement
           .
           m
           Yea
           ,
           they
           goe
           on
           further
           to
           embrace
           transubstantiation
           it selfe
           ,
           so
           farre
           as
           concernes
           the
           word
           :
           And
           how
           much
           the
           matter
           of
           it
           displeaseth
           them
           wee
           shall
           heare
           anon
           .
           n
        
         
           But
           to
           shew
           their
           minde
           more
           clearely
           towards
           the
           Masse
           ,
           consider
           the
           
             Scottish
             Liturgie
          
           ;
           This
           unhappy
           book
           was
           his
           Graces
           invention
           :
           If
           he
           should
           
           denie
           it
           ,
           his
           owne
           deeds
           would
           convince
           him
           .
           The
           manifold
           letters
           which
           in
           this
           pestiferous
           affaire
           have
           passed
           betwixt
           him
           and
           our
           Prelates
           are
           yet
           extant
           .
           If
           we
           might
           bee
           heard
           ,
           wee
           would
           spread
           out
           sundrie
           of
           them
           before
           the
           Convocation
           house
           of
           England
           ,
           making
           it
           cleare
           as
           the
           light
           ,
           that
           in
           all
           this
           designe
           his
           hand
           hath
           ever
           been
           the
           prime
           stikler
           ;
           so
           that
           upon
           his
           back
           mainly
           ,
           nill
           he
           will
           hee
           ,
           would
           be
           laid
           the
           charge
           of
           all
           the
           fruits
           good
           or
           evill
           which
           from
           that
           tree
           ,
           are
           like
           to
           fall
           on
           the
           Kings
           Countries
           .
           But
           of
           this
           in
           time
           and
           place
           ;
           onely
           now
           we
           desire
           to
           bee
           considered
           ,
           that
           to
           this
           houre
           ,
           his
           Grace
           hath
           not
           permitted
           any
           of
           his
           partie
           to
           speak
           one
           crosse
           word
           against
           that
           booke
           ,
           but
           by
           the
           contrarie
           lets
           many
           ofthem
           commend
           it
           in
           word
           and
           writ
           for
           the
           most
           rare
           and
           singular
           piece
           ,
           that
           these
           many
           ages
           hath
           beene
           seene
           in
           any
           Church
           ,
           for
           all
           gratious
           qualities
           that
           can
           bee
           found
           in
           any
           humane
           writ
           .
           Heare
           how
           the
           personate
           Jesuite
           
             〈◊〉
             Nicanor
          
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           as
           we
           conjecture
           by
           too
           probable
           signes
           his
           Graces
           creature
           ,
           Lesly
           of
           Dun
           ,
           and
           Conner
           extolls
           that
           Booke
           above
           the
           skies
           :
           o
           And
           yet
           we
           did
           undertake
           to
           shew
           into
           it
           the
           maine
           ,
           yea
           all
           the
           substantiall
           parts
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           and
           this
           undertaking
           to
           the
           satisfaction
           of
           our
           Nation
           was
           performed
           in
           our
           generall
           Assembly
           ;
           but
           to
           those
           men
           the
           judgements
           of
           nationall
           Churches
           are
           but
           vile
           
           and
           contemptible
           testimonies
           .
           I
           have
           seene
           a
           parallel
           written
           by
           a
           preacher
           among
           us
           ,
           comparing
           all
           and
           every
           particular
           portion
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           cleared
           by
           
             Innocent
             ,
             Durand
             ,
             Walfrid
             ,
             Berno
             ,
          
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           old
           Liturgick
           Rationalists
           ,
           with
           the
           parts
           of
           our
           Liturgy
           ,
           as
           they
           may
           bee
           cleared
           by
           the
           late
           writs
           of
           the
           Canterburians
           ,
           which
           ends
           not
           ,
           till
           all
           the
           parts
           great
           and
           small
           of
           the
           Masse
           bee
           demonstrate
           in
           our
           Book
           either
           formally
           ,
           in
           so
           many
           words
           ,
           as
           the
           most
           considerable
           are
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           the
           very
           〈◊〉
           (
           If
           you
           will
           joyne
           to
           our
           book
           the
           Canterburian
           commentars
           )
           or
           virtually
           a
           necessity
           being
           laid
           uponus
           ,
           upon
           the
           same
           grounds
           which
           perswades
           to
           embrace
           what
           in
           those
           bookes
           is
           formally
           expressed
           ,
           to
           embrace
           also
           what
           of
           the
           Masse
           is
           omitted
           ,
           〈◊〉
           it
           shal
           be
           their
           pleasure
           in
           a
           new
           edition
           to
           add
           it
           .
           This
           parallel
           is
           ready
           for
           the
           publick
           when
           ever
           it
           shall
           be
           called
           for
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           present
           ,
           because
           those
           men
           make
           our
           gracious
           
           Soveraigne
           beleeve
           ,
           and
           declare
           also
           to
           the
           world
           in
           print
           ,
           that
           what
           we
           challenge
           in
           that
           book
           ,
           doeth
           strike
           alike
           against
           the
           Liturgie
           of
           England
           ,
           as
           if
           the
           Scots
           Liturgy
           were
           altogether
           one
           with
           the
           English
           ,
           and
           the
           few
           small
           variations
           ,
           which
           possibly
           may
           be
           found
           in
           the
           Scottish
           ,
           were
           not
           onely
           to
           the
           better
           ,
           but
           made
           for
           this
           very
           end
           ,
           that
           this
           new
           booke
           might
           better
           comply
           with
           the
           Scots
           humour
           ,
           which
           now
           almost
           by
           birth
           or
           at
           least
           by
           long
           education
           is
           become
           naturally
           antipathetick
           
           to
           the
           Masse
           ,
           to
           make
           this
           their
           impudent
           fraud
           so
           palpable
           that
           hereafter
           they
           may
           blush
           (
           if
           it
           bee
           possible
           for
           such
           foreheads
           to
           blush
           at
           any
           thing
           )
           ever
           againe
           before
           our
           King
           to
           make
           any
           such
           allegeance
           passing
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           that
           booke
           for
           shortnesse
           ,
           wee
           shall
           consider
           some
           few
           lines
           in
           some
           three
           or
           foure
           leafes
           of
           it
           at
           most
           ,
           wherein
           the
           world
           may
           see
           their
           malapart
           changing
           of
           the
           English
           liturgy
           in
           twentie
           particulars
           and
           above
           ,
           every
           one
           whereof
           drawes
           us
           beyond
           all
           that
           ever
           was
           allowed
           in
           England
           ,
           and
           diverse
           of
           them
           lead
           to
           those
           parts
           of
           the
           Masse
           which
           all
           protestants
           this
           day
           count
           most
           wicked
           .
           If
           this
           be
           made
           cleare
           ,
           I
           hope
           that
           all
           equitable
           men
           will
           bee
           the
           more
           willing
           to
           free
           our
           opposition
           thereto
           ,
           of
           all
           imputations
           ,
           and
           specially
           of
           all
           intentions
           to
           meddle
           with
           any
           thing
           that
           concernes
           the
           English
           Church
           ,
           except
           so
           farre
           as
           is
           necessary
           for
           our
           present
           defence
           ,
           and
           future
           peace
           ,
           and
           makes
           cleerely
           fortheir
           good
           also
           .
           For
           albeit
           we
           are
           confident
           the
           world
           would
           have
           excused
           us
           to
           have
           opposed
           with
           all
           vehemency
           the
           imposition
           upon
           us
           (
           a
           Church
           and
           Kingdome
           as
           free
           and
           independant
           upon
           any
           other
           nation
           as
           is
           to
           bee
           found
           this
           day
           in
           Christendome
           )
           without
           our
           consent
           ,
           or
           so
           much
           as
           our
           advice
           ,
           the
           heavie
           burden
           of
           foure
           forraigne
           books
           ,
           of
           liturgie
           ,
           canons
           ,
           ordination
           ,
           homilies
           :
           ofa
           number
           ofstrange
           judicatories
           ;
           high
           commission
           ,
           episcopall
           visitations
           ,
           officiall
           courts
           ,
           and
           the
           like
           ,
           though
           they
           had
           bin
           urged
           in
           no
           other
           words
           ,
           in
           no
           other
           sence
           then
           of
           old
           they
           wont
           to
           be
           used
           in
           England
           :
           For
           it
           is
           well
           known
           that
           those
           things
           have
           bin
           the
           sole
           ground
           and
           onely
           occasion
           of
           the
           〈◊〉
           
           schismes
           ,
           and
           heavie
           troubles
           wherewith
           almost
           ever
           since
           the
           reformation
           ,
           that
           gracious
           church
           hath
           beene
           miserably
           vexed
           .
           But
           now
           all
           those
           things
           being
           laid
           upon
           us
           in
           a
           far
           worse
           sence
           as
           they
           are
           declared
           by
           the
           Canterburian
           imposers
           in
           their
           owne
           writs
           ,
           yea
           in
           farre
           worse
           words
           ,
           as
           all
           who
           will
           take
           the
           paines
           to
           compare
           ,
           may
           see
           :
           wee
           trust
           that
           our
           immoveable
           resolution
           to
           oppose
           even
           unto
           death
           all
           such
           violent
           novations
           shall
           be
           taken
           ,
           by
           no
           good
           man
           ,
           in
           evill
           part
           ,
           let
           be
           ,
           to
           be
           throwne
           ,
           far
           against
           our
           intentions
           ,
           to
           the
           disgrace
           of
           our
           neighbour
           church
           ,
           or
           any
           well
           minded
           person
           therein
           .
           We
           have
           with
           the
           English
           church
           nought
           to
           doe
           ,
           but
           as
           with
           our
           most
           deare
           and
           nearest
           sister
           ,
           wee
           wish
           them
           all
           happinesse
           ;
           and
           that
           not
           onely
           they
           ,
           but
           all
           other
           Christian
           Churches
           this
           day
           were
           both
           almost
           ,
           and
           altogether
           such
           as
           wee
           are
           ,
           except
           our
           afflictions
           .
           We
           have
           no
           enemies
           there
           but
           the
           Canterburian
           faction
           ,
           no
           lesse
           heavie
           to
           her
           than
           to
           us
           .
           What
           we
           have
           said
           against
           the
           
             Scots
             liturgie
          
           may
           well
           reflect
           upon
           them
           ,
           and
           so
           farre
           as
           we
           intend
           ,
           upon
           them
           alone
           ,
           and
           that
           for
           three
           of
           their
           crimes
           chiefely
           .
           First
           their
           forcing
           upon
           us
           ,
           with
           whom
           they
           had
           nought
           to
           do
           ,
           so
           many
           novations
           ,
           even
           all
           that
           is
           England
           at
           one
           draught
           ,
           and
           that
           by
           meere
           violence
           .
           2.
           
           Their
           mutation
           of
           the
           most
           of
           those
           things
           to
           a
           plaine
           popish
           sence
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           best
           sence
           that
           ever
           was
           put
           upon
           them
           ,
           did
           occasion
           alwayes
           to
           England
           much
           trouble
           .
           3.
           
           Their
           mutation
           of
           the
           English
           books
           not
           onely
           to
           popish
           sences
           ,
           but
           even
           to
           popish
           words
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           a
           number
           of
           the
           most
           important
           passages
           of
           the
           Masse
           .
           This
           last
           here
           wee
           will
           shew
           ,
           
           holding
           us
           within
           the
           bounds
           of
           our
           few
           forenamed
           leafes
           ,
           by
           which
           ,
           conjecture
           may
           bee
           made
           of
           the
           rest
           .
        
         
           Of
           all
           the
           limbes
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           the
           most
           substantious
           
           for
           many
           evill
           qualities
           are
           those
           three
           ,
           which
           lie
           contiguous
           together
           ,
           the
           Offertorie
           ,
           the
           Canon
           ,
           the
           Communion
           :
           The
           English
           at
           the
           reformation
           ,
           howsoever
           for
           reasons
           of
           their
           owne
           ,
           thought
           meet
           to
           retaine
           more
           of
           the
           Masse
           words
           than
           our
           church
           could
           ever
           be
           induced
           to
           follow
           ,
           yet
           in
           those
           three
           portions
           of
           the
           Masse
           they
           were
           very
           carefull
           to
           cast
           out
           what
           they
           knew
           protestants
           did
           much
           abhorre
           in
           the
           church
           of
           Rome
           .
           But
           at
           this
           time
           the
           Canterburians
           having
           gotten
           the
           refraiming
           of
           the
           Liturgy
           in
           their
           hands
           ,
           for
           to
           manifest
           their
           affection
           openly
           to
           Rome
           do
           put
           in
           expressely
           that
           ,
           which
           the
           English
           reformers
           put
           out
           ,
           as
           wicked
           scandalls
           .
           That
           this
           may
           bee
           seene
           ,
           consider
           severally
           the
           three
           named
           portions
           .
        
         
           The
           popish
           Offertorie
           in
           it selfe
           is
           a
           foule
           practice
           ,
           even
           a
           renovation
           in
           the
           Christian
           church
           of
           a
           Jewish
           Sacrifice
           ,
           as
           Durand
           confesseth
           .
           p
           But
           as
           it
           stands
           in
           the
           Masse
           ,
           it
           hath
           yet
           a
           worse
           use
           ,
           to
           bee
           a
           preparatorie
           peace
           offering
           making
           way
           for
           that
           holy
           propitiatorie
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           Canon
           followes
           .
           It
           is
           pretended
           to
           bee
           a
           sacrifice
           for
           the
           benefit
           both
           of
           quicke
           and
           dead
           ,
           for
           the
           good
           of
           the
           whole
           church
           universall
           ,
           for
           the
           helpe
           of
           these
           in
           Purgatorie
           ;
           but
           it
           is
           really
           intended
           to
           be
           a
           dragge
           ,
           a
           hook
           to
           draw
           in
           money
           to
           the
           Priests
           purses
           .
           This
           piece
           of
           the
           Masse
           the
           English
           did
           cleane
           abolish
           ,
           but
           behold
           how
           much
           of
           it
           our
           present
           Reformers
           
           are
           pleased
           to
           replant
           in
           our
           booke
           :
           First
           ,
           they
           professe
           in
           plaine
           tearmes
           the
           reduction
           of
           the
           Offertorie
           ,
           and
           that
           not
           once
           alone
           ,
           but
           least
           their
           designe
           should
           passe
           without
           observation
           ,
           they
           tell
           us
           over
           againe
           of
           the
           Offertory
           :
           2.
           
           In
           the
           very
           forefront
           of
           this
           their
           Offertory
           ,
           they
           set
           up
           unto
           us
           whole
           five
           passages
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           whereof
           the
           English
           hath
           none
           ,
           all
           directly
           in
           the
           literall
           sence
           carrying
           to
           a
           Jewish
           oblation
           .
           3.
           
           For
           the
           waking
           of
           the
           Priests
           appetite
           (
           which
           of
           it selfe
           uses
           to
           be
           sharpe
           enough
           )
           Upon
           the
           hope
           of
           present
           gaine
           to
           sing
           his
           Masses
           with
           the
           better
           will
           ,
           they
           set
           up
           a
           Rubrick
           ,
           seasing
           and
           infefting
           the
           officiating
           Priest
           in
           the
           halfe
           of
           all
           the
           oblations
           ,
           which
           hee
           can
           move
           the
           people
           to
           offer
           ,
           and
           giving
           a
           liberty
           to
           him
           with
           his
           Church-warden
           ,
           to
           dispose
           on
           the
           other
           halfe
           also
           as
           he
           thinks
           good
           ,
           expresly
           contrary
           to
           the
           English
           ,
           which
           commands
           all
           the
           almes
           of
           the
           people
           to
           bee
           put
           up
           in
           the
           poores
           boxe
           .
           4.
           
           They
           will
           not
           have
           us
           to
           want
           the
           very
           formality
           of
           a
           Jewish
           offering
           ,
           for
           they
           ordaine
           the
           Deacon
           to
           put
           the
           bason
           with
           the
           peoples
           devotions
           in
           the
           hands
           of
           the
           Priest
           ,
           that
           hee
           may
           present
           it
           before
           the
           Lord
           upon
           the
           Altar
           ,
           just
           as
           the
           papists
           in
           this
           place
           ordaine
           to
           bring
           the
           paten
           with
           their
           oblations
           unto
           the
           Priest
           ;
           that
           hee
           may
           set
           it
           before
           their
           altar
           .
           q
           5
           The
           priest
           is
           ordained
           to
           place
           and
           to
           offer
           up
           the
           bread
           and
           wine
           upon
           the
           Lords
           Table
           ,
           that
           it
           may
           be
           ready
           for
           that
           service
           ,
           just
           the
           popish
           offering
           in
           that
           place
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           of
           the
           bread
           and
           wine
           ,
           as
           a
           preparatory
           sacrifice
           for
           the
           propitiatory
           following
           .
           6.
           
           The
           English
           prayer
           for
           the
           Catholick
           Church
           ,
           is
           in
           our
           
           book
           cast
           immediately
           at
           the
           back
           of
           the
           offering
           of
           bread
           and
           wine
           ,
           and
           that
           we
           may
           know
           it
           must
           be
           taken
           for
           the
           Offertory
           prayers
           that
           stands
           there
           in
           the
           Missall
           ,
           and
           that
           for
           the
           benefit
           not
           onely
           of
           the
           living
           ,
           but
           also
           of
           the
           dead
           :
           The
           Masse
           clauses
           for
           the
           honour
           of
           the
           Saints
           ,
           and
           helpe
           of
           those
           who
           are
           in
           purgatorie
           ,
           which
           the
           English
           scraped
           out
           ,
           they
           put
           in
           againe
           :
           For
           as
           the
           Papists
           say
           ,
           these
           Offertorie
           prayers
           for
           the
           honour
           of
           the
           Saints
           ,
           especially
           of
           the
           blessed
           Virgin
           ,
           and
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           Martyrs
           ,
           so
           they
           in
           this
           their
           Offertorie
           prayer
           commemorat
           all
           the
           Saints
           ,
           who
           in
           their
           severall
           generations
           were
           the
           lights
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           and
           had
           wonderfull
           grace
           and
           vertue
           ,
           they
           might
           have
           put
           in
           particularly
           ,
           as
           Couzins
           in
           his
           devotions
           doeth
           ,
           page
           .
           371.
           
           The
           blessed
           Virgin
           〈◊〉
           ,
           the
           holy
           Patriarchs
           ,
           Prophets
           ,
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           Martyrs
           :
           also
           they
           mention
           among
           the
           dead
           not
           onely
           these
           glorious
           Saints
           ,
           but
           the
           rest
           of
           Gods
           servants
           ,
           who
           have
           finished
           their
           course
           in
           〈◊〉
           ,
           and
           now
           doe
           
             rest
             from
             their
             labours
          
           ,
           the
           best
           description
           that
           can
           be
           ,
           if
           Bellarmine
           may
           be
           believed
           ,
           of
           the
           Soules
           in
           Purgatory
           ,
           for
           whom
           not
           only
           thanks
           is
           given
           ,
           but
           also
           prayers
           made
           ,
           as
           Couzins
           who
           is
           suspected
           to
           be
           one
           of
           the
           maine
           pen-men
           of
           our
           booke
           ,
           doth
           comment
           this
           passage
           in
           his
           devotions
           ,
           page
           372.
           
           That
           at
           the
           last
           day
           ,
           we
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           they
           with
           us
           may
           attaine
           to
           the
           resurrection
           of
           the
           Just
           ,
           and
           have
           our
           perfect
           consummation
           both
           of
           soule
           and
           body
           in
           the
           kingdome
           of
           heaven
           :
           There
           is
           no
           footestep
           of
           any
           of
           these
           things
           in
           the
           English
           book
           .
           
        
         
           The
           piece
           which
           followes
           the
           Offertorie
           in
           the
           
           Missall
           ,
           and
           in
           our
           booke
           also
           ,
           is
           the
           Canon
           ,
           no
           lesse
           detested
           by
           all
           Protestants
           ,
           then
           admired
           by
           papists
           ,
           as
           Bellarmine
           telleth
           us
           ;
           r
           Many
           of
           the
           prefaces
           and
           prayers
           thereof
           wee
           have
           word
           by
           word
           ,
           and
           what
           ever
           we
           want
           ,
           these
           men
           in
           print
           are
           bold
           to
           justifie
           it
           all
           ,
           as
           in
           nothing
           opposite
           to
           the
           truth
           or
           protestant
           Doctrine
           :
           So
           the
           appendix
           to
           D.
           Fields
           third
           Booke
           ,
           Chap.
           1.
           
           But
           wee
           must
           consider
           the
           time
           wherein
           
             D.
             Field
          
           is
           made
           to
           utter
           such
           speeches
           ,
           it
           is
           in
           the
           twenty
           eight
           yeare
           ,
           long
           after
           the
           death
           of
           that
           learned
           and
           reverend
           Divine
           :
           It
           is
           in
           that
           yeare
           when
           his
           Grace
           sitting
           in
           the
           Chaire
           of
           London
           ,
           had
           〈◊〉
           now
           the
           full
           superintendence
           of
           all
           the
           presses
           there
           ,
           and
           could
           very
           easily
           (
           for
           the
           promoving
           of
           his
           designes
           )
           put
           in
           practice
           that
           piece
           of
           policie
           among
           others
           ,
           to
           make
           men
           after
           their
           death
           speak
           in
           print
           ,
           what
           they
           never
           thought
           in
           their
           life
           ;
           or
           at
           least
           to
           speake
           out
           those
           thoughts
           which
           for
           the
           good
           and
           peace
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           they
           keeped
           close
           within
           the
           doors
           of
           their
           owne
           breast
           ,
           and
           withdrew
           from
           the
           notice
           of
           the
           World
           ;
           it
           would
           then
           seeme
           reason
           to
           father
           these
           strange
           justifications
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           which
           are
           cast
           to
           Fields
           booke
           so
           long
           after
           his
           death
           ,
           as
           also
           many
           passages
           in
           these
           posthume
           works
           of
           Andrewes
           ,
           which
           his
           Grace
           avowedly
           sets
           out
           in
           the
           twentie
           ninth
           yeare
           ,
           and
           those
           new
           pieces
           never
           heard
           of
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           thirtie
           one
           yeare
           are
           set
           out
           by
           M.
           Aylward
           ,
           under
           the
           name
           of
           the
           English
           Martyrs
           ,
           as
           also
           that
           writ
           of
           Overall
           ,
           which
           Montagu
           puts
           out
           with
           his
           owne
           amplifications
           ,
           in
           the
           thirty
           six
           yeare
           :
           These
           and
           the
           like
           pieces
           ,
           must
           in
           reason
           be
           ratherfather'd
           on
           those
           
           who
           put
           them
           forth
           ,
           then
           upon
           their
           pretended
           authors
           ,
           who
           readily
           did
           never
           know
           such
           posthume
           children
           ,
           or
           else
           did
           take
           them
           for
           such
           unhappy
           bastards
           as
           they
           were
           resolved
           ,
           for
           reasons
           known
           to
           themselves
           to
           keep
           them
           in
           obscurity
           ,
           and
           never
           in
           publike
           to
           avow
           them
           as
           their
           owne
           .
        
         
           In
           this
           Canon
           there
           are
           two
           parts
           most
           principall
           ,
           which
           the
           papists
           call
           the
           Heart
           ,
           and
           Head
           thereof
           .
           s
           The
           prayers
           of
           consecration
           ,
           and
           of
           oblation
           ,
           this
           head
           the
           English
           strikes
           off
           ,
           this
           heart
           they
           pull
           out
           of
           their
           Booke
           ,
           that
           the
           wicked
           Serpent
           should
           not
           have
           any
           life
           among
           them
           .
           But
           our
           men
           are
           so
           tender
           and
           compassionate
           towards
           that
           poore
           Beast
           ,
           that
           they
           will
           again
           put
           in
           that
           Heart
           ,
           and
           set
           on
           that
           Head.
           The
           consecration
           and
           oblation
           they
           will
           bee
           loth
           〈◊〉
           want
           .
           Consider
           then
           these
           mens
           changing
           of
           the
           English
           booke
           towards
           both
           those
           ,
           the
           two
           incomparable
           worst
           parts
           of
           the
           whole
           Masse
           .
           First
           ,
           the
           English
           scrapes
           out
           all
           mention
           of
           any
           consecration
           :
           for
           however
           we
           delight
           not
           to
           strive
           with
           the
           papists
           any
           where
           about
           words
           ,
           yet
           in
           this
           place
           while
           they
           declare
           expressely
           ,
           that
           by
           consecration
           of
           the
           Elements
           they
           doe
           understand
           not
           the
           sanctification
           of
           the
           Elements
           by
           the
           word
           and
           prayer
           ,
           but
           a
           secret
           whispering
           of
           certaine
           words
           upon
           the
           Elements
           ,
           for
           their
           very
           Transubstantiation
           :
           t
           Consecration
           in
           this
           place
           being
           so
           taken
           by
           the
           papists
           ,
           the
           English
           rejects
           it
           ,
           and
           will
           have
           nothing
           to
           do
           therewith
           ;
           but
           our
           men
           being
           more
           wise
           ,
           and
           understanding
           their
           owne
           ends
           ,
           put
           up
           in
           their
           rubrick
           in
           capitall
           letters
           formally
           and
           expressely
           their
           praier
           of
           consecration
           .
        
         
         
           〈◊〉
           .
           The
           Papists
           to
           the
           end
           that
           their
           consecratory
           words
           may
           bee
           whispered
           upon
           the
           elements
           for
           their
           change
           ,
           and
           no
           wayes
           heard
           of
           the
           people
           ,
           who
           perchance
           if
           they
           heard
           and
           understood
           them
           ,
           might
           learne
           them
           by
           heart
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           idlenesse
           might
           pronounce
           them
           over
           their
           meales
           ,
           and
           so
           ,
           which
           once
           they
           say
           was
           done
           ,
           Transubstantiate
           their
           ordinary
           food
           into
           Christs
           body
           :
           for
           the
           eschewing
           of
           these
           inconveniences
           ,
           they
           ordaine
           the
           consecration
           to
           bee
           made
           in
           the
           outmost
           corner
           of
           the
           church
           ,
           so
           far
           from
           the
           eares
           of
           the
           people
           as
           may
           be
           ;
           and
           for
           the
           greater
           security
           ,
           they
           ordaine
           their
           priests
           in
           the
           time
           of
           consecration
           ,
           both
           to
           speake
           low
           ,
           and
           to
           turne
           their
           backs
           upon
           the
           people
           :
           For
           to
           remedy
           these
           wicked
           follies
           ,
           the
           English
           expressely
           ordained
           their
           Communion
           Table
           to
           stand
           in
           the
           body
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           where
           the
           Minister
           in
           the
           mids
           of
           the
           people
           might
           read
           out
           openly
           all
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Institution
           .
           But
           our
           men
           to
           returne
           to
           the
           old
           fashion
           ,
           command
           the
           table
           to
           be
           set
           at
           the
           East
           end
           of
           the
           Chancell
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           consecration
           ,
           the
           priest
           may
           stand
           so
           farre
           removed
           from
           the
           people
           ,
           as
           the
           furthest
           wall
           of
           the
           Church
           can
           permit
           ,
           and
           as
           this
           distance
           were
           not
           enough
           to
           keep
           these
           holy
           words
           of
           〈◊〉
           from
           the
           prophane
           eares
           of
           Laicks
           ,
           our
           book
           hath
           a
           second
           Rubrick
           ,
           enjoyning
           expressely
           the
           priest
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Consecration
           to
           turne
           his
           backe
           on
           the
           people
           ,
           to
           come
           from
           the
           North
           end
           of
           the
           Table
           ,
           and
           to
           stand
           at
           such
           a
           place
           where
           bee
           may
           use
           both
           his
           hands
           with
           more
           decencie
           and
           ease
           ,
           which
           is
           not
           possible
           but
           on
           the
           West
           side
           alone
           ;
           for
           on
           the
           South
           side
           
           the
           commoditie
           is
           just
           alike
           as
           in
           the
           North.
           On
           the
           Eastnone
           can
           stand
           ,
           for
           the
           Table
           is
           joyned
           hard
           to
           the
           Wall
           ,
           and
           whosoever
           stands
           at
           the
           West
           side
           of
           the
           Altar
           ,
           his
           Back
           is
           directly
           to
           the
           people
           that
           are
           behind
           him
           .
           They
           say
           for
           this
           practise
           many
           things
           ,
           first
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           good
           holy
           Liturgie
           of
           Edward
           the
           sixth
           ,
           the
           Priest
           was
           ordained
           to
           stand
           with
           his
           back
           to
           the
           people
           .
           u
           Againe
           ,
           that
           alwayes
           in
           the
           ancient
           church
           the
           priests
           stood
           in
           the
           uppermost
           end
           of
           the
           church
           ,
           divided
           from
           the
           people
           behind
           them
           ,
           with
           railes
           ,
           and
           vailes
           ,
           and
           other
           distinctions
           .
           x
           3.
           
           That
           Scripture
           is
           the
           ground
           of
           this
           practice
           ,
           for
           so
           it
           was
           in
           the
           Jewish
           Church
           ,
           the
           Priest
           when
           hee
           went
           into
           the
           Sanctuary
           to
           pray
           ,
           and
           offer
           incense
           for
           the
           people
           ,
           they
           stood
           without
           and
           never
           did
           heare
           what
           he
           spake
           ,
           nor
           saw
           what
           he
           did
           .
           y
           If
           from
           this
           practice
           wee
           would
           inferre
           with
           Bellarmine
           ,
           that
           the
           priest
           in
           the
           consecration
           might
           speake
           in
           latine
           ,
           or
           in
           a
           language
           unknown
           to
           the
           people
           ,
           since
           God
           to
           whom
           he
           speaks
           understands
           alllanguages
           ,
           the
           elements
           upon
           which
           the
           consecratorie
           words
           are
           murmured
           ,
           z
           understands
           none
           ,
           and
           the
           people
           for
           whom
           alone
           the
           vulgar
           language
           is
           used
           ,
           is
           put
           backe
           from
           the
           hearing
           of
           the
           consecration
           ;
           we
           know
           not
           what
           in
           reason
           they
           could
           answer
           :
           But
           this
           weknow
           ,
           that
           the
           maine
           ground
           whereupon
           we
           presse
           the
           use
           of
           the
           vulgar
           language
           ,
           not
           onely
           in
           the
           consecration
           as
           they
           call
           it
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           whole
           service
           of
           God
           ,
           I
           
           meane
           the
           warrant
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           they
           openly
           denie
           and
           for
           it
           gives
           no
           ground
           ,
           but
           the
           old
           tradition
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           &
        
         
           3
           When
           our
           priest
           is
           set
           under
           the
           East
           wal
           within
           his
           raile
           his
           backe
           upon
           the
           people
           ,
           he
           is
           directed
           to
           use
           both
           his
           armes
           with
           decency
           and
           ease
           ,
           what
           use
           here
           can
           be
           made
           of
           the
           priests
           armes
           ,
           except
           it
           be
           for
           making
           oflarge
           crosses
           as
           the
           masse
           Rubricks
           at
           this
           place
           doth
           direct
           ,
           We
           doe
           not
           understand
           :
           only
           we
           bave
           heard
           before
           ,
           that
           they
           avow
           the
           lawfulnesse
           of
           crossing
           no
           lesse
           in
           the
           supper
           than
           in
           Baptisme
           .
           4.
           
           The
           prayer
           which
           stands
           here
           in
           the
           English
           booke
           ,
           drawne
           from
           the
           place
           wherin
           it
           stood
           of
           old
           in
           the
           Masse
           to
           countenance
           the
           transubstantiation
           of
           the
           bread
           and
           wine
           into
           Christs
           body
           and
           blood
           ,
           but
           standing
           in
           this
           place
           before
           the
           consecration
           it
           is
           clear
           of
           all
           such
           suspition
           :
           Our
           men
           are
           so
           bold
           as
           to
           transplant
           it
           from
           this
           good
           ground
           to
           the
           old
           wicked
           soyle
           at
           the
           backe
           of
           the
           consecration
           where
           it
           wont
           to
           stand
           before
           in
           the
           old
           order
           of
           Sarum
           .
           5.
           
           In
           the
           next
           English
           prayer
           ,
           we
           put
           in
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           whereby
           God
           is
           besought
           by
           his
           omnipotent
           spirit
           so
           to
           sanctifie
           the
           oblations
           of
           bread
           and
           wine
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           become
           to
           us
           Christs
           body
           and
           bloud
           ,
           from
           these
           words
           all
           papists
           use
           to
           draw
           the
           truth
           of
           their
           transubstantiation
           ,
           wherefore
           the
           English
           reformers
           scraped
           them
           out
           of
           their
           Booke
           ,
           but
           our
           men
           put
           them
           fairely
           in
           ,
           and
           good
           reason
           have
           they
           so
           to
           do
           :
           for
           long
           agoe
           they
           professed
           that
           about
           the
           presence
           of
           Christs
           body
           and
           blood
           in
           the
           Sacrament
           after
           consecration
           ,
           they
           are
           fully
           agreed
           with
           Lutherans
           
           and
           papists
           in
           all
           things
           that
           is
           materiall
           and
           needfull
           ,
           as
           for
           the
           small
           difference
           which
           remaines
           about
           the
           formalitie
           and
           mode
           of
           presence
           ,
           it
           is
           but
           a
           curious
           and
           undeterminable
           question
           ,
           whereabout
           there
           would
           bee
           no
           controversie
           ,
           did
           not
           the
           devilish
           humour
           of
           the
           Puritans
           and
           Jesuites
           make
           and
           entertaine
           it
           .
           a
           Yea
           they
           seeme
           to
           have
           come
           a
           step
           further
           ,
           to
           the
           embracing
           of
           the
           very
           mode
           of
           the
           popish
           presence
           ,
           for
           they
           〈◊〉
           of
           a
           corporall
           presence
           ibi
           that
           the
           body
           is
           there
           on
           the
           Altar
           ,
           and
           that
           essentially
           ;
           yea
           so
           grossely
           ,
           that
           for
           its
           presence
           there
           ,
           the
           Altar
           it selfe
           ,
           let
           be
           the
           elements
           ,
           must
           bee
           adored
           .
           6.
           
           They
           make
           an
           expresse
           rubrick
           for
           the
           priests
           taking
           of
           the
           patin
           and
           chalice
           in
           his
           hand
           in
           the
           time
           of
           consecration
           ,
           which
           taking
           not
           being
           either
           for
           his
           owne
           participation
           or
           distribution
           to
           others
           ,
           why
           shall
           wee
           not
           understand
           the
           end
           of
           it
           to
           be
           that
           ,
           which
           the
           Masse
           there
           enjoynes
           the
           〈◊〉
           and
           chalice
           ,
           their
           elevation
           and
           adoration
           ;
           for
           the
           elevation
           it
           waslong
           ago
           practised
           and
           professed
           by
           som
           of
           our
           Bishops
           ,
           and
           the
           adoration
           when
           the
           chalice
           
           and
           paten
           are
           taken
           in
           the
           priests
           hands
           is
           avowed
           by
           Heylin
           .
           The
           practice
           of
           Wren
           does
           declare
           their
           intention
           :
           this
           man
           as
           the
           Citizens
           of
           Ipswich
           complaines
           to
           the
           Parliament
           ,
           when
           he
           consecrat
           at
           their
           new
           Altar
           ,
           did
           alwayes
           turne
           his
           back
           on
           the
           people
           ,
           did
           elevate
           the
           bread
           and
           wine
           above
           his
           shoulder
           ,
           that
           it
           might
           be
           seene
           ,
           did
           set
           downe
           every
           one
           of
           the
           Elements
           ,
           after
           they
           were
           consecrate
           ,
           and
           adored
           lowly
           before
           them
           .
           b
           7.
           
           In
           another
           rubrick
           of
           our
           consecration
           we
           have
           the
           cautels
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           anent
           the
           priests
           intention
           to
           consecrate
           ,
           expressely
           delivered
           unto
           us
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           that
           wicked
           sacrifice
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           which
           
           the
           Canon
           puts
           at
           the
           back
           of
           the
           Consecration
           ,
           the
           English
           banisheth
           it
           all
           utterly
           out
           of
           their
           book
           ;
           but
           the
           faction
           to
           shew
           their
           zeal
           in
           their
           reforming
           the
           errours
           of
           the
           English
           Church
           ,
           their
           mother
           ,
           puts
           downe
           here
           in
           our
           booke
           ;
           first
           at
           the
           backe
           of
           the
           consecration
           their
           memento
           and
           prayer
           of
           oblation
           .
           2.
           
           That
           prayer
           of
           Thanksgiving
           which
           the
           English
           sets
           after
           the
           Communion
           in
           a
           place
           ,
           where
           it
           cannot
           be
           possibly
           abused
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           in
           the
           Masse
           for
           a
           propitiatory
           sacrifice
           of
           Christs
           body
           and
           blood
           ,
           they
           transpose
           and
           set
           it
           just
           in
           the
           old
           place
           where
           it
           stood
           in
           the
           order
           of
           Sarum
           ,
           at
           the
           back
           of
           the
           consecration
           before
           the
           Communion
           .
           3.
           
           The
           clause
           of
           the
           Missall
           ,
           which
           for
           its
           savour
           of
           a
           〈◊〉
           presence
           ,
           the
           English
           put
           out
           of
           this
           prayer
           (
           
             may
             worthily
             receive
             the
             most
             precious
             body
             and
             blood
             of
             thy
             Son
             Christ
             Iesus
          
           )
           they
           have
           here
           restored
           .
           4.
           
           That
           wee
           may
           plainly
           understand
           ,
           that
           this
           prayer
           is
           so
           transpianted
           and
           supplyed
           for
           this
           very
           〈◊〉
           ,
           that
           it
           
           may
           serve
           as
           it
           did
           of
           old
           in
           the
           Missall
           for
           a
           prayer
           of
           oblation
           of
           that
           unbloudie
           sacrifice
           by
           the
           priest
           for
           the
           sinnes
           of
           the
           world
           .
           Behold
           the
           first
           eighth
           lines
           of
           it
           ,
           which
           of
           old
           it
           had
           in
           the
           Missall
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           reformation
           was
           scraped
           out
           by
           the
           English
           ,
           are
           plainly
           restored
           ,
           wherein
           we
           professe
           to
           make
           and
           over
           againe
           to
           make
           before
           〈◊〉
           divine
           Majestie
           a
           memoriall
           as
           Christ
           hath
           commanded
           .
           This
           making
           not
           only
           the
           Papists
           ,
           but
           Heylene
           speaking
           from
           Canterburie
           ,
           expones
           farre
           otherwise
           then
           either
           
             Andrewes
             ,
             Hooker
             ,
             Montagu
          
           ,
           or
           the
           grossest
           of
           the
           English
           Divines
           for
           a
           true
           ,
           proper
           ,
           corporall
           ,
           visible
           ,
           unbloody
           sacrificing
           of
           Christ
           ,
           for
           which
           first
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           then
           all
           Ministers
           are
           as
           truely
           priests
           though
           Evangelicall
           ,
           and
           after
           the
           order
           of
           Melchisedeck
           ,
           as
           ever
           the
           Sons
           of
           Aaron
           were
           under
           the
           Law
           ,
           and
           the
           Communion
           Table
           becomes
           as
           true
           and
           proper
           an
           Altar
           ,
           as
           ever
           was
           the
           brazen
           Altar
           of
           Moses
           .
           c
           5.
           
           After
           the
           consecration
           and
           oblation
           they
           put
           to
           the
           Lords
           prayer
           ,
           with
           the
           Missalls
           preface
           ,
           
             audemus
             dicere
          
           .
           Here
           the
           papists
           〈◊〉
           ,
           that
           their
           priest
           by
           consecration
           having
           transubstantiate
           the
           bread
           ,
           and
           by
           their
           memoriall
           of
           oblation
           having
           offered
           up
           in
           an
           unbloody
           sacrifice
           the
           body
           of
           Christ
           ,
           for
           the
           reconciliation
           of
           the
           Father
           ,
           doth
           then
           close
           his
           quiet
           whisperings
           ,
           his
           poore
           pipings
           ,
           and
           becomes
           bold
           to
           say
           with
           a
           loud
           voyce
           ,
           having
           Christ
           corporally
           in
           his
           hands
           ,
           
             Pater
             noster
          
           .
           The
           English
           to
           banish
           such
           absurdities
           ,
           put
           away
           that
           naughty
           preface
           ,
           and
           removed
           the
           prayer
           it selfe
           from
           that
           place
           :
           But
           our
           men
           to
           shew
           their
           Orthodoxie
           ,
           repone
           the
           prayer
           in
           the
           owne
           old
           
           place
           ,
           and
           set
           before
           it
           in
           a
           faire
           Rubrick
           the
           whole
           old
           preface
           .
           6.
           
           The
           first
           English
           prayer
           which
           stood
           before
           the
           consecration
           ,
           where
           the
           passages
           of
           eating
           Christs
           bodie
           ,
           and
           drinking
           Christs
           blood
           ,
           could
           not
           possibly
           ,
           by
           the
           very
           papists
           themselves
           ,
           be
           detorted
           to
           a
           corporall
           presence
           ,
           yet
           now
           in
           our
           book
           ,
           it
           must
           change
           the
           place
           ,
           and
           bee
           brought
           to
           its
           owne
           old
           stance
           ,
           after
           the
           consecration
           and
           oblation
           ,
           immediately
           before
           the
           communion
           ,
           as
           a
           prayer
           of
           humble
           accesse
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           part
           of
           the
           Masse
           I
           spake
           of
           ,
           was
           the
           
           Communion
           ;
           see
           how
           here
           our
           men
           change
           the
           English
           booke
           :
           The
           English
           indeed
           in
           giving
           the
           Elements
           to
           the
           people
           ,
           retaine
           the
           Masse
           words
           ,
           but
           to
           prevent
           any
           mischiefe
           that
           could
           arise
           in
           the
           peoples
           minde
           from
           their
           sound
           of
           a
           corporall
           presence
           ,
           they
           put
           in
           at
           the
           distribution
           of
           both
           the
           elements
           ,
           two
           golden
           sentences
           ,
           of
           the
           hearts
           eating
           by
           faith
           ,
           of
           the
           soules
           drinking
           in
           remembrance
           .
           Our
           men
           being
           nothing
           afraid
           for
           the
           peoples
           beliefe
           of
           a
           corporall
           presence
           ,
           have
           pulled
           out
           of
           their
           hands
           and
           scraped
           out
           of
           our
           booke
           both
           these
           antidotes
           .
           2.
           
           The
           Masse
           words
           of
           Christs
           body
           and
           blood
           in
           the
           act
           of
           communion
           ,
           being
           quite
           of
           the
           English
           antidots
           against
           their
           〈◊〉
           ,
           must
           not
           stand
           in
           our
           booke
           simply
           ;
           but
           that
           the
           people
           
           may
           take
           extraordinary
           notice
           of
           these
           phrases
           ,
           there
           are
           two
           Rubricks
           set
           up
           to
           their
           backs
           ,
           obliging
           every
           Communicant
           with
           their
           owne
           mouth
           to
           say
           their
           Amen
           to
           them
           .
           3.
           
           The
           English
           enjoynes
           the
           Minister
           to
           give
           the
           people
           the
           elements
           in
           their
           owne
           hand
           ;
           ours
           scrapes
           out
           that
           clause
           ,
           and
           bid
           communicate
           the
           people
           in
           their
           owne
           order
           ,
           which
           imports
           not
           onely
           their
           removall
           from
           the
           Altar
           ,
           their
           standing
           without
           the
           Rail
           ,
           as
           prophane
           Laicks
           farre
           from
           the
           place
           ,
           and
           communion
           of
           the
           Priests
           ,
           but
           also
           openeth
           a
           faire
           doore
           to
           the
           popish
           practice
           ,
           of
           putting
           the
           elements
           not
           in
           the
           prophane
           hands
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           mouthes
           of
           the
           people
           ;
           this
           as
           the
           report
           goes
           ,
           they
           have
           well
           neer
           practised
           ;
           and
           no
           marvaile
           ,
           since
           already
           they
           professe
           that
           the
           people
           ought
           not
           with
           their
           fingers
           to
           touch
           these
           holy
           mysteries
           :
           See
           in
           the
           Supplement
           ,
           D.
           Kellets
           Tenets
           .
           4.
           
           The
           English
           permit
           the
           Curate
           to
           carry
           home
           the
           reliques
           of
           the
           bread
           and
           wine
           for
           his
           private
           use
           ,
           but
           such
           profanity
           by
           our
           booke
           is
           discharged
           :
           The
           consecrate
           elements
           are
           injoyned
           to
           be
           〈◊〉
           in
           the
           holy
           place
           by
           the
           priest
           alone
           ,
           and
           some
           of
           the
           Communicants
           that
           day
           ,
           whose
           mouths
           he
           esteemeth
           to
           be
           most
           holy
           :
           Yea
           ,
           for
           preventing
           of
           all
           dangers
           the
           cautele
           is
           put
           in
           ,
           that
           so
           few
           elements
           as
           may
           ,
           be
           consecrate
           .
           5.
           
           Our
           Booke
           will
           have
           the
           elements
           after
           the
           consecration
           covered
           with
           a
           Corporall
           ,
           the
           Church
           Linnings
           were
           never
           called
           Corporalls
           any
           where
           ,
           till
           Transubstantiation
           was
           borne
           ,
           neither
           carryed
           they
           that
           name
           in
           England
           ,
           till
           of
           late
           his
           Grace
           was
           pleased
           by
           the
           pen
           of
           his
           man
           Pocklingtonne
           and
           the
           like
           ,
           to
           disgrace
           them
           with
           that
           stile
           .
           
           6
           The
           English
           will
           have
           the
           Ministers
           and
           people
           to
           communicate
           in
           both
           kinds
           ;
           our
           booke
           enjoynes
           the
           Priest
           to
           receive
           in
           both
           kindes
           ,
           but
           the
           people
           onely
           in
           due
           order
           :
           This
           due
           order
           of
           the
           people
           ,
           opposite
           to
           the
           communion
           of
           the
           Priest
           in
           both
           kindes
           ,
           may
           import
           the
           removall
           of
           one
           kinde
           from
           the
           people
           ,
           so
           much
           the
           more
           may
           wee
           feare
           this
           sacriledge
           from
           their
           hands
           ,
           since
           they
           tell
           us
           ,
           that
           our
           onely
           ground
           for
           communicating
           of
           the
           people
           in
           both
           kindes
           is
           stark
           naught
           ,
           that
           for
           this
           practice
           there
           may
           well
           be
           tradition
           ,
           but
           Scripture
           there
           is
           none
           .
           d
           Also
           that
           in
           divers
           cases
           the
           ancient
           Church
           did
           lawfully
           give
           to
           the
           people
           the
           bread
           alone
           ,
           that
           the
           Sacrament
           after
           the
           publick
           communion
           ,
           was
           oft
           reserved
           to
           be
           sent
           to
           the
           sick
           ,
           to
           be
           taken
           at
           private
           occasions
           ,
           and
           laid
           up
           in
           the
           Church
           in
           a
           publicke
           repository
           .
           Now
           it
           is
           well
           knowne
           ,
           and
           the
           papists
           presse
           this
           upon
           us
           ,
           when
           they
           would
           rob
           the
           people
           of
           the
           cup
           ;
           that
           the
           wine
           was
           not
           sent
           to
           the
           sicke
           in
           a
           farre
           distance
           from
           the
           Church
           ,
           nor
           taken
           home
           by
           the
           people
           to
           be
           used
           with
           the
           bread
           in
           the
           times
           of
           straight
           ,
           nor
           set
           up
           in
           the
           Church
           in
           the
           Ciboir
           or
           Repositorie
           .
           These
           changes
           of
           the
           English
           Liturgy
           ,
           which
           the
           Canterburians
           have
           made
           ,
           in
           some
           few
           pages
           lying
           together
           of
           the
           Scottish
           service
           ,
           if
           they
           be
           either
           few
           or
           small
           ,
           your selfe
           pronounce
           the
           sentence
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           The
           last
           chapter
           ,
           containing
           the
           
             Canterburian
             maximes
             of
             Tyrannie
          
           .
        
         
           ONe
           of
           the
           great
           causes
           of
           Protestants
           separation
           from
           Rome
           ,
           is
           the
           tyranny
           of
           the
           Romish
           Clergie
           ,
           whereby
           they
           presse
           upon
           the
           verie
           conscience
           of
           their
           people
           ,
           a
           multitude
           of
           their
           own
           devices
           ,
           with
           the
           most
           extreame
           and
           rigorous
           censures
           which
           can
           be
           inflicted
           either
           upon
           bodies
           or
           soules
           .
           And
           for
           the
           more
           facilitating
           of
           their
           purposes
           ,
           they
           advance
           the
           secular
           power
           of
           Princes
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           Soveraigne
           Estates
           above
           all
           ,
           that
           themselves
           either
           crave
           or
           desire
           :
           alone
           for
           this
           end
           ,
           that
           their
           Clerks
           may
           ride
           upon
           the
           shoulders
           of
           Soveraignty
           ,
           to
           tread
           under
           the
           feet
           of
           their
           domination
           ;
           first
           the
           Subjects
           ,
           and
           then
           the
           Soveraignes
           themselves
           .
        
         
           How
           much
           our
           men
           are
           behinde
           the
           greatest
           tyrants
           
           that
           ever
           were
           in
           Rome
           ,
           let
           any
           pronounce
           ,
           when
           they
           have
           considered
           these
           their
           following
           maximes
           :
           They
           tell
           us
           ,
           first
           ,
           that
           the
           making
           of
           all
           Ecclesiastick
           constitutions
           doth
           belong
           alone
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           the
           Diocesse
           ,
           no
           lesse
           out
           of
           Synod
           than
           in
           Synod
           :
           That
           some
           of
           the
           inferiour
           Clergy
           may
           be
           called
           (
           if
           the
           Bishops
           please
           )
           to
           give
           their
           advice
           ,
           and
           deliberative
           voyce
           ;
           That
           the
           Prince
           may
           lend
           his
           power
           ,
           for
           confirming
           and
           executing
           of
           the
           constitutions
           made
           ;
           but
           for
           the
           worke
           of
           their
           making
           ,
           it
           is
           the
           Bishops
           priviledge
           ,
           belonging
           to
           them
           
           alone
           by
           Divine
           right
           .
           a
           2.
           
           That
           in
           a
           whole
           kingdome
           ,
           the
           Bishops
           alone
           ,
           without
           the
           privatie
           of
           any
           of
           the
           Clergie
           ,
           of
           any
           of
           the
           Laity
           ,
           may
           abolish
           all
           the
           Ecclesiasticall
           judicatories
           ,
           which
           the
           standing
           and
           unrepealed
           lawes
           ,
           which
           the
           constant
           customes
           ,
           ever
           since
           the
           reformation
           had
           setled
           ,
           and
           put
           in
           their
           roomenew
           forraigne
           Courts
           ,
           which
           the
           kingdome
           had
           never
           knowne
           ,
           scarce
           so
           much
           as
           by
           their
           name
           .
           b
           That
           at
           one
           stroke
           they
           may
           annull
           all
           the
           Acts
           of
           three
           or
           fourescore
           Nationall
           Assemblies
           ,
           and
           set
           up
           in
           their
           roome
           a
           Book
           of
           Canons
           
           of
           their
           owne
           devising
           .
           c
           That
           they
           may
           abolish
           all
           the
           formes
           used
           in
           the
           worship
           of
           God
           ,
           without
           any
           question
           for
           threescore
           yeeres
           and
           above
           ,
           both
           in
           the
           publicke
           prayers
           ,
           in
           the
           administration
           of
           the
           Sacraments
           ,
           in
           singing
           of
           Psalmes
           ,
           in
           preaching
           the
           Word
           ,
           in
           celebrating
           of
           marriage
           ,
           in
           visiting
           the
           sicke
           ,
           and
           in
           ordination
           of
           Ministers
           :
           neither
           this
           alone
           ,
           but
           that
           it
           is
           in
           their
           hand
           to
           impose
           in
           place
           of
           these
           accustomed
           formes
           ,
           foure
           new
           Bookes
           of
           their
           owne
           ;
           of
           Service
           ,
           of
           Psalmes
           ,
           of
           Ordination
           ,
           of
           Homilies
           .
           All
           this
           our
           Bishops
           in
           Scotland
           have
           done
           ,
           and
           to
           this
           day
           ,
           not
           any
           of
           them
           to
           our
           knowledge
           can
           bee
           moved
           to
           confesse
           in
           that
           deed
           ,
           any
           faile
           against
           the
           rules
           either
           of
           equity
           or
           justice
           ,
           what
           ever
           slips
           of
           imprudence
           there
           may
           bee
           therein
           .
           And
           all
           this
           they
           have
           done
           at
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterburies
           direction
           ,
           as
           we
           shall
           make
           good
           by
           his
           owne
           hand
           ,
           if
           ever
           we
           shall
           bee
           so
           happy
           as
           to
           be
           permitted
           to
           produce
           his
           owne
           authentick
           autographs
           ,
           before
           the
           Parliament
           of
           England
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           Judicatorie
           that
           his
           Majestie
           will
           command
           to
           cognosce
           upon
           this
           our
           allegeance
           .
           Readily
           Rome
           it selfe
           cannot
           be
           able
           in
           any
           one
           age
           to
           parallell
           this
           work
           which
           our
           faction
           did
           bring
           forth
           in
           one
           yeare
           .
           It
           is
           a
           bundle
           of
           so
           many
           ,
           so
           various
           ,
           and
           so
           heavie
           acts
           of
           tyrannie
           .
           Certainly
           ,
           England
           was
           never
           acquaint
           with
           the
           like
           ;
           we
           see
           what
           great
           trouble
           it
           hath
           cost
           his
           Grace
           ,
           to
           get
           thorow
           there
           one
           poore
           Ceremonie
           of
           setting
           the
           Communion
           Table
           Altar
           wayes
           ;
           for
           there
           themselves
           dare
           not
           denie
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           repugnant
           to
           the
           established
           Lawes
           of
           their
           Church
           and
           
           state
           for
           any
           Bishop
           ;
           yea
           ,
           for
           all
           the
           Bishops
           being
           joyned
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           poorest
           Canon
           without
           the
           voyces
           of
           their
           Convocation
           house
           ,
           or
           nationall
           Assembly
           ;
           yea
           ,
           without
           the
           Parliaments
           good
           pleasure
           .
           d
           3.
           
           They
           avow
           that
           all
           their
           injunctions
           though
           so
           many
           and
           so
           new
           ,
           yet
           they
           are
           so
           holy
           and
           so
           just
           ,
           that
           the
           whole
           kingdome
           in
           conscience
           mustembrace
           them
           all
           as
           the
           commands
           of
           God.
           e
           That
           whoever
           will
           be
           so
           peart
           as
           to
           affirme
           in
           any
           one
           of
           them
           ,
           the
           least
           contrariety
           to
           the
           Word
           of
           God
           ,
           he
           must
           have
           no
           lesse
           censure
           then
           the
           great
           excommunication
           ,
           from
           which
           he
           must
           never
           be
           relaxed
           but
           by
           the
           Bishops
           own
           mouth
           ,
           after
           his
           publick
           repentance
           and
           revocation
           of
           so
           vile
           an
           errour
           .
           f
           That
           his
           bodily
           and
           pecuniall
           penaltie
           shall
           be
           at
           the
           free-will
           and
           discretion
           of
           the
           
           Bishop
           .
           g
           That
           the
           worthiest
           men
           of
           any
           liberall
           profession
           get
           favour
           to
           lose
           but
           their
           eares
           ,
           to
           have
           their
           nosesslit
           ,
           and
           cheeks
           burnt
           for
           contradicting
           their
           innovations
           .
           h
           That
           the
           furthest
           banishments
           for
           tearme
           of
           life
           ,
           is
           a
           priviledge
           which
           their
           indulgence
           may
           grant
           but
           to
           few
           .
           i
           That
           the
           vilest
           dungeons
           ,
           irons
           ,
           whippings
           ,
           bread
           and
           water
           ,
           chaining
           to
           posts
           without
           all
           company
           ,
           day
           or
           night
           in
           the
           coldest
           and
           longest
           winters
           ,
           is
           but
           a
           part
           of
           their
           opposers
           deserving
           .
           k
           That
           the
           greatest
           Nobles
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           ought
           in
           Law
           to
           forfeit
           their
           Life
           and
           Estate
           ,
           if
           they
           be
           so
           bold
           as
           to
           put
           their
           hand
           to
           a
           supplication
           unto
           their
           gratious
           
           Prince
           against
           their
           practices
           .
           l
           That
           all
           this
           is
           but
           just
           severity
           ,
           and
           the
           very
           expedient
           meane
           to
           advance
           their
           cause
           ,
           which
           they
           glory
           hath
           well
           neere
           already
           close
           undone
           their
           opposites
           ,
           m
           and
           which
           they
           boast
           shall
           still
           bee
           used
           .
           n
           But
           alas
           it
           is
           gone
           now
           beyond
           boasts
           ,
           when
           they
           are
           the
           second
           time
           upon
           the
           very
           poynt
           to
           kill
           millions
           of
           the
           Kings
           best
           Subjects
           ,
           to
           dash
           together
           all
           his
           dominions
           in
           a
           bloody
           warre
           ,
           as
           pitchers
           one
           upon
           
           another
           ,
           for
           the
           confirmation
           of
           their
           intollerable
           tyranny
           ,
           where
           long
           it
           hath
           beene
           tottering
           ,
           and
           the
           reerection
           of
           it
           where
           it
           s
           owne
           unsupportable
           weight
           hath
           caused
           it
           to
           fall
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           the
           power
           of
           Princes
           ,
           the
           most
           of
           those
           
           this
           day
           who
           are
           Christians
           ,
           and
           especially
           our
           gracious
           Soveraigne
           ,
           are
           very
           well
           content
           to
           bee
           limited
           within
           the
           bounds
           of
           the
           lawes
           which
           themselves
           and
           their
           predecessors
           have
           setled
           in
           the
           Church
           and
           State
           of
           their
           dominions
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           preservation
           of
           those
           Lawes
           and
           of
           their
           subjects
           liberties
           Ecclesiastick
           and
           Civill
           ,
           according
           to
           them
           ,
           the
           greatest
           glory
           of
           their
           prerogative
           Royall
           .
           o
           To
           give
           assurance
           of
           their
           resolution
           never
           to
           abolish
           any
           old
           ,
           or
           bring
           in
           any
           new
           act
           ,
           either
           in
           church
           or
           state
           without
           the
           concurrence
           of
           Assemblies
           and
           Parliaments
           .
           p
           Neither
           to
           impose
           any
           taxation
           on
           their
           subjects
           goods
           without
           their
           free
           consent
           thereto
           given
           by
           their
           Commissioners
           in
           Parliament
           ,
           q
           the
           extending
           of
           the
           prerogative
           to
           the
           
           making
           of
           new
           lawes
           ,
           or
           abolishing
           of
           old
           ,
           to
           the
           imposing
           of
           taxes
           by
           simple
           proclamation
           without
           Parliament
           ,
           our
           Prince
           doth
           so
           farre
           abhorre
           ,
           that
           he
           condemned
           a
           certaine
           writ
           for
           importing
           his
           Majesties
           entertainment
           of
           such
           motions
           ;
           yea
           ,
           his
           Majestie
           by
           his
           Attourney
           generall
           called
           the
           Earle
           of
           Bedford
           and
           other
           noble
           personages
           to
           censure
           ,
           for
           keeping
           such
           a
           writ
           wherein
           did
           lye
           so
           pernicious
           positions
           .
           r
           Where
           some
           Princes
           misled
           through
           passion
           and
           mis-information
           have
           deviat
           so
           far
           from
           the
           path
           of
           justice
           ,
           as
           to
           intend
           by
           violence
           and
           armes
           the
           overthrow
           of
           the
           true
           religion
           and
           ancient
           liberties
           of
           their
           subjects
           ,
           the
           opposition
           which
           the
           subjects
           are
           forced
           to
           make
           in
           this
           case
           against
           the
           oppression
           of
           their
           Prince
           ,
           our
           gracious
           Soveraigne
           hath
           been
           so
           farre
           ever
           from
           counting
           of
           it
           rebellion
           ,
           of
           which
           crime
           the
           greatest
           royalists
           in
           England
           wont
           alway
           to
           absolve
           it
           ,
           s
           that
           his
           
           Majestie
           hath
           thought
           meet
           before
           all
           Europe
           after
           the
           example
           of
           his
           glorious
           Father
           ,
           and
           renowned
           predecesrix
           Elizabeth
           ,
           to
           give
           his
           countenance
           ,
           aid
           ,
           and
           powerfull
           assistance
           to
           them
           all
           ,
           when
           their
           just
           grievances
           and
           feares
           were
           laid
           out
           before
           his
           Throne
           .
           If
           so
           be
           King
           Charles
           had
           esteemed
           the
           late
           wars
           in
           France
           of
           the
           protestants
           against
           their
           king
           ,
           the
           present
           wars
           of
           Holland
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           high
           Dutches
           against
           the
           Spaniard
           and
           Emperour
           an
           unlawfull
           defence
           ,
           let
           be
           a
           trayterous
           insurrection
           of
           Subjects
           against
           their
           Soveraignes
           ;
           Weepresuppone
           his
           Majesties
           justice
           would
           have
           beene
           loath
           ever
           to
           have
           defiled
           his
           Scepter
           by
           supporting
           them
           all
           with
           men
           and
           moneyes
           ,
           as
           oft
           he
           hath
           done
           ,
           and
           yet
           doth
           avow
           the
           deed
           .
        
         
           While
           our
           gracious
           prince
           is
           so
           farre
           inflamed
           with
           
           hatred
           against
           all
           tyranny
           ,
           yet
           behold
           this
           wicked
           fiction
           how
           carefully
           they
           goe
           about
           by
           all
           the
           meanes
           they
           can
           ,
           to
           draw
           his
           royall
           mind
           to
           that
           
           which
           naturally
           it
           doth
           so
           much
           abhorre
           :
           For
           they
           tell
           us
           first
           ,
           that
           the
           power
           of
           all
           true
           Kings
           is
           so
           simply
           absolute
           and
           illimitate
           ,
           that
           for
           any
           man
           to
           reason
           what
           they
           may
           not
           ,
           is
           a
           crime
           no
           lesse
           than
           treason
           ;
           that
           they
           are
           far
           above
           all
           Law.
           t
           2.
           
           That
           the
           Oath
           which
           a
           Prince
           makes
           to
           keepe
           the
           Lawes
           is
           but
           a
           personall
           deed
           ,
           which
           cannot
           oblige
           his
           successor
           ,
           that
           his
           Oath
           and
           promise
           at
           his
           Coronation
           to
           keepe
           the
           Lawes
           ,
           is
           to
           be
           exponed
           of
           his
           resolution
           to
           make
           his
           lawes
           to
           be
           keeped
           by
           others
           :
           That
           all
           the
           oathes
           and
           promises
           he
           makes
           at
           his
           coronation
           are
           but
           of
           his
           meere
           free-will
           and
           arbitrement
           ,
           that
           by
           them
           all
           no
           true
           covenant
           or
           paction
           can
           bee
           inferred
           betwixt
           the
           King
           and
           his
           subjects
           .
           w
           3.
           
           That
           the
           prince
           alone
           is
           the
           Law-giver
           ,
           
           both
           in
           Church
           and
           State.
           x
           4.
           
           That
           in
           matters
           Ecclesiasticall
           they
           themselves
           alone
           without
           the
           advice
           of
           any
           of
           the
           Clergie
           may
           lawfully
           make
           what
           Canons
           they
           please
           ,
           and
           compell
           their
           Clergie
           to
           embrace
           them
           .
           y
           5.
           
           That
           it
           is
           a
           part
           of
           the
           Kings
           prerogative
           to
           have
           power
           to
           impose
           upon
           all
           his
           Subjects
           such
           Confessions
           of
           Faith
           ,
           such
           Liturgies
           ,
           such
           Canons
           as
           he
           thinks
           meetest
           without
           the
           advice
           of
           any
           Church
           Assembly
           .
           z
           6.
           
           When
           it
           is
           his
           pleasure
           to
           call
           an
           Assembly
           ,
           the
           members
           of
           that
           Ecclesiastick
           Court
           are
           onely
           such
           as
           hee
           is
           pleased
           to
           call
           ,
           whether
           of
           the
           Clergie
           or
           of
           the
           Laity
           .
           &
           7.
           
           That
           when
           they
           are
           called
           onely
           the
           Princes
           voyce
           is
           decisive
           ,
           
           the
           voyce
           of
           all
           the
           rest
           at
           most
           but
           consultive
           ,
           or
           if
           any
           of
           them
           become
           decisive
           ,
           it
           is
           by
           the
           Princes
           favour
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           permission
           .
           a
           8.
           
           That
           Church
           Assemblies
           are
           onely
           politick
           Conventions
           ,
           not
           grounded
           upon
           any
           Divine
           right
           ,
           and
           so
           to
           bee
           used
           ,
           or
           disused
           as
           the
           prince
           shall
           thinke
           expedient
           .
           b
           9.
           
           That
           it
           is
           in
           the
           power
           of
           all
           Soveraignes
           ,
           whether
           Monarchick
           ,
           Aristocratick
           ,
           or
           Democratick
           ,
           to
           appoynt
           for
           the
           government
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           their
           dominions
           such
           Officers
           and
           Spirituall
           Courts
           ,
           as
           they
           finde
           most
           meet
           ,
           and
           agreeable
           to
           their
           temporall
           estates
           ,
           to
           erect
           Bishops
           ,
           and
           put
           downe
           Presbyteries
           ,
           to
           erect
           Presbyteries
           ,
           and
           put
           downe
           Bishops
           .
           c
           10.
           
           That
           all
           this
           power
           to
           conclude
           every
           ecclesiastick
           affaire
           which
           can
           bee
           subject
           to
           the
           jurisdiction
           of
           any
           ecclesiasticall
           Synod
           doth
           belong
           alike
           to
           all
           Soveraignes
           ,
           whether
           
             Turkish
             ,
             Iewish
             ,
             Pagan
             ,
             Hereticall
             ,
          
           or
           Christian
           and
           Orthodox
           .
           d
        
         
         
           Concerning
           the
           Kings
           power
           in
           matter
           of
           State
           ,
           
           they
           teach
           first
           ,
           that
           a
           Parliament
           is
           but
           his
           arbitrarie
           Councell
           ,
           which
           in
           making
           or
           annulling
           of
           his
           Lawes
           hee
           may
           use
           or
           not
           use
           as
           hee
           pleaseth
           .
           e
           2.
           
           When
           hee
           is
           pleased
           to
           call
           a
           Parliament
           ,
           it
           is
           his
           due
           right
           by
           his
           letter
           to
           ordaine
           such
           Barons
           to
           be
           Commissioners
           for
           the
           Shires
           ,
           and
           such
           Citizens
           to
           bee
           Commissioners
           for
           Burrowes
           as
           hee
           shall
           bee
           pleased
           to
           name
           .
           f
           3.
           
           That
           hee
           may
           lawsully
           exact
           when
           he
           hath
           to
           doe
           what
           portion
           of
           his
           subjects
           
           goods
           hee
           thinks
           meet
           ,
           and
           by
           himselfe
           alone
           ,
           may
           make
           such
           Lawes
           for
           exactions
           in
           times
           to
           come
           ,
           as
           seemes
           to
           him
           best
           .
           g
           4.
           
           That
           no
           subject
           of
           his
           Kingdome
           can
           have
           any
           hereditarie
           jurisdiction
           ,
           but
           any
           jurisdiction
           that
           either
           any
           of
           the
           Nobilitie
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           Magistrate
           or
           Officer
           possesseth
           ,
           they
           have
           it
           alone
           during
           his
           pleasure
           ;
           that
           at
           his
           presence
           ,
           the
           power
           of
           all
           others
           must
           cease
           ,
           and
           at
           his
           death
           evanish
           ,
           and
           be
           quite
           extinguished
           ,
           till
           by
           his
           successors
           by
           new
           gift
           it
           bee
           renewed
           .
           h
           5.
           
           That
           Scotland
           is
           a
           subdued
           Nation
           ,
           that
           Fergus
           our
           first
           King
           did
           conquer
           us
           by
           
           the
           sword
           ,
           and
           establish
           an
           absolute
           Monarchie
           for
           himselfe
           and
           his
           heires
           ,
           giving
           to
           us
           what
           Lawes
           he
           thought
           meetest
           .
           i
           6.
           
           That
           all
           the
           Lands
           in
           Scotland
           were
           once
           the
           Kings
           propertie
           ,
           and
           what
           thereof
           hath
           beene
           given
           out
           for
           service
           ,
           yet
           remaines
           his
           owne
           by
           a
           manifold
           right
           .
           k
           7.
           
           That
           to
           denie
           any
           of
           the
           named
           parts
           of
           this
           power
           to
           the
           King
           ,
           is
           to
           destroy
           his
           Monarchike
           government
           ,
           to
           dethrone
           him
           and
           make
           him
           no
           King
           ,
           to
           subject
           him
           to
           his
           people
           ,
           and
           make
           them
           his
           Masters
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           Collegues
           in
           the
           Empire
           .
           l
           But
           thankes
           be
           to
           God
           that
           our
           gracious
           prince
           hath
           so
           oft
           declared
           himselfe
           to
           bee
           farre
           from
           all
           such
           thoughts
           ;
           yea
           ,
           that
           my
           Lord
           of
           Canterburie
           himselfe
           ,
           is
           forced
           whiles
           to
           let
           drop
           from
           his
           fingers
           cleane
           contrarie
           maximes
           .
           m
        
         
           Lastly
           ,
           they
           teach
           us
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           resistance
           ,
           
           first
           ,
           that
           doe
           the
           Prince
           what
           hee
           will
           ,
           he
           may
           never
           be
           resisted
           by
           any
           or
           all
           his
           Subjects
           ,
           that
           not
           onely
           a
           private
           man
           must
           give
           over
           all
           defence
           ,
           though
           most
           innocent
           of
           his
           owne
           life
           against
           the
           prince
           
           his
           unjust
           violence
           ;
           n
           but
           the
           whole
           State
           can
           doe
           nought
           without
           rebellion
           against
           GOD
           ,
           but
           flee
           or
           suffer
           ,
           when
           the
           prince
           ,
           whether
           by
           himselfe
           or
           his
           Officers
           doth
           destroy
           the
           true
           religion
           established
           by
           all
           Lawes
           ,
           and
           the
           liberties
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           deare
           bought
           of
           old
           ,
           and
           peaceably
           brooked
           in
           many
           ages
           ,
           also
           the
           lives
           of
           many
           thousands
           of
           the
           best
           Subjects
           ,
           without
           the
           pretence
           or
           colour
           of
           any
           just
           cause
           .
           o
           Againe
           ,
           that
           all
           this
           subjection
           must
           be
           used
           ,
           not
           onely
           to
           our
           native
           King
           ,
           but
           to
           any
           forraine
           usurper
           who
           can
           get
           footing
           among
           us
           ,
           and
           it
           were
           the
           Kings
           of
           Spaine
           ,
           as
           their
           predecessors
           the
           hereticall
           Gothish
           Kings
           got
           footing
           in
           the
           Roman
           Empire
           .
           p
           That
           even
           against
           them
           ,
           the
           States
           of
           a
           Land
           with
           a
           good
           conscience
           could
           use
           no
           defence
           ,
           though
           before
           their
           eyes
           ,
           they
           should
           see
           them
           execute
           the
           cruell
           tyrannies
           of
           Nebuchadnezzar
           ,
           put
           out
           the
           eyes
           of
           the
           King
           ,
           kill
           〈◊〉
           Children
           ,
           lead
           himselfe
           and
           his
           Nobles
           away
           to
           a
           far
           land
           in
           fetters
           :
           Though
           with
           Nero
           ,
           q
           for
           their
           mere
           pleasure
           they
           should
           set
           the
           royallcitie
           in
           
           a
           faire
           fire
           ,
           or
           execute
           the
           plot
           of
           〈◊〉
           by
           murthering
           all
           the
           seed
           of
           the
           Iewes
           ,
           all
           zealous
           protestants
           up
           and
           downe
           the
           land
           in
           one
           day
           .
           Such
           maximes
           exceedingly
           opposite
           to
           the
           honour
           of
           God
           ,
           the
           safetie
           of
           the
           Kings
           person
           and
           Crowne
           ,
           the
           welfare
           of
           the
           people
           ,
           these
           men
           cause
           to
           bee
           printed
           and
           let
           them
           goe
           athort
           without
           any
           censure
           at
           these
           times
           ,
           when
           by
           royall
           decreets
           ,
           they
           have
           pulled
           into
           their
           hands
           the
           full
           commandement
           of
           all
           the
           presses
           ,
           and
           the
           absolute
           jurisdiction
           over
           all
           the
           Book-sellers
           shops
           in
           the
           Kingdome
           ,
           and
           〈◊〉
           frequently
           theirzeale
           against
           any
           bookes
           that
           give
           but
           the
           least
           touch
           to
           their
           mitres
           ,
           by
           inflicting
           no
           lesse
           censure
           than
           fire
           upon
           the
           books
           ,
           pilloring
           and
           nose-slitting
           on
           the
           Authors
           ,
           and
           whipping
           thorow
           the
           streets
           on
           the
           carriers
           .
        
         
           All
           these
           extraordinarie
           prerogatives
           ,
           whereby
           
           the
           faction
           advanceth
           supreme
           Magistrates
           so
           neere
           unto
           God
           ,
           and
           their
           favourites
           so
           far
           above
           the
           skies
           ,
           r
           seeme
           to
           flow
           not
           from
           any
           love
           they
           carrie
           either
           to
           their
           crowns
           or
           the
           royall
           heads
           that
           beare
           them
           ,
           but
           meerely
           out
           of
           their
           selfe-respect
           to
           their
           owne
           ambition
           and
           greed
           ,
           that
           Soveraignty
           being
           advanced
           to
           an
           unmeasurable
           height
           ,
           may
           be
           a
           statelier
           horse
           for
           them
           to
           ride
           upon
           ,
           in
           their
           glorious
           triumphings
           above
           all
           that
           is
           called
           God.
           For
           otherwise
           ,
           yee
           may
           see
           how
           farre
           they
           depresse
           all
           Soveraignes
           when
           they
           are
           layed
           in
           the
           ballance
           with
           themselves
           ;
           they
           tell
           us
           that
           the
           King
           can
           bee
           no
           more
           the
           head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           than
           the
           boy
           that
           rubs
           
           their
           horse
           heeles
           .
           s
           2.
           
           That
           the
           heart
           whence
           the
           native
           life
           and
           vigour
           of
           the
           Ecclesiastick
           Lawes
           doth
           flow
           ,
           is
           alone
           the
           Bishops
           ,
           and
           not
           the
           King.
           t
           3.
           
           That
           Kings
           and
           Emperours
           ought
           to
           reverence
           ;
           yea
           ,
           to
           adore
           Bishops
           ,
           and
           to
           pay
           them
           tributes
           .
           w
           4.
           
           That
           everie
           Bishop
           is
           a
           Prince
           and
           a
           Monarch
           ,
           as
           farre
           in
           dignitie
           above
           the
           greatest
           secular
           Prince
           ,
           as
           the
           soule
           above
           the
           body
           ,
           or
           God
           above
           man.
           
           x
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
           Revised
           according
           to
           the
           ordinance
           of
           the
           generall
           Assembly
           ,
           by
           me
           
             Mr.
             A.
             Jhonston
          
           Clerk
           thereto
           .
        
         
           Edinb
           .
           1.
           of
           April
           1640.
           
        
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A67904-e1530
           
             Wee
             did
             expect
             nothing
             lesse
             then
             war.
             
          
           
             Wee
             have
             committed
             no
             〈◊〉
             that
             〈◊〉
             be
             〈◊〉
             with
             any
             goodly
             colour
             〈◊〉
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             late
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             Compassion
             ,
             hope
             ,
             and
             all
             reason
             call
             now
             for
             peace
             at
             home
             ,
             〈◊〉
             at
             last
             we
             may
             get
             some
             order
             of
             our
             〈◊〉
             a
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             The
             Canterburian
             faction
             〈◊〉
             veth
             not
             so
             well
             of
             England
             that
             armes
             in
             their
             favour
             ought
             to
             be
             taken
             against
             Scotland
             .
          
           
             Wee
             〈◊〉
             to
             instruct
             by
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             our
             partie
             their
             unsupportable
             crimes
             .
          
           
             Arme
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             taken
             in
             so
             evill
             a
             cause
             can
             not
             but
             end
             in
             an
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             In
             this
             〈◊〉
             of
             time
             very
             poore
             〈◊〉
             without
             presumption
             may
             venture
             to
             speake
             to
             Parliaments
             .
          
           
             An
             offer
             de
             .
             serving
             〈◊〉
             audience
             .
          
           
             The
             silence
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             Divines
             is
             〈◊〉
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A67904-e2650
           
             Our
             adversaries
             de
             cline
             to
             answer
             ou
             greatest
             challenge
             .
          
           
             The
             scope
             of
             the
             treatise
             .
          
           
             All
             our
             〈◊〉
             ,
             but
             one
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             The
             Major
             thereof
             .
          
           
             a
             Neither
             shall
             We
             ever
             give
             way
             to
             the
             authorizing
             of
             any
             thing
             ,
             whereby
             any
             innovation
             may
             steale
             or
             〈◊〉
             into
             the
             Church
             ,
             〈◊〉
             shall
             preserve
             that
             unitie
             of
             doctrine
             and
             discipline
             ,
             established
             in
             Queen
             〈◊〉
             Reigne
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             have
             stood
             and
             flourished
             ,
             since
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               the
               〈◊〉
               of
               England
               ,
            
             1628.
             and
             therefore
             once
             for
             all
             ,
             we
             have
             thought
             sit
             to
             declare
             ,
             and
             hereby
             to
             assure
             all
             our
             good
             people
             ,
             that
             we
             neither
             were
             ,
             are
             ,
             nor
             ever
             (
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             )
             shall
             be
             stained
             with
             Popish
             superstition
             ,
             〈◊〉
             by
             the
             contrary
             ,
             are
             resolved
             to
             maintain
             the
             true
             Protestant
             Religion
             ,
             already
             professed
             within
             this
             our
             ancient
             Kingdome
             .
             We
             neither
             intend
             innovation
             in
             Religion
             or
             Laws
             ,
             
               Proclam
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             8.
             1638.
             
             〈◊〉
             all
             our
             good
             Subjects
             of
             the
             least
             suspition
             of
             any
             intention
             in
             us
             ,
             to
             innovate
             any
             thing
             either
             in
             Religion
             or
             Laws
             ,
             and
             to
             satisfie
             not
             only
             their
             desires
             ,
             but
             even
             their
             doubts
             .
             Wee
             have
             discharged
             ,
             &c.
             
               Proclam
               .
               Septemb.
            
             22.
             1638.
             and
             to
             give
             all
             his
             Majesties
             people
             full
             assurance
             ,
             that
             hee
             never
             intended
             to
             admit
             any
             alteration
             or
             change
             in
             the
             true
             Religion
             professed
             within
             this
             Kingdome
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             may
             be
             truly
             and
             fully
             satisfied
             of
             the
             reality
             of
             his
             intentions
             ,
             and
             integrity
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             his
             Majesty
             hath
             been
             pleased
             to
             require
             and
             command
             all
             his
             good
             Subjects
             ,
             to
             subscribe
             the
             Confession
             of
             Faith
             ,
             formerly
             signed
             by
             his
             deare
             Father
             ,
             in
             Anno
             1580
             :
             and
             it
             is
             his
             Majesties
             will
             that
             this
             be
             insert
             and
             registred
             in
             the
             Books
             of
             Assembly
             ,
             as
             a
             testimony
             to
             posterity
             ,
             not
             only
             of
             the
             sincerity
             of
             his
             intertions
             to
             the
             said
             true
             Religion
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             his
             resolution
             to
             mayntain
             and
             defend
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             his
             Subjects
             in
             the
             profession
             thereof
             ,
             
               Proclam
               .
               Decemb.
            
             13.
             1638.
             
          
           
             b
             If
             any
             prelate
             would
             labour
             to
             bring
             in
             the
             superstitions
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             I
             doe
             not
             only
             leave
             him
             to
             Gods
             iudgment
             ,
             but
             if
             his
             irreligious
             〈◊〉
             can
             be
             discovered
             ,
             also
             to
             shame
             and
             severe
             panishment
             from
             the
             State
             ,
             and
             in
             any
             just
             way
             ,
             no
             mans
             hands
             should
             be
             sooner
             against
             him
             then
             mine
             .
          
           
             The
             Minor.
             
          
           
             The
             conclusion
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A67904-e3070
           
             〈◊〉
             a
             great
             and
             dangerous
             innovation
             of
             〈◊〉
             
          
           
             King
             James
             judgment
             of
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             a
             Declarat
             .
             contra
             〈…〉
             p.
             15.
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             b
             Ibid.
             p.
             12.
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             c
             Ibid.
             pag.
             18
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             d
             Ibid.
             pag.
             12.
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             e
             Ibid.
             pag.
             14.
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             f
             Ibid.
             pag.
             15.
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             The
             great
             increase
             of
             Arminians
             in
             Scotland
             ,
             by
             Canterburies
             mean.
             
          
           
             The
             Kings
             name
             stolne
             by
             〈◊〉
             to
             the
             defence
             of
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             g
             Large
             Declar.
             pag.
             74.
             
             According
             to
             their
             weake
             and
             〈◊〉
             power
             they
             did
             determine
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Predestination
             ,
             Universall
             Grace
             ,
             irresistibility
             of
             Grace
             ,
             concurrance
             of
             Free
             Will
             with
             Grace
             ,
             totall
             and
             finall
             perseverance
             in
             Grace
             ,
             and
             other
             such
             like
             intricate
             points
             ,
             that
             some
             men
             would
             be
             loth
             to
             live
             so
             long
             as
             they
             could
             make
             them
             understand
             them
             .
          
           
             h
             P.
             16.
             
             Some
             Ministers
             were
             deprived
             for
             〈◊〉
             ,
             a
             course
             never
             heard
             of
             in
             any
             place
             where
             any
             rule
             of
             justice
             was
             observed
             ,
             that
             a
             Minister
             should
             bee
             deprived
             for
             holding
             any
             Tenet
             which
             is
             not
             against
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             that
             Church
             wherein
             hee
             liveth
             ,
             and
             that
             before
             it
             bee
             prohibited
             and
             condemned
             by
             that
             Church
             .
             Now
             there
             is
             nothing
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             that
             Church
             against
             these
             Tenets
             .
          
           
             i
             Pag.
             303.
             
             They
             could
             make
             no
             answer
             when
             it
             was
             told
             them
             these
             Tenets
             could
             not
             be
             counted
             Popish
             ,
             concerning
             which
             ,
             or
             the
             chiese
             of
             which
             as
             learned
             Papists
             as
             any
             in
             the
             World
             ,
             the
             〈◊〉
             and
             Jesuits
             did
             differ
             as
             much
             as
             the
             Protestants
             ,
             and
             that
             those
             which
             doe
             adhere
             to
             the
             Augustan
             Confession
             did
             hold
             that
             side
             of
             those
             Tenets
             which
             the
             Arminians
             did
             hold
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             were
             very
             farre
             from
             being
             Papists
             ,
             being
             the
             first
             Protestants
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             was
             against
             all
             sense
             to
             condemne
             that
             for
             Popery
             which
             was
             held
             by
             many
             Protestant
             Churches
             ,
             and
             rejected
             by
             many
             learned
             Papists
             .
          
           
             〈◊〉
             is
             the
             author
             of
             this
             part
             of
             the
             Declaration
             
          
           
             The
             Irish
             Church
             infected
             with
             〈◊〉
             by
             Canterburie
             .
          
           
             The
             Canterburians
             in
             England
             ,
             teach
             the
             first
             and
             second
             Article
             of
             Arminianisme
             .
          
           
             k
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             60
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             my
             through
             and
             sincere
             〈◊〉
             from
             the
             faction
             of
             novellizing
             〈◊〉
             ,
             but
             in
             no
             point
             〈◊〉
             then
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             desperate
             Predestination
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             70.
             
             I
             see
             no
             reason
             why
             any
             Divines
             of
             our
             〈◊〉
             present
             at
             the
             Syned
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             should
             take
             any
             〈◊〉
             at
             my
             〈◊〉
             ,
             who
             had
             no
             authority
             that
             I
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             to
             conclude
             me
             ,
             〈◊〉
             then
             I
             doe
             at
             them
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             from
             mee
             in
             their
             〈◊〉
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               in
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               .
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             71.
             
             I
             am
             sure
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             never
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             in
             her
             〈◊〉
             .
             
               Ibid
               pag
            
             72
             ,
             at
             the
             Conference
             of
             Hampton
             Court
             ,
             before
             his
             Majesty
             ,
             by
             Doctor
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             doctrine
             of
             irrespective
             Predestination
             was
             stiled
             against
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             then
             urged
             by
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             a
             desperare
             doctrine
             without
             reproofe
             or
             taxation
             of
             any
             .
             
               Ibid.
               〈◊〉
            
             50.
             your
             absolute
             ,
             necessary
             ,
             determined
             ,
             irresistible
             ,
             irrespective
             Decree
             of
             God
             to
             call
             ,
             save
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             Saint
             〈◊〉
             ,
             for
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             without
             any
             consideration
             had
             of
             ,
             or
             regard
             unto
             his
             〈◊〉
             ,
             obedience
             ,
             〈◊〉
             :
             I
             say
             it
             truly
             ,
             it
             is
             the
             fancie
             of
             some
             〈◊〉
             men
             .
          
           
             l
             
               Ibid.
               〈◊〉
            
             61.
             64.
             
             I
             shall
             as
             I
             can
             briefly
             set
             downe
             what
             I
             conceive
             of
             this
             act
             of
             Gods
             Decree
             of
             Predestination
             ,
             setting
             by
             all
             execution
             of
             purpose
             :
             thus
             far
             we
             have
             gone
             ,
             and
             no
             word
             yet
             of
             Predestination
             ,
             for
             how
             could
             it
             be
             in
             a
             paritie
             ?
             There
             must
             be
             first
             conceived
             a
             disproportion
             ,
             before
             there
             can
             be
             conceived
             〈◊〉
             election
             or
             dereliction
             :
             God
             had
             compassion
             of
             men
             in
             the
             masse
             of
             perdition
             ,
             upon
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ,
               &
               genera
               〈◊〉
               ,
            
             and
             out
             of
             his
             mercy
             in
             his
             love
             motumero
             ,
             no
             otherwise
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             out
             to
             them
             deliverance
             ,
             in
             a
             Mediatour
             the
             Man
             
               Iesus
               Christ
            
             ,
             and
             drew
             them
             out
             that
             took
             hold
             of
             mercy
             ,
             leaving
             them
             there
             that
             would
             none
             of
             him
             .
          
           
             Why
             King
             Iames
             styled
             them
             Atheists
             .
          
           
             m
             Appeal
             ,
             pae
             .
             49.
             the
             〈◊〉
             among
             others
             〈◊〉
             that
             〈◊〉
             of
             old
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               to
               
            
             .
             They
             meant
             it
             substantially
             ,
             and
             so
             〈◊〉
             :
             Christians
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             it
             too
             ,
             but
             disposively
             in
             his
             providence
             .
          
           
             They
             teach
             the
             third
             and
             〈◊〉
             Article
             .
          
           
             n
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             89.
             
             St.
             
               〈◊〉
               in
               〈◊〉
            
             hath
             the
             very
             word
             antipiptete
             ,
             you
             resist
             ,
             nay
             ,
             fall
             crosse
             with
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             not
             suffering
             him
             to
             〈◊〉
             grace
             in
             you
             .
             If
             the
             Councell
             meaned
             it
             
               
               ,
               operante
            
             :
             I
             thinke
             no
             man
             will
             deny
             it
             ,
             
               de
               gratia
               〈◊〉
               ,
               subsequente
               ,
               cooperante
            
             ;
             there
             is
             without
             question
             in
             the
             naturall
             will
             of
             a
             regenerate
             man
             so
             much
             〈◊〉
             concupiscence
             ,
             as
             may
             make
             him
             resist
             and
             rebell
             against
             the
             law
             of
             the
             Spirit
             .
             And
             if
             a
             man
             justified
             may
             fall
             away
             from
             grace
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             ,
             then
             without
             question
             ,
             your selves
             being
             judges
             ,
             he
             may
             〈◊〉
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             offered
             .
          
           
             o
             
               Ibid.
               〈◊〉
            
             95.
             
             Thus
             having
             with
             as
             great
             diligence
             as
             I
             could
             examined
             this
             question
             
               inter
               partes
            
             of
             Free-will
             ,
             I
             doe
             ingenuously
             confesse
             ,
             that
             I
             cannot
             finde
             any
             such
             materiall
             〈◊〉
             between
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             at
             least
             of
             better
             temper
             ,
             and
             our
             Church
             .
          
           
             Also
             the
             fifth
             .
          
           
             p
             
               Antigag
               .
               p.
            
             161
             Man
             is
             not
             likely
             in
             the
             State
             of
             grace
             to
             be
             of
             an
             higher
             alloy
             then
             Angels
             were
             in
             the
             state
             of
             glory
             ,
             then
             Adam
             was
             in
             the
             state
             of
             innocencie
             :
             Now
             i
             Adam
             in
             Paradise
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             in
             heaven
             did
             fall
             and
             lost
             their
             originall
             estate
             ,
             the
             one
             totally
             ,
             〈◊〉
             and
             the
             other
             eternally
             ,
             what
             greater
             assurance
             hath
             any
             man
             in
             the
             state
             of
             proficiencie
             ;
             not
             of
             consummation
             .
          
           
             Silence
             by
             proclamation
             enjoyned
             to
             both
             sides
             .
          
           
             The
             Arminians
             in
             England
             advanced
             .
          
           
             q
             A
             moderate
             answer
             ,
             pag.
             78
             you
             will
             be
             troubled
             to
             finde
             Canterburies
             equall
             in
             our
             Church
             ,
             since
             King
             Edwards
             Reformation
             ,
             whether
             yee
             looke
             to
             his
             publike
             or
             private
             demeanours
             .
          
           
             r
             
               Ibid
               pag.
            
             84.
             
             
               White
               ,
               Montagne
            
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             whom
             you
             so
             abuse
             ,
             are
             such
             ,
             who
             for
             their
             endeavours
             for
             this
             Churches
             honour
             ,
             fidelity
             in
             their
             service
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             full
             abilities
             in
             Learning
             ,
             have
             had
             no
             equals
             in
             this
             Church
             ,
             since
             the
             Reformation
             .
          
           
             Their
             opposites
             disgraced
             and
             persecuted
             .
          
           
             Albeit
             to
             this
             day
             fleshly
             feares
             have
             made
             him
             to
             let
             passe
             with
             silence
             in
             publike
             the
             most
             wicked
             of
             their
             courses
             .
          
           
             s
             
               Chr.
               Dow.
            
             Answer
             to
             Master
             Burton
             ,
             M.
             Burton
             did
             preach
             on
             the
             highest
             point
             of
             Predestination
             in
             a
             cōtroverted
             way
             with
             disputes
             and
             clamorous
             invectives
             against
             those
             who
             dissented
             from
             him
             in
             opinion
             ,
             his
             questioning
             and
             suspending
             for
             this
             cause
             ,
             was
             nothing
             contrary
             to
             his
             Majestics
             Declarations
             .
             
               ibid
               pag.
            
             40.
             
             Be
             it
             so
             that
             the
             doctrine
             of
             election
             ,
             effectuall
             vocation
             ,
             assurance
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             are
             by
             the
             Declaration
             suppressed
             ,
             rather
             then
             the
             peace
             of
             the
             Church
             should
             bee
             disturbed
             ,
             wee
             might
             truly
             say
             of
             that
             time
             when
             his
             〈◊〉
             Declaration
             was
             published
             ,
             that
             men
             were
             uncapable
             of
             these
             doctrines
             ,
             when
             men
             began
             to
             chide
             ,
             and
             to
             count
             each
             other
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             it
             was
             with
             our
             neighbours
             ,
             it
             began
             to
             be
             with
             us
             ,
             was
             it
             not
             time
             to
             enjoyne
             both
             sides
             silence
             ?
             By
             this
             meanes
             you
             say
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             Minister
             ,
             not
             one
             among
             a
             thousand
             that
             dare
             clearly
             preach
             of
             these
             most
             comfortable
             doctrines
             ,
             and
             so
             soundly
             confute
             the
             〈◊〉
             heresie
             .
             Blessed
             be
             God
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             so
             few
             who
             dare
             ,
             and
             I
             with
             those
             few
             who
             dare
             ,
             had
             shewed
             more
             obedience
             to
             his
             Majesty
             .
          
           
             Canterbury
             and
             his
             〈◊〉
             contrary
             to
             the
             Proclamation
             goe
             on
             still
             to
             print
             ,
             let
             be
             to
             preach
             their
             Tenets
             .
          
           
             t
             Pag
             82.
             
             The
             benefit
             of
             redemption
             by
             the
             antecedent
             will
             of
             Christ
             is
             intended
             to
             all
             men
             living
             ,
             though
             all
             men
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             own
             demerits
             doe
             not
             actually
             receive
             the
             fruit
             of
             it
             .
             
               Volūtas
               antecedens
               est
               voluntas
               〈◊〉
               &
               〈◊〉
               Dei
               ex
               ejus
               nativa
               〈◊〉
               existens
               ,
               〈◊〉
               sumens
               occasionem
               ex
               nobis
               .
            
          
           
             w
             Moderate
             answer
             ,
             pag.
             121.
             
             The
             historicall
             narration
             was
             called
             in
             also
             for
             your
             pleasure
             .
          
           
             x
             Star-chamber
             ,
             speech
             ,
             p.
             28.
             
             It
             was
             delet
             at
             the
             King
             ,
             direction
             in
             my
             Predecessors
             time
             ,
             when
             theKing
             had
             no
             children
             
          
           
             y
             Satan
             like
             an
             Angell
             of
             light
             stirring
             up
             in
             the
             heart
             of
             immort
             fied
             persons
             ,
             a
             spirituall
             pride
             in
             a
             high
             conceit
             of
             their
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             assurance
             of
             their
             election
             ,
             illumination
             ,
             conversion
             ,
             imaginary
             sense
             of
             their
             adoption
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             z
             
               Pag.
               82.
            
             
             Salus
             〈◊〉
             satis
             certa
             quāvis
             ipsis
             ignota
             ,
             ex
             gratia
             &
             〈◊〉
             sua
             misericordia
             det
             Deus
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             suavissimam
             &
             〈◊〉
             spei
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             non
             expectamus
             .
          
           
             *
             Stricturae
             ,
             wee
             thinke
             it
             not
             safe
             for
             any
             man
             peremptorily
             to
             presume
             himselfe
             predestinate
             .
          
           
             A
             demonstration
             of
             Canterburies
             Arminianisme
             in
             the
             highest
             degree
             .
          
           
             a
             Pag.
             3.
             〈◊〉
             if
             you
             bee
             so
             〈◊〉
             as
             not
             to
             apprehend
             that
             ,
             yet
             must
             the
             publishing
             of
             this
             libell
             〈◊〉
             in
             conclusion
             ,
             on
             my
             Lord
             high
             treasurer
             the
             Bishop
             of
             London
             ,
             at
             whose
             house
             the
             booke
             was
             licentiat
             ,
             which
             is
             so
             high
             a
             language
             against
             authority
             ,
             against
             the
             practice
             of
             this
             Realme
             ,
             for
             licentiating
             of
             bookes
             against
             the
             honour
             of
             the
             Star-chamber
             on
             whose
             decree
             that
             practice
             is
             founded
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             b
             
               Pag.
               18.
            
             
             Non
             video
             〈◊〉
             in
             〈◊〉
             quare
             cum
             quae
             est
             ex
             Deo
             per
             〈◊〉
             eandemque
             actionem
             bonitatis
             à
             seipso
             emanantem
             ,
             recta
             〈◊〉
             fidei
             in
             Christum
             resipiscentiae
             ,
             obedientiae
             ,
             perseverantiae
             ,
             sit
             causa
             salvationis
             ,
             perversa
             quae
             〈◊〉
             hominibus
             est
             damnationis
             ,
             in
             eadem
             unitatis
             ratione
             ,
             electinis
             &
             reprobationis
             〈◊〉
             causae
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             Arminianisme
             is
             consonant
             to
             the
             Articles
             of
             England
             ,
             and
             not
             contrary
             to
             the
             Proclamation
             .
          
           
             c
             Nec
             videantur
             sensum
             articulorum
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             in
             literali
             &
             grammaticali
             nedum
             in
             〈◊〉
             verborum
             sensu
             transgredi
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A67904-e7240
           
             The
             faction
             once
             suspected
             of
             Luthcranisme
             .
          
           
             But
             at
             last
             〈◊〉
             was
             〈◊〉
             to
             be
             their
             marke
             .
          
           
             f
             His
             fifth
             Sermon
             through
             the
             whole
             .
          
           
             To
             make
             way
             for
             their
             designes
             ,
             they
             cry
             downe
             the
             Pope
             .
             Antichristianisme
             .
          
           
             a
             Caeterum
             agendo
             quam
             nihil
             agent
             ,
             &
             〈…〉
             disputatione
             ista
             de
             antichristo
             ,
             liquido
             constare
             poterit
             ;
             quia
             si
             causam
             hanc
             obtinuerimus
             esse
             romanum
             pontificem
             antichristum
             ,
             de
             reliqua
             controversii
             dubitandi
             no
             erit
             〈◊〉
             locus
             ,
             quia
             de
             Antichristo
             Doctrina
             quin
             perniciosa
             sit
             et
             impia
             dubitari
             non
             potest
             .
          
           
             b
             Illa
             mihi
             imprimis
             quaestio
             ,
             quae
             est
             de
             antichristo
             ,
             dignissima
             semper
             est
             〈◊〉
             ,
             in
             qua
             docti
             determinanda
             omnes
             tum
             ingenii
             ,
             tum
             industriae
             nervos
             contenderent
             :
             illa
             enim
             de
             veritate
             quam
             nos
             in
             hac
             causa
             singulari
             Dei
             beneficio
             tenemus
             ,
             si
             inter
             omnes
             semel
             conveniret
             ,
             de
             reliquis
             statim
             controversiis
             actum
             esset
             ,
             debillatumque
             ,
             neque
             aliquid
             in
             posterum
             periculi
             foret
             ,
             quemquam
             omnino
             Christianum
             ,
             cui
             sua
             cara
             esset
             salus
             ,
             detecto
             jam
             antichristo
             ,
             agnitoque
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             c
             
               Pelag.
               rediv.
            
             2.
             
               tab
               .
               pag.
            
             39.
             
             As
             for
             the
             Protestant
             arguments
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Apocalypse
             ,
             to
             prove
             the
             Pope
             to
             be
             the
             Antichrist
             .
             〈◊〉
             calleth
             them
             deliramenta
             ,
             dotages
             :
             And
             the
             Appealer
             to
             shew
             more
             zeale
             to
             the
             Popes
             cause
             straineth
             further
             ,
             aad
             tearmeth
             them
             Apocalypticall
             phrensies
             .
          
           
             d
             P.
             53.
             
             Many
             〈◊〉
             in
             our
             Church
             especially
             when
             the
             greatest
             heat
             was
             stricken
             betweene
             us
             and
             Rome
             ,
             have
             affirmed
             the
             Pope
             to
             be
             the
             Antichrist
             ,
             yet
             to
             them
             that
             calmely
             &
             seriously
             consider
             it
             ,
             it
             may
             not
             without
             good
             reason
             be
             disputed
             as
             doubtfull
             .
          
           
             e
             Pag.
             128.
             
             I
             have
             yet
             one
             thing
             more
             to
             say
             to
             you
             in
             this
             point
             ,
             St.
             Iohn
             hath
             given
             it
             for
             a
             rule
             ,
             that
             every
             spirit
             that
             confesseth
             not
             that
             Jesus
             Christ
             is
             come
             in
             the
             slesh
             ,
             is
             not
             of
             God
             ,
             but
             is
             that
             spirit
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             whereof
             yee
             have
             heard
             .
             So
             that
             unlesse
             you
             can
             make
             good
             (
             as
             I
             thinke
             you
             cannot
             )
             that
             the
             Pope
             of
             Rome
             confesseth
             not
             that
             Jesus
             Christ
             is
             come
             in
             the
             flesh
             ,
             you
             have
             no
             reason
             to
             conclude
             that
             hee
             is
             that
             Antichrist
             .
          
           
             g
             Star-chamber
             speech
             ,
             pag.
             32.
             the
             first
             place
             is
             changed
             thus
             ,
             from
             ,
             Root
             out
             that
             Babylonish
             and
             Antichristian
             Sect
             ,
             which
             say
             of
             Jerusalem
             ,
             into
             this
             forme
             of
             words
             ,
             Root
             out
             that
             Romish
             and
             Babylonish
             Sect
             ,
             of
             them
             ,
             which
             say
             ,
             This
             alteration
             is
             of
             sosmall
             consequence
             that
             it
             is
             ,
             not
             worthy
             the
             speaking
             .
             or
             if
             there
             be
             any
             thing
             of
             moment
             in
             it
             ,
             it
             is
             answered
             in
             the
             next
             ,
             where
             the
             chiefe
             thing
             hee
             sayes
             ,
             is
             ,
             that
             hee
             was
             commanded
             to
             alter
             it
             by
             the
             King
             for
             to
             remove
             scandall
             from
             the
             Papists
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             content
             to
             have
             the
             
             .
          
           
             h
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             i
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             pag.
             183.
             
             A
             primacie
             of
             order
             was
             never
             denied
             to
             St.
             Peter
             ,
             that
             Rome
             had
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             〈◊〉
             other
             Churches
             :
             the
             Protestants
             grant
             ,
             and
             that
             not
             only
             ,
             because
             the
             Roman
             〈◊〉
             was
             
               ordine
               primus
            
             ,
             first
             in
             order
             and
             degree
             ,
             which
             some
             one
             must
             be
             to
             avoid
             confusion
             ,
             but
             also
             ,
             &c.
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             154.
             〈◊〉
             saith
             indeed
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             there
             did
             ever
             〈◊〉
             the
             principalitie
             of
             an
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             this
             no
             man
             denies
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             133.
             
             No
             man
             of
             learning
             doubts
             but
             the
             Church
             of
             〈◊〉
             had
             a
             powerfull
             〈◊〉
             within
             its
             own
             〈◊〉
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               Antid
               .
               p.
            
             51.
             
             
               Damus
               à
               〈◊〉
               ad
               〈◊〉
               .
               Augustini
               in
               〈◊〉
               Romana
               Apostolicae
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               princ
               patum
               .
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             57.
             
             
               Quae
               ratio
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               singulorum
               in
               suis
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Ep
               scoporum
               ,
               cadem
               erat
               in
               provinciis
               〈◊〉
               ,
               in
               
               ,
               recte
               autem
               (
               quis
               negat
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ,
               &
               cautum
               per
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ,
               ut
               〈◊〉
               ille
               〈◊〉
               (
               nec
               hoc
               〈◊〉
               )
               〈◊〉
               ,
               cui
               tot
               per
               occidentem
               
               ,
               ubi
               fides
               
               universalis
               ,
               at
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               in
               rebus
               ad
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               &
               quicquid
               〈◊〉
               suo
               〈◊〉
               confirmaret
               ,
               〈◊〉
               ratum
               〈◊〉
               ,
               〈◊〉
               legis
               vim
               &
               essicaciam
               per
               〈◊〉
               un
               versal
               mobtincret
               .
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             80.
             
             
               Monarchae
               sunt
               〈◊〉
               in
               〈◊〉
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               Monarchae
               in
               suis
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Metropolitae
               ,
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               augustiores
               ,
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               per
               unam
               〈◊〉
               Catholicam
               :
               Praecipuae
               〈◊〉
               parti
               Christiani
               orbis
               hoc
               est
               ,
               cunctis
               ad
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               cum
               〈◊〉
               quadam
               non
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               praesuit
               Pontisex
               ,
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               obstaret
               illa
               〈◊〉
               ambitio
               etiam
               hedie
               〈◊〉
               .
            
          
           
             k
             
               Cant.
               relat
               .
               pag.
            
             183.
             
             The
             Roman
             Prelate
             was
             
               ordine
               primus
            
             ,
             first
             in
             order
             or
             degree
             ,
             which
             some
             one
             must
             bee
             to
             avoid
             confusion
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             antid
             .
             p.
             116.
             
             Certum
             est
             ratione
             vinculi
             〈◊〉
             inter
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ord
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             inter
             Patriarchas
             universalis
             〈◊〉
             curam
             ad
             〈◊〉
             sed
             m
             const
             〈◊〉
             .
             Ibid.
             pag.
             51
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ordinata
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             constitu
             a.
             〈◊〉
             ;
             multi
             &
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ut
             〈◊〉
             eluceat
             ,
             &
             harmonia
             conservetur
             ab
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             est
             origo
             〈◊〉
             .
             Vnde
             
             ab
             
             ,
             &
             illum
             ord
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             
             beat
             ,
             si
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Pontiser
             .
             Inter
             〈◊〉
             sacerdotes
             〈◊〉
             &
             societas
             
             quoad
             〈◊〉
             &
             〈◊〉
             executionem
             non
             
             fieri
             &
             〈◊〉
             ;
             Inde
             〈◊〉
             per
             consensum
             〈◊〉
             ani
             orbis
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             à
             
             Romano
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             .
             Ibid.
             pag.
             158
             Illi
             〈◊〉
             principatum
             〈◊〉
             ,
             super
             〈◊〉
             anti
             quitas
             tribui
             ,
             
             .
          
           
             l
             Pokling
             .
             〈◊〉
             p.
             50.
             
             Miserable
             were
             we
             ,
             if
             he
             that
             now
             〈◊〉
             Archbishop
             of
             Canterbury
             ,
             could
             not
             derive
             his
             succession
             from
             St.
             〈◊〉
             ,
             St.
             Augustine
             〈◊〉
             St
             Gregory
             ,
             St.
             Gregory
             from
             St.
             〈◊〉
             .
             What
             a
             comfort
             is
             it
             to
             his
             Grace
             ,
             that
             he
             can
             say
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               Apostolorum
               ,
               I
            
             ,
             and
             my
             preducessours
             have
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             Sunday
             at
             the
             beginning
             .
             Our
             Diocesan
             can
             derive
             himselfe
             the
             Successour
             of
             an
             Apostle
             ,
             otherwise
             we
             should
             have
             taken
             his
             call
             for
             the
             voice
             of
             a
             stranger
             ,
             and
             not
             have
             here
             appeared
             .
             It
             is
             St.
             〈◊〉
             resolution
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               Episcoporum
               ab
               ipsa
               sede
               Petri
               ,
            
             is
             that
             which
             among
             other
             things
             by
             〈◊〉
             named
             ,
             keep
             ,
             us
             in
             the
             bosome
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             subjects
             us
             to
             our
             Bishops
             jurisdiction
             
          
           
             m
             Montag
             orig
             Eccles.
             pag.
             114.
             
             Patrum
             nostrorum
             vel
             avorum
             memoria
             duo
             summi
             Pontisices
             viri
             〈◊〉
             &
             doct
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Hadrianus
             sextu
             ,
             &
             Bellarmini
             avunculus
             Marcellus
             secundus
             .
             An
             id
             .
             pag.
             47
             .
             〈
             ◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Pontisex
             Maximus
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             scio
             vocatum
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             Papam
             &
             Pastorem
             〈◊〉
             ,
             quid
             si
             hec
             
             .
             
               Orig.
               p.
               417
            
             Certis
             quibusdam
             titulis
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             〈◊〉
             ab
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             viri
             〈◊〉
             etiam
             &
             〈◊〉
             honorarunt
             ,
             isto
             honorum
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             non
             est
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             sed
             nec
             〈◊〉
             reprehendere
             ,
             aut
             〈◊〉
             derogare
             id
             quod
             solent
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
             indigitare
             certissimus
             est
             character
             
             〈◊〉
             adorator
             ,
             cum
             〈◊〉
             portan
             
             Paulo
             al
             cui
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Sexto
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             &
             caeteris
             ,
             si
             qui
             sunt
             
             
             
             .
          
           
             n
             Montag
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             pag.
             166.
             
             Est
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ut
             recte
             observat
             Philo.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             itaque
             ut
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Iesu
             Christi
             ut
             Dei
             atque
             hominum
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             summus
             à
             Christianis
             omnibus
             ,
             Divino
             instituto
             debetur
             honor
             &
             reverentia
             singusaris
             ,
             ibid.
             
               p.
               40.
            
             
             Fatetur
             ultro
             〈◊〉
             aliquo
             modo
             in
             〈◊〉
             supra
             regiam
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             cum
             vetusti
             &
             orthodoxis
             〈◊〉
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             (
             inquit
             Chrysostom
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             (
             〈◊〉
             prius
             〈◊〉
             )
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &
             Nazian
             .
             in
             apologia
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ibid
             pag.
             161.
             
             Allusum
             est
             a
             pussimo
             rege
             ad
             illud
             Exodi
             ,
             Constitui
             te
             Deum
             Pharaonis
             ,
             communicat
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             seu
             Pontificio
             ,
             seu
             Civili
             ,
             sui
             ipsi
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             dii
             〈◊〉
             quis
             vingatur
             ob
             hanc
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &
             merito
             quos
             locum
             ille
             suum
             〈◊〉
             inter
             〈◊〉
             sustinere
             .
          
           
             o
             Montag
             .
             antid
             .
             pag.
             40.
             
             Non
             est
             mirum
             si
             Constantinus
             ,
             olim
             
               〈◊〉
               ,
               Carolus
            
             ,
             &
             alii
             〈◊〉
             ,
             de
             equis
             descenderint
             ,
             venientes
             exceperint
             ,
             religionis
             antistites
             Christianae
             venerationemque
             exhibuerint
             .
             Quid
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             non
             ita
             pridem
             lot
             Sultanos
             tautam
             observantiam
             exhibuisse
             tam
             ampla
             〈◊〉
             persolvi
             se
             :
             Non
             minora
             quondam
             principes
             &
             populi
             Christiani
             Christianis
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Ramanis
             〈◊〉
             exhibuerunt
             ,
             exhibebunt
             〈◊〉
             ad
             pristinos
             illos
             mores
             ,
             si
             tantum
             revertatur
             ,
             &
             exempla
             pietatis
             〈◊〉
             .
             ibid.
             pag.
             158.
             
             Adoravit
             
               Johannem
               Justinus
            
             ,
             sic
             &
             Constantinus
             inferiores
             Joanne
             sacerdotes
             ,
             adoravit
             autem
             ,
             dicit
             autor
             ille
             tuus
             dans
             gloriam
             Deo.
             
          
           
             p
             Montag
             .
             antid
             .
             pag.
             95.
             
             Habeat
             ille
             suas
             sibi
             opes
             &
             facultates
             ,
             fundos
             habeat
             &
             latisundia
             principatum
             &
             dom
             nium
             per
             Ecclesiae
             terras
             ,
             &
             Petri
             possessiones
             obtineat
             ,
             dummodo
             contentus
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             liberalitate
             ,
             alienam
             non
             invadat
             possessionem
             .
          
           
             q
             
               Cant.
               relat
               .
               pag.
            
             202.
             
             Hee
             that
             is
             not
             blinde
             may
             see
             ,
             if
             hee
             will
             ,
             of
             what
             little
             value
             the
             Popes
             power
             in
             France
             and
             Spaine
             is
             this
             day
             further
             then
             to
             serve
             the
             turns
             of
             their
             Kings
             therewith
             ,
             which
             they
             doe
             to
             their
             great
             advantage
             .
          
           
             r
             Montagantid
             .
             pag.
             156.
             
             Quod
             è
             codice
             allegatur
             Theodosiano
             decernimus
             ne
             quid
             tam
             〈◊〉
             Gallicanis
             quam
             alierum
             〈◊〉
             ,
             contra
             〈◊〉
             veterem
             liceat
             〈◊〉
             viri
             venerabilis
             〈◊〉
             urbis
             〈◊〉
             authoritate
             tentare
             ,
             sed
             illis
             omnibusque
             legis
             loco
             sit
             ,
             quisquid
             sanxit
             sanxeritve
             sedis
             〈◊〉
             authoritas
             .
             Quicquid
             〈◊〉
             pontifici
             (
             saith
             Montagow
             )
             arrogatur
             id
             totum
             edicto
             debetur
             Theodofiano
             vel
             vetustae
             consuetudini
             ,
             quicquid
             autem
             per
             rescriptum
             〈◊〉
             imperatoris
             ad
             occidentales
             〈◊〉
             solos
             pertinebat
             ,
             &
             nec
             〈◊〉
             quibus
             juxta
             veterem
             〈◊〉
             Pontifex
             ,
             praesidebat
             ut
             〈◊〉
             :
             Decernat
             imperator
             de
             〈◊〉
             is
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Rex
             Angliae
             de
             〈◊〉
             suis
             ,
             Francorum
             de
             Gallicanis
             ,
             quod
             olim
             Theodosius
             decrivit
             ,
             dicto
             〈◊〉
             omnes
             obediantes
             .
          
           
             s
             
               Cant.
               relat
               .
               pag.
            
             171.
             
             It
             is
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             in
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             times
             ,
             in
             the
             Church
             government
             ,
             Britaine
             was
             never
             subject
             to
             the
             Sea
             of
             Rom
             ;
             for
             it
             was
             one
             of
             the
             six
             dioces
             of
             the
             West
             Empire
             ,
             and
             had
             a
             Primat
             of
             its
             own
             :
             Nay
             
               〈◊〉
               Capgraw
            
             ,
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             tell
             us
             ,
             that
             Pope
             〈◊〉
             the
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             Councel
             at
             Bari
             in
             〈◊〉
             ,
             accounted
             my
             worthy
             〈◊〉
             S
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             said
             ,
             He
             was
             as
             the
             〈◊〉
             and
             Apostolick
             of
             the
             other
             world
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               comparem
               ,
               &
               veluti
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               orbis
               &
               Patriarcham
               .
            
             Now
             the
             Britains
             having
             a
             Primate
             of
             their
             〈◊〉
             ,
             which
             is
             greater
             then
             a
             Metropolitan
             ;
             yea
             ,
             a
             Patriarch
             ,
             if
             ye
             will
             ,
             he
             could
             not
             be
             〈◊〉
             from
             to
             Rome
             .
          
           
             t
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             Their
             minde
             to
             the
             Cardinalat
             .
          
           
             w
             Montag
             .
             ap
             .
             pag.
             56.
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             potuit
             $$Para$$.
             
          
           
             x
             
               〈◊〉
               .
               Alt.
               p
            
             34.
             
             The
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             in
             his
             jearing
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Cardinall
             Baromaeus
             ,
             whereas
             ,
             if
             he
             〈◊〉
             to
             read
             his
             life
             ,
             he
             may
             not
             be
             〈◊〉
             that
             the
             Cardinall
             was
             a
             man
             of
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             spent
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             his
             life
             in
             fasting
             ,
             prayer
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             preaching
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             did
             〈◊〉
             both
             impiety
             and
             vanity
             both
             in
             word
             and
             deed
             .
             Me
             thinkes
             his
             〈◊〉
             should
             check
             him
             for
             his
             scornfull
             usage
             of
             a
             man
             who
             had
             the
             report
             of
             so
             vertuous
             and
             pious
             a
             Bishop
             .
          
           
             They
             affect
             much
             to
             bee
             joyned
             with
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             as
             she
             stands
             .
          
           
             y
             Cant.
             relat
             .
             p.
             36.
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             &
             Protestants
             set
             not
             up
             a
             different
             Religion
             ,
             for
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             is
             the
             same
             to
             both
             ,
             but
             they
             differ
             in
             the
             same
             Religion
             ,
             and
             the
             difference
             is
             in
             certain
             grosse
             corruptions
             to
             the
             very
             endangering
             of
             salvation
             ,
             which
             each
             side
             saith
             the
             other
             is
             guilty
             of
             .
             
               Star
               chamber
            
             speech
             .
             p.
             36.
             
             My
             second
             reason
             is
             ,
             That
             the
             learned
             make
             but
             three
             Religions
             to
             have
             been
             of
             old
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             Paganisme
             ,
             Judaisme
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             now
             they
             have
             added
             a
             fourth
             which
             is
             〈◊〉
             .
             Now
             if
             this
             ground
             of
             theirs
             be
             true
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             generally
             received
             ,
             perhaps
             it
             will
             bee
             of
             dangerous
             consequence
             sadly
             to
             〈◊〉
             that
             the
             〈◊〉
             religion
             is
             rebellion
             ,
             though
             〈◊〉
             clause
             passed
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             through
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             in
             King
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             this
             reason
             well
             〈◊〉
             is
             taken
             from
             the
             very
             foundation
             of
             Religion
             it self
             .
             ibid.
             page
             34.
             
             His
             Majesty
             〈◊〉
             commanded
             〈◊〉
             to
             make
             the
             alteration
             ,
             and
             to
             see
             it
             printed
             .
          
           
             z
             〈◊〉
             .
             pag.
             3.
             06.
             
             We
             dare
             not
             communicat
             with
             Rome
             ,
             either
             in
             her
             publick
             〈◊〉
             which
             is
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             with
             grosse
             superstition
             ,
             or
             in
             these
             corrupt
             and
             ungrounded
             opinions
             ,
             which
             shee
             hath
             added
             to
             the
             faith
             .
             These
             make
             up
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             but
             not
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             .
             In
             them
             our
             communion
             is
             dissolved
             ,
             but
             〈◊〉
             have
             still
             a
             true
             and
             reall
             union
             with
             that
             and
             all
             other
             members
             of
             the
             Church
             universall
             in
             faith
             and
             charity
             .
             ibid.
             p.
             74.
             
             To
             depart
             from
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             in
             some
             〈◊〉
             and
             practices
             ,
             we
             had
             just
             and
             necessary
             cause
             though
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             〈◊〉
             nothing
             necessary
             to
             salvation
             .
             There
             is
             great
             difference
             betwixt
             shisme
             from
             them
             and
             reformation
             of
             our selfe
             .
             It
             is
             one
             thing
             to
             leave
             communion
             with
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             another
             to
             leave
             communicating
             with
             her
             errors
             ,
             whosoever
             professeth
             himselfe
             to
             forsake
             the
             communion
             of
             any
             one
             member
             of
             Christs
             body
             ,
             must
             confesse
             himselfe
             consequently
             to
             forsake
             the
             whole
             .
             And
             therefore
             we
             forsake
             not
             Romes
             communion
             more
             nor
             the
             body
             of
             Christ
             whereof
             we
             acknowledge
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             to
             be
             a
             member
             ,
             though
             corrupted
             .
             If
             any
             Zelots
             〈◊〉
             proceeded
             among
             us
             to
             heavier
             censures
             ,
             their
             zeale
             may
             be
             excused
             ,
             but
             their
             charity
             and
             wisdome
             cannot
             be
             justified
             .
             Cant.
             relat
             .
             p.
             192.
             
             The
             Protestants
             have
             not
             lest
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             in
             her
             essence
             ,
             but
             in
             her
             errors
             ,
             not
             in
             the
             things
             which
             constitute
             a
             Church
             ,
             but
             only
             in
             such
             abuses
             and
             corruptions
             which
             work
             toward
             the
             dissolution
             of
             a
             Church
             .
          
           
             &
             Can.
             〈◊〉
             .
             1.
             p.
             249.
             
             The
             foundation
             is
             &
             〈◊〉
             whole
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             their
             superstitions
             .
             〈◊〉
             answer
             ,
             p.
             124.
             
             Suppose
             a
             great
             Prelate
             in
             the
             high
             Commission
             Court
             had
             said
             openly
             ,
             That
             we
             and
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             differed
             not
             
               in
               fundamentalibus
            
             ,
             yet
             how
             commeth
             this
             to
             be
             an
             innovation
             in
             the
             doctrine
             of
             England
             for
             that
             Church
             telleth
             us
             in
             the
             19.
             article
             ,
             That
             Rome
             doth
             〈◊〉
             in
             matters
             of
             Faith
             ,
             but
             it
             hath
             not
             told
             us
             that
             she
             doth
             erre
             in
             
               fundamentalibus
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             old
             religion
             after
             the
             beginning
             :
             It
             is
             the
             charitable
             profession
             of
             zealous
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             under
             the
             Popery
             there
             is
             much
             Christian
             good
             ,
             yea
             ,
             all
             ,
             that
             under
             the
             Papacy
             there
             is
             true
             Christianity
             ,
             yea
             ,
             the
             kernell
             of
             Christianity
             ?
             Neither
             doe
             wee
             censure
             that
             Church
             for
             what
             it
             hath
             not
             ,
             but
             for
             what
             it
             hath
             .
             Fundamentall
             truth
             is
             like
             the
             〈◊〉
             wine
             ,
             which
             if
             it
             be
             mixed
             with
             twenty
             times
             so
             much
             water
             ,
             〈◊〉
             his
             〈◊〉
             .
             Rome
             as
             it
             is
             Babylon
             ,
             we
             must
             come
             out
             of
             it
             ,
             but
             as
             it
             is
             an
             outward
             visible
             Church
             ,
             we
             〈◊〉
             did
             nor
             would
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               Maskel
            
             .
             Popery
             is
             〈◊〉
             ,
             but
             fundamentall
             truth
             is
             an
             antidote
             .
             A
             little
             quantity
             of
             antidot
             that
             is
             soveraigne
             ,
             will
             destroy
             much
             poyson
             .
             Pottar
             .
             p.
             62.
             
             The
             most
             necessary
             and
             fundamentall
             truths
             which
             constitute
             a
             Church
             ,
             are
             on
             both
             sides
             unquestioned
             ,
             ibid.
             By
             fundamentall
             points
             of
             〈◊〉
             we
             understand
             these
             prime
             and
             capitall
             doctrines
             of
             Religion
             ,
             which
             〈◊〉
             up
             the
             holy
             Catholick
             Faith
             ,
             which
             〈◊〉
             constitutes
             a
             true
             Church
             and
             a
             〈◊〉
             Christian.
             The
             Apostles
             〈◊〉
             taken
             in
             a
             Catholick
             sense
             that
             is
             as
             it
             was
             〈◊〉
             opened
             in
             some
             parts
             by
             occasion
             of
             emergent
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             other
             Catholick
             creeds
             of
             
               Nice
               ,
               〈◊〉
               ,
               Epbesus
               ,
               Chalcedon
            
             and
             〈◊〉
             is
             said
             generally
             by
             the
             Schoolmen
             and
             Fathers
             to
             comprehend
             a
             perfect
             〈◊〉
             of
             fundamentall
             truths
             and
             to
             imply
             a
             full
             rejection
             of
             fundamentall
             〈◊〉
             .
             ib.
             p.
             109.
             
             It
             seemed
             to
             some
             men
             of
             great
             learning
             and
             judgement
             ,
             such
             as
             Hooker
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             all
             who
             prosesse
             to
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Lord
             〈◊〉
             ,
             are
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             may
             be
             〈◊〉
             ,
             though
             with
             errors
             ,
             even
             fundamentall
             .
             Hereticks
             do
             imbrace
             the
             principles
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             onely
             by
             misconstruction
             .
             Whereupon
             〈◊〉
             opinions
             ,
             albeit
             repugnant
             indeed
             to
             Faith
             ,
             yet
             are
             held
             otherwise
             by
             them
             ,
             and
             maintainedas
             consonant
             to
             the
             Faith.
             
          
           
             a
             
               Cant.
               relat
               .
               pag.
            
             361.
             
             
               Holcat
               .
               Non
               omnes
               error
               in
               his
               quae
               fidei
               sunt
               est
               aut
               〈◊〉
               ,
               aut
               〈◊〉
               ,
            
             In
             things
             not
             necessary
             ,
             though
             they
             bee
             divine
             truths
             if
             about
             them
             men
             differ
             ,
             it
             is
             no
             more
             then
             they
             have
             done
             ,
             more
             or
             lesse
             in
             all
             ages
             ,
             and
             they
             may
             differ
             and
             yet
             preserve
             that
             one
             necessary
             Faith
             intire
             ,
             and
             charity
             also
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             so
             well
             〈◊〉
             ,
             for
             opinions
             which
             fluttereth
             about
             that
             one
             soules
             saving
             Faith
             ,
             there
             are
             dangerous
             differences
             this
             day
             .
             Pottar
             .
             pag.
             38.
             
             It
             is
             a
             great
             vanity
             to
             hope
             or
             expect
             that
             all
             learned
             men
             in
             this
             life
             should
             absolutely
             consent
             in
             all
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             divine
             truth
             ,
             so
             long
             as
             the
             faith
             once
             delivered
             to
             the
             Saints
             ,
             and
             that
             common
             faith
             containing
             all
             necessary
             verities
             is
             keeped
             .
             So
             long
             as
             men
             walke
             charitably
             according
             to
             this
             rule
             ,
             though
             in
             other
             things
             they
             be
             otherwise
             minded
             ,
             the
             unity
             of
             the
             Church
             is
             no
             wise
             violated
             :
             for
             it
             doth
             consist
             in
             the
             unity
             of
             faith
             ,
             not
             of
             opinions
             ,
             in
             the
             union
             of
             mens
             hearts
             by
             true
             charity
             ,
             which
             easily
             tolerateth
             unnecessary
             differences
             .
             Some
             points
             of
             religion
             are
             〈◊〉
             articles
             essentiall
             in
             the
             object
             of
             Faith.
             Dissention
             in
             these
             is
             pernitious
             ,
             and
             destroieth
             unity
             .
             Other
             ,
             are
             secundary
             probable
             obscure
             and
             accidentall
             points
             :
             〈◊〉
             in
             these
             are
             tolerable
             .
             Unity
             in
             these
             is
             very
             contingent
             and
             variable
             .
             As
             in
             musicall
             consort
             ,
             a
             discord
             now
             and
             then
             ,
             so
             it
             bee
             in
             the
             discant
             ,
             and
             depart
             not
             from
             the
             ground
             sweetens
             the
             harmony
             :
             so
             the
             variety
             of
             opinions
             and
             rites
             in
             divers
             parts
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             doth
             rather
             commend
             then
             prejudice
             the
             unity
             of
             the
             whole
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               Antigag
            
             pag.
             14.
             
             Truth
             is
             of
             two
             sorts
             among
             men
             ,
             manifest
             and
             confessed
             truth
             ,
             or
             more
             obscure
             and
             involved
             truth
             .
             Plainly
             delivered
             in
             Scripture
             are
             all
             these
             points
             which
             belong
             unto
             Faith
             ,
             and
             manners
             ,
             hope
             and
             charity
             .
             I
             know
             none
             of
             these
             contraverted
             
               inter
               partes
            
             .
             The
             articles
             of
             our
             creedare
             confessed
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             and
             held
             plaine
             〈◊〉
             .
             The
             contraverted
             points
             are
             of
             a
             larger
             and
             inferiour
             alloy
             .
             Of
             them
             a
             man
             may
             bee
             ignorant
             without
             any
             danger
             of
             his
             〈◊〉
             at
             all
             .
             A
             
             this
             way
             or
             that
             way
             without
             〈◊〉
             of
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             
               Cant.
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             about
             the
             〈◊〉
             .
             The
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             of
             Rome
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             very
             kinde
             and
             nature
             ,
             are
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             hay
             ,
             and
             stuble
             ,
             yet
             the
             Bishop
             thought
             that
             〈◊〉
             as
             were
             〈◊〉
             by
             education
             ,
             or
             long
             custome
             ,
             or
             overvaluing
             the
             Soveraignty
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             Church
             ,
             and
             did
             in
             〈◊〉
             of
             heart
             imbrace
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             by
             their
             generall
             〈◊〉
             and
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             Christ
             ,
             attended
             with
             charity
             and
             other
             vertues
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             at
             Gods
             hand
             .
             〈◊〉
             pag.
             235.
             
             Though
             there
             be
             some
             difference
             among
             us
             in
             ceremonies
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             which
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             yet
             still
             our
             head
             Christ
             by
             〈◊〉
             stands
             upon
             our
             body
             ,
             and
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Gospel
             is
             intire
             and
             whole
             among
             us
             by
             〈◊〉
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             Faith
             ,
             the
             volume
             of
             the
             New-Testament
             ,
             and
             the
             practice
             thereof
             by
             Faith
             and
             good
             workes
             .
             ibid.
             239.
             
             There
             bee
             〈◊〉
             which
             〈◊〉
             our
             agreement
             .
             What
             then
             ?
             Among
             the
             Greekes
             there
             were
             divers
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             yet
             〈◊〉
             but
             one
             language
             ,
             they
             〈◊〉
             together
             in
             the
             maine
             .
             So
             though
             Papists
             have
             a
             letter
             more
             then
             wee
             ,
             and
             we
             one
             letter
             for
             another
             ,
             yet
             we
             hold
             together
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             .
             Paul
             could
             beare
             〈◊〉
             differences
             ,
             expecting
             Gods
             reformation
             .
             〈◊〉
             you
             be
             otherwise
             minded
             God
             shall
             〈◊〉
             .
             For
             the
             present
             let
             us
             be
             patient
             ,
             and
             after
             〈◊〉
             God
             will
             shew
             where
             the
             〈◊〉
             heth
             .
             Why
             should
             we
             presume
             so
             〈◊〉
             of
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             wee
             are
             in
             our
             none-age
             ,
             and
             know
             〈◊〉
             in
             part
             ?
             Have
             not
             better
             men
             then
             we
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Have
             not
             〈◊〉
             Fathers
             and
             slyding
             Schoolists
             been
             alwaies
             borne
             with
             in
             〈◊〉
             of
             Religion
             ?
          
           
             b
             Pottar
             pag.
             77.
             
             We
             hope
             well
             of
             these
             holy
             〈◊〉
             ,
             who
             〈◊〉
             ages
             lived
             and
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             for
             though
             they
             〈◊〉
             in
             〈◊〉
             sinfull
             〈◊〉
             ,
             yet
             because
             they
             did
             it
             ignorantly
             through
             〈◊〉
             ,
             not
             knowing
             them
             either
             to
             be
             〈◊〉
             or
             sinnes
             ,
             and
             repented
             in
             generall
             for
             all
             〈◊〉
             knowne
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             doubt
             not
             ,
             but
             they
             obtained
             pardon
             of
             all
             their
             ignorances
             .
             Nay
             ,
             our
             charity
             〈◊〉
             further
             to
             all
             these
             this
             day
             ,
             who
             in
             〈◊〉
             of
             heart
             〈◊〉
             the
             Roman
             〈◊〉
             and
             〈◊〉
             it
             .
             But
             we
             understand
             onely
             them
             who
             either
             have
             no
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             to
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             or
             〈◊〉
             such
             as
             after
             the
             use
             〈◊〉
             the
             best
             meanes
             they
             can
             have
             ,
             〈◊〉
             things
             〈◊〉
             ,
             find
             no
             sufficient
             motives
             to
             
             Hall
             ,
             I
             dare
             bee
             bold
             to
             say
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Church
             of
             Rome
             had
             
             years
             before
             the
             councel
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             to
             good
             a
             〈◊〉
             of
             
             doth
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             c
             〈◊〉
             ,
             page
             300.
             
             I
             am
             not
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             that
             all
             images
             are
             idols
             ,
             but
             only
             when
             they
             are
             〈◊〉
             for
             gods
             .
             This
             the
             
             the
             〈◊〉
             shipping
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             with
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             is
             divine
             worship
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             used
             by
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             p.
             299
             They
             keepe
             close
             to
             that
             which
             is
             superstition
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             case
             of
             images
             come
             〈◊〉
             to
             〈◊〉
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             p.
             79.
             
             Et
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             palam
             non
             〈◊〉
             :
             à
             pretate
             &
             
             moribus
             
             in
             〈◊〉
             non
             〈◊〉
             quam
             milvus
             &
             corvus
             〈◊〉
             animalierant
             in
             area
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             singulari
             ,
             At
             nullus
             in
             area
             erat
             idololatres
             ,
             quia
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             quatenus
             Christianam
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               Orig.
            
             p.
             309.
             〈◊〉
             cultum
             latriam
             quam
             appellant
             
             ,
             nec
             debemus
             sive
             〈◊〉
             sive
             〈◊〉
             quamvis
             excellentissimae
             impend
             re
             .
             
             Pontificius
             &
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             non
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             
             modo
             〈◊〉
             creaturae
             〈◊〉
             ne
             
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               Antigag
            
             .
             p.
             319
             Yousay
             ,
             that
             images
             must
             not
             have
             〈◊〉
             so
             we
             :
             let
             your
             practice
             and
             doctrine
             〈◊〉
             together
             ,
             and
             we
             agree
             .
             Dow
             against
             Burton
             .
             p.
             142.
             
             When
             Burton
             objecteth
             that
             〈◊〉
             did
             〈◊〉
             out
             of
             the
             publick
             〈◊〉
             of
             fasts
             ,
             this
             sentence
             ,
             Thou
             hast
             delivered
             us
             from
             superstition
             and
             〈◊〉
             wherein
             we
             were
             〈◊〉
             drowned
             ,
             his
             chiefe
             answer
             is
             ,
             That
             men
             may
             be
             good
             Protestants
             ,
             and
             yet
             not
             〈◊〉
             all
             their
             sorefathers
             ,
             who
             lived
             before
             the
             reformation
             ,
             as
             he
             must
             doe
             ,
             who
             saith
             of
             them
             ,
             they
             were
             wholly
             drowned
             in
             idolatry
             ,
             which
             though
             M.
             〈◊〉
             perhaps
             will
             not
             ,
             yet
             some
             men
             may
             think
             it
             to
             be
             a
             reason
             sufficient
             for
             the
             leaving
             out
             of
             that
             sentence
             .
          
           
             d
             〈◊〉
             .
             page
             306.
             
             Non
             omnis
             error
             in
             his
             quae
             
             insidelitas
             aut
             heresis
             .
             Pottar
             .
             p
             102.
             Every
             
             so
             passionately
             in
             love
             with
             their
             owne
             opinions
             that
             they
             condemne
             all
             other
             differing
             from
             them
             to
             bee
             hereticall
             ,
             so
             there
             〈◊〉
             not
             a
             〈◊〉
             on
             earth
             who
             in
             the
             judgement
             of
             many
             other
             is
             not
             an
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ibid.
             page
             The
             Giant
             in
             Gath
             was
             a
             true
             man
             ,
             though
             much
             deformed
             with
             〈◊〉
             sing
             is
             and
             toes
             ,
             but
             if
             one
             lose
             any
             vitall
             part
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             a
             man
             no
             longer
             ,
             there
             is
             not
             so
             much
             danger
             in
             adding
             super
             〈◊〉
             ,
             as
             is
             in
             〈◊〉
             ,
             what
             is
             essentiall
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             the
             Church
             shall
             never
             bee
             robbed
             of
             any
             〈◊〉
             ,
             necessary
             to
             the
             being
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             promises
             of
             Christ
             assureth
             us
             ,
             but
             that
             she
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             no
             〈◊〉
             truth
             wee
             have
             no
             warrant
             
          
           
             e
             
               Cant
               relat
            
             .
             page
             316.
             
             If
             any
             will
             bee
             a
             leader
             and
             teaching
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             adde
             〈◊〉
             to
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             bee
             〈◊〉
             in
             both
             ,
             〈◊〉
             without
             repentance
             must
             needs
             be
             lost
             ,
             while
             many
             that
             succeed
             him
             in
             the
             errour
             onely
             ,
             and
             notobstinacy
             may
             bee
             saved
             :
             I
             say
             ,
             those
             ,
             howsoever
             〈◊〉
             ,
             are
             neither
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             nor
             hereticks
             before
             God
             and
             are
             therefore
             in
             a
             state
             of
             salvation
             .
             
               Montag
               Apar
               .
               p.
            
             283.
             〈◊〉
             &
             〈◊〉
             non
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             qui
             constanter
             retinent
             doctrinam
             〈◊〉
             ,
             necenim
             ille
             haereticus
             dicetur
             ,
             qui
             per
             omnia
             Romanam
             fidem
             integerrimè
             prositetur
             .
             ibid.
             p.
             389.
             
             Schismatici
             &
             singularitate
             rapti
             in
             transversum
             quales
             Scaliger
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Pareus
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             opinatores
             ,
             quaero
             autem
             an
             quis
             ferendus
             fit
             homo
             novus
             terrae
             filius
             ,
             〈◊〉
             contempto
             spretoque
             consensu
             majorum
             suas
             phreneticas
             observationes
             〈◊〉
             serit
             
          
           
             f
             Shelford
             p.
             238.
             
             Let
             us
             Christians
             leave
             off
             our
             divisions
             ,
             the
             Papists
             and
             we
             call
             upon
             one
             God
             our
             Father
             ,
             upon
             one
             Christ
             our
             Sav
             our
             ,
             〈◊〉
             holy
             Ghost
             our
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             we
             have
             but
             one
             mean
             to
             unite
             us
             to
             this
             holy
             〈◊〉
             ,
             which
             is
             baptisme
             ,
             How
             then
             should
             we
             not
             be
             brethren
             ?
             O
             blessed
             〈◊〉
             raise
             up
             one
             to
             bid
             the
             people
             returne
             ,
             blessed
             be
             that
             peace-maker
             among
             men
             ,
             Nulla
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             pacem
             te
             〈◊〉
             omnes
             .
             ibid.
             p.
             296.
             
             Why
             judge
             we
             so
             eargerly
             others
             for
             holding
             of
             errours
             ,
             are
             any
             without
             them
             ?
             Some
             errours
             we
             may
             beare
             with
             ,
             charity
             〈◊〉
             me
             to
             judge
             that
             errours
             of
             Christians
             are
             not
             of
             intention
             but
             ignorance
             .
             For
             I
             beleeve
             that
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             willingly
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Protestant
             nor
             Lutheran
             would
             wrong
             their
             head
             Christ
             ,
             whom
             daily
             they
             professe
             .
             
               Montag
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             p
             45
             Citius
             inter
             
             bono
             ,
             quam
             inter
             Protestantes
             &
             Papistas
             inaudita
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             nuper
             inauspicato
             〈◊〉
             controversis
             inter
             〈◊〉
             questionibus
             conveniet
             ,
             sed
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             de
             〈◊〉
             istis
             quae
             penè
             〈◊〉
             sani
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             in
             vita
             &
             〈◊〉
             bus
             nobis
             〈◊〉
             ,
             cum
             prophani
             homines
             &
             politici
             sub
             〈◊〉
             &
             〈◊〉
             religionis
             suas
             〈◊〉
             actiones
             ,
             enormiz
             desideria
             soleant
             〈◊〉
             .
             Post
             mota
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             inter
             〈◊〉
             odiis
             decertatum
             vatinianis
             ,
             atque
             eo
             〈◊〉
             est
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             &
             excessus
             ut
             ferre
             eos
             nequeant
             zelota
             &
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             I
             heologi
             qui
             non
             una
             cum
             ipsis
             velint
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Cassander
             vir
             usque
             ad
             miraculum
             eruditus
             〈◊〉
             modestia
             &
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ab
             importunis
             utrinque
             censoribus
             ,
             Calvino
             nimirum
             propter
             editum
             〈◊〉
             aureum
             libellum
             de
             officio
             viri
             pii
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             inter
             〈◊〉
             propter
             consultationem
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             nemo
             ,
             quam
             fortunae
             〈◊〉
             subeite
             
               〈◊〉
               Fricius
            
             〈◊〉
             qui
             impudenter
             noluerunt
             esse
             〈◊〉
             .
             ibid
             pag.
             78.
             
             Hoc
             tempore
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             protestantium
             &
             papistarum
             variantibus
             de
             fide
             ac
             pietate
             sententiis
             distraxerunt
             in
             diversum
             Christianum
             otbem
             ,
             si
             qui
             〈◊〉
             qui
             bellum
             malint
             〈◊〉
             ,
             qui
             velint
             odia
             exerceri
             im
             nortalia
             traducant
             illi
             nostram
             quae
             solet
             odiosius
             exagitari
             tepeditatem
             vel
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             Ego
             filius
             illius
             pacifici
             &
             〈◊〉
             qui
             〈◊〉
             utraque
             unum
             〈◊〉
             materie
             separationis
             ;
             neque
             certè
             arbitror
             ab
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             abhorret
             nostrae
             Anglicanae
             Ecclesiae
             〈◊〉
             &
             voluntas
             ,
             quod
             nonnulli
             〈◊〉
             &
             〈◊〉
             contendunt
             ,
             ibid.
             p.
             245.
             
             In
             Pharisaeis
             ad
             vivum
             depictas
             imagines
             intueamur
             corum
             〈◊〉
             qui
             Pharisaica
             nobis
             institu
             ta
             in
             Christianismum
             retulere
             ,
             〈◊〉
             intelligo
             &
             Jesuitas
             ,
             sive
             ut
             verius
             dicam
             utrinque
             puritanos
             honestatis
             etiam
             civilis
             reduvias
             ,
             pietatis
             carcinomata
             ,
             &
             Christianismi
             dehonestamenta
             pacis
             &
             concordiae
             alastoras
             &
             pernities
             .
          
           
             g
             Pottars
             Epistle
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             it
             was
             undertaken
             in
             obedience
             to
             your
             Majesties
             particular
             commandement
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A67904-e11430
           
             In
             the
             midst
             of
             their
             deniall
             ,
             yet
             they
             avow
             their
             giving
             of
             religious
             adoration
             to
             the
             very
             stock
             or
             stone
             of
             the
             altar
             .
          
           
             a
             Pag.
             47.
             
             A
             great
             〈◊〉
             is
             due
             to
             the
             body
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             the
             throne
             where
             his
             body
             is
             usually
             present
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             49.
             
             
               Do
               mino
               &
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             to
             the
             Lord
             your
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             his
             altar
             ,
             for
             there
             is
             a
             〈◊〉
             due
             to
             that
             too
             .
             ibid.
             pag.
             45.
             
             Therefore
             according
             to
             the
             Service
             booke
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             ,
             the
             Priest
             and
             the
             people
             are
             called
             upon
             ,
             for
             externall
             and
             bodily
             worship
             of
             God
             in
             his
             Church
             ;
             Therefore
             they
             which
             do
             it
             not
             ,
             innovat
             ,
             and
             yet
             the
             government
             is
             so
             moderate
             ,
             God
             grant
             it
             be
             not
             too
             loose
             ,
             that
             no
             man
             is
             constrained
             ,
             no
             man
             questioned
             ,
             only
             religiously
             called
             upon
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             b
             
               Pockling
               altare
               p.
            
             160.
             
             I
             shall
             intreat
             the
             pious
             and
             〈◊〉
             Reader
             ,
             to
             consider
             with
             meet
             reverence
             ,
             what
             is
             recorded
             among
             the
             statutes
             of
             that
             most
             noble
             order
             ;
             
               
               
               
            
             ,
             in
             his
             Sunday
             no
             Sabbath
             at
             the
             end
             ,
             if
             wee
             doe
             not
             onely
             bend
             or
             bow
             our
             body
             to
             his
             blessed
             board
             ,
             or
             holy
             altar
             ,
             but
             fall
             slat
             in
             our
             faces
             before
             his
             footstooll
             so
             soon
             as
             ever
             wee
             come
             in
             sight
             thereof
             ,
             what
             Apostle
             or
             Father
             would
             condemn
             us
             for
             it
             ,
             and
             not
             rather
             be
             delighted
             to
             see
             the
             Lord
             so
             honored
             .
          
           
             c
             Antidot
             .
             〈◊〉
             preface
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             altars
             were
             〈◊〉
             so
             sacred
             that
             even
             the
             barbarous
             souldiers
             honoured
             them
             with
             affectionate
             kisses
             .
             Ibid
             pag.
             86.
             
             The
             altar
             being
             thought
             to
             be
             〈◊〉
             sacred
             ,
             had
             a
             farre
             greater
             measure
             of
             reverence
             and
             devotion
             conferred
             upon
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             a
             reverend
             salutation
             of
             the
             table
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             he
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             both
             pag.
             142.
             commends
             that
             exhortation
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             fifth
             councell
             ,
             
               Ado
               emus
               primum
               〈◊〉
               altare
               .
               Idem
               ,
            
             in
             his
             answer
             to
             〈◊〉
             ,
             pag.
             〈◊〉
             .
             If
             you
             look
             〈◊〉
             unto
             the
             use
             and
             practice
             of
             the
             ancient
             Church
             ,
             you
             〈◊〉
             raisse
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             an
             honor
             to
             the
             altar
             ,
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             an
             
               ad
               
            
             .
          
           
             d
             pag.
             25.
             we
             finde
             in
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             a
             honor
             due
             to
             the
             altar
             :
             and
             in
             
               Tertullian
               ad
               geniculariaris
            
             a
             kneeling
             to
             the
             altar
             :
             and
             in
             the
             fifth
             councel
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             an
             adoration
             of
             the
             altar
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             synoldals
             of
             
               Odo
               〈◊〉
               altaribus
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &
             in
             〈◊〉
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             in
             another
             ,
             
               divine
               altaria
            
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             life
             of
             〈◊〉
             the
             〈◊〉
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             casting
             my self
             to
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             worshipping
             the
             〈◊〉
             ground
             ,
             &
             the
             Grecians
             triple
             prostrations
             tria
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             before
             the
             altar
             in
             the
             old
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             e
             Ibid.
             Although
             they
             gave
             a
             religious
             reverence
             to
             these
             places
             ,
             yet
             they
             determine
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             reverence
             in
             God
             not
             in
             the
             place
             :
             the
             throne
             is
             honoured
             for
             the
             King
             ;
             he
             that
             〈◊〉
             cts
             the
             house
             for
             the
             owners
             sake
             ,
             respects
             not
             the
             house
             but
             him
             .
          
           
             f
             
               ibid.
               pag
            
             30.
             
             So
             much
             they
             said
             ,
             but
             to
             justifie
             the
             practice
             of
             our
             Church
             ,
             I
             need
             not
             say
             so
             much
             :
             for
             as
             although
             the
             humane
             nature
             of
             Christ
             receive
             all
             from
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             yet
             we
             adore
             the
             whole
             suppositum
             in
             grosse
             ,
             which
             consists
             of
             the
             humane
             as
             well
             as
             of
             the
             Divine
             .
             So
             because
             of
             Gods
             personall
             presence
             in
             the
             place
             ,
             wee
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             without
             abstraction
             of
             his
             person
             ,
             from
             the
             place
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             altar
             .
             
             153.
             
             Altars
             have
             beene
             in
             all
             ages
             so
             greatly
             honoured
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             the
             seats
             and
             chaires
             of
             Estate
             ,
             where
             the
             Lord
             〈◊〉
             to
             place
             himselfe
             amongst
             us
             .
             
               Quid
               est
               enim
               altare
            
             (
             as
             Optatus
             speaks
             )
             
               nisi
               sedes
               〈◊〉
               &
               〈◊〉
               Christi
               ?
            
          
           
             As
             much
             adoration
             of
             the
             elements
             they
             grant
             as
             the
             Papists
             require
             .
          
           
             g
             Apologie
             des
             〈◊〉
             reformes
             par
             loan
             Daille
             chap.
             20.
             
          
           
             h
             〈◊〉
             remedy
             of
             profainnesse
             ,
             pag.
             1
             2
             8.
             away
             with
             these
             monsters
             of
             opinion
             and
             practice
             in
             this
             sacrament
             ,
             Christ
             Jesus
             is
             here
             really
             tendered
             to
             us
             ,
             and
             who
             can
             ,
             who
             〈◊〉
             take
             him
             but
             on
             his
             knees
             ?
          
           
             i
             〈◊〉
             moderate
             answer
             ,
             p.
             137.
             〈◊〉
             bowing
             towards
             the
             communion
             table
             be
             offensive
             to
             you
             at
             the
             administration
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             I
             would
             〈◊〉
             know
             upon
             what
             reasons
             〈◊〉
             stomack
             ,
             that
             men
             should
             use
             their
             greatest
             reverence
             in
             so
             great
             an
             action
             ,
             thinke
             you
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             the
             Priest
             should
             take
             into
             his
             hands
             the
             holy
             〈◊〉
             without
             lowly
             reverence
             ,
             or
             that
             it
             is
             an
             innovation
             so
             to
             do
             ?
          
           
             In
             the
             matter
             of
             images
             their
             full
             agreeance
             with
             Rome
             .
          
           
             k
             
               Montag
               .
               orig
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             162.
             
             Imagines
             illae
             per
             ecclesias
             constitutae
             quae
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             iconoclastarum
             ,
             ibid.
             p.
             174.
             sub
             praetextu
             reformatae
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Deum
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             per
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             eversis
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             templis
             ,
             sa
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             redactis
             infiscum
             
             lones
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             l
             
               〈◊〉
               .
               〈◊〉
               .
               p
            
             28.
             〈◊〉
             est
             omnino
             quod
             affirmas
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             〈◊〉
             Caesaris
             imago
             in
             numilmate
             ,
             〈◊〉
             meletii
             character
             in
             pala
             annuli
             ,
             quod
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Caesarem
             in
             〈◊〉
             suo
             &
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             archerypum
             transit
             ea
             〈◊〉
             ,
             quo
             modo
             si
             quis
             sancti
             〈◊〉
             imaginem
             〈◊〉
             afficiat
             ,
             illum
             ego
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             suae
             temeritatis
             peaenas
             dare
             .
             Studley
             in
             his
             glasse
             for
             〈◊〉
             about
             the
             end
             ,
             tels
             us
             ,
             that
             he
             knew
             a
             Churchwarden
             for
             the
             taking
             downe
             of
             a
             〈◊〉
             which
             he
             conceived
             to
             have
             been
             by
             his
             neighbours
             idolized
             ,
             to
             have
             had
             his
             swine
             〈◊〉
             with
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             thereafter
             the
             man
             in
             desperation
             to
             have
             drowned
             himselfe
             Whence
             he
             exhorts
             all
             men
             to
             beware
             so
             much
             as
             to
             censure
             their
             antecessors
             of
             idolatry
             ,
             for
             〈◊〉
             such
             monuments
             of
             their
             devotion
             
          
           
             m
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               .
               pag.
            
             24.
             
             
             debemus
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             asservamus
             enim
             diligenter
             ,
             &
             cum
             cura
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             virginis
             ,
             sanctorum
             〈◊〉
             innumeras
             imagines
             ,
             praesertim
             vero
             Jesu
             
             etiam
             in
             templorum
             cryptis
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             in
             parietibus
             ,
             &
             
             non
             adoramus
             .
             Ib.
             p.
             26
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             ut
             cum
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Sunt
             apud
             nos
             quod
             aliquoties
             dicendum
             〈◊〉
             imagines
             in
             〈◊〉
             per
             stallos
             ,
             ut
             vocant
             ,
             Canonicorum
             ,
             per
             fenestras
             ,
             ambones
             ,
             vasa
             ,
             vestimenta
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               Pocking
               .
               〈◊〉
               pag.
            
             87.
             
             In
             my
             Lord
             of
             〈◊〉
             private
             Chappel
             ,
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             〈◊〉
             the
             altar
             ,
             most
             richly
             furnished
             close
             to
             the
             wall
             under
             the
             East
             window
             ,
             many
             goodly
             pictures
             which
             cannot
             but
             strik
             the
             beholders
             with
             thoughts
             of
             piety
             ,
             and
             devotion
             at
             their
             entrance
             into
             so
             holy
             a
             place
             ,
             as
             the
             picture
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             likewise
             of
             the
             holy
             Apostles
             ,
             together
             with
             a
             fair
             crucifix
             ,
             and
             our
             blessed
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             S.
             Iohn
             set
             up
             in
             painted
             glasse
             in
             the
             east
             window
             ,
             just
             over
             the
             holy
             table
             ,
             or
             sacred
             altar
             ;
             So
             that
             I
             must
             say
             ,
             That
             who
             so
             lives
             in
             this
             Diocie
             ,
             must
             be
             condemned
             of
             great
             impiety
             ,
             that
             will
             desert
             his
             Lord
             ,
             and
             not
             follow
             him
             giving
             a
             precedent
             of
             such
             devotion
             ,
             so
             conformable
             to
             the
             rubrick
             of
             our
             Church
             .
             Heylens
             answer
             ,
             pag.
             174.
             
             For
             your
             particular
             instances
             in
             the
             Cathedrals
             of
             Durham
             ,
             Bristow
             ,
             Pauls
             ,
             &c.
             the
             most
             that
             you
             except
             against
             ,
             are
             things
             of
             ornament
             ,
             which
             you
             are
             greeved
             to
             see
             now
             more
             rich
             or
             costly
             ,
             nor
             they
             have
             been
             formerly
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               altare
            
             page
             24.
             
             Our
             Churches
             (
             by
             Gods
             mercy
             )
             are
             a
             glory
             to
             our
             religion
             ,
             beautified
             with
             goodly
             glasse
             windowes
             .
             ibid
             page
             87.
             
             A
             faire
             Crucifix
             ,
             and
             our
             blessed
             Lady
             ,
             and
             St.
             Iohn
             set
             up
             in
             painted
             glasse
             in
             the
             East
             window
             ,
             just
             over
             the
             sacred
             altar
             .
          
           
             n
             Widowes
             schismaticall
             puritan
             ,
             page
             10.
             
             Church
             pictures
             are
             an
             externall
             beauty
             ,
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             a
             memory
             of
             honour
             to
             the
             dead
             ,
             and
             Saint
             Gregory
             cals
             them
             〈◊〉
             mens
             books
             .
             
               Pockling
               .
               altare
            
             page
             87.
             
             There
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             many
             goodly
             pictures
             ,
             which
             cannot
             but
             strike
             the
             beholders
             with
             thoughts
             of
             piety
             and
             devotion
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               Antig.
            
             page
             318.
             
             The
             pictures
             of
             Christ
             ,
             of
             the
             blessed
             Virgin
             ,
             and
             Saints
             ,
             may
             be
             made
             ,
             had
             in
             houses
             ,
             set
             up
             in
             Churches
             ,
             respect
             and
             honour
             may
             be
             given
             to
             them
             the
             〈◊〉
             do
             it
             ,
             and
             use
             them
             for
             helpes
             of
             piery
             ,
             in
             rememoration
             ,
             and
             effectuall
             representing
             of
             the
             prototyp
             .
             Ibid.
             page
             300.
             
             Imager
             have
             three
             uses
             ,
             assigned
             by
             our
             Schooles
             instruction
             of
             the
             rude
             ,
             commonefaction
             of
             story
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             up
             of
             devotion
             ,
             these
             you
             and
             we
             also
             give
             unto
             them
             .
          
           
             o
             
               Montag
               .
               antid
            
             .
             page
             30.
             
             Christiani
             omnes
             adoramus
             Christum
             imagini
             &
             simulachro
             ,
             non
             prosternimur
             coram
             imagine
             forsan
             ,
             quid
             ad
             rem
             vero
             ?
             Invitatio
             est
             
             mensam
             Dominicam
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             in
             genua
             procumbimus
             ,
             venerationem
             〈◊〉
             ,
             
             .
          
           
             p
             
               Montag
               .
               antid
            
             .
             p.
             16.
             〈◊〉
             ,
             illum
             cultum
             solens
             〈◊〉
             ,
             neque
             ego
             nomen
             a
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             rationem
             ,
             vel
             subjectum
             improbavero
             ,
             eum
             à
             〈◊〉
             soletis
             〈◊〉
             re
             ,
             non
             also
             〈◊〉
             ,
             quam
             quod
             〈◊〉
             subjectarum
             〈◊〉
             ,
             secundum
             〈◊〉
             &
             minus
             〈◊〉
             se
             distinguantur
             .
             pag.
             27.
             
             Tantummodo
             taxamus
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             usum
             &
             〈◊〉
             non
             〈◊〉
             ullo
             pacto
             .
             p.
             24.
             〈◊〉
             ad
             Ecclesiae
             Romanae
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             p.
             40.
             
             Nolunt
             illi
             quovis
             pacto
             〈◊〉
             cuicunque
             〈◊〉
             ne
             〈◊〉
             cultu
             relativo
             exhiberi
             ,
             sed
             non
             constat
             quis
             
             Deo
             〈◊〉
             &
             〈◊〉
             debitus
             ,
             quibus
             terminis
             〈◊〉
             ,
             quis
             ille
             qui
             solus
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             quis
             ejus
             modus
             ,
             gradus
             ,
             mensura
             ,
             pattes
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             nec
             illud
             agitur
             ut
             constare
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             est
             in
             hac
             questione
             &
             
             nempe
             vel
             contendendi
             vel
             
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             conveniet
             〈◊〉
             nos
             .
             Magnam
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ab
             〈◊〉
             Christi
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             inter
             se
             contendentibus
             〈◊〉
             ,
             qui
             
             in
             hoc
             〈◊〉
             cultu
             ,
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             possumus
             sine
             justo
             〈◊〉
             ,
             animae
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             &
             
             ,
             in
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             About
             reliques
             they
             agree
             with
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             q
             
               Andrew
               stri
               〈◊〉
            
             For
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             were
             〈◊〉
             sure
             they
             were
             true
             wee
             would
             carry
             to
             them
             the
             regard
             〈◊〉
             becomes
             .
             It
             was
             〈◊〉
             and
             un
             discreetly
             done
             of
             Vigilantius
             so
             to
             〈◊〉
             his
             〈◊〉
             co
             〈◊〉
             them
             ,
             had
             they
             power
             of
             doing
             miracles
             we
             would
             have
             esteemed
             them
             so
             much
             the
             more
             but
             in
             their
             〈◊〉
             degree
             :
             yet
             the
             carrying
             of
             them
             about
             in
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             and
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             did
             object
             ,
             if
             he
             did
             it
             〈◊〉
             ,
             we
             would
             〈◊〉
             beare
             with
             it
             ,
             and
             excuse
             it
             as
             〈◊〉
             from
             〈◊〉
             and
             〈◊〉
             devotion
             which
             will
             
             end
             it
             .
          
           
             r
             
               Montag
               .
               antid
            
             .
             p.
             17.
             
             
             vase
             
             convolvebant
             Ego
             certe
             cum
             〈◊〉
             illas
             reliquias
             fascus
             
             ,
             admovebo
             
             
             .
          
           
             s
             
               〈◊〉
               antid
            
             .
             p.
             16.
             
             
             〈◊〉
             
             corpori
             insidentem
             ,
             fit
             quandam
             tenus
             particeps
             sanctificationis
             .
          
           
             t
             
               Monta
               .
               antid
            
             .
             p.
             16.
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             veterem
             sanctorum
             〈◊〉
             &
             cineribus
             〈◊〉
             honorem
             detulisse
             &
             veneratione
             quadam
             relativa
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             w
             
               Montag
               .
               antid
            
             .
             p.
             44.
             〈◊〉
             peregrinationem
             religiosam
             ad
             loca
             ut
             appellant
             〈◊〉
             quisquam
             〈◊〉
             qui
             in
             rebus
             Ecclesiae
             Christianae
             veteris
             non
             est
             hospes
             :
             improbat
             Molinaeus
             &
             merito
             peregrinationes
             ut
             appellant
             malas
             ,
             inventas
             vel
             ad
             superstitionem
             ,
             vel
             ad
             questum
             ,
             vel
             ad
             tyrannidem
             ,
             quas
             &
             ipsas
             nemo
             sanus
             inter
             catholicos
             Romanos
             non
             improbaverit
             .
          
           
             x
             
               Montag
               .
               orig
            
             .
             p.
             45.
             
             Ut
             de
             lana
             caprina
             ,
             vel
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             hic
             〈◊〉
             videantur
             contendentes
             .
             〈◊〉
             come
             very
             neare
             to
             the
             invocation
             of
             Saints
             .
          
           
             y
             
               Andrews
               stricturae
            
             p.
             57.
             
             The
             〈◊〉
             freely
             confessed
             to
             M.
             Causabon
             that
             he
             had
             never
             prayed
             to
             a
             Saint
             in
             all
             his
             life
             save
             onely
             when
             〈◊〉
             happened
             to
             follow
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             that
             then
             he
             sung
             
               ora
               pro
               〈◊〉
            
             with
             the
             Clerks
             but
             else
             not
             .
          
           
             z
             Montag
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             p
             20.
             
             Non
             〈◊〉
             sanctos
             esse
             orationis
             &
             〈◊〉
             ut
             〈◊〉
             soletis
             mediatores
             sed
             〈◊〉
             universis
             :
             precibus
             suis
             apud
             Deum
             〈◊〉
             &
             orationibus
             mediantur
             .
             Christus
             〈◊〉
             &
             absque
             aliis
             〈◊〉
             mediator
             redemptionis
             &
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             〈◊〉
             intercessionis
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Andrews
               〈◊〉
            
             pa.
             8.
             
             We
             agree
             with
             Saint
             Augustine
             ,
             we
             celebrate
             the
             memories
             and
             hold
             the
             feasts
             of
             the
             blessed
             Martyrs
             as
             well
             for
             imitation
             ,
             as
             that
             we
             may
             be
             〈◊〉
             of
             their
             intercession
             .
             Shelfords
             first
             sermon
             page
             44.
             
             Upon
             the
             Saints
             dayes
             the
             Saints
             in
             Heaven
             〈◊〉
             with
             us
             ,
             now
             if
             the
             Saints
             in
             Heaven
             〈◊〉
             their
             manner
             〈◊〉
             us
             with
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             shall
             wee
             be
             so
             base
             minded
             as
             not
             to
             〈◊〉
             with
             them
             ?
             Ibid
             〈◊〉
             27.
             In
             
             and
             in
             dedicating
             tem
             ples
             to
             God
             in
             their
             names
             these
             who
             neglect
             this
             holy
             fellowship
             have
             a
             great
             losse
             ,
             which
             none
             can
             see
             but
             they
             who
             have
             spirituall
             eies
             
          
           
             a
             Andrews
             answer
             to
             Cardinall
             Pirron
             .
             20.
             
             Chap.
             We
             will
             hope
             well
             that
             Theodosius
             might
             interceed
             with
             God
             for
             his
             children
             ,
             we
             see
             no
             cause
             to
             the
             contrary
             .
             
               They
               Idolize
               the
               blessed
               Virgin
               as
               much
               as
               any
               Papist
               .
               Montag
               .
               antid
               .
            
             p.
             22.
             
             Meminerunt
             amicorum
             suorū
             &
             rerū
             à
             se
             quondā
             in
             terris
             gesta
             tum
             quocirca
             ad
             Christum
             in
             coelo
             recollecti
             poterint
             de
             via
             ordinaria
             per
             Jesum
             Christum
             apud
             Deum
             patrem
             amicos
             ,
             familiares
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             precibus
             commendare
             &
             adjuvare
             .
          
           
             o
             M.
             
               Dow
               p.
            
             54.
             
             In
             all
             these
             〈◊〉
             straines
             of
             Rhetorick
             (
             for
             such
             for
             the
             most
             part
             they
             seeme
             rather
             then
             positive
             〈◊〉
             )
             Stafford
             hath
             not
             deviat
             so
             much
             to
             the
             one
             extreame
             as
             M
             Bortouns
             marginall
             hath
             to
             the
             other
             in
             〈◊〉
             and
             calling
             her
             the
             new
             great
             goddesse
             〈◊〉
             .
             And
             if
             it
             be
             true
             that
             he
             hath
             not
             digressed
             in
             any
             particular
             from
             D.
             〈◊〉
             the
             Bishop
             of
             〈◊〉
             as
             M.
             Burtoun
             makes
             him
             affirme
             ,
             I
             dare
             boldly
             say
             M
             Burtoun
             will
             never
             be
             able
             to
             finde
             the
             least
             point
             of
             Popery
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             For
             it
             is
             well
             knowne
             ,
             that
             Bishop
             hath
             approved
             himselfe
             such
             a
             champion
             against
             Rome
             ,
             that
             they
             who
             have
             tryed
             his
             strength
             durst
             never
             yet
             come
             to
             a
             second
             encounter
             .
          
           
             b
             
               Montag
               .
               antid
            
             .
             p.
             229.
             
             Save
             all
             other
             labour
             in
             this
             point
             .
             Prove
             only
             their
             knowledge
             of
             any
             thing
             ordinarily
             I
             promise
             you
             streight
             I
             willl
             say
             holy
             S.
             Mary
             pray
             for
             me
             .
             
               Ib.
               antid
            
             .
             p.
             23.
             
             Tu
             〈◊〉
             proba
             &
             demonstra
             posse
             me
             certum
             esse
             de
             scientia
             sanctorum
             particulari
             quocunque
             tandem
             modo
             acquisita
             ego
             certe
             quod
             ad
             me
             ipsum
             attinet
             sanctos
             defunctos
             beatam
             puta
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             Apostolos
             gloriosissimos
             Martyres
             non
             verebor
             adire
             interpellare
             ,
             alloqui
             ,
             〈◊〉
             precibus
             deprecari
             habeant
             me
             commendatum
             &
             adjutum
             suis
             〈◊〉
             apud
             Deum
             patrem
             per
             filium
             .
             
               Idem
               antid
            
             .
             p.
             200.
             
             Perhaps
             there
             is
             no
             such
             great
             impiety
             in
             saying
             holy
             S.
             Laurence
             pray
             for
             me
             .
          
           
             c
             Montag
             .
             invocation
             of
             Saints
             p.
             99.
             
             If
             thus
             my selfe
             resolved
             to
             do
             infer
             (
             holy
             Angel
             keeper
             pray
             for
             me
             )
             I
             see
             no
             reason
             to
             be
             taxed
             with
             point
             of
             Popery
             or
             superstition
             much
             lesse
             of
             absurdity
             or
             impiety
             .
             
               Ib.
               ant
            
             .
             p.
             203.
             
             The
             case
             of
             Angels
             keepers
             in
             point
             of
             advocation
             is
             much
             different
             from
             other
             Angels
             not
             guardians
             ,
             as
             being
             continually
             attendants
             alwaies
             at
             hand
             though
             invisible
             ,
             and
             therefore
             though
             we
             may
             say
             S.
             Angel
             keeper
             pray
             for
             me
             ,
             it
             followeth
             nor
             ,
             we
             may
             say
             
               S.
               Gabriel
            
             pray
             for
             me
             .
          
           
             d
             
               Anthony
               Stafford
               Female
               glorie
            
             .
             p.
             3.
             
             Others
             of
             these
             first
             and
             purer
             times
             not
             without
             admiration
             observe
             that
             God
             was
             almost
             fifty
             ages
             in
             the
             meditation
             of
             the
             structure
             of
             this
             stately
             Palace
             .
             
               Mon.
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             p.
             301.
             
             Magno
             procul
             dubio
             opere
             templū
             illud
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             aparabatur
             ,
             nec
             ut
             unade
             multis
             mater
             Domini
             in
             hune
             mundum
             processit
             è
             materno
             utero
             .
             Ibid.
             p.
             338.
             
             Utcunque
             conceptum
             in
             originali
             peccato
             '
             ,
             vixisse
             tamen
             immunem
             à
             mortali
             peccato
             cum
             〈◊〉
             putaverim
             .
             
               Staffords
               Female
               glorie
            
             in
             his
             proemiall
             verses
             ,
             for
             Eves
             offence
             '
             ,
             not
             hers
             she
             did
             begin
             ,
             to
             learne
             repentance
             ere
             she
             knew
             to
             sinne
             .
             Idem
             p.
             20.
             
             She
             sent
             forth
             many
             a
             sigh
             for
             sin
             not
             having
             committed
             any
             ,
             and
             bewailed
             that
             of
             which
             she
             was
             utterly
             ignorant
             .
             Idem
             p.
             8.
             
             The
             Apostles
             sometimes
             were
             obscured
             with
             the
             fog
             of
             finne
             ,
             but
             her
             brightnesse
             nothing
             vitious
             could
             lessen
             ,
             much
             lesse
             alutterly
             extinguish
             .
          
           
             e
             
               Femal
               glorie
            
             .
             p.
             28.
             
             Nothing
             in
             her
             was
             wanting
             but
             the
             〈◊〉
             it selfe
             .
             Idem
             in
             the
             preface
             ,
             Whether
             we
             regard
             her
             person
             or
             her
             divine
             gifts
             ,
             shee
             is
             in
             dignity
             next
             to
             God
             himselfe
             .
             Ib.
             Great
             Queen
             of
             Queens
             ,
             daughter
             ,
             and
             mother
             ,
             and
             the
             spouse
             of
             God.
             Idem
             p.
             210.
             
             Her
             assumption
             by
             many
             of
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             by
             all
             the
             Romish
             Church
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             the
             reformed
             is
             held
             for
             an
             undoubted
             truth
             .
          
           
             f
             Montag
             .
             apar
             .
             p.
             212.
             
             Dominum
             profecto
             indicat
             〈◊〉
             nomen
             ,
             nam
             revera
             facta
             est
             domina
             omnium
             creaturarum
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ait
             ,
             cum
             conditoris
             omnium
             effecta
             fuerit
             mater
             .
             Ibid.
             p.
             302.
             
             Certe
             nulli
             sanctorum
             dedi
             Deus
             plura
             ,
             nulli
             majora
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ne
             omnibus
             quidem
             ne
             sanctis
             ,
             tanta
             ,
             hoc
             est
             elogia
             matris
             Dei
             Deus
             〈◊〉
             qui
             titulus
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             omnes
             omnium
             creaturarum
             dignitates
             illud
             unicum
             privilegium
             supergreditur
             Recte
             ait
             B.
             Thomas
             ,
             beata
             virgo
             ex
             hoc
             quod
             est
             mater
             Dei
             habet
             quandam
             dignitatem
             infinitam
             .
             Ex
             his
             licet
             colligere
             (
             inquit
             Baradas
             )
             sanctissimam
             virginem
             infinitam
             〈◊〉
             quondam
             dignitatem
             ex
             Deo
             ,
             qui
             &
             〈◊〉
             bonaventura
             recitat
             ,
             majorem
             mundum
             Deus
             facere
             potest
             ,
             majus
             coelum
             Deus
             facere
             potest
             majorem
             autem
             matrem
             quam
             est
             mater
             Dei
             〈◊〉
             facere
             non
             potest
             .
             Fem.
             gl
             .
             p.
             21.
             
             She
             undoubtedly
             deserved
             to
             be
             rapt
             up
             ,
             if
             it
             were
             possible
             ,
             a
             story
             higher
             than
             was
             S.
             
               Paul.
               Ib.
            
             p.
             80.
             
             Certainly
             all
             the
             ancient
             Fathers
             with
             one
             consent
             affirme
             that
             she
             deserves
             to
             be
             Empresse
             of
             all
             others
             who
             humbled
             her selfe
             below
             them
             all
             .
          
           
             g
             
               Femal
               glorie
            
             .
             In
             the
             Panegyrick
             ,
             to
             whom
             do
             bow
             the
             souls
             of
             all
             the
             just
             ,
             whose
             place
             is
             next
             to
             Gods
             ,
             to
             whom
             the
             Hierarchie
             do
             throng
             ,
             and
             for
             whom
             heaven
             is
             all
             one
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Ib.
             p.
             3.
             
             Truly
             our
             beleef
             may
             easily
             digest
             this
             〈◊〉
             his
             〈◊〉
             would
             〈◊〉
             her
             fit
             to
             be
             〈◊〉
             of
             this
             lower
             world
             .
             Ib.
             pa.
             17
             There
             were
             no
             doubt
             some
             of
             〈◊〉
             children
             who
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             before
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             to
             their
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Ibid.
             page
             32.
             
             The
             〈◊〉
             glorious
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             h
             Femal
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             .
             Whose
             place
             is
             next
             to
             God
             ,
             and
             in
             his
             face
             all
             creatures
             and
             delights
             doe
             see
             as
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             i
             Ibid.
             p.
             220.
             
             The
             〈◊〉
             of
             this
             land
             are
             〈◊〉
             I
             mean
             ,
             they
             reject
             all
             testimonies
             of
             her
             worth
             as
             haile
             Mary
             full
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &c.
             
             They
             abhor
             to
             hear
             her
             called
             Domina
             ,
             because
             forsooth
             they
             chalenge
             to
             themselves
             a
             greater
             measure
             of
             knowledge
             but
             a
             lesser
             of
             piety
             ,
             than
             did
             their
             〈◊〉
             by
             〈◊〉
             words
             and
             〈◊〉
             familiar
             to
             antiquity
             .
             Of
             one
             thing
             I
             will
             assure
             them
             till
             they
             be
             good
             〈◊〉
             they
             shall
             never
             be
             good
             Christians
             .
          
           
             k
             page
             23.
             
             My
             arithmetick
             will
             not
             serve
             me
             to
             number
             all
             those
             who
             have
             registrate
             their
             nam
             〈◊〉
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             of
             〈◊〉
             our
             blessed
             Lady
             .
             The
             Princes
             of
             this
             〈◊〉
             have
             not
             beene
             defective
             in
             doing
             her
             all
             possible
             honour
             ,
             and
             in
             consecrating
             Chapels
             and
             Temples
             to
             her
             memory
             .
             〈◊〉
             holy
             Orders
             also
             are
             of
             this
             〈◊〉
             as
             the
             〈◊〉
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             Franciscans
             ,
             the
             Cartusians
             ,
             and
             many
             others
             .
             If
             all
             those
             testimonies
             and
             examples
             of
             great
             worthy
             and
             pious
             people
             will
             not
             move
             us
             to
             honour
             her
             ,
             we
             shall
             be
             judged
             both
             unworthy
             of
             this
             life
             ,
             and
             ignorant
             of
             that
             better
             to
             come
             .
          
           
             l
             Ib.
             p
             153.
             
             This
             day
             the
             celebration
             whereof
             is
             institute
             by
             the
             Church
             is
             called
             Candlemes
             ,
             as
             much
             as
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             day
             of
             lights
             ,
             on
             which
             while
             masse
             was
             singing
             very
             many
             tapers
             were
             burning
             in
             the
             Church
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               orig
               .
               p.
            
             157.
             
             
               Diem
               ab
               illa
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               cant
               〈◊〉
               vel
               purificationis
               :
               nos
               anglue
            
             the
             purification
             of
             our
             Lady
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Candlemes
             day
             
               à
               distributione
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               .
               Couzins
            
             did
             put
             all
             this
             in
             practice
             in
             the
             Cathedral
             of
             Durham
             made
             burne
             in
             day
             light
             some
             hundreths
             of
             wax
             candles
             .
             
               Peter
               Smart
            
             for
             preaching
             against
             him
             was
             deposed
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             but
             Couzins
             for
             his
             devotion
             advanced
             from
             a
             Prebend
             to
             a
             Provest
             of
             a
             Colledge
             and
             a
             royall
             Chaplane
             in
             ordinary
             .
          
           
             m
             
               Femal
               glorie
            
             p.
             226.
             
             The
             originall
             of
             the
             sodality
             of
             the
             blessed
             virgin
             is
             derived
             from
             the
             battell
             of
             Naupactum
             gained
             by
             John
             of
             Austria
             and
             the
             Christians
             ,
             which
             victory
             was
             attributed
             to
             her
             intercession
             with
             her
             Son.
             
          
           
             n
             〈◊〉
             answer
             .
             p.
             123.
             
             As
             for
             〈◊〉
             booke
             intituled
             the
             
               Femal
               glory
            
             you
             finde
             not
             in
             it
             that
             I
             see
             by
             your
             collections
             any
             thing
             positively
             or
             〈◊〉
             delivered
             contrary
             unto
             any
             point
             of
             doctrine
             established
             and
             received
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             .
             Some
             swelling
             language
             there
             is
             into
             it
             and
             some
             Apostrophees
             I
             perceive
             by
             you
             to
             the
             Virgin
             Mary
             which
             if
             you
             take
             for
             invocations
             you
             mistake
             his
             meaning
             ,
             no
             innovation
             hitherto
             〈◊〉
             of
             doctrine
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A67904-e14570
           
             a
             〈◊〉
             cites
             from
             Causabon
             these
             words
             :
             Put
             by
             controversies
             these
             things
             wherein
             all
             sects
             universally
             do
             agree
             ,
             are
             sufficient
             for
             salvation
             .
          
           
             They
             joyne
             with
             Rome
             in
             〈◊〉
             up
             traditions
             in
             prejudice
             of
             Scripture
             .
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               anti
               .
               d.
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               .
            
             〈◊〉
             .
             sect
             .
             2.
             
             Things
             that
             have
             been
             generally
             received
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             Christ
             are
             〈◊〉
             to
             have
             been
             derived
             from
             Apostolicall
             tradition
             ,
             without
             any
             speciall
             mandat
             left
             in
             Scripture
             for
             the
             doing
             of
             them
             .
             Praying
             directly
             towards
             the
             East
             is
             conceived
             to
             be
             of
             〈◊〉
             condition
             ,
             why
             may
             wee
             not
             conclude
             the
             like
             of
             〈◊〉
             up
             the
             〈◊〉
             along
             the
             〈◊〉
             ?
             Many
             things
             come
             into
             our
             minde
             by
             a
             successionall
             tradition
             ,
             for
             which
             we
             cannot
             finde
             an
             〈◊〉
             command
             ,
             which
             yet
             〈◊〉
             ought
             to
             entertaine
             ,
             
             ;
             of
             which
             traditions
             there
             are
             many
             ,
             which
             〈◊〉
             retaine
             their
             force
             among
             us
             in
             England
             .
             This
             Church
             (
             the
             Lord
             〈◊〉
             thanked
             for
             it
             )
             hath
             stood
             more
             firme
             for
             Apostolicall
             〈◊〉
             ,
             than
             any
             other
             whatsoever
             of
             the
             reformation
             .
             
               Samuel
               〈◊〉
            
             sermon
             ,
             p.
             15.
             
             We
             yeeld
             that
             there
             are
             Apostolicall
             traditions
             rituall
             and
             dogmaticall
             ,
             which
             are
             no
             where
             mentioned
             or
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             but
             delivered
             by
             word
             of
             mouth
             ,
             by
             the
             Apostles
             to
             their
             followers
             ;
             for
             some
             of
             which
             these
             are
             reputed
             the
             number
             of
             Canonicall
             books
             ,
             the
             Apostles
             creed
             the
             baptisme
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             fast
             of
             Lent
             ,
             the
             Lords
             day
             ,
             the
             great
             festivalls
             of
             Easter
             and
             Whitson
             day
             ,
             beside
             these
             we
             〈◊〉
             ,
             there
             are
             and
             have
             been
             many
             ancient
             〈◊〉
             traditions
             ,
             from
             which
             as
             foundations
             grew
             those
             noted
             practices
             of
             not
             fasting
             on
             the
             Sunday
             ,
             of
             adoring
             towards
             the
             East
             ,
             〈◊〉
             before
             the
             altar
             ,
             of
             signing
             the
             baptised
             with
             the
             crosse
             ,
             of
             exorcising
             the
             party
             baptised
             ,
             and
             putting
             a
             white
             garment
             upon
             them
             ,
             of
             receiving
             the
             〈◊〉
             fasting
             ,
             of
             mixing
             water
             with
             the
             wine
             ,
             of
             sending
             it
             to
             such
             as
             were
             absent
             ,
             of
             eating
             the
             confecrate
             bread
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             or
             carrying
             it
             home
             ,
             of
             crossing
             themselves
             when
             they
             went
             out
             ,
             or
             when
             〈◊〉
             went
             in
             ,
             when
             they
             went
             to
             bed
             ,
             or
             when
             they
             rose
             ,
             when
             they
             sate
             downe
             to
             meat
             ,
             when
             they
             lighted
             candles
             ,
             or
             had
             any
             businesse
             of
             moment
             to
             doe
             ,
             that
             ceremonies
             and
             rites
             of
             this
             nature
             are
             〈◊〉
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Church
             to
             ordaine
             ,
             we
             generally
             grant
             to
             our
             adversaries
             .
             White
             on
             the
             Sabboth
             ,
             page
             97.
             
             The
             reformed
             Churches
             reject
             not
             all
             traditions
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             are
             spurious
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             no
             consonant
             to
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             but
             genuine
             traditions
             agreeable
             to
             the
             rule
             of
             faith
             ,
             derived
             from
             the
             Apostolicall
             times
             by
             a
             successive
             current
             ,
             and
             which
             have
             the
             uniforme
             testimony
             of
             pious
             antiquity
             ,
             are
             received
             and
             honoured
             by
             us
             .
             Now
             such
             are
             these
             which
             follow
             the
             historicall
             tradition
             ,
             concerning
             the
             number
             ,
             integrity
             ,
             dignity
             ,
             and
             perfection
             of
             the
             books
             of
             Canonicall
             Scripture
             ,
             the
             Catholick
             exposition
             of
             many
             sentences
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             the
             Apostles
             creed
             ,
             the
             baptisme
             of
             infants
             ,
             the
             observation
             of
             the
             Lords
             day
             ,
             and
             some
             other
             〈◊〉
             ,
             as
             Easter
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &c.
             baptising
             and
             administration
             of
             the
             Supper
             in
             holy
             assemblies
             ,
             the
             service
             of
             the
             Church
             in
             a
             known
             language
             ,
             the
             delivering
             of
             the
             Communion
             to
             the
             people
             in
             both
             kindes
             ,
             the
             superiority
             of
             Bishops
             over
             Priests
             and
             Deacons
             in
             jurisdiction
             ,
             and
             power
             of
             ordination
             .
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             p.
             396.
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             tur
             in
             Scripturis
             infantes
             batizari
             ,
             aut
             in
             coena
             Domini
             sub
             utraque
             specie
             communicantes
             participare
             .
             600.
             sunt
             ejusmodi
             in
             rebus
             sacris
             à
             Deo
             institutis
             ,
             〈◊〉
             mandatis
             &
             usurpatis
             ab
             Ecclesia
             ,
             de
             quibus
             possumus
             pro
             〈◊〉
             ,
             nihil
             tale
             docet
             Scriptura
             ,
             Scriptura
             haec
             non
             aedicat
             .
          
           
             d
             
               Mon.
               orig
            
             .
             p.
             276.
             
             Nihil
             est
             memoriae
             proditum
             ,
             quod
             ego
             quidem
             sciam
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             apud
             vetustiores
             ,
             sive
             historicos
             five
             〈◊〉
             ,
             probabile
             tamen
             est
             〈◊〉
             receptam
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             de
             traditione
             vetustiore
             ,
             aut
             scriptis
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             vetustioribus
             nunc
             deperditis
             dimanasse
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               apar
            
             .
             389.
             
             Ad
             me
             quod
             attinet
             ,
             si
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             sanctis
             patribus
             per
             illa
             tempora
             inventum
             ,
             primo
             &
             〈◊〉
             ,
             nulla
             traditione
             priore
             commendatum
             ,
             nullo
             usu
             veterum
             ,
             ne
             quidem
             vestigiis
             leviter
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             per
             〈◊〉
             annorum
             decursum
             ad
             nostra
             usque
             tempora
             sine
             contradictione
             〈◊〉
             ,
             non
             video
             cur
             non
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             vim
             suam
             obtineat
             &
             authoritatem
             .
             Absit
             enim
             ut
             〈◊〉
             Ecclesia
             vel
             in
             rebus
             de
             facto
             ,
             &
             Ecclesiasticis
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             diu
             aberraverit
             .
             Ibid.
             p.
             382.
             
             Meminerimus
             〈◊〉
             olim
             statuisse
             cum
             applausu
             de
             hujusmodi
             consuetudinibus
             ,
             si
             legem
             expostules
             scriptam
             ,
             nullam
             invenies
             ,
             sed
             traditio
             praetenditur
             autrix
             ,
             consuetudo
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             fides
             observatrix
             .
             Et
             Irenaeus
             ,
             quid
             autem
             si
             neque
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             nobis
             Scripturas
             ,
             nonne
             oporteret
             〈◊〉
             traditionis
             .
             
               Idem
               antig
            
             .
             p.
             42.
             
             That
             author
             saies
             no
             more
             then
             is
             justifiable
             touching
             traditions
             :
             for
             thus
             he
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Church
             is
             two
             waies
             delivered
             unto
             us
             ;
             first
             by
             writing
             ,
             then
             by
             tradition
             from
             hand
             to
             hand
             .
             Both
             are
             of
             alike
             value
             or
             force
             unto
             piety
             .
          
           
             e
             White
             in
             his
             examination
             of
             the
             dialogue
             〈◊〉
             not
             only
             this
             testimony
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Etiamsi
             Scripturae
             authoritas
             non
             subesset
             ,
             totius
             tamen
             orbis
             in
             hanc
             partem
             consensus
             ,
             instar
             praecepti
             obtinet
             ,
             〈◊〉
             &
             alia
             multa
             quae
             per
             traditionem
             in
             〈◊〉
             observantur
             ,
             authoritatem
             sibi
             scriptae
             legis
             〈◊〉
             ,
             
               but
               also
               that
               of
               Eusebius
            
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             in
             sanctis
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             decernitur
             ,
             id
             universum
             divinae
             voluntati
             debet
             attribui
             :
             
               And
               this
               of
               Bernards
            
             .
             Sive
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             homo
             vicarius
             Dei
             mandatum
             quodcunque
             tradiderit
             ,
             pari
             profecto
             obsequendum
             est
             cura
             ,
             pari
             reverentia
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ubi
             tamen
             Deo
             contraria
             non
             praecipit
             homo
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             pag.
             31.
             
             Sensum
             Scripturarum
             ex
             patribus
             &
             doctoribus
             Ecclesiae
             〈◊〉
             ,
             traditum
             &
             conservatum
             in
             Ecclesia
             ,
             &
             approbatum
             ,
             quidni
             pro
             tali
             traditione
             agnoscamus
             ,
             in
             〈◊〉
             veritate
             acquiescendum
             ,
             &
             à
             qua
             minimè
             〈◊〉
             sit
             .
          
           
             f
             
               Montag
               orig
            
             .
             p.
             353.
             
             Eusebius
             de
             Severianis
             hereticis
             loquens
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             Prophetis
             &
             〈◊〉
             utuntur
             sacrarum
             Scripturarum
             sensus
             &
             sententias
             ,
             ut
             nostri
             solent
             puritani
             &
             novatores
             pro
             suo
             arbitratu
             interpretantur
             .
             
               Mon.
               orig
            
             .
             p.
             318.
             
             Neque
             enim
             insanire
             solent
             sine
             Scripturis
             haeretici
             &
             mir
             〈◊〉
             casdem
             ad
             suos
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             solent
             applicare
             defendendos
             persusdendosque
             .
          
           
             g
             
               Mont
               apar
            
             .
             382.
             
             Non
             ut
             nostri
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             quibus
             〈◊〉
             est
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             resipit
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &
             ideo
             〈◊〉
             est
             vel
             ut
             amant
             〈◊〉
             reformandum
             ad
             Dei
             verbum
             ,
             hoc
             est
             ad
             Lesbiam
             plane
             regulam
             ipsorum
             cerebrositatem
             amussitandum
             .
          
           
             h
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             p.
             129.
             
             The
             godly
             and
             learned
             Fathers
             of
             our
             Church
             ,
             give
             strick
             charge
             to
             private
             preachers
             ,
             that
             they
             preach
             nothing
             in
             their
             preachings
             which
             they
             would
             have
             the
             people
             〈◊〉
             to
             beleeve
             and
             observe
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             is
             agreeable
             to
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             old
             and
             new
             Testament
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             the
             Catholick
             Fathers
             ,
             and
             ancient
             Bishops
             have
             formerly
             taught
             and
             collected
             from
             thence
             .
             White
             upon
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             12.
             
             The
             holy
             Scripture
             is
             the
             fountaine
             and
             living
             spting
             ,
             containing
             in
             all
             〈◊〉
             and
             abundance
             whatsoever
             is
             necessary
             to
             make
             Gods
             people
             wise
             unto
             salvation
             .
             The
             〈◊〉
             and
             unanimous
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             true
             Church
             of
             Christ
             〈◊〉
             the
             primitive
             ages
             thereof
             is
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             or
             a
             〈◊〉
             pipe
             to
             derive
             and
             convoy
             to
             〈◊〉
             generations
             the
             〈◊〉
             water
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             .
             Ibid.
             From
             〈◊〉
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               Injuriam
               nobis
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ,
               nos
               〈◊〉
               solam
               〈◊〉
               esse
               〈◊〉
               &
               judicem
               〈◊〉
               siarum
               〈◊〉
               ,
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               &
               Spiritum
               〈◊〉
               ,
               
               
            
             p.
             14.
             
             The
             Ecclesiasticall
             〈◊〉
             reporteth
             of
             〈◊〉
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             in
             their
             studying
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             〈◊〉
             collected
             the
             sense
             of
             them
             ,
             not
             from
             their
             owne
             judgement
             or
             presumption
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             testimony
             and
             authority
             of
             the
             ancients
             ,
             who
             had
             received
             the
             rule
             of
             the
             true
             intelligence
             of
             Scripture
             from
             the
             holy
             Apostles
             by
             succession
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             doctrine
             of
             faith
             ,
             justification
             ,
             fulfilling
             of
             the
             Law
             ,
             merit
             ,
             they
             are
             fully
             Popish
             .
          
           
             i
             〈◊〉
             pag.
             46.
             
             This
             one
             faith
             is
             called
             by
             Divines
             the
             Catholike
             faith
             ,
             contained
             in
             the
             three
             Creedes
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             Nice
             and
             〈◊〉
             .
             The
             false
             faith
             is
             contrary
             to
             this
             ,
             the
             private
             faith
             ,
             or
             fancy
             rather
             ,
             by
             which
             men
             beleeve
             to
             be
             saved
             by
             themselves
             that
             which
             is
             the
             mother
             and
             nource
             to
             vice
             ,
             an
             enemy
             to
             all
             good
             life
             ;
             &
             that
             this
             is
             not
             the
             Catholick
             faith
             ,
             shall
             appear
             ,
             because
             that
             faith
             hath
             not
             a
             special
             object
             ,
             as
             a
             mans
             selfe
             ,
             or
             Gods
             speciall
             favour
             to
             this
             or
             that
             particular
             man
             ,
             which
             is
             hopes
             object
             ,
             but
             Catholick
             object
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             whole
             first
             truth
             ,
             and
             every
             member
             of
             Gods
             book
             ,
             as
             the
             school
             teacheth
             ,
             this
             faith
             goeth
             but
             to
             the
             truth
             and
             esse
             of
             divine
             things
             .
             Faith
             giveth
             these
             truths
             a
             being
             &
             substance
             in
             our
             mind
             ,
             but
             after
             hope
             layeth
             hold
             on
             them
             in
             the
             wil
             and
             affections
             ,
             and
             applyeth
             them
             to
             our selves
             ,
             &
             charity
             goeth
             in
             unto
             them
             .
             The
             Apostle
             saith
             ,
             that
             he
             who
             commeth
             to
             God
             must
             believe
             that
             he
             is
             a
             rewarder
             of
             them
             that
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             him
             ,
             not
             a
             〈◊〉
             of
             me
             or
             thee
             ,
             as
             if
             the
             article
             of
             〈◊〉
             were
             personall
             .
             Idem
             pag.
             106.
             
             In
             the
             love
             of
             the
             heart
             lyeth
             the
             greatest
             apprehension
             .
             The
             greatest
             meane
             of
             our
             apprehending
             of
             him
             ,
             is
             by
             charity
             ,
             which
             layes
             hold
             on
             him
             in
             the
             will
             and
             reasonable
             affections
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               Collect.
            
             82.
             
             Applicatio
             ex
             parte
             hominis
             ;
             non
             ex
             alia
             ratione
             procedit
             ,
             quam
             ex
             amplexu
             amoris
             &
             desiderii
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             97.
             
             〈◊〉
             Deus
             hanc
             spem
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             hujus
             spei
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             k
             
               〈◊〉
               collect
               .
               p.
            
             69.
             
             Inchoative
             per
             〈◊〉
             justicfiat
             Deus
             ,
             dat
             〈◊〉
             .
             propter
             Christum
             cognitionem
             ,
             ex
             cognitione
             fidem
             ,
             ex
             fide
             spem
             sive
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ex
             fiduciacharitatem
             ,
             ex
             chatitate
             adhae
             sionem
             ,
             obediendi
             &
             complacendi
             desiderium
             ,
             ex
             isto
             desiderio
             meritorum
             〈◊〉
             salubrium
             applicationem
             ,
             ex
             〈◊〉
             applicatione
             sanctificationem
             ,
             seu
             observantiam
             mandatorum
             ,
             ex
             istis
             omnibus
             in
             actu
             scilicet
             consummato
             just
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ex
             illa
             salvationem
             quae
             omnia
             quum
             〈◊〉
             per
             canalem
             Dei
             gratiae
             ,
             ex
             fide
             tanquam
             ex
             principio
             seu
             radice
             ,
             per
             connaturalitatem
             omnium
             ad
             fidem
             ,
             &
             adse
             invicem
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             quaecunque
             ab
             aliquibus
             〈◊〉
             ad
             fidem
             ,
             tanquam
             ad
             omnium
             originem
             referenda
             sunt
             ,
             &
             in
             hoc
             sensu
             arbitramur
             Apostolum
             .
             3.
             ad
             Rom.
             vers
             .
             28.
             locutum
             fide
             homines
             justificatum
             〈◊〉
             scilicet
             per
             fi
             lem
             〈◊〉
             ex
             〈◊〉
             suis
             operationem
             .
          
           
             l
             Shelfoord
             pag
             〈◊〉
             .
             Charity
             is
             called
             of
             Schoole
             Divines
             grace
             it selfe
             .
             It
             is
             that
             law
             of
             the
             Spirit
             which
             freeth
             from
             death
             and
             sinne
             .
             It
             is
             the
             maine
             refuge
             of
             a
             distressed
             conscience
             .
             It
             covereth
             a
             multitude
             of
             sins
             ,
             It
             will
             not
             suffer
             them
             to
             appear
             :
             Without
             〈◊〉
             workes
             are
             dead
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             faith
             and
             other
             vertues
             .
             Hence
             the
             Schoole
             〈◊〉
             charity
             the
             forme
             of
             vertues
             .
             Ibid
             pag.
             106.
             
             Faith
             converteth
             the
             minde
             to
             God
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             love
             that
             converts
             the
             heart
             and
             will
             to
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             greatest
             and
             last
             conversion
             ;
             for
             we
             never
             seck
             anything
             till
             we
             desire
             it
             .
             〈◊〉
             conversion
             is
             begun
             in
             the
             minde
             by
             faith
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             only
             halfe
             conversion
             ,
             yea
             no
             conversion
             of
             the
             whole
             man
             ,
             except
             the
             love
             of
             the
             heart
             (
             where
             heth
             the
             greatest
             apprehension
             )
             follow
             it
             .
             we
             see
             salvation
             by
             faith
             ,
             but
             we
             obtaine
             it
             not
             ,
             till
             we
             seek
             it
             by
             〈◊〉
             desire
             .
             Wherefore
             I
             conclude
             ,
             that
             for
             as
             much
             as
             charity
             is
             the
             most
             near
             and
             immediate
             cause
             of
             our
             conversion
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             also
             the
             most
             pretious
             grace
             of
             God
             for
             our
             good
             ,
             and
             the
             greatest
             mean
             of
             our
             〈◊〉
             him
             is
             by
             charity
             ,
             which
             layeth
             hold
             on
             him
             in
             the
             will
             and
             reasonable
             affections
             ,
             〈◊〉
             his
             must
             be
             the
             greatest
             meane
             of
             our
             justification
             .
             Ibid.
             p.
             109.
             
             The
             sulfilling
             of
             the
             law
             justifieth
             ,
             but
             charity
             is
             the
             fulfilling
             of
             the
             law
             ,
             where
             the
             Apostle
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             to
             justifying
             faith
             ,
             he
             compareth
             them
             in
             the
             most
             excellent
             way
             and
             it
             is
             most
             manifest
             that
             the
             most
             excellent
             way
             ,
             is
             the
             way
             of
             our
             justification
             &
             conversion
             to
             God.
             
          
           
             m
             
               Shelsoord
               pag.
            
             107.
             
             Justification
             &
             conversion
             to
             God
             is
             all
             one
             .
             
               Idem
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             102.
             
             Charity
             is
             the
             maine
             refuge
             of
             a
             distressed
             conscience
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               〈◊〉
               .
               pag.
            
             142.
             
             A
             sinner
             is
             then
             justified
             when
             he
             is
             made
             just
             ,
             when
             he
             is
             transformed
             in
             minde
             ,
             tenewed
             in
             soule
             ,
             〈◊〉
             by
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             in
             〈◊〉
             answer
             for
             Hall
             to
             Burtoun
             ,
             is
             not
             only
             content
             to
             exeeme
             the
             〈◊〉
             justification
             from
             all
             blot
             of
             a
             fundamentall
             error
             ,
             but
             〈◊〉
             also
             to
             make
             all
             our
             〈◊〉
             in
             this
             point
             to
             be
             but
             a
             jugling
             about
             words
             ;
             yea
             ,
             at
             last
             he
             seemes
             to
             〈◊〉
             with
             the
             Counsell
             of
             Trent
             in
             anathematizing
             our
             doctrine
             :
             For
             thus
             ,
             if
             I
             remember
             well
             ,
             doth
             he
             speake
             .
             If
             any
             man
             shall
             〈◊〉
             that
             men
             are
             so
             justified
             by
             the
             sole
             imputation
             of
             Christs
             righteousnesse
             ,
             or
             by
             sole
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             ,
             〈◊〉
             they
             are
             not
             also
             〈◊〉
             fied
             by
             inherent
             grace
             or
             charity
             ,
             or
             also
             that
             the
             grace
             whereby
             we
             are
             justified
             is
             only
             the
             favour
             of
             God
             ,
             let
             him
             be
             accursed
             ,
             and
             let
             him
             be
             so
             indeed
             for
             me
             .
             You
             will
             say
             this
             is
             nothing
             but
             meere
             jugling
             ,
             I
             grant
             it
             ,
             〈◊〉
             yet
             it
             is
             not
             the
             direct
             deny
             all
             of
             the
             foundation
             ,
             for
             here
             is
             both
             remission
             of
             sins
             ,
             and
             imputation
             of
             Christs
             righteousnesse
             included
             ,
             which
             though
             it
             be
             sufficient
             to
             justification
             in
             the
             Protestant
             sence
             ,
             yet
             in
             the
             Popish
             sence
             ,
             wherein
             〈◊〉
             is
             also
             required
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             sufficient
             .
          
           
             n
             
               〈◊〉
               pag.
            
             121.
             
             That
             there
             is
             a
             fulfilling
             of
             the
             Law
             in
             this
             life
             :
             Iames
             teacheth
             ,
             
               if
               you
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               the
               〈◊〉
               law
               ,
               you
               doe
               will.
            
             Were
             Gods
             Law
             no
             possible
             to
             be
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             supposition
             should
             be
             idle
             ,
             〈◊〉
             fit
             for
             Gods
             word
             ,
             a
             caption
             unbeseeming
             a
             man
             〈◊〉
             by
             divine
             inspiration
             .
             To
             the
             keeping
             of
             this
             we
             must
             strain
             our
             soule
             ,
             we
             must
             not
             flee
             to
             a
             naked
             〈◊〉
             ,
             where
             is
             required
             our
             conformation
             .
             He
             hath
             predestinate
             us
             to
             be
             conform
             to
             the
             image
             of
             his
             Son.
             He
             hath
             fulfilled
             the
             Law
             and
             so
             must
             we
             too
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             127.
             
             Christ
             hath
             merited
             ,
             that
             the
             righteousnesse
             of
             the
             Law
             should
             be
             fulfilled
             in
             us
             ,
             not
             by
             faith
             only
             ,
             or
             by
             sole
             imputation
             ,
             as
             the
             ignorant
             understand
             it
             ,
             but
             by
             our
             actuall
             walking
             in
             the
             divine
             precepts
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             136.
             
             To
             binde
             a
             man
             to
             things
             impossible
             ,
             were
             a
             wrong
             both
             to
             nature
             and
             grace
             ,
             therefore
             the
             schoole
             verse
             〈◊〉
             ,
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 viri
                 non
                 〈◊〉
                 Deus
                 ulla
                 〈◊〉
                 .
              
            
             God
             can
             no
             more
             in
             〈◊〉
             now
             require
             impossibilities
             at
             our
             hands
             ,
             then
             he
             could
             at
             first
             at
             〈◊〉
             :
             Neither
             doth
             he
             ,
             if
             we
             beleeve
             S.
             〈◊〉
             ,
             who
             saith
             ,
             
               I
               can
               doe
               〈◊〉
               things
               by
               Christ
               ,
               who
               hath
               loved
               me
               .
               Ibid.
               pag
            
             139.
             
             If
             God
             should
             command
             things
             impossible
             ,
             then
             should
             he
             be
             more
             cruell
             then
             a
             tyrant
             ,
             who
             〈◊〉
             not
             offer
             to
             exact
             of
             his
             Subjects
             such
             a
             tribute
             which
             he
             knowes
             cannot
             be
             〈◊〉
             :
             It
             is
             tyrannical
             and
             cruell
             ,
             and
             therefore
             impossible
             to
             God
             to
             require
             the
             ability
             which
             he
             himselfe
             took
             away
             ,
             and
             of
             those
             too
             that
             are
             his
             friends
             ,
             and
             in
             league
             with
             him
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             147.
             
             To
             say
             that
             the
             very
             best
             workes
             of
             the
             Saints
             are
             uncleane
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             mortall
             sins
             ,
             is
             extreame
             blasphemy
             .
             Can
             the
             workes
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             be
             impure
             ?
             The
             least
             addition
             of
             evill
             in
             a
             good
             worke
             makes
             it
             sinfull
             ,
             because
             Bonum
             est
             ex
             integracausa
             ,
             malum
             ex
             〈◊〉
             defectu
             .
             White
             on
             the
             Sabboth
             ,
             pag.
             157.
             〈◊〉
             those
             sayings
             ,
             as
             from
             S.
             Austine
             ,
             Neque
             impossible
             aliquid
             〈◊〉
             potuit
             Deus
             〈◊〉
             justus
             est
             ;
             neque
             damnaturus
             est
             hominem
             pro
             eo
             quod
             vitare
             non
             potest
             ,
             quia
             〈◊〉
             est
             .
             Execramur
             blasphemiam
             eorum
             ,
             qui
             dicunt
             aliquid
             impossibile
             homini
             à
             Deo
             esse
             praeceptum
             .
          
           
             o
             
               〈◊〉
               pag.
            
             184
             By
             his
             〈◊〉
             he
             informeth
             us
             of
             all
             the
             meanes
             that
             leads
             toward
             life
             eternal
             by
             his
             counsels
             ,
             which
             goe
             beyond
             his
             〈◊〉
             (
             because
             G
             O
             D
             hath
             given
             man
             free-will
             to
             get
             what
             he
             can
             in
             the
             state
             of
             grace
             for
             the
             state
             of
             glory
             )
             he
             shewes
             some
             exceeding
             meanes
             to
             grow
             to
             this
             lifes
             perfection
             ,
             and
             to
             improve
             the
             common
             reward
             of
             glory
             for
             the
             next
             life
             ,
             as
             
               sell
               what
               thou
               hast
               and
               give
               it
               to
               the
               peore
               ,
               and
               〈◊〉
               shalt
               have
               〈◊〉
               in
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             here
             wee
             have
             counsell
             to
             change
             temporall
             riches
             for
             eternall
             ,
             which
             are
             better
             .
             2.
             
             Wee
             are
             counselled
             to
             change
             permitted
             fleshly
             pleasures
             for
             heavenly
             pleasures
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             
               qui
               〈◊〉
               capere
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             3.
             
             Wee
             are
             counselled
             to
             deny
             our selves
             and
             our
             lawfull
             libertie
             ,
             to
             follow
             Christ
             through
             the
             worlds
             difficulties
             ;
             these
             are
             Gods
             counsels
             which
             in
             the
             primitive
             church
             were
             put
             in
             practice
             ,
             but
             in
             our
             times
             they
             are
             put
             off
             with
             
               a
               non
               placet
               .
               Ibid.
               p.
            
             129.
             
             Of
             the
             counsels
             of
             the
             gospel
             which
             goe
             beyond
             the
             counsels
             of
             the
             Law.
             S.
             〈◊〉
             .
             sayes
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Christ
             hath
             commanded
             nothing
             impossible
             yea
             ,
             many
             have
             gone
             above
             his
             commandements
             .
          
           
             p
             
               〈◊〉
               .
               appeal
               .
               p.
            
             233.
             
             The
             wicked
             go
             to
             enduring
             of
             torments
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             good
             to
             enjoying
             of
             happinesse
             without
             end
             ;
             thus
             is
             their
             estate
             diversified
             to
             their
             deserving
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               p.
            
             120.
             setteth
             downe
             the
             comitiall
             verses
             of
             Cambridge
             which
             in
             merite
             goeth
             as
             farre
             as
             
               〈◊〉
               ,
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               &
               speciosa
               〈◊〉
               ,
               salutem
               divine
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               dabunt
               .
               〈◊〉
               p.
            
             18.
             goes
             yet
             further
             ,
             that
             our
             workes
             are
             as
             true
             efficent
             causes
             of
             our
             salvation
             ,
             as
             our
             wickednesse
             can
             be
             of
             our
             damnation
             ,
             as
             we
             heard
             before
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               〈◊〉
               .
               pag.
            
             153.
             
             That
             a
             worke
             may
             be
             said
             to
             be
             meritorious
             ,
             
               ex
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             these
             conditions
             are
             required
             ,
             that
             it
             be
             morally
             good
             ,
             that
             it
             be
             freely
             wrought
             by
             a
             man
             in
             this
             life
             in
             the
             estate
             of
             grace
             and
             friendship
             with
             God
             ,
             that
             it
             have
             annexed
             Gods
             promise
             of
             reward
             .
             All
             which
             conditions
             I
             cannot
             conceive
             that
             any
             Protestants
             doth
             deny
             to
             good
             workes
             .
          
           
             q
             
               〈◊〉
               p.
            
             198.
             
             In
             that
             blessed
             estate
             there
             are
             degrees
             of
             joy
             and
             glory
             ,
             a
             starre
             differs
             from
             another
             in
             glory
             ,
             some
             ground
             bringeth
             foorth
             thirty
             ,
             some
             sixty
             ,
             some
             a
             hundred
             fold
             .
             To
             this
             agreeth
             S.
             Gregory
             ,
             Quia
             in
             hac
             vita
             est
             discretio
             operum
             ,
             erit
             procul
             dubio
             in
             illa
             discretio
             dignitatum
             ,
             ut
             quo
             hic
             alius
             alium
             merito
             superat
             ,
             illic
             alius
             alium
             retributione
             transcendat
             .
             And
             S.
             Cyprian
             ,
             in
             pace
             coronam
             vincentibus
             candidam
             pro
             operibus
             dabit
             in
             persecutio
             ne
             purpuream
             pro
             passione
             geminabit
             ;
             Certēt
             nune
             sin
             guli
             ad
             utriusque
             honoris
             amplissimam
             dignitatem
             ,
             accipiant
             coronas
             vel
             de
             operibus
             candidas
             ,
             vel
             de
             sanguine
             purpureas
             .
             Here
             shineth
             Gods
             justice
             in
             distributing
             rewards
             according
             to
             the
             variety
             of
             his
             owne
             grace
             in
             this
             life
             bestowed
             ,
             and
             Christians
             works
             by
             their
             own
             free
             wil
             to
             the
             best
             end
             imployed
             ,
             and
             because
             there
             are
             certaine
             excellencies
             of
             workes
             in
             overcomming
             the
             greatest
             difficulties
             ,
             therefore
             the
             scoole
             after
             the
             former
             demonstration
             argueth
             priviledged
             crownes
             which
             they
             call
             〈◊〉
             to
             bee
             due
             to
             them
             which
             have
             conauered
             best
             to
             Martyes
             for
             overcomming
             persecutions
             ,
             to
             virgins
             for
             conquering
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             qnd
             to
             Doctors
             for
             putting
             the
             Divell
             to
             flight
             from
             their
             flockes
             :
          
           
             r
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             127.
             
             For
             Shelsoords
             booke
             whatever
             is
             in
             that
             mentioned
             should
             not
             trouble
             you
             ,
             if
             he
             ascribe
             a
             speciall
             eminency
             unto
             charity
             in
             some
             cerraine
             things
             ,
             it
             is
             no
             more
             then
             〈◊〉
             taught
             to
             him
             by
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             who
             doth
             preferre
             it
             ,
             as
             you
             cannot
             but
             choose
             to
             know
             ,
             before
             faith
             and
             hope
             :
             nor
             doth
             he
             attribute
             our
             justification
             〈◊〉
             in
             any
             other
             sence
             then
             was
             taught
             him
             by
             S.
             Iames
             M
             
               Dow
               p
            
             52.
             
             And
             I
             believe
             if
             M.
             Shelsoords
             justification
             by
             〈◊〉
             be
             well
             examined
             ,
             it
             will
             prove
             no
             other
             then
             that
             which
             S.
             Iames
             saies
             ,
             yee
             see
             how
             that
             by
             works
             a
             man
             is
             justified
             and
             not
             by
             faith
             onely
             ,
             and
             I
             would
             demand
             of
             any
             reasonable
             man
             ,
             whether
             the
             expresse
             words
             of
             that
             〈◊〉
             may
             not
             without
             aspersion
             of
             popery
             be
             even
             openly
             and
             publickly
             maintained
             ,
             if
             there
             be
             no
             sence
             obtruded
             upon
             them
             which
             may
             crosse
             S.
             Pauls
             doctrine
             ,
             which
             M
             Burtoun
             can
             never
             prove
             that
             they
             did
             whom
             he
             charged
             with
             that
             assertion
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             sacraments
             see
             their
             Popery
             .
          
           
             s
             
               Montag
               .
               orig
               .
               p.
            
             72.
             de
             circumcisione
             quaeritur
             quamgratiam
             〈◊〉
             &
             primo
             ponitur
             non
             〈◊〉
             quod
             〈◊〉
             verum
             sacramentum
             veteris
             politiae
             in
             statu
             legis
             &
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ideo
             esse
             operativū
             illius
             gratiae
             qua
             ab
             .
             luuntur
             〈◊〉
             ut
             fit
             in
             baptismo
             novae
             legis
             .
             2.
             
             Si
             quaeratur
             an
             ut
             baptismus
             〈◊〉
             &
             〈◊〉
             quae
             figurat
             〈◊〉
             olim
             peccata
             visua
             sacramētali
             ex
             institutione
             divino
             opere
             operato
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             operantis
             aut
             alio
             quovis
             modo
             abolere
             &
             mundare
             poterit
             ,
             qua
             de
             re
             sunt
             diversae
             sententiae
             .
             Hereafter
             he
             hath
             brought
             at
             length
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             to
             prove
             that
             Sacramēta
             veteris
             testamēti
             non
             causabant
             gratiam
             sed
             cam
             solum
             per
             〈◊〉
             Christi
             〈◊〉
             esse
             significabant
             ,
             nostra
             vero
             &
             gratiam
             continent
             &
             digne
             suscipientibus
             conferunt
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               closes
            
             ,
             inanes
             〈◊〉
             illae
             disputationes
             &
             acerbae
             contentiones
             〈◊〉
             lorum
             ,
             quae
             apud
             scholasticos
             &
             doctores
             nonnullos
             ventilantur
             ,
             quas
             sopitas
             optamus
             nos
             .
             Ibid.
             p.
             Baptismus
             Joannis
             rudimentarius
             ait
             Damascenus
             :
             imperfectus
             ,
             &
             isagogicus
             ,
             〈◊〉
             :
             ut
             &
             lex
             vetus
             ,
             〈◊〉
             novum
             baptisma
             post
             illud
             necessarium
             inquit
             Augustinus
             ,
             post
             Johannem
             baptizabat
             Paulus
             ,
             post
             hereticos
             non
             baptizat
             Ecclesia
             ,
             Christi
             baptismo
             actu
             remittebantur
             peccata
             ,
             non
             remittebantur
             actu
             post
             
               Iohannis
               .
               Then
               in
               his
               owne
               words
               ,
            
             quid
             ergo
             ?
             An
             dabat
             gratiam
             baptismus
             ille
             ;
             〈◊〉
             visum
             non
             nullis
             perperam
             omnino
             ,
             nam
             ubi
             tum
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             baptismatis
             Christi
             &
             Sacramentorum
             novi
             faederis
             ,
             quibus
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             gratiam
             〈◊〉
             quam
             significant
             ,
             preparatoriè
             hoc
             agebat
             non
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             spe
             tantum
             cum
             re
             ipsa
             in
             Domini
             baptismo
             illud
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ab
             〈◊〉
             sententia
             quae
             est
             〈◊〉
             omnium
             antiquorum
             ,
             si
             Calvinus
             recesserit
             cum
             sequacibus
             ,
             aetatem
             habent
             ,
             ipsi
             respondeant
             ,
             privati
             cujuscunque
             hominis
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             non
             est
             communi
             protestantium
             sententiae
             ascribendum
             .
             Obtineat
             ergo
             per
             me
             Tridentinae
             synodi
             canon
             primus
             sessionis
             septimae
             :
             Si
             quis
             dixerit
             baptismum
             Iohannis
             habuisse
             eandem
             vim
             cum
             baptismo
             Christi
             anathema
             sit
             .
          
           
             t
             
               Mon.
               opeal
            
             p.
             35.
             
             We
             〈◊〉
             aught
             in
             the
             Liturgie
             earnestly
             to
             beleeve
             ,
             lest
             it
             should
             be
             left
             to
             mens
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             〈◊〉
             hath
             received
             favourably
             these
             infants
             that
             are
             baptised
             .
             And
             to
             make
             this
             doctrine
             〈◊〉
             more
             sure
             against
             our
             novellists
             ,
             it
             is
             again
             repeated
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             certainly
             true
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             that
             children
             being
             baptised
             have
             all
             things
             necessary
             forsalvation
             ,
             and
             if
             they
             die
             before
             actuall
             sin
             ,
             shall
             be
             undoubtedly
             saved
             ,
             according
             whereunto
             all
             antiquity
             hath
             also
             taught
             us
             Let
             this
             therefore
             be
             acknowledged
             to
             be
             the
             doctrine
             of
             our
             Church
             .
             
               White
               against
               the
               〈◊〉
            
             p.
             95.
             avowes
             it
             as
             the
             doctrine
             of
             England
             ,
             that
             all
             infants
             baptised
             have
             the
             holy
             spirit
             ,
             &
             are
             made
             the
             children
             of
             God
             by
             adoptiō
             ,
             pressing
             that
             of
             S.
             〈◊〉
             of
             all
             infants
             baptised
             .
             Quid
             dicturus
             est
             de
             infantibus
             parvulis
             qui
             plerique
             accepto
             in
             illa
             aetate
             gratiae
             sacramento
             ,
             qut
             〈◊〉
             dubio
             pertinerent
             ad
             vitam
             aeternam
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             si
             continuo
             ex
             hac
             vita
             〈◊〉
             ,
             sinuntur
             crescere
             &
             nonnulli
             etiā
             apostatae
             sunt
             .
             Albeit
             this
             same
             White
             makes
             this
             tenet
             in
             his
             conserence
             with
             Fisher
             to
             be
             the
             judgement
             only
             of
             Papists
             and
             Lutherans
             pag.
             176.
             
             They
             differ
             from
             Lutherans
             and
             〈◊〉
             first
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             〈◊〉
             the
             grace
             of
             sanctification
             only
             to
             the
             elect
             .
             2.
             
             In
             that
             they
             deny
             externall
             baptisme
             to
             be
             alwayes
             effectuall
             at
             the
             very
             〈◊〉
             time
             when
             it
             is
             administrate
             .
          
           
             w
             
               Cant.
               relat
            
             .
             p.
             56.
             
             That
             baptisme
             is
             necessary
             to
             the
             salva
             tion
             of
             infants
             in
             the
             ordinare
             way
             of
             the
             Church
             (
             without
             binding
             GOD
             to
             the
             use
             and
             means
             of
             that
             Sacrament
             to
             which
             hee
             hath
             bound
             us
             )
             it
             is
             expresse
             in
             Saint
             John
             ,
             Chap.
             3.
             
             Except
             a
             man
             be
             born
             again
             by
             water
             he
             cannot
             enter
             ,
             no
             baptisme
             ,
             no
             entrance
             ,
             nor
             can
             infants
             creep
             in
             any
             other
             ordinare
             way
             .
             And
             this
             is
             the
             〈◊〉
             opinion
             of
             all
             the
             ancient
             Church
             infants
             are
             to
             be
             baptised
             that
             their
             salvation
             may
             be
             certain
             ,
             for
             they
             which
             cannot
             helpe
             themselves
             must
             not
             be
             left
             only
             to
             extraordinare
             helps
             of
             which
             we
             have
             no
             assurance
             ,
             and
             for
             which
             we
             have
             no
             warrant
             at
             all
             in
             Seripture
             ,
             〈◊〉
             .
             p.
             66.
             
             I
             can
             shew
             you
             of
             none
             saved
             ordinarly
             without
             the
             sacraments
             in
             regard
             of
             our
             Saviours
             exception
             in
             the
             3.
             of
             Iohn
             ,
             Except
             a
             man
             be
             born
             againe
             of
             the
             water
             and
             the
             spirit
             ,
             he
             cannot
             enter
             into
             the
             kingdome
             of
             heaven
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               orig
            
             .
             p.
             397.
             
             Adeo
             huic
             usui
             inserviunt
             aquae
             ut
             si
             tollatur
             lavacrū
             aquae
             alieni
             a
             Deo
             &
             soedere
             promissionis
             aeternae
             excludantur
             illi
             in
             tenebras
             exteriores
             ,
             cum
             edicto
             divino
             〈◊〉
             sit
             nisi
             quis
             renatus
             fuerit
             ex
             aqua
             &
             spiritu
             sancto
             non
             introibit
             in
             regnum
             coelorum
             .
             〈◊〉
             hoc
             elusum
             a
             novatoribus
             ,
             sed
             &
             Christi
             divinitatem
             ab
             haereticis
             negatam
             〈◊〉
             utrumque
             in
             contemptum
             Dei
             &
             dispendium
             animarum
             .
          
           
             x
             Samuel
             Hoards
             sermon
             supra
             ,
             puts
             crosse
             in
             baptisme
             and
             sindry
             other
             ceremonies
             of
             it
             among
             his
             rituall
             traditions
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             pag.
             16.
             vestis
             alba
             oleum
             ,
             sal
             ,
             lac
             ,
             chrisma
             ,
             additamenta
             quaedam
             sunt
             ornatus
             causa
             .
             Ib.
             p.
             15.
             
             Cum
             concilio
             quodam
             nupero
             non
             veremur
             profiteri
             ceremonias
             à
             majoribus
             hominibus
             religiosissimis
             usurpatas
             quod
             ad
             varios
             pietatis
             usus
             valeant
             &
             exercitia
             quaedam
             fint
             quibus
             mens
             externarū
             rerum
             sensu
             &
             significatione
             ad
             divinum
             cultum
             〈◊〉
             Deum
             attrahitur
             in
             Ecclesia
             retinendas
             &
             ubi
             abrogatae
             fuerant
             restituendas
             esse
             statuimus
             .
             Andrews
             stricturae
             ,
             p.
             13.
             
             Chrisme
             ,
             salt
             ,
             candles
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             signe
             of
             the
             crosse
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             the
             consecration
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             those
             being
             all
             matter
             of
             ceremony
             ,
             are
             therefore
             in
             the
             Church
             power
             on
             good
             reasons
             either
             to
             retaine
             or
             to
             alter
             ,
          
           
             y
             
               Andrews
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             p.
             11.
             
             The
             whole
             matter
             about
             the
             five
             Sacraments
             is
             a
             meer
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             z
             
               Pokling
               altare
            
             p.
             65.
             
             And
             because
             the
             competents
             were
             persons
             of
             full
             age
             they
             received
             also
             confirmation
             by
             imposition
             of
             hands
             
               〈◊〉
               pleni
               〈◊〉
               inveniantar
            
             .
          
           
             zz
             
               Andrewes
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             pag.
             12.
             
             The
             five
             orders
             is
             a
             point
             not
             〈◊〉
             the
             standing
             on
             ,
             while
             the
             revenues
             of
             the
             Church
             were
             able
             to
             maintaine
             so
             many
             degrees
             it
             cannot
             be
             denyed
             but
             that
             there
             were
             so
             many
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             Churches
             owne
             order
             neither
             by
             commandement
             nor
             example
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             but
             what
             is
             this
             to
             the
             present
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             scarce
             able
             to
             maintaine
             two
             ?
          
           
             &c.
             
               〈◊〉
               antid
               .
               sect
            
             .
             3.
             p8
             .
             Let
             the
             Bishops
             stand
             alone
             on
             Apostolicall
             right
             and
             no
             more
             then
             so
             ,
             and
             doubt
             it
             not
             but
             some
             wil
             take
             it
             on
             your
             word
             &
             then
             plead
             accordingly
             ,
             that
             thingsof
             Apostolicall
             institution
             may
             be
             laid
             aside
             .
             When
             Bishop
             Andrews
             had
             learnedly
             asserted
             the
             〈◊〉
             order
             to
             be
             of
             Christs
             institutiō
             I
             have
             heard
             that
             some
             who
             were
             then
             in
             place
             did
             secretly
             interceed
             with
             King
             〈◊〉
             to
             have
             had
             it
             altered
             ,
             for
             feare
             forsooth
             of
             offending
             our
             neighbour
             Churches
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             3.
             
             〈◊〉
             .
             p.
             195.
             
             Dixi
             abesse
             ab
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             aliquid
             quod
             de
             jure
             divino
             sit
             ,
             culpa
             〈◊〉
             vestra
             non
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             injuria
             temporum
             ,
             non
             enim
             tam
             propitios
             habuisse
             Reges
             Galliam
             vestram
             in
             Ecclesia
             reformanda
             quam
             habuit
             Britannia
             nostra
             :
             Interim
             ubi
             dabit
             meliora
             Deus
             ,
             &
             hoc
             quoque
             quod
             jam
             abest
             per
             Dei
             gratiam
             suppletum
             iri
             .
             Relatum
             inter
             hereticos
             Aerium
             qui
             Epiphanio
             credat
             vel
             Augustino
             necesse
             est
             fateatur
             ,
             &
             tu
             qui
             〈◊〉
             Aerium
             quo
             nomine
             damnas
             ?
             An
             quod
             se
             〈◊〉
             consensui
             universalis
             Ecclesiae
             .
             Idem
             qui
             sentit
             an
             non
             itidem
             se
             opponit
             ac
             eo
             nomine
             damnandus
             erit
             
               Montag
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             p.
             138.
             〈◊〉
             jus
             &
             autoritatem
             ita
             credimus
             annexam
             Episcoporum
             personis
             ut
             a
             nemine
             non
             episcopo
             ordinato
             &
             consecrato
             possit
             aut
             debeat
             adhiberi
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ordinationem
             vel
             〈◊〉
             omnem
             pronunciamus
             quae
             non
             a
             legitimo
             &
             canonico
             more
             〈◊〉
             quod
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             se
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             &
             non
             missi
             ingerant
             caelesti
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             &
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             viderint
             〈◊〉
             quid
             sint
             responsuri
             olim
             summo
             sacerdoti
             cujus
             partes
             usurpant
             ,
             〈◊〉
             nostros
             non
             aliorum
             〈◊〉
             vocationes
             .
             Yea
             ,
             not
             only
             they
             tye
             ordination
             and
             jurisdict
             on
             to
             the
             person
             of
             Bishops
             ,
             but
             of
             such
             Bishops
             who
             must
             of
             necessity
             shew
             the
             derivation
             of
             all
             their
             power
             ,
             from
             the
             Pope
             as
             was
             shown
             before
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Dew
               p.
            
             184.
             
             By
             his
             favour
             I
             must
             tell
             him
             that
             neither
             the
             law
             of
             God
             nor
             of
             the
             King
             disallowes
             the
             use
             of
             the
             old
             Canons
             and
             Constitutions
             ,
             though
             made
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Popery
             and
             by
             the
             Pope
             or
             Popish
             Prelats
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             contrary
             to
             the
             law
             of
             God
             or
             the
             King
             :
             If
             hee
             desire
             proofe
             of
             this
             ,
             let
             him
             consider
             whether
             the
             Statute
             25.
             
             Hen.
             8
             19.
             do
             not
             say
             as
             much
             as
             I
             affirme
             ,
             which
             having
             regulated
             divers
             things
             touching
             the
             exercise
             of
             Ecclesiasticall
             jurisdiction
             .
             At
             last
             the
             statute
             concludes
             with
             this
             〈◊〉
             Provided
             also
             that
             such
             Canons
             constitutions
             ,
             ordinances
             ,
             and
             synodals
             provinciall
             being
             already
             made
             not
             repugnant
             to
             the
             lawes
             and
             customes
             of
             this
             Realme
             ,
             nor
             to
             the
             hurt
             of
             the
             Kings
             prerogative
             royall
             ,
             shall
             now
             still
             be
             used
             and
             executed
             as
             they
             were
             before
             the
             making
             of
             this
             Act
             ,
             till
             such
             time
             as
             they
             be
             viewed
             ,
             searched
             ,
             or
             otherwise
             ordered
             by
             the
             said
             two
             and
             thirty
             persons
             or
             the
             more
             part
             of
             them
             according
             to
             the
             tenour
             of
             this
             present
             Act.
             It
             followes
             then
             that
             till
             these
             thirty
             two
             persons
             determine
             otherwise
             ,
             old
             Canons
             may
             bee
             still
             executed
             and
             retaine
             their
             ancient
             vigour
             and
             authority
             ,
             and
             when
             that
             will
             be
             I
             know
             not
             but
             as
             yet
             I
             am
             sure
             it
             hath
             not
             beene
             done
             .
          
           
             b
             
               Femall
               glory
            
             ,
             pag.
             128.
             
             With
             this
             pious
             and
             gratefull
             ordinance
             ,
             I
             conclude
             the
             visitation
             of
             our
             incomparable
             Lady
             ,
             〈◊〉
             meanes
             the
             act
             of
             the
             late
             Councell
             of
             Basile
             ,
             which
             ordained
             a
             festivall
             for
             that
             visitation
             .
          
           
             c
             〈◊〉
             altar
             pag.
             52.
             
             There
             is
             mention
             madeof
             the
             dedication
             of
             Churches
             unde
             
               〈◊〉
               ,
               An.
            
             〈◊〉
             12.
             and
             under
             〈◊〉
             ,
             154.
             under
             Calixtus
             221.
             
             And
             before
             them
             all
             in
             Saint
             Clemence
             his
             Epistles
             .
             These
             testimonies
             of
             Roman
             Bishops
             the
             Centurists
             doe
             suspect
             :
             Where
             the
             doctrine
             and
             decrees
             of
             Popes
             ,
             and
             those
             in
             the
             first
             and
             best
             times
             are
             confirmed
             by
             the
             doctrine
             and
             constant
             practice
             of
             the
             holy
             Catholicke
             Church
             ,
             it
             〈◊〉
             great
             boldnesse
             in
             three
             or
             foure
             men
             to
             condemne
             and
             to
             brand
             their
             authority
             with
             the
             ministery
             of
             iniquity
             .
          
           
             d
             Laurence
             ,
             Sermon
             ,
             pag.
             18.
             the
             Apostles
             in
             their
             Canons
             ,
             and
             these
             too
             ,
             which
             are
             undoubtedly
             theirs
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               apart
            
             .
             pag.
             390
             Ex
             antiquissimis
             illum
             〈◊〉
             principem
             &
             primariae
             authoritatis
             ,
             〈◊〉
             erat
             Apostolorū
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             &
             〈◊〉
             nimerum
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             non
             preteribo
             ,
             quem
             licet
             delicatuli
             nescio
             qui
             ,
             ex
             〈◊〉
             parte
             contendentium
             falsi
             postulant
             ,
             &
             tanquam
             falsarium
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Nos
             tamen
             ipsius
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             quosvis
             suscipere
             patrocinium
             audemus
             ,
             doctissimum
             post
             virum
             Turrianum
             .
          
           
             e
             White
             on
             the
             Sabboth
             in
             the
             preface
             .
             There
             might
             also
             my
             reverend
             good
             Lord
             ,
             be
             a
             very
             profitable
             use
             of
             some
             private
             of
             pasturall
             collation
             with
             their
             〈◊〉
             ,
             for
             their
             direct
             on
             and
             information
             in
             〈◊〉
             spirituall
             duties
             ,
             such
             as
             was
             ,
             private
             confestion
             in
             the
             ancient
             Church
             :
             Now
             the
             Presbyterian
             censures
             by
             their
             paralogisme
             taken
             from
             abuse
             have
             with
             such
             loud
             and
             impetuous
             declamations
             ,
             filled
             the
             cares
             and
             possessed
             the
             mindes
             of
             many
             people
             that
             they
             are
             exceeding
             averse
             from
             this
             soveraigne
             and
             ancient
             medecine
             of
             consolation
             ,
             prevention
             ,
             and
             curing
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             soule
             .
             He
             approueth
             that
             of
             Gerardus
             ,
             Privata
             coram
             Ecclesiae
             ministro
             confessio
             ,
             quam
             auricularem
             vocant
             ,
             quamv
             is
             non
             habeat
             expressum
             &
             peculiare
             mandatum
             〈◊〉
             non
             fit
             absolutae
             necessitatis
             ,
             tamen
             cum
             plurimas
             praester
             utilitates
             &
             disciplinae
             Ecclesiasticae
             〈◊〉
             sit
             non
             postrema
             publico
             Ecclesiae
             consensu
             recepta
             ,
             ideo
             nequaquam
             timere
             vel
             negligenda
             vel
             abolenda
             ,
             〈◊〉
             piè
             &
             in
             vero
             Dei
             timore
             ,
             praesertim
             ab
             〈◊〉
             qui
             ad
             sacram
             synoxin
             accedunt
             usurpanda
             .
             M.
             Sp.
             Sermon
             printed
             with
             approbation
             .
             p.
             18.
             
             Confesse
             as
             the
             Church
             directs
             ,
             confesse
             to
             God
             ,
             confesse
             also
             to
             the
             Priest
             ,
             if
             not
             privately
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             since
             that
             is
             out
             of
             use
             .
             〈◊〉
             saith
             a
             devout
             Bishop
             ,
             it
             is
             almost
             quite
             lost
             ,
             the
             more
             pitty
             .
          
           
             f
             Dew
             p.
             35.
             
             It
             cannot
             be
             denied
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             did
             ever
             allow
             the
             private
             confession
             of
             sinnes
             to
             the
             Priest
             ,
             it
             were
             very
             strange
             ,
             if
             our
             Church
             ordaining
             Priests
             and
             giving
             them
             power
             of
             absolution
             ,
             and
             prescribing
             the
             forme
             to
             be
             used
             for
             the
             exercise
             of
             that
             power
             upon
             confession
             ,
             should
             not
             allow
             of
             the
             private
             confession
             .
             M.
             Sp.
             Sermon
             page
             .
             16.
             
             Since
             the
             Priest
             can
             in
             the
             name
             of
             God
             forgive
             us
             our
             sinnes
             ,
             good
             reason
             we
             should
             make
             our
             confession
             to
             him
             :
             Surely
             God
             never
             give
             the
             Priest
             this
             power
             in
             vaine
             ,
             he
             expects
             we
             should
             make
             the
             best
             use
             of
             it
             we
             can
             .
             He
             requires
             we
             should
             use
             the
             meanes
             we
             can
             to
             obtaine
             that
             blessing
             ;
             now
             the
             onely
             meanes
             to
             obtaine
             this
             absolution
             is
             our
             confession
             to
             him
             〈◊〉
             .
             p.
             19.
             
             If
             we
             confesse
             in
             humility
             with
             griefe
             and
             sorrow
             for
             them
             ,
             if
             we
             confesse
             them
             faithfully
             not
             concealing
             any
             (
             Ibid
             )
             p.
             15.
             
             There
             is
             another
             confession
             that
             would
             not
             be
             neglected
             .
             He
             that
             would
             be
             sure
             of
             pardon
             ,
             let
             him
             seek
             out
             a
             Priest
             ,
             and
             make
             his
             humble
             confession
             to
             him
             :
             for
             God
             who
             alone
             hath
             the
             prime
             and
             originall
             right
             of
             forgiving
             sins
             hath
             delegat
             the
             Priests
             here
             upon
             earth
             his
             judges
             ,
             and
             hath
             given
             them
             the
             power
             of
             absolution
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             can
             in
             Gods
             name
             forgive
             the
             sinnes
             of
             those
             that
             confesse
             to
             them
             .
             But
             is
             not
             this
             Popery
             ,
             would
             some
             say
             ,
             Now
             take
             the
             counsell
             that
             is
             given
             in
             the
             eight
             of
             
               Iob
               ,
               Aske
               the
               Fathers
               ,
               and
               they
               shall
               tell
               thee
               :
            
             aske
             then
             S.
             〈◊〉
             on
             Esay
             ,
             and
             he
             will
             tell
             thee
             ,
             that
             heaven
             waites
             and
             expects
             the
             Priests
             sentence
             here
             on
             earth
             :
             For
             the
             Priest
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             on
             earth
             ,
             and
             the
             Lord
             followes
             the
             servant
             ,
             and
             when
             the
             servant
             bindes
             or
             looses
             here
             on
             earth
             ,
             
               clave
               non
               errante
            
             ,
             the
             Lord
             confirmes
             it
             in
             heaven
             ,
             words
             ,
             saies
             he
             ,
             so
             cleare
             for
             the
             judiciall
             and
             formall
             absolution
             of
             the
             Priest
             ,
             that
             nothing
             can
             be
             said
             more
             plaine
             .
          
           
             h
             
               Pockl.
               alt
            
             .
             pag.
             57.
             
             The
             Bishops
             made
             an
             addition
             to
             the
             Ecclesiastick
             canon
             ,
             that
             in
             every
             Church
             a
             penitentiarie
             should
             be
             appointed
             to
             admit
             penetents
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             after
             they
             have
             done
             publick
             pennance
             .
             This
             kind
             of
             confession
             〈◊〉
             abolished
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             how
             beit
             the
             confession
             ,
             whereof
             Tertullian
             and
             Cyprian
             speaks
             ,
             was
             never
             abolished
             ,
             but
             did
             ever
             continue
             in
             the
             Greek
             Church
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Latine
             likewise
             :
             And
             to
             this
             purpose
             a
             solemne
             day
             was
             set
             apart
             for
             taking
             of
             publick
             pennance
             ,
             for
             open
             faults
             ,
             by
             imposition
             of
             hands
             ,
             and
             sprinkling
             of
             ashes
             ,
             namely
             Ashwednesday
             .
             This
             is
             the
             godly
             discipline
             whereof
             out
             Church
             speaketh
             ,
             and
             wisheth
             that
             it
             might
             be
             restored
             .
             And
             as
             Ashwednesday
             was
             appointed
             for
             penetents
             to
             receive
             absolution
             .
             This
             absolution
             they
             took
             upon
             their
             knees
             by
             the
             imposition
             of
             the
             Priests
             hands
             .
             Ibid.
             p.
             63.
             and
             67.
             
             The
             Competents
             beginning
             on
             Ashwednesday
             in
             sackcloth
             and
             ashes
             to
             humble
             themselves
             ,
             they
             were
             all
             Lent
             long
             purged
             with
             fasting
             and
             prayer
             :
             They
             were
             to
             stand
             barefoot
             on
             sackcloth
             ,
             and
             watch
             on
             good
             Fryday
             all
             night
             .
             How
             fand
             a
             thing
             it
             is
             ,
             saith
             〈◊〉
             ,
             to
             thinke
             to
             carry
             away
             with
             us
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             sinne
             ,
             and
             not
             first
             of
             all
             to
             pay
             for
             our
             commodity
             .
             The
             Merchant
             before
             he
             deliver
             his
             wares
             will
             look
             to
             your
             coyne
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               soulptilis
               ,
               ne
               rasus
            
             ,
             that
             it
             be
             neither
             washed
             nor
             shaved
             ;
             and
             doe
             not
             thinke
             but
             the
             Lord
             will
             looke
             well
             to
             your
             repentances
             and
             turne
             it
             over
             and
             over
             ,
             before
             ye
             receive
             
             .
             The
             Church
             caused
             those
             to
             take
             so
             strict
             pennance
             ,
             that
             by
             their
             great
             humiliation
             they
             might
             make
             some
             amends
             for
             that
             liberty
             which
             some
             took
             to
             sin
             .
             Ibid.
             p.
             24.
             
             Our
             Churches
             are
             a
             glory
             to
             our
             religion
             .
             To
             the
             〈◊〉
             elongeth
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               lavaiorie
            
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             heating
             confessions
             .
             Shalfoord
             p.
             126.
             
             If
             the
             Just
             shall
             transgresse
             while
             they
             are
             within
             the
             law
             they
             are
             bound
             to
             make
             satisfaction
             by
             pennance
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             
               
               Ibid.
            
             pag.
             〈◊〉
             .
             The
             law
             is
             oft
             broken
             by
             sins
             of
             omission
             and
             commission
             .
             I
             answer
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             oft
             broken
             of
             us
             ,
             so
             it
             is
             as
             oft
             repaired
             and
             satisfied
             ,
             and
             so
             all
             is
             made
             whole
             againe
             ,
             and
             so
             he
             is
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               quo
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             he
             riseth
             againe
             so
             oft
             as
             he
             falleth
             ;
             either
             in
             number
             or
             vertue
             our
             sins
             of
             commission
             are
             repaired
             by
             repentance
             ,
             our
             sins
             of
             omission
             are
             supplied
             by
             prayer
             .
          
           
             i
             
               Montag
               .
               antig
            
             .
             pag.
             267.
             
             That
             sacramentall
             unction
             is
             not
             to
             be
             used
             to
             the
             sick
             ,
             use
             it
             if
             you
             will
             ,
             we
             hinder
             you
             not
             ,
             nor
             much
             care
             or
             enquire
             what
             effects
             ensue
             upon
             it
             ,
             but
             obtrude
             it
             not
             upon
             us
             as
             
               in
               〈◊〉
            
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             in
             the
             time
             of
             grace
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             for
             the
             recrection
             of
             monasteries
             ,
             and
             placing
             of
             Monks
             ,
             and
             Nuns
             therein
             as
             of
             old
             .
          
           
             k
             
               Montag
               .
               orig
            
             .
             p.
             303.
             
             In
             Ecclesia
             anglicana
             sacerdotes
             〈◊〉
             magis
             gaudere
             ,
             &
             soleant
             &
             debeant
             immunitatibus
             ,
             tamen
             &
             frequentius
             &
             exuberantius
             ,
             &
             libentius
             quam
             laici
             decimarum
             decimas
             ,
             subsidia
             ,
             annatas
             primitias
             ,
             solvunt
             principi
             ,
             ut
             vel
             inde
             〈◊〉
             discerni
             possit
             quantum
             detrimenti
             regiis
             accesserit
             〈◊〉
             per
             illam
             desolationem
             monasteriis
             invectam
             per
             importunum
             Henrici
             octavi
             rigorem
             ,
             &
             per
             parliamentarias
             impropriationes
             .
             Ibid.
             p.
             384.
             
             Quales
             quales
             reformare
             potius
             ,
             &
             ad
             normam
             veterum
             reducere
             debebant
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             non
             quod
             factum
             facinore
             flagitioso
             ,
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             fuerunt
             ad
             haras
             ,
             altaria
             ad
             lupanaria
             transferenda
             ,
             sed
             reprimam
             〈◊〉
             .
             Ibid.
             p.
             174.
             
             Sub
             pretextu
             reformatae
             pietatis
             .
             Deum
             ,
             Ecclesiam
             ,
             pietatem
             ,
             per
             nefandistima
             sacrilegia
             ,
             eversis
             ubicunque
             monasteriis
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             l
             
               Montag
               .
               orig
            
             .
             p
             ,
             370.
             〈◊〉
             primus
             hanc
             viam
             insistebat
             ,
             illum
             〈◊〉
             ut
             in
             aliis
             sequebantur
             〈◊〉
             &
             〈◊〉
             .
             Ibid.
             p.
             382.
             
             Ejusmodi
             vitae
             genere
             〈◊〉
             jecisse
             fundamenta
             monasticae
             vitae
             ,
             cum
             illustrissimo
             Barono
             non
             abnuerim
             .
          
           
             m
             
               Montag
               .
               orig
            
             .
             p
             369.
             〈◊〉
             &
             interula
             &
             tunica
             ,
             &
             quocunque
             amictu
             vestiebatur
             ,
             de
             camelorum
             pilis
             id
             gestabat
             vestimentum
             ,
             ut
             ipsa
             asperitas
             ad
             virtutem
             patientiae
             animum
             exerceret
             ,
             nec
             princeps
             hoc
             institutum
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             :
             ab
             omni
             retro
             antiquitate
             Prophetarum
             filii
             
               Elias
               ,
               〈◊〉
            
             alii
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ute
             bantur
             ,
             quin
             &
             positum
             in
             more
             qui
             rem
             quamcunque
             persuadere
             vellent
             ,
             habitu
             ipso
             se
             componerent
             ad
             〈◊〉
             rem
             efficacius
             insinuandam
             .
             
               William
               〈◊〉
            
             sermon
             p.
             20.
             
             The
             sackcloth
             and
             ashes
             they
             received
             from
             Daniel
             and
             the
             Ninivites
             ,
             and
             to
             live
             according
             to
             a
             〈◊〉
             rule
             ,
             and
             order
             from
             S.
             Mark
             and
             other
             Apostles
             .
             so
             saith
             
               Cossian
               Ibidem
            
             p.
             28.
             
             Those
             if
             you
             censure
             for
             will-worship
             or
             superstition
             take
             heed
             ye
             condemne
             not
             the
             authors
             of
             them
             ,
             even
             our
             blessed
             Saviour
             ,
             with
             his
             Prophets
             and
             Apostles
             .
             Ibid.
             pag.
             44.
             
             Whereas
             our
             blessed
             Saviour
             hath
             forbidden
             shooes
             to
             his
             Disciples
             ,
             he
             was
             herein
             obeyed
             by
             the
             Primitive
             mortifiers
             ,
             sandals
             were
             meere
             solls
             tyed
             with
             strings
             :
          
           
             n
             
               Femal
               glory
            
             page
             22.
             
             The
             same
             author
             affirmes
             that
             there
             she
             lived
             a
             〈◊〉
             Nunne
             .
             Ibid.
             23.
             
             Let
             us
             then
             imagine
             that
             this
             holy
             〈◊〉
             confined
             her
             body
             to
             this
             sacred
             solitude
             ,
             that
             shee
             might
             the
             more
             freely
             enjoy
             the
             inconceivable
             pleasure
             shee
             tooke
             in
             her
             〈◊〉
             Virginity
             .
             Ibid.
             page
             She
             was
             a
             votary
             never
             to
             know
             man.
             Ibid.
             page
             148.
             
             You
             who
             ply
             your
             sacred
             Arithmetik
             and
             have
             thoughts
             cold
             and
             cleare
             as
             the
             Cristall
             beeds
             you
             pray
             by
             .
             You
             who
             have
             vowed
             virginity
             ,
             mentall
             and
             corporall
             ,
             approach
             with
             comfort
             ,
             and
             kneel
             downe
             before
             the
             grand
             white
             immaculate
             〈◊〉
             of
             your
             snowie
             Nunries
             ,
             and
             present
             the
             alsaving
             babe
             in
             her
             armes
             with
             due
             veneration
             :
          
           
             o
             Ibid.
             page
             236.
             
             Many
             holy
             orders
             also
             are
             of
             this
             sodality
             as
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             
               Franciscans
               ,
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             .
             If
             these
             examples
             of
             pious
             and
             worthy
             people
             will
             not
             move
             us
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             p
             
               William
               Wats
            
             sermon
             .
             page
             3.
             
             〈◊〉
             Bishop
             of
             Vienne
             did
             not
             uncannonically
             ,
             to
             appoint
             a
             solemne
             〈◊〉
             of
             three
             daies
             fast
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             a
             Letany
             to
             be
             sung
             in
             a
             barefooted
             procession
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             page
             20.
             
             To
             goe
             barefooted
             ,
             they
             received
             from
             David
             and
             
               Esaias
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             page
             45.
             〈◊〉
             maketh
             goers
             barefoote
             to
             be
             imitators
             of
             Apostolick
             spirited
             people
             .
             Ibid.
             page
             48.
             
             In
             the
             third
             ,
             fourth
             ,
             and
             fifth
             ages
             ,
             are
             examples
             plentifull
             of
             the
             nightly
             processions
             of
             the
             Christians
             ;
             yea
             ,
             they
             went
             from
             their
             houses
             in
             the
             Cities
             to
             some
             of
             their
             Churches
             in
             the
             fields
             ,
             singing
             Psalmes
             all
             the
             way
             through
             the
             streets
             in
             the
             hearing
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             .
             
               Ibid.
               Minutius
               Felix
            
             mentioneth
             
               necturna
               &
               〈◊〉
               sacra
            
             .
             For
             this
             purpose
             the
             night
             was
             devided
             into
             Canonicall
             houres
             or
             certaine
             times
             of
             rising
             to
             prayer
             ,
             whereof
             midnight
             was
             one
             ,
             the
             morning
             watch
             was
             another
             Canonicall
             houre
             .
             I
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             notwithstanding
             our
             devotion
             serveth
             us
             not
             〈◊〉
             the
             Prophets
             and
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             the
             Primitives
             ,
             yet
             we
             will
             forbeare
             to
             take
             part
             with
             the
             old
             Hereticks
             in
             reprehending
             them
             .
             Ibid.
             Before
             a
             greater
             Festivall
             all
             the
             devouter
             sort
             of
             Christians
             constantly
             repaired
             to
             their
             Churches
             at
             midnight
             .
          
           
             How
             neere
             they
             approach
             to
             Purgatorie
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             for
             the
             dead
             .
          
           
             q
             Montag
             .
             orig
             .
             pag.
             286.
             
             His
             qui
             in
             carcere
             erant
             spiritibus
             ,
             hoc
             est
             defunct
             is
             ,
             suo
             fato
             &
             inferno
             addict
             is
             praedicavit
             ,
             quo
             in
             loco
             Puritani
             ,
             &
             novatores
             spiritum
             ,
             non
             animam
             Christi
             intelligunt
             Ibid.
             apar
             .
             p.
             476.
             
             Communem
             esse
             patrum
             sententiam
             ,
             〈◊〉
             doctissimorum
             scriptorum
             nostrae
             aetatis
             &
             confessionis
             ,
             sanctorum
             animas
             ante
             Christi
             resurrectionem
             non
             fuisse
             in
             Coelo
             .
             Olim
             (
             inquit
             Chrysostomus
             )
             ad
             infernum
             deducebat
             mors
             ,
             sed
             nunc
             assumit
             ad
             Christum
             .
             Ideo
             dicebat
             olim
             Iacob
             ,
             Deducet
             is
             senectutem
             meam
             ad
             infernum
             cum
             lachrymis
             Ideo
             olim
             lugebantur
             mortui
             ,
             at
             nunc
             cum
             Psalmis
             &
             hymnis
             efferuntur
             .
             Hieronymi
             testimonia
             sunt
             innumera
             ,
             ante
             adventum
             Christi
             omnes
             ad
             inferos
             ducebantur
             ;
             inde
             Iacob
             ad
             inferos
             discensurum
             se
             dicit
             ,
             &
             Iob
             pios
             &
             impios
             in
             inferno
             queritur
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             Euangelium
             docet
             magnum
             chaos
             interpositum
             apud
             inferos
             ,
             &
             revera
             antequamflammeam
             illam
             rotam
             ,
             &
             igneam
             rompheam
             ad
             〈◊〉
             fores
             Christ
             us
             〈◊〉
             one
             reseraret
             ,
             clausa
             erant
             caelestia
             ,
             Nota
             quoque
             ut
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             quoque
             in
             inferno
             fuisse
             credas
             ,
             &
             ante
             adventum
             Christi
             ,
             quamvis
             sanctos
             〈◊〉
             lege
             detentos
             :
             locum
             esse
             ait
             ,
             qui
             lacus
             〈◊〉
             &
             abyssus
             ,
             in
             qua
             non
             erant
             aquae
             in
             qua
             animae
             〈◊〉
             ,
             sive
             ad
             poenas
             .
          
           
             r
             
               Montag
               .
               a
               par
               .
               pag.
            
             476.
             
             
               Postquam
               eo
               descendit
               ,
               Christus
               ,
               inferorum
               claustra
               perfodit
               ,
               diripuit
               ,
               vastavit
               ,
               spoliavit
               ,
               vinctas
               inde
               animas
               liberando
               .
               M.
               Maxwels
            
             demonstration
             ,
             pag.
             9.
             
             Whether
             the
             places
             of
             Scripture
             wherein
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             our
             Saviours
             spoyling
             of
             hell
             ,
             and
             leading
             captivitie
             captive
             ,
             may
             perhaps
             be
             understood
             of
             his
             powerfull
             &
             mercifull
             delivering
             from
             hell
             ,
             of
             some
             of
             the
             soules
             of
             vertuous
             Pagans
             ,
             as
             of
             their
             Philosophers
             ,
             lawgivers
             ,
             governors
             ,
             kings
             ,
             queens
             ,
             &
             other
             private
             persons
             renowned
             for
             their
             wisdome
             ,
             prudence
             ,
             fortitude
             ,
             temperance
             ,
             bounty
             ,
             chastity
             ,
             justice
             ,
             mercy
             ;
             and
             generally
             for
             their
             civill
             carriage
             ,
             &
             morall
             conversation
             ,
             〈◊〉
             as
             were
             
               Hermes
               Trismegistus
               ,
               Zoroaster
               ,
               Socrates
               ,
               Plato
               ,
               Aristotle
               ,
               Pythagoras
               ,
               Homer
               ,
               Phocyllides
               ,
               Theognis
               ,
               Epictetus
               ,
               Cicero
            
             ;
             and
             such
             as
             were
             
               Hercules
               ,
               Thesem
               ,
               Cyrus
               ,
               Solon
               ,
               Lycurgus
               ,
               Aristides
               ,
               Simon
               ,
               〈◊〉
               ,
               Epaminondas
               ,
               Tarrina
               ,
               Camilla
               ,
               〈◊〉
               ,
               Panthea
               ,
               Penelope
               ,
               Artemisia
               ,
            
             and
             others
             the
             like
             :
             for
             my
             owne
             part
             ,
             I
             do
             professe
             such
             love
             to
             those
             vertuous
             wights
             ,
             for
             their
             vertues
             sake
             ,
             as
             I
             had
             rather
             condemne
             twentie
             such
             opinions
             as
             that
             of
             
               Limbus
               patrum
            
             ,
             than
             to
             damne
             eternally
             the
             soule
             of
             one
             Socrates
             ,
             of
             one
             Cyrus
             .
          
           
             s
             Montag
             .
             apar
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             135
             Objiciunt
             ,
             nullus
             tertius
             〈◊〉
             indicatur
             in
             Scriptura
             praeter
             infernum
             damnatorum
             &
             coelum
             .
             Resp.
             Licet
             non
             indicaretur
             in
             〈◊〉
             esse
             alium
             locum
             tertium
             ,
             non
             tamen
             inde
             sequeretur
             non
             fuisse
             tertium
             ,
             quia
             multa
             sunt
             quae
             non
             indicantur
             in
             Scripturis
             .
             Locus
             ille
             Matthaei
             25.
             
             Loquitur
             non
             de
             loco
             aut
             statu
             animarum
             ante
             Christum
             ,
             sed
             de
             statu
             &
             loco
             finali
             post
             finem
             saeculi
             ,
             cum
             〈◊〉
             tantum
             erunt
             absque
             dubio
             hominum
             societates
             sempiternae
             .
          
           
             t
             
               Andreus
               stricturae
               ,
               pag.
            
             56.
             
             Anent
             offering
             and
             prayer
             for
             the
             dead
             ,
             there
             is
             little
             to
             be
             said
             against
             it
             ,
             it
             cannot
             be
             denyed
             but
             it
             is
             ancient
             .
             
               Dow.
               pag.
            
             56.
             
             That
             the
             ancient
             Church
             had
             commemorations
             ,
             oblations
             ,
             and
             prayers
             for
             the
             dead
             ,
             the
             testimonies
             of
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             ecclesiasticall
             stories
             &
             ancient
             Liturgies
             do
             put
             out
             of
             all
             question
             .
             
               Pokling
               .
               alt
               .
               p.
            
             83.
             
             Commends
             that
             Canon
             whereby
             a
             Priest
             after
             his
             death
             was
             ordained
             to
             be
             punished
             ,
             for
             making
             another
             Priest
             his
             Executour
             ,
             with
             this
             paine
             ,
             that
             at
             the
             altar
             for
             such
             an
             one
             ,
             
               non
               offerretur
               ,
               nee
               sacrificium
               〈◊〉
               dormitione
               ejus
               〈◊〉
               .
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A67904-e17850
           
             Few
             of
             all
             Romes
             superstitions
             are
             against
             their
             stomack
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Samuel
               Hoards
            
             Sermon
             ,
             pag.
             15
             :
             Reckons
             out
             among
             his
             traditions
             the
             crossing
             of
             themselves
             when
             they
             went
             out
             ,
             or
             when
             they
             came
             in
             ,
             when
             they
             went
             to
             bed
             ,
             or
             〈◊〉
             they
             rose
             ,
             〈◊〉
             they
             sat
             down
             to
             meat
             ,
             or
             lighted
             candles
             ,
             or
             had
             any
             businesse
             of
             moment
             to
             doe
             .
             
               Montag
               .
               apeal
               .
               p.
            
             268.
             
             What
             hinders
             but
             that
             I
             may
             signe
             my self
             with
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             crosse
             in
             any
             part
             of
             my
             body
             ,
             at
             any
             time
             when
             I
             goe
             to
             bed
             ,
             in
             the
             morning
             when
             I
             rise
             ,
             at
             my
             going
             out
             ,
             at
             my
             returning
             home
             ,
             the
             ancient
             Church
             so
             used
             it
             ,
             and
             so
             may
             we
             (
             for
             ought
             I
             know
             )
             without
             just
             scandall
             or
             superstition
             .
          
           
             b
             Montag
             .
             antid
             .
             p.
             17.
             
             Ego
             certe
             illas
             〈◊〉
             fasciis
             involvam
             ;
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             admovebo
             labiis
             ac
             collo
             suspensas
             〈◊〉
             oculisque
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             as
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             pag.
             24.
             
             Imagines
             praesertim
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             diligenter
             &
             cum
             cura
             :
             sunt
             apud
             nos
             per
             fenestras
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             c
             
               Female
               glory
               ,
               pag.
            
             148.
             
             Among
             the
             other
             praises
             of
             his
             holy
             Nuns
             ,
             this
             is
             one
             ,
             You
             who
             ply
             your
             sacred
             Arithmetick
             ,
             and
             have
             your
             thoughts
             cold
             and
             cleare
             as
             the
             crystall
             beeds
             you
             pray
             by
             :
             And
             in
             his
             proemials
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               terra
               revibrat
               ave
            
             .
          
           
             d
             
               Montag
               .
               antid
               .
               pag.
            
             164.
             
             
               Quadragesimale
               jejunium
               libenter
               ego
               concesserim
               ab
               Apostolis
               constitutum
               ,
               &
               apud
               vetustissimos
               〈◊〉
               proceres
               usurpatum
               .
               Ibid.
               p.
            
             9.
             
             
               Doceatur
               esse
               aliquid
               ab
               ipsis
               Apostolis
               institutum
               ,
               utpote
               jejunium
               quadragesimale
               ;
               Causam
               non
               dicam
               quin
               haereseos
               accuser
               ,
               si
               non
               ut
               ab
               Apostolica
               authoritate
               sancitumpropugnavero
               .
               William
               Wats
            
             sermon
             ,
             p.
             50.
             
             Most
             precise
             and
             severe
             observers
             were
             they
             of
             Lent-fast
             ,
             which
             the
             whole
             primitive
             Church
             did
             believe
             to
             be
             of
             Apostolicall
             institution
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             had
             their
             Saviours
             and
             his
             Apostles
             example
             for
             that
             strictnesse
             .
             I
             passe
             their
             observation
             of
             Wednesdayes
             and
             Fridayes
             fast
             weekly
             ,
             which
             Epiphanius
             among
             many
             others
             assureth
             to
             be
             of
             Apostolicall
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             devotion
             :
             It
             hath
             also
             beene
             an
             ancient
             and
             religious
             custome
             ,
             to
             fast
             all
             the
             Fridayes
             in
             the
             yeare
             ,
             except
             those
             which
             fall
             within
             the
             twelve
             dayes
             of
             Christmasse
             .
             The
             Lent
             which
             now
             is
             ,
             and
             ever
             hath
             beene
             reputed
             an
             Apostolicall
             constitution
             ,
             and
             wee
             adde
             out
             of
             Chrysologus
             that
             it
             is
             not
             an
             humane
             invention
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             it
             ,
             but
             it
             comes
             from
             divine
             authoritie
             that
             we
             fast
             our
             fourtie
             dayes
             in
             Lent
             ,
             pag
             221.
             
          
           
             They
             embrace
             the
             grossest
             not
             only
             of
             their
             private
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             their
             publick
             〈◊〉
             ,
          
           
             e
             Laurence
             sermon
             p
             9.
             
             Christians
             distinguished
             their
             oratories
             into
             an
             atrium
             ,
             a
             Church
             yard
             ,
             a
             sanctum
             ,
             a
             Church
             a
             
               sanctum
               sanctorum
            
             ,
             a
             Chancell
             ,
             they
             did
             conceive
             a
             greater
             degree
             of
             〈◊〉
             in
             one
             of
             them
             ,
             than
             in
             another
             ,
             and
             in
             one
             place
             of
             them
             than
             another
             ,
             Churchyards
             they
             thought
             profaned
             by
             sports
             ,
             the
             whole
             circuit
             both
             before
             and
             after
             Christ
             was
             〈◊〉
             ledged
             for
             refuge
             ,
             none
             out
             of
             the
             communion
             of
             the
             Kirk
             permitted
             to
             〈◊〉
             there
             ,
             any
             〈◊〉
             ground
             〈◊〉
             for
             interment
             before
             that
             which
             was
             not
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             that
             in
             an
             higher
             esteem
             which
             was
             in
             a
             higher
             degree
             of
             consecration
             ,
             and
             that
             in
             the
             highest
             which
             was
             neerest
             the
             altar
             .
             Halls
             sermon
             at
             the
             consecration
             of
             a
             buriall
             place
             ,
             p.
             38.
             
             Out
             of
             the
             consideration
             of
             the
             holy
             designation
             of
             these
             peculiar
             places
             came
             both
             the
             title
             and
             practice
             of
             consecration
             of
             〈◊〉
             ,
             which
             they
             say
             is
             no
             lesse
             ancient
             than
             the
             dayes
             of
             Calixtus
             the
             first
             who
             dedicated
             the
             first
             Cemiteries
             ,
             albeit
             it
             was
             decreed
             by
             the
             Councel
             of
             Arles
             ,
             that
             if
             any
             Church
             were
             consecrated
             ,
             the
             Churchyard
             of
             it
             should
             require
             no
             other
             hallowing
             but
             by
             simple
             conspersion
             ,
             p.
             40.
             
             It
             is
             meet
             &
             necessary
             that
             those
             places
             should
             be
             set
             aside
             to
             this
             holy
             use
             by
             a
             due
             &
             religious
             dedication
             ,
             by
             praiers
             &
             holy
             actions
             tending
             therunto
             ,
             if
             the
             Jews
             used
             these
             dedications
             ,
             how
             much
             more
             we
             Ib.
             in
             the
             preface
             ,
             an
             act
             worthy
             both
             of
             this
             common
             celebration
             &
             of
             that
             episcopall
             service
             of
             mine
             .
          
           
             f
             Tedders
             sermon
             ,
             p.
             8.
             
             It
             is
             the
             consecration
             that
             makes
             them
             holy
             &
             makes
             God
             esteem
             them
             so
             ,
             which
             though
             they
             be
             not
             capable
             of
             grace
             ,
             yet
             receive
             by
             their
             consecration
             a
             spiritual
             power
             ,
             wherby
             they
             are
             made
             fit
             for
             divine
             service
             ,
             and
             being
             consecrate
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             danger
             in
             ascribing
             holinesse
             unto
             them
             ,
             if
             we
             beleeve
             S.
             Bernard
             ,
             
               quis
               parietes
               istos
               sanctos
               dicere
               vereatur
               ,
               quos
               manus
               sacratae
               Pontificū
               〈◊〉
               sanctificavere
               mysteriis
               .
            
             When
             we
             come
             to
             Church
             ,
             say
             the
             holy
             Fathers
             of
             the
             devotion
             of
             those
             primitive
             times
             ,
             
               corpora
               humi
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             they
             that
             shewed
             the
             least
             devotion
             did
             bow
             ,
             all
             the
             time
             that
             they
             were
             there
             none
             presumed
             so
             much
             as
             to
             sit
             ,
             as
             being
             too
             〈◊〉
             &
             lazie
             a
             posture
             in
             Gods
             house
             ,
             but
             only
             for
             infirmitie
             or
             some
             other
             cause
             were
             〈◊〉
             with
             .
             There
             were
             some
             that
             would
             not
             have
             their
             shooes
             on
             their
             feet
             in
             the
             temple
             ,
             a
             shame
             to
             them
             that
             have
             their
             hats
             on
             in
             Gods
             house
             .
             
               Shelf
               p.
            
             51.
             
             Some
             profane
             Gods
             house
             by
             going
             out
             with
             headscovered
             ,
             as
             if
             God
             were
             not
             present
             ,
             &
             it
             were
             not
             his
             house
             when
             service
             was
             ended
             .
             
               Pokling
               .
               〈◊〉
               .
               p.
            
             141.
             hurches
             when
             they
             were
             made
             they
             were
             consecrate
             ,
             for
             a
             man
             may
             as
             lawfully
             and
             Christianly
             administer
             the
             sacrament
             in
             a
             barn
             or
             town
             hal
             as
             in
             any
             place
             that
             is
             not
             consecrate
             to
             such
             holy
             uses
             ,
             
               Queen
               scoole
               p.
            
             223.
             
             S.
             Giles
             Church
             in
             the
             fields
             being
             newly
             repaired
             after
             two
             years
             service
             ,
             sermon
             &
             sacraments
             in
             it
             in
             D.
             Montary
             B.
             of
             Londons
             time
             ,
             was
             required
             to
             be
             consecrate
             by
             his
             successor
             D.
             Laud
             ,
             the
             parochin
             refusing
             ,
             the
             Bishop
             caused
             sequester
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             up
             the
             house
             for
             a
             month
             ,
             &
             forces
             the
             parish
             after
             50
             pound
             fine
             to
             put
             up
             a
             〈◊〉
             upon
             the
             East
             window
             ,
             &
             receive
             the
             other
             orders
             of
             consecration
             .
             The
             foundatiō
             stons
             of
             there
             air
             of
             Pauls
             were
             solemnly
             blessed
             by
             the
             Bishop
             ,
             his
             main
             reason
             for
             urging
             of
             the
             visitation
             of
             Cambridge
             was
             ,
             that
             two
             chappels
             there
             was
             not
             yet
             consecrate
             ,
             notwithstanding
             of
             divine
             service
             in
             them
             for
             some
             score
             of
             years
             past
             .
          
           
             g
             
               Pokl
               alt
               p.
            
             141.
             
             Was
             not
             the
             altar
             the
             chiefest
             place
             which
             with
             most
             ceremony
             &
             devotion
             was
             hallowed
             ?
             was
             there
             not
             a
             feast
             annuall
             kept
             in
             joyfull
             remembrance
             of
             the
             dedication
             of
             every
             Church
             .
             Doth
             not
             S.
             Austine
             say
             ,
             
               Novit
               sanctitas
               vestra
               fratres
               ,
               corsecrationem
               altaris
               celebrareus
               in
               quo
               unctus
               vel
               benedictus
               est
               lapis
               ,
            
             as
             he
             cites
             the
             place
             in
             his
             Sunday
             .
             
               Quenscoole
               ,
               p.
            
             198.
             
             In
             the
             collegiat
             Church
             of
             Wolverhampton
             in
             the
             countrey
             of
             Stafford
             ,
             the
             altar
             &
             cloaths
             therof
             were
             consecrate
             11.
             
             Octob.
             1635.
             
             As
             soon
             as
             the
             Priests
             come
             to
             the
             Church
             ,
             each
             of
             them
             made
             a
             low
             congie
             at
             their
             first
             entring
             in
             at
             the
             church
             door
             ,
             &
             after
             that
             three
             congies
             a
             peece
             towards
             the
             altar
             ,
             so
             they
             went
             unto
             the
             chancell
             ,
             where
             a
             bason
             with
             water
             &
             a
             towel
             was
             provided
             for
             the
             Priests
             to
             wash
             in
             ,
             where
             also
             was
             incense
             burning
             ;
             after
             they
             returned
             making
             three
             〈◊〉
             a
             peece
             .
             After
             the
             sermon
             every
             one
             of
             them
             had
             a
             paper
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             which
             they
             tearmed
             a
             censer
             ,
             &
             so
             they
             went
             up
             again
             to
             the
             altar
             :
             as
             they
             went
             they
             made
             〈◊〉
             congies
             a
             peece
             ,
             the
             Communion
             being
             ended
             they
             washed
             their
             hands
             ,
             and
             returned
             giving
             three
             congies
             as
             before
             .
             Ib.
             220.
             
             There
             are
             divers
             high
             〈◊〉
             solemnly
             dedicated
             of
             late
             in
             divers
             〈◊〉
             of
             Cambridge
             and
             Oxford
             ,
             adorned
             with
             tapers
             ,
             candlesticks
             ,
             Crucifixes
             ,
             basons
             ,
             crosses
             ,
             rich
             altar-clothes
             ,
             crimson
             cushions
             ,
             rich
             hangings
             .
             
               Pokl
               .
               alt
               .
               p.
            
             24.
             
             Optatus
             saith
             that
             
               Erant
               Ecclesiae
               ex
               auro
               &
               argento
               quam
               plurtma
               ornamenta
               .
               ib
               p
            
             80.
             
             At
             the
             upper
             end
             of
             the
             Chancell
             was
             a
             place
             railed
             in
             ,
             whereunto
             none
             were
             permitted
             to
             enter
             but
             the
             Priests
             .
             The
             Canon
             is
             cleare
             ,
             
               Nulli
               omnium
               qui
               sit
               in
            
             Laicorum
             
               numeroliceat
               intra
               sacram
               altare
               ingredi
            
             .
             A
             dispensation
             indeed
             there
             was
             for
             the
             Emperor
             to
             enter
             inhither
             when
             he
             would
             
               Creatori
               dona
               afferre
            
             ,
             but
             stay
             there
             he
             might
             not
             .
             
               Laurence
               ,
               p.
            
             10.
             
             Beyond
             these
             railes
             
               duo
               cancelli
            
             ,
             which
             distinguished
             the
             body
             of
             the
             Church
             from
             the
             Oracle
             ,
             none
             out
             of
             orders
             came
             .
             A
             more
             awfull
             reverence
             was
             commanded
             to
             this
             part
             being
             barred
             from
             common
             view
             .
             
               Ib.
               p
            
             29
             We
             have
             the
             Grecians
             triple
             prostrations
             from
             their
             Liturgies
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               Ib.
               p.
            
             12.
             
             The
             same
             God
             is
             thorow
             all
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             but
             not
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             thorow
             all
             the
             parts
             therof
             ,
             for
             as
             they
             are
             different
             degrees
             of
             sanctitie
             in
             them
             ,
             so
             is
             there
             a
             different
             dispensation
             of
             his
             presence
             in
             them
             .
             
               Ib.
               p.
            
             15.
             
             This
             followes
             upon
             the
             consecration
             ,
             as
             there
             was
             a
             greater
             communication
             of
             the
             divine
             presence
             in
             those
             places
             than
             in
             others
             ,
             so
             was
             there
             a
             greater
             communication
             of
             the
             same
             presence
             in
             some
             part
             of
             the
             temple
             of
             Solomon
             than
             in
             others
             .
             And
             as
             that
             distinction
             in
             holy
             places
             continued
             after
             Christ
             ,
             so
             did
             the
             reason
             of
             that
             distinction
             too
             .
             The
             whole
             indeed
             is
             the
             house
             of
             God
             ,
             for
             albeit
             the
             Lord
             be
             without
             these
             wals
             ,
             yet
             is
             he
             more
             within
             ,
             as
             we
             are
             not
             presumed
             to
             be
             so
             much
             abroad
             as
             at
             home
             ,
             though
             the
             Church
             conceived
             him
             to
             be
             present
             in
             all
             parts
             of
             this
             house
             ,
             yet
             it
             concerved
             him
             to
             be
             present
             more
             in
             one
             part
             of
             it
             than
             another
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             that
             〈◊〉
             dispensation
             of
             his
             presence
             to
             that
             place
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             as
             of
             old
             to
             that
             place
             of
             the
             temple
             which
             was
             within
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             we
             having
             an
             altar
             here
             answerable
             to
             a
             mercy
             〈◊〉
             there
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             respect
             of
             that
             union
             〈◊〉
             this
             place
             and
             〈◊〉
             humane
             nature
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               .
               Star-Chamber
            
             speech
             ,
             p.
             47.
             
             The
             altar
             is
             the
             greatest
             place
             of
             Gods
             residence
             upon
             〈◊〉
             ,
             I
             say
             the
             greatest
             ,
             〈◊〉
             greater
             than
             the
             pulpit
             ,
             for
             〈◊〉
             it
             is
             
               hoc
               est
               corpus
               meum
            
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             pulpit
             is
             is
             〈◊〉
             
               hoc
               est
               verbum
               meum
            
             ,
             and
             a
             greater
             reverence
             no
             doubt
             is
             due
             to
             the
             body
             than
             to
             the
             word
             ,
             and
             so
             in
             〈◊〉
             answerable
             to
             the
             〈◊〉
             where
             his
             body
             is
             usually
             〈◊〉
             then
             to
             the
             seat
             whence
             his
             word
             uses
             to
             be
             proclaimed
             .
          
           
             h
             Vide
             supra
             cap.
             5.
             
             (
             〈◊〉
             )
          
           
             i
             〈…〉
             I
             was
             shewed
             a
             Latine
             determination
             〈◊〉
             in
             one
             of
             our
             universities
             〈◊〉
             to
             prove
             ,
             that
             looke
             what
             ceremonies
             were
             used
             about
             the
             altar
             before
             the
             reformation
             by
             power
             and
             force
             of
             any
             generall
             custome
             ,
             though
             past
             over
             in
             deep
             silence
             by
             our
             Liturgie
             ,
             are
             notwithstanding
             commanded
             us
             by
             a
             kind
             of
             impli●●
             〈◊〉
             ,
             even
             unto
             us
             ,
             that
             live
             under
             the
             discipline
             of
             the
             English
             Liturgie
             .
             〈◊〉
             authour
             therein
             ,
             onely
             leaves
             him
             as
             a
             man
             most
             able
             to
             justifie
             that
             writ
             .
             〈◊〉
             are
             his
             words
             ,
             as
             for
             your
             Sally
             on
             the
             author
             of
             the
             latin
             determination
             ,
             I
             leave
             him
             to
             himselfe
             :
             He
             is
             of
             age
             to
             do
             you
             reason
             in
             this
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             in
             that
             other
             quarrell
             you
             have
             against
             him
             .
          
           
             k
             Vide
             supra
             ,
             cap.
             5.
             
             B.
             
          
           
             l
             
               〈◊〉
               Bughen
               ,
               serm
               .
               pag.
            
             9
             We
             〈◊〉
             not
             think
             〈◊〉
             enough
             that
             we
             stand
             at
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             except
             wee
             say
             it
             also
             with
             the
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             with
             a
             loud
             voice
             ,
             nor
             is
             it
             enough
             〈◊〉
             us
             to
             stand
             up
             at
             the
             gospel
             ,
             but
             
             at
             the
             name
             of
             Jesus
             ,
             not
             as
             if
             we
             were
             ashamed
             of
             what
             we
             did
             ,
             but
             
             ,
             neither
             is
             it
             〈◊〉
             to
             be
             bare
             in
             time
             of
             divine
             service
             ,
             
             kneell
             on
             our
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             commands
             &
             letanie
             are
             〈◊〉
             .
             
               Shelfoord
               ,
               pag.
            
             20.
             
             Let
             us
             learne
             of
             our
             Cathedrall
             Churches
             ,
             for
             there
             our
             reverend
             Fathers
             ,
             the
             prelats
             ,
             maketheir
             reverence
             to
             God
             in
             this
             wise
             ,
             both
             at
             their
             entry
             and
             their
             returne
             ,
             wherefore
             to
             follow
             their
             good
             &
             holy
             patterne
             ,
             we
             are
             to
             do
             the
             like
             ,
             both
             at
             our
             comming
             into
             Gods
             house
             ,
             and
             at
             our
             going
             out
             .
             
               Ib.
               p.
            
             22
             The
             fifth
             office
             of
             holinesse
             is
             to
             rise
             up
             from
             our
             seats
             when
             the
             articles
             of
             our
             faith
             are
             read
             ,
             wee
             also
             doe
             more
             reverently
             to
             stand
             up
             at
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             Psalmes
             ,
             before
             ,
             after
             ,
             and
             behind
             the
             holy
             Lessons
             .
             We
             are
             also
             to
             stand
             at
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             Gospel
             .
             The
             reason
             that
             the
             old
             Lyturgick
             writers
             gives
             of
             this
             superstitious
             standing
             at
             the
             Creed
             &
             Gospel
             more
             than
             at
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             lessons
             &
             Epistles
             is
             ,
             because
             these
             Epistles
             among
             which
             they
             put
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             the
             Pentateuch
             ,
             and
             sundry
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             old
             restament
             ,
             contains
             more
             base
             doctrine
             than
             the
             Gospel
             which
             comes
             behind
             them
             ,
             as
             the
             Master
             comes
             after
             his
             servant
             which
             goes
             before
             to
             make
             way
             .
          
           
             m
             
               Couzins
               devotions
            
             ,
             they
             offend
             against
             the
             fifth
             command
             that
             obeyes
             not
             the
             precepts
             of
             the
             ecclesiastick
             Governors
             .
             The
             precepts
             of
             the
             Church
             are
             first
             to
             observe
             the
             festivals
             and
             holy
             dayes
             appointed
             in
             the
             Church
             calendar
             ,
             
               vide
               supra
               cap.
            
             
          
           
             n
             
               Whits
               examinat
               .
               p.
            
             118.
             
             The
             injunction
             maketh
             no
             difference
             betwixt
             Sunday
             and
             the
             other
             holy
             dayes
             concerning
             working
             in
             harvest
             ,
             no
             speciall
             priviledge
             is
             given
             it
             more
             than
             the
             〈◊〉
             .
             For
             King
             Edwards
             statute
             repeated
             by
             Queen
             Elizabeth
             saith
             ,
             It
             shall
             be
             law
             full
             to
             every
             husband-man
             ,
             labourer
             ,
             fisher-man
             ,
             &c.
             upon
             the
             holy
             dayes
             aforesaid
             in
             harvest
             ,
             or
             at
             any
             other
             time
             of
             the
             yeare
             when
             necessity
             shall
             require
             ,
             to
             labour
             ,
             ride
             ,
             fish
             ,
             or
             work
             any
             kind
             of
             work
             at
             their
             free
             wils
             and
             pleasure
             .
             
               Ib.
               on
               the
               Sabbath
               .
               p.
            
             217.
             
             In
             the
             new
             testament
             we
             read
             of
             no
             prohibition
             concerning
             abstinence
             from
             secular
             actions
             upon
             the
             
               Lords
               day
            
             more
             than
             upon
             other
             dayes
             ,
             
               Et
               quod
               non
               prohibetur
               ultro
               permissum
               est
               .
            
             The
             Catholike
             Church
             for
             more
             than
             600
             yeares
             after
             Christ
             ,
             gave
             licence
             to
             many
             Christian
             people
             to
             work
             upon
             the
             
               Lords
               day
            
             at
             such
             houres
             as
             they
             were
             not
             commanded
             to
             be
             present
             at
             the
             publike
             service
             by
             the
             precept
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             In
             S.
             Jeroms
             dayes
             the
             devoutest
             Christians
             did
             ordinarily
             work
             upon
             the
             
               Lords
               day
            
             .
             In
             
               Gregory
               the
               Greats
            
             time
             it
             was
             reputed
             antichristian
             doctrine
             to
             make
             it
             a
             sin
             to
             work
             on
             the
             
               Lords
               day
               .
               Helenes
            
             answer
             ,
             p.
             111.
             
             His
             Majestie
             having
             published
             his
             declaration
             about
             lawfull
             pastimes
             on
             the
             Sunday
             ,
             gives
             order
             to
             his
             Bishops
             that
             publication
             thereof
             be
             made
             in
             all
             their
             severall
             Diocesses
             ,
             the
             Bishops
             hereupon
             appoint
             the
             Incumbent
             of
             every
             Church
             to
             read
             the
             declaration
             to
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             finding
             opposition
             to
             the
             said
             appointment
             ,
             presse
             them
             to
             the
             performance
             of
             it
             by
             vertue
             of
             that
             Canonicall
             obedience
             ,
             which
             by
             their
             severall
             oaths
             they
             were
             bound
             to
             yeeld
             unto
             their
             Ordinaries
             ;
             but
             seeing
             nothing
             but
             contempt
             upon
             contempt
             ,
             after
             much
             patience
             and
             long
             suffering
             ,
             some
             of
             the
             most
             perverse
             have
             been
             suspended
             ,
             as
             well
             
               〈◊〉
               beneficio
            
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             for
             an
             example
             to
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             o
             Vide
             supra
             caput
             
               5.
               w.
            
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A67904-e19280
           
             They
             cry
             downe
             so
             far
             as
             they
             can
             all
             preaching
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Cant.
               Star-chamber
            
             speech
             ,
             pag.
             47.
             
             But
             in
             the
             pulpit
             it
             is
             at
             most
             ,
             
               Hoc
               est
               verbum
               meum
            
             ,
             and
             God
             hold
             it
             there
             at
             his
             word
             :
             for
             as
             too
             many
             men
             use
             the
             matter
             ,
             it
             is
             ,
             
               Hoc
               est
               verbum
               Diaboli
            
             ,
             this
             is
             the
             word
             of
             the
             devill
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             witnesse
             sedition
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             to
             it
             .
          
           
             b
             And.
             Posthuma
             ,
             pag.
             32.
             
             Ex
             quo
             nuper
             hic
             apud
             nos
             vapularunt
             canes
             muti
             ,
             exclusi
             sunt
             clamatores
             〈◊〉
             as
             molesti
             ,
             ex
             quo
             pessimus
             〈◊〉
             mos
             invaluit
             ,
             ex
             quo
             pruriginoso
             〈◊〉
             editus
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             bic
             quicquidlibet
             effutiendi
             ,
             Ecclesia
             in
             tonstrinam
             versa
             est
             ,
             non
             plus
             ibi
             ineptiarum
             quam
             bic
             ,
             Theologia
             in
             battologiam
             ,
             canes
             〈◊〉
             latrantes
             mutati
             in
             catulos
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             fere
             scias
             〈◊〉
             opt
             ādum
             fit
             ,
             illudne
             〈◊〉
             ,
             an
             bi
             latratus
             absoni
             ,
             illudne
             jejunium
             ,
             an
             baec
             nausea
             .
          
           
             c
             
               Shelfoord
               ,
               pag.
            
             91.
             
             Beside
             these
             ten
             kinds
             of
             preaching
             ,
             which
             are
             able
             to
             stop
             the
             mouth
             of
             all
             itching
             〈◊〉
             professours
             ,
             there
             is
             yet
             another
             kind
             of
             preaching
             not
             fit
             for
             every
             Minister
             ,
             but
             for
             extraordinary
             and
             excellent
             men
             ,
             called
             by
             God
             and
             the
             Church
             ,
             to
             reforme
             errors
             and
             abuses
             ,
             to
             promulge
             to
             the
             world
             new
             Lawes
             &
             Canons
             .
             And
             as
             this
             kind
             is
             to
             be
             performed
             by
             extraordinary
             men
             ,
             〈◊〉
             it
             is
             not
             alwaies
             so
             needfull
             ,
             but
             when
             necessity
             required
             :
             for
             when
             things
             are
             setled
             ,
             there
             needs
             no
             more
             setling
             ,
             but
             only
             preserving
             .
             We
             ought
             not
             to
             have
             many
             〈◊〉
             ,
             or
             many
             Evangelists
             ,
             nor
             many
             Apostles
             ;
             Were
             people
             now
             to
             be
             called
             and
             converted
             to
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             then
             not
             〈◊〉
             this
             kind
             of
             preaching
             ,
             but
             miracles
             also
             were
             needful
             ,
             when
             much
             needlesse
             and
             some
             unsound
             teaching
             by
             tract
             of
             time
             had
             sued
             into
             the
             ark
             of
             Christs
             Church
             ,
             by
             the
             〈◊〉
             &
             Priests
             thereof
             :
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             19
             year
             of
             King
             Henry
             the
             eighth
             ,
             began
             licences
             to
             be
             granted
             by
             the
             Court
             of
             Star-chamber
             ,
             to
             preach
             against
             the
             corruptions
             of
             the
             time
             ;
             but
             now
             the
             corruptions
             are
             〈◊〉
             the
             ancient
             &
             true
             doctrine
             of
             the
             primitive
             Church
             by
             setled
             articles
             is
             restored
             ;
             Therfore
             this
             extraordinary
             kind
             is
             not
             now
             so
             necessary
             ,
             except
             it
             be
             upon
             some
             〈◊〉
             crimes
             ,
             breaking
             forth
             among
             people
             .
          
           
             d
             
               Shelfoord
               ,
               pag.
            
             35.
             
             The
             principall
             part
             of
             the
             Ministers
             office
             is
             the
             true
             understand
             〈◊〉
             ,
             distinct
             reading
             ,
             and
             decent
             Ministrie
             of
             the
             Church
             service
             ,
             contained
             in
             the
             Book
             of
             Common
             Prayer
             .
             This
             is
             the
             pith
             of
             godlinesse
             ,
             the
             heart
             of
             religion
             ,
             the
             spina
             or
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             backbone
             of
             all
             holy
             faculties
             of
             the
             Christian
             body
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag
            
             39.
             
             Were
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             as
             the
             Canons
             〈◊〉
             aptly
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             by
             just
             distinctions
             ,
             and
             by
             a
             sensible
             Reader
             ,
             observing
             all
             the
             rules
             of
             reading
             ,
             with
             〈◊〉
             fit
             〈◊〉
             the
             matter
             ,
             and
             with
             due
             attention
             of
             the
             hearer
             ,
             there
             would
             bee
             much
             profit
             and
             edifing
             .
             
               Jbid.
               pag.
            
             76.
             
             Gods
             Minister
             〈◊〉
             thy
             Preacher
             ,
             and
             the
             divine
             service
             of
             the
             church
             book
             is
             his
             sermon
             .
             In
             this
             service
             &
             this
             sermon
             is
             contained
             whatsoever
             is
             necessary
             for
             salvation
             .
             
               Ibid.
               p.
            
             78.
             
             The
             〈◊〉
             reading
             is
             preaching
             ;
             yea
             ,
             a
             lively
             &
             effectuall
             kind
             of
             preaching
             .
          
           
             e
             Heylens
             answer
             ,
             pag.
             165.
             
             Whereas
             formerly
             you
             used
             to
             mangle
             and
             cut
             short
             the
             Service
             ,
             that
             you
             might
             bring
             the
             whole
             worship
             of
             God
             to
             your
             extemporary
             prayers
             and
             Sermons
             ,
             now
             you
             are
             brought
             againe
             to
             the
             ancient
             usage
             of
             reading
             the
             whole
             prayers
             ,
             without
             any
             diminishing
             in
             regard
             of
             preaching
             .
             As
             for
             your
             other
             cavils
             about
             the
             using
             of
             no
             prayer
             at
             all
             after
             Sermon
             ,
             the
             innovation
             here
             is
             on
             your
             part
             ,
             who
             have
             offended
             all
             this
             while
             ,
             not
             only
             against
             the
             Canon
             ,
             but
             act
             of
             Parliament
             ,
             by
             bringing
             in
             new
             formes
             of
             your
             owne
             devising
             .
             As
             for
             the
             forbidding
             of
             any
             prayer
             before
             the
             Sermon
             ,
             if
             any
             such
             be
             ,
             it
             is
             but
             agreeable
             unto
             the
             Canon
             ,
             which
             hath
             determined
             so
             of
             it
             long
             ago
             .
             The
             Preachers
             in
             King
             Edwards
             dayes
             used
             no
             forme
             of
             prayers
             ,
             but
             〈◊〉
             exhorting
             which
             is
             now
             required
             in
             the
             Canon
             .
          
           
             f
             Couzins
             devotions
             in
             the
             preface
             .
             Let
             no
             prayers
             be
             used
             ,
             but
             these
             which
             are
             allowed
             by
             the
             Church
             :
             what
             prayers
             〈◊〉
             ever
             any
             man
             hath
             framed
             for
             himselfe
             ,
             let
             him
             first
             acquaint
             these
             that
             are
             wise
             &
             learned
             〈◊〉
             them
             ,
             before
             he
             presume
             to
             use
             them
             :
             and
             that
             men
             may
             not
             think
             those
             rules
             are
             to
             be
             applied
             to
             publike
             praiers
             only
             ,
             &
             not
             to
             privat
             ,
             let
             them
             weigh
             those
             words
             in
             the
             councell
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               ,
               Quascunque
               〈◊〉
               preces
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             When
             we
             speak
             to
             the
             awfull
             〈◊〉
             of
             God
             ,
             we
             would
             be
             sure
             to
             speak
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             and
             pious
             language
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             which
             hath
             ever
             been
             guided
             by
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             &
             not
             to
             lose
             our selves
             with
             confusion
             in
             any
             sudden
             abrupt
             or
             rude
             dictates
             ,
             which
             are
             〈◊〉
             by
             private
             spirits
             ,
             &
             ghosts
             of
             our
             own
             ,
             in
             regard
             whereof
             our
             very
             Priests
             &
             Deacons
             themselves
             are
             in
             their
             private
             and
             〈◊〉
             prayers
             enjoyned
             to
             say
             the
             morning
             &
             evening
             devotions
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             when
             at
             any
             time
             they
             pray
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             set
             forme
             of
             words
             prescribed
             to
             them
             to
             use
             ,
             that
             they
             also
             might
             now
             it
             is
             not
             lawful
             for
             them
             to
             pray
             of
             their
             own
             heads
             ,
             or
             suddenly
             to
             say
             what
             they
             please
             themselves
             .
          
           
             g
             Pokling
             〈◊〉
             .
             Our
             Saviour
             in
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             ,
             preached
             but
             once
             a
             day
             ,
             for
             immediatly
             after
             he
             went
             to
             dinner
             .
             〈◊〉
             answer
             ,
             〈◊〉
             .
             168.
             
             If
             in
             the
             great
             cities
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Sermons
             are
             〈◊〉
             to
             the
             〈◊〉
             time
             of
             the
             day
             ,
             or
             as
             〈◊〉
             owne
             phrase
             is
             ,
             to
             an
             〈◊〉
             onely
             ,
             assuredly
             it
             is
             neither
             〈◊〉
             nor
             strange
             ,
             nor
             need
             〈◊〉
             bee
             offended
             at
             it
             ,
             if
             by
             that
             meanes
             the
             people
             in
             those
             place
             ,
             cannot
             heare
             but
             one
             sermon
             in
             the
             day
             ,
             it
             being
             not
             many
             ,
             but
             good
             sermons
             ;
             not
             much
             ,
             but
             profitable
             hearing
             ,
             which
             you
             should
             labor
             to
             commend
             .
             
               Shelford
               ,
               p.
            
             93.
             
             Better
             were
             it
             for
             our
             Church
             and
             people
             to
             have
             but
             one
             Sermon
             well
             premeditated
             ,
             in
             a
             moneth
             ,
             which
             is
             insinuated
             by
             the
             Canon
             ,
             than
             two
             on
             a
             day
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             a
             rolling
             braine
             and
             mouth
             ,
             without
             due
             preparation
             .
             Heylens
             answer
             ,
             pag.
             166.
             
             Your
             afternoone
             Sermon
             on
             the
             Sunday
             ,
             if
             performed
             by
             Lecturers
             ,
             are
             but
             a
             part
             of
             your
             new
             fashion
             ,
             and
             having
             no
             foundation
             in
             the
             Church
             at
             all
             ,
             it
             cannot
             be
             any
             innovation
             to
             lay
             them
             by
             ,
             and
             if
             the
             Curate
             performe
             his
             dutie
             in
             catechizing
             ,
             you
             have
             no
             reason
             to
             complaine
             for
             want
             of
             Sermons
             in
             the
             afternoone
             .
          
           
             h
             Heylens
             answer
             ,
             163.
             
             Why
             count
             yee
             the
             suppressing
             of
             Lectures
             for
             an
             innovation
             ,
             whereas
             the
             name
             of
             Lecturers
             and
             Lectures
             are
             in
             themselves
             a
             new
             and
             〈◊〉
             invention
             ,
             borrowed
             from
             the
             new
             fashions
             of
             Geneva
             ?
          
           
             i
             
               Shelford
               ,
               pag.
            
             71
             When
             men
             had
             more
             of
             inward
             teaching
             ,
             and
             lesse
             of
             outward
             ,
             then
             was
             there
             far
             better
             living
             ;
             for
             then
             they
             lived
             alwayes
             in
             feare
             of
             offending
             ,
             and
             as
             〈◊〉
             as
             they
             had
             done
             any
             thing
             amisse
             ,
             their
             conscience
             by
             &
             by
             gave
             them
             a
             nip
             ,
             and
             a
             memento
             for
             it
             ,
             then
             they
             confessed
             their
             sins
             to
             God
             &
             their
             Minister
             ,
             for
             spirituall
             comfort
             and
             counsell
             ;
             then
             they
             endevoured
             to
             make
             the
             best
             temporall
             satisfaction
             they
             could
             by
             almes
             ,
             prayers
             ,
             &
             fasting
             ,
             &
             other
             good
             works
             ofhumiliation
             ;
             but
             now
             outward
             teaching
             not
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             understood
             ,
             hath
             beaten
             away
             this
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             82.
             
             The
             besotted
             negligence
             of
             our
             delicate
             Puritans
             ,
             is
             that
             which
             makes
             them
             to
             run
             so
             after
             Sermons
             ;
             what
             doth
             this
             singularitie
             work
             in
             them
             ,
             but
             a
             contempt
             of
             government
             ?
             As
             weak
             stomacks
             cannot
             well
             digest
             much
             meat
             ,
             so
             the
             common
             people
             cannot
             governe
             much
             〈◊〉
             ;
             &
             when
             they
             can
             not
             digest
             it
             well
             ,
             they
             vomit
             it
             up
             ,
             they
             wax
             proud
             ,
             and
             will
             contest
             with
             their
             Ministers
             .
             At
             what
             time
             were
             most
             heresies
             broached
             ?
             Was
             it
             not
             in
             the
             primitive
             Church
             ,
             when
             there
             was
             most
             preaching
             ;
             〈◊〉
             thereafter
             they
             did
             slake
             it
             .
             
               Ibid
               pag.
            
             99.
             
             Preaching
             by
             reading
             is
             the
             ordinarie
             preaching
             ordained
             by
             God
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             his
             Church
             ,
             and
             this
             was
             the
             ordinarie
             preaching
             in
             our
             Church
             before
             King
             Henry
             the
             eighth
             .
          
           
             They
             approve
             the
             Masse
             both
             for
             word
             &
             matter
             .
          
           
             k
             
               〈◊〉
               .
               Sunday
               ,
               Missam
               facere
               coepi
               ,
            
             saith
             
               S.
               Ambrose
            
             ,
             he
             began
             the
             second
             service
             ,
             as
             our
             Church
             calleth
             it
             ,
             
               quidam
               cogunt
               sacerdotem
               〈◊〉
               abbreviet
               〈◊〉
               ,
            
             saith
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             they
             make
             the
             Priest
             to
             curtaile
             Divine
             Service
             .
          
           
             l
             Montag
             .
             antid
             .
             pag.
             10.
             
             Missam
             ipsam
             non
             damnamus
             ,
             quoad
             vocem
             ,
             quin
             neque
             Missae
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             sano
             &
             recto
             sensu
             intellectum
             
          
           
             m
             
               Pockling
               .
               alt
               .
               pag.
            
             138.
             
             The
             King
             would
             like
             well
             enough
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             if
             the
             Priests
             would
             shrive
             her
             of
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             n
             Montag
             .
             antid
             .
             pag.
             10.
             
             De
             vocibus
             ,
             ne
             Missae
             quidem
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ne
             Transubstantiationis
             certamen
             moveremus
             .
          
           
             o
             Pag.
             28.
             
             I
             〈◊〉
             no
             Church
             〈◊〉
             celebrate
             the
             Sacrament
             with
             more
             puritie
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             gravitie
             ,
             and
             none
             with
             more
             majestythan
             by
             thi
             Book
             :
             Certainly
             it
             is
             purged
             from
             all
             〈◊〉
             ,
             which
             you
             call
             Superstition
             ,
             or
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             it
             is
             restored
             to
             the
             ancient
             〈◊〉
             ,
             the
             least
             thing
             that
             〈◊〉
             to
             〈◊〉
             ,
             being
             thrust
             out
             of
             doores
             ,
             as
             Amnon
             did
             Tamar
             ,
             without
             hope
             of
             returne
             :
             And
             if
             any
             superstitions
             would
             dare
             to
             enter
             ,
             the
             doore
             is
             so
             〈◊〉
             shut
             ,
             that
             〈◊〉
             must
             despaire
             of
             any
             entrie
             .
             What
             needs
             all
             such
             uproare
             then
             without
             cause
             ?
             I
             shall
             〈◊〉
             my selfe
             to
             make
             good
             these
             particulars
             :
             First
             ,
             that
             you
             shall
             never
             bee
             able
             to
             find
             any
             thing
             in
             that
             Booke
             ,
             contrarie
             to
             the
             Word
             of
             GOD.
             2.
             
             That
             it
             containeth
             nothing
             contrarie
             to
             the
             practice
             of
             the
             primitive
             Church
             ,
             but
             which
             is
             most
             agreeable
             thereto
             .
             3.
             
             That
             all
             the
             points
             which
             you
             condemne
             are
             not
             contraverted
             betweene
             our
             Classicall
             Divines
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             but
             agreed
             upon
             on
             both
             sides
             .
             4.
             
             That
             there
             is
             nothing
             in
             it
             ,
             contrarie
             to
             our
             Confession
             of
             Faith
             in
             Scotland
             ;
             yea
             ,
             which
             is
             much
             ,
             yee
             shall
             not
             shew
             mee
             a
             〈◊〉
             Divine
             of
             any
             note
             ,
             who
             ever
             did
             condemne
             this
             Book
             of
             the
             least
             point
             of
             Poperie
             ,
             but
             on
             the
             contrarie
             ,
             did
             defend
             and
             commend
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             Scottish
             Liturgie
             is
             much
             worse
             than
             the
             English.
             
          
           
             Our
             alteration
             in
             the
             Offertorie
             .
          
           
             p
             Durand
             .
             Ration
             .
             lib.
             4.
             fol.
             65.
             
             Ritus
             igitur
             〈◊〉
             transivit
             in
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             sacrificia
             〈◊〉
             populi
             〈◊〉
             sunt
             in
             observantimpopuli
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             q
             Durand
             .
             lib.
             4
             〈◊〉
             .
             64.
             
             Subsequens
             Dtaconus
             ipse
             patinam
             cum
             hostia
             pontifici
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             pontifex
             seu
             sacerdos
             〈◊〉
             collocat
             super
             altare
             .
             Ibid.
             fol
             66
             Sacerdos
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             manu
             targit
             ,
             repraesentans
             〈◊〉
             
               〈◊〉
               ,
               14.
               4.
            
             ponetque
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             super
             〈◊〉
             hostiae
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             in
             expiationem
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             Our
             changes
             in
             the
             consecration
             .
          
           
             r
             De
             missa
             ,
             lib.
             2.
             cap
             17.
             〈◊〉
             canonem
             ut
             summa
             reverentia
             semper
             Catholici
             retinuerunt
             ,
             it
             a
             incredibili
             furore
             haeretici
             hujus
             temporis
             lacerant
             .
          
           
             s
             Innocent
             .
             lib.
             4
             〈◊〉
             .
             1.
             〈◊〉
             nuno
             〈◊〉
             summam
             Sacramenti
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ad
             ipsum
             〈◊〉
             divini
             sacrificii
             penetramus
             .
          
           
             t
             Durand
             .
             lib.
             6.
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             non
             〈◊〉
             ;
             sed
             〈◊〉
             :
             differt
             autem
             inter
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             consecrare
             ,
             est
             〈◊〉
             transubstantiare
             :
             〈◊〉
             est
             ,
             sanctum
             &
             reverendum
             efficere
             ,
             ut
             〈◊〉
             in
             aqua
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             u
             
               Heylens
               antid
               .
               pag.
            
             45.
             and
             46.
             
             The
             Church
             of
             Rome
             enjoyneth
             the
             Priest
             to
             stand
             
               in
               medio
               altaris
            
             ,
             with
             his
             face
             to
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             back
             to
             the
             people
             ;
             But
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             at
             the
             North
             side
             of
             the
             Table
             ,
             albeit
             〈◊〉
             King
             Edwards
             Lyturgie
             ,
             the
             Priest
             was
             appointed
             to
             stand
             at
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             x
             〈◊〉
             saepe
             .
          
           
             y
             
               Pokling
               alt
               .
               pag.
            
             99.
             
             The
             people
             might
             see
             the
             Priest
             going
             into
             the
             Sanctuarie
             ,
             they
             might
             heare
             the
             noyse
             of
             his
             bels
             ;
             himselfe
             ,
             his
             gesture
             ,
             his
             actions
             〈◊〉
             saw
             not
             ,
             yet
             all
             this
             was
             done
             
               in
               medio
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             but
             not
             among
             the
             people
             in
             the
             outward
             〈◊〉
             inward
             Court
             ,
             whereunto
             onely
             the
             people
             were
             permitted
             to
             come
             .
          
           
             z
             
               Scottish
               Service
            
             the
             words
             of
             〈◊〉
             may
             be
             repeated
             againe
             over
             more
             either
             bread
             or
             wine
             .
          
           
             &
             White
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             ,
             pag.
             97.
             
             Such
             traditions
             are
             those
             that
             follow
             the
             Service
             of
             the
             Church
             in
             a
             knowne
             language
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             a
             
               Monr
               .
               apeal
               p.
            
             289.
             
             If
             men
             were
             disposed
             as
             they
             ought
             unto
             peace
             ,
             there
             needed
             bee
             no
             difference
             in
             the
             point
             of
             reall
             presence
             :
             for
             the
             disagreement
             is
             only
             
               de
               modo
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             the
             〈◊〉
             it self
             ,
             That
             there
             is
             in
             the
             holy
             Eucharist
             a
             reall
             presence
             ,
             is
             〈◊〉
             to
             on
             either
             side
             .
             For
             Andrews
             professeth
             to
             
               Bellarmine
               ,
               Nobis
               vobiscum
               de
               objecto
               convenit
               ,
               de
               modo
               lis
               est
               .
               Praesentiam
               inquam
               credimus
               non
               minus
               〈◊〉
               vos
               veram
               ,
               de
               modo
               praesentiae
               nil
               temere
               〈◊〉
               .
            
             There
             is
             no
             such
             cause
             therefore
             saith
             he
             ,
             why
             in
             this
             point
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             we
             should
             be
             so
             distracted
             ,
             seeing
             we
             both
             confesse
             that
             which
             is
             enough
             ,
             
               This
               is
               my
               body
            
             ,
             and
             contend
             meerly
             about
             the
             mean
             ,
             how
             it
             is
             my
             body
             ,
             a
             point
             of
             faith
             undeniable
             though
             it
             be
             unsearchable
             and
             incomprehensible
             :
             From
             Hooker
             he
             pronounceth
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             generall
             agreement
             about
             that
             which
             is
             alone
             materiall
             ,
             for
             the
             rest
             he
             avoweth
             himselfe
             to
             be
             for
             peace
             and
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             all
             to
             be
             so
             but
             Puritans
             and
             Jesuites
             ,
             〈◊〉
             the
             〈◊〉
             doth
             nourish
             up
             in
             a
             faction
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               ,
               p.
            
             18.
             
             I
             like
             S.
             
               Ambrose
               ,
               Lombard
               ,
               Roffensis
            
             &
             Harding
             ,
             who
             advise
             in
             this
             argument
             to
             forbeare
             the
             〈◊〉
             nation
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             presence
             ,
             and
             to
             cloath
             our
             〈◊〉
             with
             〈◊〉
             &
             general
             expressions
             .
             As
             I
             like
             not
             those
             that
             say
             he
             is
             〈◊〉
             there
             ,
             so
             I
             〈◊〉
             not
             those
             that
             say
             his
             body
             is
             not
             there
             .
             For
             S.
             Paul
             saith
             it
             is
             there
             ,
             〈◊〉
             the
             Church
             〈◊〉
             England
             saith
             it
             is
             there
             and
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ever
             said
             ,
             it
             is
             there
             ,
             and
             that
             truly
             ,
             substantially
             ,
             essentially
             .
             We
             must
             beleeve
             it
             is
             there
             .
             We
             must
             not
             know
             how
             it
             is
             there
             .
             It
             is
             a
             mysterie
             they
             all
             say
             .
             The
             presence
             they
             determined
             ,
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             his
             presence
             they
             determined
             not
             .
             They
             said
             he
             is
             there
             ,
             but
             the
             Lord
             knows
             how
             .
          
           
             b
             〈◊〉
             answer
             ,
             pag.
             137.
             
             Think
             you
             it
             〈◊〉
             the
             Priest
             should
             takeinto
             his
             〈◊〉
             the
             holy
             mysteries
             without
             lowly
             reverence
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             an
             innovation
             to
             do
             so
             .
          
           
             Our
             〈◊〉
             about
             the
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             c
             
               Heylens
               antid
               .
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             6.
             
             〈◊〉
             .
             2
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             of
             our
             〈◊〉
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             Lords
             owne
             〈◊〉
             ,
             it
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             to
             the
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             legal
             
             by
             Christs
             〈◊〉
             ,
             it
             is
             to
             
             by
             us
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             holy
             
             .
             A
             〈◊〉
             it
             was
             in
             figure
             ,
             a
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             in
             fact
             ,
             〈◊〉
             so
             by
             consequence
             a
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             the
             commemorations
             ,
             or
             immediately
             upon
             the
             post
             fact
             a
             Sacrifice
             there
             was
             among
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             a
             Sacrifice
             〈◊〉
             must
             be
             amongst
             the
             Christians
             :
             and
             if
             a
             Sacrifice
             must
             bee
             ,
             there
             must
             be
             Priests
             also
             to
             do
             ,
             and
             altars
             whereupon
             to
             do
             it
             :
             for
             without
             a
             Priest
             and
             an
             Altar
             there
             can
             be
             no
             Sacrifice
             .
             There
             was
             a
             bloudy
             Sacrifice
             then
             ,
             an
             unbloudy
             now
             ;
             a
             Priest
             derived
             from
             Aaron
             then
             ,
             from
             Melchisedeck
             now
             ;
             an
             Altar
             for
             Mosatcall
             Sacrifices
             then
             ,
             for
             Evangelicall
             now
             .
             The
             Apostles
             in
             the
             institution
             were
             appointed
             Priests
             by
             Christ
             ,
             where
             they
             received
             a
             power
             for
             them
             and
             their
             Successors
             to
             celebrate
             these
             holy
             mysteries
             .
             
               Hoc
               facite
            
             ,
             is
             for
             the
             Priest
             ,
             who
             hath
             power
             to
             consecrate
             ;
             
               Hoc
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             is
             both
             for
             Priest
             and
             people
             .
             
               Ibid
               pag.
            
             17.
             
             He
             maintained
             at
             length
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Lords
             Supper
             there
             is
             a
             true
             ,
             proper
             ,
             corporall
             ,
             visible
             ,
             and
             externall
             Sacrifice
             .
          
           
             Our
             changes
             in
             the
             Communion
             .
          
           
             d
             White
             on
             the
             Sabbath
             ,
             pag.
             97.
             
             Such
             Traditions
             are
             those
             that
             follow
             the
             deliverie
             of
             the
             Communion
             to
             the
             people
             in
             both
             kinds
             .
             Montag
             .
             orig
             .
             pag.
             396.
             
             Vbi
             〈◊〉
             in
             Scripturis
             infantes
             baptizari
             ,
             aut
             in
             coena
             Domiui
             sub
             utraque
             specie
             communicantes
             participare
             ;
             de
             his
             〈◊〉
             profiteri
             ,
             Nihil
             tale
             docet
             Scriptura
             ,
             Scriptura
             〈◊〉
             non
             praedicat
             .
             
               Andrews
               stricturae
               pag.
            
             5.
             
             It
             cannot
             be
             denyed
             ,
             but
             roserving
             the
             Sacrament
             was
             suffered
             a
             long
             time
             in
             the
             Primitive
             Church
             ,
             in
             time
             of
             persecution
             ,
             they
             were
             permitted
             to
             carrie
             away
             how
             great
             a
             part
             they
             would
             ,
             and
             to
             keep
             it
             by
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             take
             it
             at
             times
             to
             comfort
             them
             ;
             but
             for
             the
             sick
             ,
             it
             was
             alwayes
             sent
             them
             home
             ,
             were
             the
             distance
             never
             so
             great
             ,
             and
             against
             the
             time
             of
             extremitie
             ,
             it
             was
             thought
             not
             amisse
             to
             have
             it
             reserved
             ,
             that
             if
             the
             Priest
             should
             not
             then
             be
             in
             state
             to
             go
             to
             the
             sick
             partie
             ,
             and
             there
             to
             〈◊〉
             it
             for
             him
             ,
             yet
             at
             least
             it
             might
             be
             sent
             him
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             case
             of
             
               Serapion
               .
               Pokling
            
             .
             as
             we
             have
             heard
             ,
             made
             it
             one
             of
             the
             matters
             of
             that
             Churches
             glorie
             ,
             that
             they
             yet
             〈◊〉
             retaine
             in
             their
             〈◊〉
             the
             old
             Repositories
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A67904-e21870
           
             The
             tyrannous
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             Canterburians
             ,
             are
             as
             many
             and
             〈◊〉
             as
             these
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             Clergie
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Samuel
               Hoards
            
             Sermon
             ,
             pag
             7.
             
             By
             the
             Church
             I
             meane
             the
             Churches
             Pilots
             ,
             who
             sit
             at
             the
             sterne
             ;
             Heads
             and
             members
             divide
             al
             bodies
             Ecclesiasticall
             and
             civill
             ,
             what
             ever
             is
             to
             bee
             done
             in
             matters
             of
             direction
             and
             government
             ,
             hath
             alwayes
             beene
             ,
             and
             must
             bee
             the
             sole
             prerogative
             of
             the
             heads
             of
             these
             bodies
             ,
             unlesse
             we
             will
             have
             all
             Common-wealths
             and
             Churches
             broken
             in
             peeces
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             8.
             
             The
             key
             of
             jurisdiction
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             power
             of
             binding
             and
             loosing
             men
             ,
             
               in
               foro
               exteriori
            
             ,
             in
             the
             courts
             of
             justice
             ,
             and
             of
             making
             lawes
             and
             orders
             ,
             for
             the
             government
             of
             Gods
             house
             ,
             is
             peculiar
             to
             the
             heads
             and
             Bishops
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             
               Ibid.
               p.
            
             31.
             
             What
             was
             Ignatius
             and
             Ambrose
             ,
             if
             we
             look
             at
             their
             authoritie
             ,
             more
             than
             other
             Bishops
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             That
             libertie
             therfore
             which
             they
             had
             to
             make
             new
             orders
             ,
             when
             they
             saw
             〈◊〉
             ,
             have
             all
             other
             Prelates
             in
             their
             Churches
             .
             
               Edward
               Boughanes
            
             Serm.
             pag.
             17.
             
             Submit
             your selves
             to
             those
             that
             are
             put
             in
             authoritie
             by
             Kings
             ,
             so
             then
             to
             Bishops
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             put
             in
             authoritie
             by
             Kings
             ,
             if
             they
             had
             no
             other
             claime
             .
             But
             blessed
             be
             God
             ,
             they
             hold
             not
             only
             by
             this
             ,
             but
             by
             an
             higher
             tenure
             ,
             since
             all
             powers
             are
             of
             God
             ,
             from
             him
             they
             have
             their
             spirituall
             jurisdiction
             what
             ever
             it
             be
             .
             S.
             Paul
             therefore
             you
             see
             assumes
             this
             power
             unto
             himselfe
             ,
             of
             setting
             things
             in
             order
             in
             the
             Kirk
             ,
             before
             any
             Prince
             become
             Christian
             ,
             
               1
               Cor.
            
             11.
             34.
             
             The
             like
             power
             hee
             acknowledgeth
             to
             be
             in
             〈◊〉
             .
             1.
             5.
             and
             in
             all
             Bishops
             ,
             Heb.
             15.
             17.
             
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             18.
             
             Kings
             make
             lawes
             ,
             and
             Bishops
             make
             canons
             .
             This
             indeed
             it
             was
             of
             necessitie
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             Christianitie
             ,
             Kings
             made
             lawes
             for
             the
             State
             ,
             and
             Bishops
             for
             the
             Kirk
             ,
             because
             then
             there
             was
             no
             Christians
             Kings
             ,
             either
             to
             authorize
             them
             to
             make
             such
             laws
             ,
             or
             who
             would
             countenance
             the
             when
             they
             were
             made
             .
             But
             after
             that
             Kings
             became
             nourishing
             sathers
             to
             the
             Church
             in
             these
             pious
             &
             regular
             times
             ,
             Bishops
             made
             no
             Canons
             ,
             without
             the
             assent
             &
             confirmation
             of
             Christians
             Kings
             ,
             &
             such
             are
             our
             Canons
             ,
             so
             made
             ,
             so
             confirmed
             ,
             
               Chounei
               collect
               .
               p.
            
             53.
             
             
               Reges
               membra
               〈◊〉
               &
               filios
               Ecclesiae
               se
               esse
               habitos
               ,
               rejecisse
               ,
               contempsisse
               non
               〈◊〉
               audivimus
               ;
               obediunt
               ,
               simulque
               regnant
               :
               Jura
               quibus
               gubernari
               se
               permittunt
               ,
               sua
               sunt
               ,
               vitalitatem
               nativam
               ex
               praepositis
               Ecclesiae
               ,
               tanquam
               ex
               corde
               recipiunts
               &
               〈◊〉
               ex
               ipsis
               tanquam
               ex
               capitibus
               derivant
               .
               Sam.
               Hoards
               p.
            
             9.
             
             Nor
             did
             they
             exercise
             this
             power
             ,
             when
             they
             were
             in
             Counsell
             only
             ,
             but
             when
             they
             were
             asunder
             also
             :
             speaking
             of
             Apostles
             as
             they
             are
             paterns
             to
             all
             Bishops
             .
          
           
             b
             Our
             Church
             Sessions
             ,
             our
             weekly
             Presbyteries
             ,
             our
             yearly
             generall
             Assemblies
             ,
             whereof
             by
             our
             standing
             lawes
             we
             have
             been
             in
             possession
             ,
             are
             close
             put
             downe
             by
             our
             book
             of
             Canons
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             roome
             Church-Wardens
             ,
             officiall
             Courts
             ,
             Synods
             for
             Episcopall
             visitation
             ,
             and
             generall
             Assemblies
             to
             bee
             called
             when
             they
             will
             ,
             to
             be
             constitute
             of
             what
             members
             they
             please
             to
             name
             ,
             are
             put
             in
             their
             place
             .
          
           
             c
             So
             is
             their
             booke
             entituled
             ,
             Canons
             and
             Constitutions
             Ecclesiasticall
             ga
             hered
             ,
             and
             put
             in
             forme
             ,
             for
             the
             government
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Scotland
             ,
             and
             ordained
             to
             bee
             observed
             by
             the
             Clergie
             ,
             and
             all
             others
             whom
             they
             concerne
             .
          
           
             d
             Whites
             Examination
             of
             the
             dialogue
             ,
             pag.
             22.
             
             By
             the
             Lawes
             of
             our
             Kingdome
             ,
             &
             Canons
             of
             our
             Church
             ,
             many
             learned
             persons
             are
             appointed
             to
             be
             assistants
             unto
             Bishops
             ,
             &
             in
             our
             nationall
             Synods
             ,
             in
             which
             al
             weightie
             matters
             concerning
             religion
             are
             determined
             ,
             nothing
             is
             ,
             or
             may
             be
             concluded
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             common
             vote
             and
             counsell
             of
             the
             major
             part
             of
             the
             convocation
             which
             consisteth
             of
             many
             other
             learned
             Divines
             ,
             besides
             Bishops
             .
             Andrews
             Sermon
             of
             Trumpets
             ,
             dedicated
             to
             the
             King
             by
             Canterburie
             .
             As
             for
             the
             Churches
             Lawes
             ,
             which
             we
             call
             Canons
             or
             rules
             ,
             made
             to
             restraine
             or
             redresse
             abuses
             ,
             they
             have
             alwayes
             been
             made
             at
             Church
             Assemblies
             ,
             and
             in
             her
             owne
             Councels
             ,
             not
             elsewhere
             .
             
               Heylens
               antid
               .
               pag
            
             29.
             
             I
             trow
             you
             are
             not
             ignorant
             that
             the
             Kirk
             makes
             Canons
             ,
             it
             is
             the
             work
             of
             〈◊〉
             men
             in
             their
             Convocations
             ,
             having
             his
             Majesties
             leave
             for
             their
             conveening
             ,
             and
             approbation
             of
             their
             doings
             .
             His
             Majestie
             in
             the
             Declaration
             before
             the
             articles
             hath
             resolved
             it
             so
             ,
             and
             the
             late
             practice
             in
             King
             James
             his
             raigne
             ,
             what
             time
             the
             book
             of
             Canons
             was
             composed
             in
             the
             Convocation
             ,
             hath
             declared
             it
             so
             too
             .
          
           
             e
             Whites
             Examination
             ,
             pag.
             20.
             telleth
             us
             as
             it
             were
             from
             
               Eusebius
               ,
               Quicquid
               in
               Sanctis
               Episcoporum
               〈◊〉
               decernitur
               ,
               id
               universum
               divinae
               voluntati
               debet
               attribui
               .
            
             And
             from
             
               Bernard
               ,
               Sive
               Deus
               ,
               five
               homo
               vicarius
               Dei
               mandatum
               quodcunque
               tradiderit
               ,
               pari
               profectò
               obsequendum
               est
               oura
               ,
               pari
               reverentia
               suscipiendum
               :
               ubi
               tamen
               Deo
               contraria
               non
               praecepit
               homo
               .
            
          
           
             f
             Book
             of
             Canons
             ,
             pag.
             8.
             
             Whosoever
             shall
             hereafter
             affirm
             ,
             that
             the
             forme
             of
             worship
             contained
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             Common
             Prayer
             ,
             that
             the
             rites
             and
             ceremonies
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             that
             the
             government
             of
             the
             Church
             by
             Arch-Bishops
             ,
             Bishops
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             that
             the
             forme
             of
             consecrating
             Arch-Bishops
             ,
             Bishops
             ,
             Presbyters
             ,
             and
             Deacons
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             now
             established
             under
             his
             Majesties
             authoritie
             ,
             doe
             containe
             in
             them
             any
             thing
             repugnant
             to
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             or
             are
             corrupt
             ,
             superstitious
             ,
             or
             unlawfull
             in
             the
             service
             and
             worship
             of
             God
             ,
             let
             him
             bee
             excommunicate
             ,
             and
             not
             restored
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             Bishop
             of
             the
             place
             ,
             or
             Arch-Bishop
             of
             the
             Province
             ,
             after
             his
             repentance
             ,
             and
             publike
             revocation
             of
             such
             his
             wicked
             errours
             .
          
           
             g
             Book
             of
             Canons
             ,
             pa.
             37.
             
             In
             all
             this
             book
             of
             Canons
             ,
             wheresoever
             there
             is
             no
             penaltie
             〈◊〉
             set
             downe
             ,
             it
             is
             to
             bee
             understood
             ,
             that
             ,
             〈◊〉
             the
             crime
             or
             offence
             be
             proved
             ,
             the
             punishment
             shall
             bee
             arbitrary
             ,
             as
             the
             Ordinary
             shall
             think
             fittest
             .
          
           
             h
             
               Canterhuries
               Starre
               Chamber
               speech
            
             in
             his
             〈◊〉
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             I
             shall
             rather
             magnifie
             your
             elemencie
             ,
             that
             proceeded
             with
             those
             offenders
             ,
             
               Burton
               ,
               Bastwick
               ,
               Prinne
            
             ,
             in
             a
             Court
             of
             Mercie
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             Justice
             ;
             since
             as
             the
             reverend
             Judges
             then
             declared
             ,
             yee
             might
             have
             justly
             called
             the
             offenders
             into
             another
             Court
             ;
             and
             put
             them
             to
             it
             in
             a
             way
             that
             might
             have
             exacted
             their
             lives
             .
          
           
             i
             The
             world
             〈◊〉
             ,
             that
             numbers
             who
             have
             beene
             flying
             from
             Episcopall
             tyrannie
             out
             of
             England
             ,
             to
             the
             very
             new
             found
             lands
             ,
             never
             to
             returne
             ,
             have
             been
             by
             violence
             kept
             back
             ,
             and
             cast
             in
             their
             prisons
             :
             and
             we
             see
             daily
             ,
             that
             numbers
             not
             onely
             of
             men
             ,
             but
             even
             of
             silly
             women
             are
             drawne
             back
             in
             Ireland
             from
             their
             flight
             out
             of
             the
             Kingdome
             ,
             to
             close
             prisons
             .
          
           
             k
             Huntly
             in
             his
             Breviate
             reports
             ,
             as
             a
             known
             case
             among
             many
             other
             ,
             this
             one
             also
             ,
             that
             M.
             
               John
               Hayden
            
             ,
             a
             poor
             Devonshire
             Minister
             ,
             for
             preaching
             at
             Norwich
             a
             Sermon
             ,
             wherin
             he
             let
             fall
             some
             passages
             against
             setting
             up
             of
             images
             ,
             and
             bowing
             at
             the
             name
             of
             Jesus
             ,
             was
             apprehended
             like
             a
             Traytour
             ,
             with
             the
             Constables
             bils
             and
             halberds
             by
             D.
             Harsnet
             then
             Bishop
             ,
             and
             brought
             manacled
             to
             him
             like
             a
             Felon
             ,
             and
             committed
             to
             the
             common
             Jayle
             close
             prisoner
             ,
             above
             thirteene
             weeks
             ,
             where
             he
             was
             like
             to
             starve
             ;
             the
             Bishop
             having
             taken
             from
             him
             his
             horse
             ,
             papers
             ,
             and
             all
             ,
             thereafter
             he
             was
             sent
             by
             a
             Pursevant
             to
             London
             ,
             and
             kept
             two
             full
             Terms
             .
             At
             last
             ,
             by
             the
             high
             Commission
             he
             was
             deprived
             of
             his
             orders
             ,
             therafter
             the
             high
             Commissioners
             imprisoned
             him
             in
             the
             
               Gate
               house
               common
               dungeon
               ,
               &
               Canterbury
            
             sent
             him
             to
             be
             whipt
             to
             Bridewell
             ,
             and
             there
             kept
             him
             all
             the
             long
             extreme
             cold
             winter
             in
             a
             dark
             cold
             dungeon
             ,
             without
             fire
             or
             candle-light
             ,
             chained
             to
             a
             post
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             roome
             ,
             with
             heavie
             〈◊〉
             on
             his
             hands
             and
             feet
             ,
             allowing
             him
             onely
             bread
             and
             water
             ,
             with
             a
             pad
             of
             straw
             to
             lye
             on
             :
             And
             since
             on
             his
             reliefe
             hath
             caused
             him
             to
             take
             an
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             give
             band
             to
             preach
             no
             more
             ,
             and
             to
             depart
             the
             Kingdome
             within
             three
             weeks
             ,
             without
             returning
             ;
             and
             all
             this
             for
             preaching
             after
             his
             first
             unjust
             deprivation
             ,
             though
             〈◊〉
             exception
             was
             taken
             against
             his
             doctrine
             .
             Thu
             much
             in
             the
             Breviate
             is
             printed
             of
             Hayden
             :
             if
             the
             man
             be
             roguish
             ,
             as
             some
             indeed
             say
             he
             is
             ,
             I
             am
             utterly
             ignorant
             of
             his
             manners
             :
             but
             hereof
             no
             man
             is
             ignorant
             ,
             that
             the
             Episcopall
             censures
             le
             ts
             slip
             in
             men
             who
             loves
             their
             cause
             ,
             manners
             of
             the
             most
             vile
             villains
             ,
             as
             appears
             well
             this
             day
             in
             many
             a
             black
             be
             presented
             to
             the
             Committee
             of
             Parliament
             for
             scandalous
             Ministers
             :
             also
             that
             the
             cruelty
             of
             Bishops
             hath
             crusht
             to
             the
             verie
             death
             ,
             with
             povertie
             ,
             banishment
             ,
             cold
             and
             famine
             in
             prisons
             ,
             many
             whose
             lives
             were
             never
             spotted
             with
             the
             allegeance
             of
             any
             crime
             ,
             but
             opposition
             to
             their
             ungratious
             Lordships
             ;
             the
             Remonstrants
             can
             make
             it
             appeare
             by
             too
             too
             many
             examples
             .
          
           
             l
             Sundry
             of
             our
             prime
             Earles
             and
             Lords
             did
             present
             a
             supplication
             to
             our
             King
             ,
             after
             his
             Coronation
             ,
             wherein
             the
             matter
             of
             their
             greatest
             complaint
             was
             ,
             so
             far
             as
             ever
             wee
             heard
             ,
             their
             challenging
             of
             the
             Bishops
             for
             what
             they
             had
             done
             ,
             and
             were
             likely
             to
             doe
             .
             The
             double
             of
             this
             privie
             supplication
             being
             privily
             convoyed
             by
             an
             unfriend
             ,
             some
             two
             or
             three
             yeares
             thereafter
             ,
             out
             of
             my
             Lord
             Balmerinochs
             chamber
             ,
             was
             a
             ditty
             for
             which
             he
             was
             condemned
             to
             dye
             ,
             for
             an
             example
             to
             all
             other
             Noble
             Men
             to
             beware
             of
             the
             like
             rashnesse
             ,
             especially
             his
             Fellow-supplicants
             ,
             who
             are
             all
             declared
             to
             have
             deserved
             by
             that
             fault
             the
             same
             sentence
             of
             death
             .
             Large
             Declaration
             ,
             pag.
             14.
             
             Nor
             could
             they
             have
             found
             the
             least
             blemish
             in
             our
             justice
             ,
             if
             we
             should
             have
             given
             warrant
             both
             〈◊〉
             his
             sentence
             and
             execution
             ,
             whose
             life
             was
             now
             legally
             devolved
             into
             our
             hands
             .
             
               Ibid.
               p.
            
             13.
             
             We
             were
             graciously
             pleased
             ,
             that
             the
             feare
             and
             example
             might
             reach
             to
             all
             ,
             but
             the
             punishment
             only
             to
             one
             of
             them
             ,
             to
             passe
             by
             many
             ,
             who
             undoubtedly
             had
             been
             concluded
             ,
             and
             involved
             by
             our
             Lawes
             in
             the
             same
             sentence
             ,
             if
             we
             had
             proceeded
             against
             them
             .
          
           
             m
             Studley
             about
             the
             end
             of
             his
             wicked
             story
             avowes
             ,
             that
             since
             by
             severe
             punishment
             the
             number
             of
             the
             unconformists
             have
             decayed
             ,
             that
             their
             cause
             cannot
             be
             from
             God
             
          
           
             n
             Canterburie
             in
             his
             Epistle
             to
             the
             King
             before
             the
             Star-Chamber
             speech
             ,
             having
             magnified
             the
             Kings
             mercie
             ,
             for
             saving
             the
             life
             of
             Burton
             and
             his
             companions
             ,
             is
             bold
             to
             advise
             the
             King
             not
             alwayes
             to
             be
             so
             mercifull
             ,
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             Yet
             this
             I
             shall
             be
             bold
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             your
             Majestie
             may
             consider
             of
             it
             in
             your
             wisdome
             ,
             that
             one
             way
             of
             government
             is
             not
             alwayes
             either
             fit
             or
             safe
             ,
             when
             the
             humours
             of
             the
             people
             are
             in
             a
             continuall
             change
             ,
             especially
             when
             such
             men
             as
             those
             shall
             work
             upon
             your
             people
             ,
             and
             labour
             to
             infuse
             into
             them
             such
             malignant
             principles
             ,
             to
             introduce
             a
             paritie
             in
             the
             Church
             or
             Common-wealth
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               non
               satis
               sua
               sponte
               〈◊〉
               instigare
               .
               Heylen
            
             in
             his
             moderate
             answer
             ,
             pag.
             187.
             〈◊〉
             many
             reasons
             and
             examples
             ,
             to
             prove
             that
             Bourton
             and
             his
             like
             deserved
             no
             lesse
             than
             publike
             execution
             :
             And
             yet
             these
             men
             are
             so
             gentle
             to
             Papists
             ,
             that
             they
             glorie
             in
             their
             meeknesse
             towards
             them
             ,
             professing
             that
             to
             the
             bitterest
             of
             the
             Jesuites
             they
             have
             never
             given
             so
             much
             as
             a
             course
             word
             .
             So
             Canterburie
             in
             his
             Epistle
             the
             other
             yeare
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             before
             the
             relation
             of
             the
             conference
             ,
             God
             forbid
             that
             I
             should
             ever
             offer
             to
             perswade
             a
             persecution
             in
             any
             kind
             against
             the
             Jesuites
             ,
             or
             practise
             it
             in
             the
             least
             ,
             for
             to
             my
             remembrance
             I
             have
             not
             given
             him
             or
             his
             so
             much
             as
             〈◊〉
             language
             .
          
           
             King
             Charles
             hates
             all
             tyranny
             .
          
           
             o
             His
             Majesties
             speech
             in
             Parliament
             28.
             p.
             75.
             
             The
             peoples
             liberties
             strengthen
             the
             Kings
             prerogative
             ,
             and
             the
             Kings
             prerogative
             is
             to
             defend
             the
             peoples
             liberties
             .
          
           
             p
             Proclamation
             at
             
               York
               ,
               April
            
             25.
             1639.
             
             We
             heartily
             declare
             and
             faithfully
             promise
             ,
             that
             although
             wee
             bee
             now
             in
             armes
             ,
             they
             shall
             be
             no
             wayes
             used
             either
             to
             force
             upon
             that
             our
             native
             Kingdome
             any
             innovation
             of
             religion
             ,
             or
             to
             infringe
             any
             of
             the
             civill
             liberties
             ,
             or
             the
             lawes
             thereof
             ,
             accounting
             it
             our
             glorie
             to
             preserve
             libertie
             and
             freedome
             among
             them
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             Lawes
             .
             Therefore
             wee
             〈◊〉
             once
             againe
             by
             this
             renew
             our
             former
             promises
             for
             the
             maintenance
             of
             Religion
             and
             Lawes
             ,
             and
             this
             we
             doe
             in
             all
             sinceritie
             of
             heart
             ,
             we
             take
             God
             the
             Searcher
             of
             all
             hearts
             to
             witnesse
             ,
             that
             as
             we
             are
             Defenders
             of
             the
             true
             Protestant
             Religion
             ,
             which
             we
             from
             our
             heart
             professe
             ;
             so
             we
             trust
             ,
             we
             shall
             by
             his
             goodnesse
             continue
             in
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             never
             shall
             permit
             any
             innovation
             to
             〈◊〉
             in
             this
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             of
             our
             Kingdomes
             .
             One
             of
             the
             articles
             of
             Dunce
             pacification
             is
             this
             :
             We
             are
             further
             graciously
             pleased
             ,
             that
             according
             to
             the
             Petitioners
             humble
             〈◊〉
             ,
             all
             matters
             Ecclesiasticall
             shall
             be
             determined
             by
             the
             Assemblies
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             matters
             〈◊〉
             by
             the
             Parliament
             ,
             and
             other
             inferiour
             Judicatories
             established
             by
             Law
             ,
             which
             accordingly
             shall
             be
             kept
             once
             a
             yeare
             ,
             or
             so
             oft
             as
             the
             affaires
             of
             the
             Church
             and
             Kingdome
             shall
             require
             .
          
           
             q
             
               Cant.
               relat
               .
               p.
            
             112.
             
             In
             some
             Kingdomes
             there
             are
             divers
             〈◊〉
             of
             greatest
             consequence
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             finally
             and
             bindingly
             ordered
             ,
             but
             in
             and
             by
             Parliament
             ;
             and
             particularly
             the
             Statute
             Lawes
             ,
             which
             must
             bind
             all
             the
             Subjects
             ,
             cannot
             bee
             made
             or
             ratified
             but
             there
             ,
             the
             supreme
             Magistrate
             in
             the
             civill
             State
             may
             not
             abrogate
             Lawes
             made
             in
             Parliament
             ,
             thogh
             hee
             may
             cispense
             with
             the
             penaltie
             of
             the
             Law
             
               quoad
               hic
               &
               nunc
            
             .
          
           
             r
             The
             which
             seditious
             discourse
             and
             writing
             ,
             the
             authors
             therof
             intended
             should
             bee
             dispersed
             ,
             as
             if
             the
             same
             had
             beene
             entertained
             by
             your
             〈◊〉
             ,
             with
             purpose
             to
             put
             it
             in
             execution
             ,
             and
             to
             alter
             the
             ancient
             Laws
             of
             this
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             to
             draw
             all
             things
             to
             your
             Majesties
             absolute
             will
             and
             pleasure
             ,
             and
             to
             dispose
             of
             your
             Subjects
             goods
             without
             their
             consent
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             and
             repeale
             Lawes
             by
             your
             Majesties
             Proclamation
             only
             ,
             without
             consent
             of
             Parliament
             ,
             which
             if
             it
             should
             be
             beleeved
             by
             your
             people
             ,
             could
             not
             but
             raise
             infinite
             discontent
             amongst
             them
             ,
             the
             consequence
             whereof
             might
             be
             of
             extreme
             and
             almost
             inevitable
             danger
             to
             your
             Majesties
             person
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             whole
             frame
             of
             the
             Kingdome
             .
          
           
             s
             Bilson
             of
             Subjection
             ,
             p.
             280.
             
             Neither
             will
             I
             rashly
             pronounce
             all
             that
             resist
             to
             be
             Rebels
             :
             Cases
             may
             fall
             out
             even
             in
             Christian
             Kingdomes
             ,
             where
             people
             may
             plead
             their
             right
             against
             the
             Prince
             ,
             and
             not
             be
             charged
             with
             rebellion
             :
             As
             for
             example
             ,
             if
             a
             Prince
             should
             go
             about
             to
             subject
             his
             Kingdome
             to
             a
             forraine
             Realme
             ,
             or
             change
             the
             forme
             of
             the
             Common-Wealth
             from
             Emperie
             to
             Tyranny
             ,
             or
             neglect
             the
             Lawes
             established
             by
             common
             consent
             of
             Prince
             and
             people
             ,
             to
             execute
             his
             owne
             pleasure
             ;
             in
             those
             and
             other
             cases
             which
             might
             be
             named
             ,
             if
             the
             Nobles
             and
             Commons
             joyne
             〈◊〉
             ,
             to
             defend
             their
             ancient
             and
             accustomed
             libertie
             ,
             regiment
             ,
             and
             lawes
             ,
             they
             may
             not
             well
             be
             counted
             Rebels
             .
             Ib.
             By
             superiour
             powers
             ordained
             of
             God
             ,
             we
             do
             not
             meane
             the
             Princes
             private
             will
             against
             his
             lawes
             ,
             but
             his
             precepts
             derived
             from
             his
             lawes
             ,
             and
             agreeing
             with
             his
             lawes
             ;
             which
             though
             it
             be
             wicked
             ,
             yet
             may
             it
             not
             be
             resisted
             by
             any
             subject
             with
             armed
             violence
             ;
             but
             when
             Princes
             offer
             their
             subjects
             no
             justice
             but
             force
             ,
             and
             despise
             all
             lawes
             to
             practise
             their
             lusts
             ,
             not
             any
             private
             man
             may
             take
             the
             sword
             to
             redresse
             the
             Prince
             ;
             but
             if
             the
             lawes
             of
             the
             land
             appoint
             the
             Nobles
             ,
             as
             next
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             to
             assist
             him
             in
             doing
             right
             ,
             and
             withhold
             him
             〈◊〉
             doing
             wrong
             ,
             then
             bee
             they
             licenced
             by
             mans
             law
             ,
             &
             so
             not
             prohibited
             by
             Gods
             Law
             for
             to
             interposethemselves
             for
             the
             safeguard
             of
             equitie
             and
             innocencie
             ,
             and
             by
             all
             lawfull
             and
             needfull
             meanes
             to
             procure
             the
             Prince
             to
             bee
             reformed
             ,
             but
             in
             no
             case
             to
             deprive
             him
             where
             the
             Scepter
             is
             inherited
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             94.
             
             Spoiles
             ,
             massacres
             ,
             conspiracies
             ,
             treasons
             ,
             even
             to
             the
             destruction
             and
             murther
             of
             Princes
             by
             their
             owne
             servants
             ,
             if
             a
             Priest
             say
             the
             word
             ,
             you
             count
             in
             your selves
             to
             bee
             just
             ,
             honourable
             ,
             and
             godly
             war
             :
             if
             others
             do
             but
             〈◊〉
             on
             their
             guard
             to
             keep
             their
             lives
             and
             families
             from
             the
             blinded
             rage
             of
             their
             enemies
             ,
             seeking
             to
             put
             whole
             townes
             and
             provinces
             to
             the
             sword
             ,
             against
             all
             law
             and
             reason
             ,
             and
             to
             disturb
             Kingdomes
             in
             the
             minoritie
             of
             the
             right
             Governours
             ,
             or
             if
             they
             defend
             their
             Christian
             and
             ancient
             liberties
             ,
             covenanted
             and
             agreed
             upon
             by
             those
             Princes
             to
             whom
             they
             first
             submitted
             themselves
             ,
             and
             ever
             since
             confirmed
             and
             allowed
             by
             the
             Kings
             that
             have
             succeeded
             .
             If
             in
             either
             of
             these
             two
             cases
             the
             Godly
             require
             their
             right
             ,
             and
             offer
             no
             wrong
             ,
             neither
             impugne
             their
             Princes
             ,
             but
             onely
             save
             their
             owne
             lives
             ,
             you
             crie
             rebellious
             Hereticks
             ,
             rebellious
             Calvinists
             ,
             surie
             ,
             frenzie
             ,
             mutinie
             ,
             and
             I
             know
             not
             what
             ,
             yee
             may
             pursue
             ,
             depose
             ,
             murther
             Princes
             when
             the
             B.
             of
             Rome
             bids
             you
             ,
             and
             that
             without
             breach
             of
             duty
             ,
             law
             ,
             or
             conscience
             to
             God
             or
             man
             ;
             as
             you
             vant
             .
             And
             that
             when
             neither
             life
             nor
             limme
             of
             you
             is
             touched
             ,
             we
             may
             not
             so
             much
             as
             beseech
             Princes
             that
             we
             may
             be
             used
             like
             subjects
             ,
             not
             like
             slaves
             ,
             like
             men
             ,
             not
             like
             beasts
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             be
             convented
             by
             lawes
             before
             Judges
             ,
             not
             murthered
             by
             Inquisitors
             in
             corners
             ,
             but
             incontinent
             the
             fume
             of
             your
             uncleant
             mouth
             is
             ready
             to
             call
             us
             by
             all
             the
             names
             you
             can
             devise
             .
          
           
             The
             Canterburians
             flatter
             the
             King
             in
             much
             more
             power
             than
             ever
             he
             will
             take
             :
             And
             〈◊〉
             him
             without
             advice
             of
             the
             Clergy
             ,
             to
             doe
             in
             the
             Church
             what
             he
             pleaseth
             .
          
           
             t
             
               H
               〈◊〉
            
             〈◊〉
             answer
             ,
             p.
             28.
             
             What
             spirit
             leads
             you
             that
             you
             are
             〈◊〉
             with
             〈◊〉
             Power
             ,
             which
             men
             of
             better
             understanding
             than
             you
             ,
             have
             given
             to
             Princes
             .
             
               Ib.
               p.
            
             32.
             
             Princes
             are
             Gods
             deputes
             ,
             of
             whom
             should
             they
             be
             limited
             ?
             if
             ye
             say
             by
             the
             Laws
             of
             the
             land
             ,
             those
             themselves
             have
             made
             ,
             a
             prince
             
               in
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             above
             the
             lawes
             ,
             though
             in
             concreto
             ,
             a
             just
             prince
             will
             not
             breake
             the
             lawes
             which
             himselfe
             hath
             promised
             to
             observe
             ,
             otherwise
             wee
             say
             of
             princes
             :
             
               Principi
               lex
               non
               est
               posita
            
             ,
             that
             they
             doe
             not
             governe
             onely
             by
             the
             〈◊〉
             ,
             but
             are
             above
             it
             ,
             that
             he
             is
             sure
             and
             hath
             an
             absolute
             authority
             .
             
               Ibid.
               p.
            
             〈◊〉
             .
             I
             will
             be
             bold
             to
             tell
             you
             that
             as
             it
             is
             a
             kind
             of
             Atheisme
             to
             dispute
             
               pro
               &
               contra
            
             ,
             what
             God
             can
             doe
             ,
             and
             what
             he
             cannot
             ,
             though
             such
             disputes
             are
             raised
             sometimes
             by
             unquiet
             〈◊〉
             ;
             so
             it
             is
             a
             〈◊〉
             of
             disobedience
             and
             disloyalty
             to
             determine
             what
             a
             King
             can
             ,
             and
             what
             he
             cannot
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               p.
            
             3.
             
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             princes
             being
             Legislators
             are
             above
             their
             Laws
             ,
             and
             dispence
             with
             them
             as
             they
             thinke
             expedient
             .
             A
             prince
             is
             not
             bound
             to
             his
             owne
             Lawes
             ,
             because
             no
             man
             can
             impose
             a
             law
             upon
             himselfe
             .
             
               Aberdeen
               duplyes
               p.
            
             22.
             
             The
             King
             is
             above
             the
             Law
             as
             both
             the
             author
             and
             giver
             of
             strength
             thereto
             .
          
           
             w
             Dominus
             Joannes
             Wemius
             de
             Craigtoun
             ,
             
               a
               man
               advanced
               by
               our
               Bishops
               to
               be
               a
               Lord
               both
               of
               Councell
               and
               Session
               in
               his
               booke
            
             de
             primatu
             Regis
             
               printed
               at
            
             Edinburgh
             
               1623.
               
               And
               going
               among
               them
               to
               this
               day
               with
               applause
            
             p.
             18.
             
             Sed
             quid
             si
             princeps
             leges
             statuat
             adhibito
             etiam
             jurisjurandi
             sacramento
             ,
             velin
             sua
             inauguratione
             promittat
             ,
             se
             leges
             non
             〈◊〉
             absque
             populi
             ordinumque
             non
             modo
             consilio
             ,
             sedetiam
             consensu
             ac
             determinante
             sententia
             ,
             fiquidem
             non
             suerit
             haec
             in
             prima
             regni
             constitutione
             conditio
             &
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ac
             〈◊〉
             regni
             〈◊〉
             non
             sit
             (
             quo
             casu
             dicerem
             non
             proprie
             esse
             regnum
             ,
             sed
             〈◊〉
             ocratiam
             ,
             vel
             democratiam
             )
             sed
             post
             regni
             constitutionem
             pactum
             〈◊〉
             sit
             Regis
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             etiam
             si
             forsan
             pollicentem
             〈◊〉
             obliget
             ,
             quoniam
             praestanda
             est
             fides
             data
             〈◊〉
             sine
             fide
             licet
             ,
             non
             fine
             〈◊〉
             regnet
             :
             successores
             tamen
             in
             regno
             quomodo
             constringet
             vix
             intell
             gimus
             ,
             〈◊〉
             si
             〈◊〉
             a
             quoque
             sit
             ut
             ait
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             omn
             is
             ea
             pactio
             quae
             inter
             patrem
             &
             filium
             ,
             maritum
             &
             〈◊〉
             .
             dominum
             &
             〈◊〉
             regem
             &
             〈◊〉
             celebratur
             ,
             quod
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             hos
             audientes
             esse
             .
             
               lb.
               p.
               39.
            
             
             Audemus
             dicere
             in
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             supra
             leges
             esse
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             nemo
             enim
             fibi
             Legislator
             ,
             virdex
             aut
             〈◊〉
             ,
             d
             stinctio
             non
             probanda
             principem
             quoad
             vim
             legum
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             coactivam
             legibus
             subditum
             esse
             ,
             non
             enim
             mag
             is
             dirigere
             quam
             cogere
             seipsum
             〈◊〉
             quis
             ,
             〈◊〉
             actio
             omnis
             sit
             inter
             agens
             &
             patiens
             .
             
               lb.
               41.
            
             
             Si
             〈◊〉
             suas
             se
             observaturum
             〈◊〉
             obligaverit
             princeps
             ,
             quod
             raroaut
             nunquam
             fit
             ,
             eriamsi
             soleat
             princeps
             quisque
             legum
             suarum
             observationem
             hoc
             sensu
             promittere
             ,
             id
             est
             ,
             〈◊〉
             a
             〈◊〉
             observentur
             se
             effecturum
             ,
             ad
             earum
             observationem
             teneri
             eum
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             religion
             is
             potius
             quam
             justitiae
             legalis
             observatione
             .
          
           
             x
             
               〈◊〉
               Wemius
               ,
               p.
               26.
            
             
             Legum
             latio
             pr
             〈◊〉
             est
             supremae
             dominationis
             ac
             majestat
             is
             caput
             .
             
               lb.
               p
               74.
            
             
             Legum
             ecclesiasticarum
             principes
             latores
             sunt
             ,
             nec
             differunt
             à
             civilibus
             ecclesiastica
             ratione
             causae
             efficient
             is
             .
          
           
             y
             
               Iohannes
               Wemius
               ,
               p.
               59.
            
             
             Potestatem
             in
             ecclesiasticis
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             posse
             a
             principibus
             jure
             suo
             extra
             concilia
             exerceri
             decent
             ,
             quas
             ita
             tulerunt
             leges
             〈◊〉
             atque
             〈◊〉
             Regis
             legibus
             ecclesiasticis
             quae
             legi
             divinae
             non
             repugnant
             ,
             nequit
             quis
             bona
             cum
             conscientia
             obedientiam
             detrectare
             ,
             quam
             vis
             non
             〈◊〉
             ad
             〈◊〉
             constitutionem
             Pastorum
             Ecclesiae
             corsensus
             .
             
               Ib.
               p.
               93.
            
             
             Etiamfi
             extra
             concilia
             jubendi
             autoritatem
             habeat
             Princeps
             ,
             tamen
             libentius
             obsequuntur
             〈◊〉
             principum
             statut
             is
             ,
             quibus
             past
             orum
             in
             conciliis
             honorantur
             judicia
             .
          
           
             z
             Large
             Declaration
             ,
             p.
             222.
             
             Did
             not
             we
             and
             our
             Councell
             by
             equall
             authoritie
             command
             these
             innovations
             of
             Canons
             and
             Liturgie
             ?
             Was
             not
             then
             the
             Prelates
             practice
             of
             them
             as
             well
             warranted
             as
             this
             confession
             of
             faith
             ,
             and
             the
             band
             annexed
             ,
             which
             were
             never
             brought
             in
             by
             Acts
             of
             Parliament
             ,
             or
             Assembly
             ;
             but
             meerely
             by
             our
             royall
             Fathers
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             put
             in
             execution
             by
             the
             authoritie
             of
             his
             Councell
             ?
          
           
             &
             
               Iohannes
               Wemius
               ,
               pag.
               66.
            
             
             Laicos
             saepè
             a
             principilius
             advocatos
             in
             Concilia
             videre
             est
             ;
             quibus
             non
             modo
             consultivam
             ,
             sed
             &
             difinitiv
             im
             〈◊〉
             permitterent
             .
             Iste
             fuit
             electionis
             mittendorum
             ad
             Conciliae
             modus
             ,
             ut
             〈◊〉
             praesulibus
             quos
             〈◊〉
             mittendi
             liberam
             plerumque
             potestatem
             permitteret
             princeps
             ,
             quod
             illis
             exploratius
             quam
             sibi
             esset
             qui
             ad
             eam
             〈◊〉
             aptiores
             :
             Non
             quod
             princ
             pi
             penitus
             neganda
             sit
             ,
             quod
             autumant
             nonnulli
             ,
             particular
             is
             personarum
             quae
             〈◊〉
             eum
             Leges
             Ecclesiasticas
             laturum
             adjuvent
             designatio
             .
             〈◊〉
             ud
             enim
             esset
             principum
             juri
             detrahere
             .
             Ex
             singulis
             〈◊〉
             moderatus
             〈◊〉
             numerus
             eruditorum
             ac
             prudentiorum
             Presbyterorum
             ,
             Diaconorum
             ,
             &
             Laicorum
             a
             Principe
             aut
             Metropolita
             Principis
             delegato
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Iohannes
               Wemius
               ,
               p.
               89.
            
             〈◊〉
             habent
             vocem
             Pasto
             〈◊〉
             tanqu
             im
             juris
             divini
             consulti
             ,
             desinitivam
             princeps
             ut
             judex
             ;
             dante
             illis
             consilii
             ,
             his
             judicii
             potestatem
             legislatore
             Deo
             ,
             penes
             quem
             solum
             summa
             in
             spiritualibus
             imperii
             residet
             .
             
               lb.
               p.
               70.
            
             
             Vocem
             habere
             qui
             congregartur
             Presbyteros
             non
             qua
             Presbyteri
             ,
             〈◊〉
             qua
             ecclesiarū
             sunt
             legati
             a
             principe
             vocati
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
               74.
            
             
             Definitiva
             〈◊〉
             dictio
             corum
             est
             ,
             qui
             a
             principe
             summo
             moderatore
             cos
             corsulente
             ,
             vocemque
             〈◊〉
             dante
             vocantur
             .
             lb.
             
             Asserimus
             non
             agitata
             in
             conciliis
             fuisse
             saltem
             quae
             majoris
             momenti
             essent
             negotia
             ,
             nisi
             quaterus
             ca
             princeps
             per
             legatos
             proponeret
             ,
             aut
             patribus
             descripta
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             b
             
               Iohannes
               Wemius
               ,
               p.
               126.
            
             〈◊〉
             in
             Scriptura
             mandato
             〈◊〉
             concilia
             celebrandi
             mos
             ;
             sed
             a
             principibus
             〈◊〉
             curam
             〈◊〉
             bus
             ,
             &
             cum
             non
             essent
             principes
             ,
             a
             pastoribus
             ipsis
             volentibus
             ortum
             habuit
             .
          
           
             c
             
               Iohannes
               Wemius
               ,
               p.
               78.
               
               &
               79.
               
            
             Officiorum
             Ecclesiae
             modus
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             est
             ,
             &
             a
             principe
             pastores
             Ecclesiae
             non
             corsulente
             〈◊〉
             posse
             affirmamus
             ,
             〈◊〉
             cum
             serenissimo
             nostro
             〈◊〉
             sammis
             quibusque
             imperitantibus
             concessum
             esse
             externam
             in
             ecclesiasticis
             regiminis
             formam
             suis
             pra
             scribere
             ,
             quae
             ad
             civilis
             administrationis
             modum
             quam
             proxime
             accedat
             ,
             dummodo
             a
             fide
             veraeque
             religionis
             fundamentis
             ne
             tantillum
             abscedat
             .
          
           
             d
             
               Iohannes
               Wemius
               ,
               p
               124.
            
             〈◊〉
             confertur
             〈◊〉
             jurisdictionis
             potest
             as
             per
             regium
             quod
             a
             Deo
             habet
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Regi
             tantum
             Christiano
             aptitudo
             eâ
             recte
             utendi
             Christi
             gratia
             donetur
             .
             Tametsi
             primatus
             〈◊〉
             administret
             Rex
             〈◊〉
             :
             Primatus
             tamen
             jus
             ,
             officii
             seu
             vecatioris
             ,
             〈◊〉
             facultatis
             aut
             exercitii
             ratione
             Rex
             obtinet
             .
             Quae
             Regi
             supervenit
             gratia
             regiam
             in
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             non
             facit
             potestatem
             ,
             non
             〈◊〉
             ,
             nec
             expellit
             gratiae
             internae
             ,
             nedum
             professionis
             externae
             defectus
             .
          
           
             They
             give
             to
             the
             〈◊〉
             power
             to
             do
             in
             the
             State
             what
             ever
             he
             will
             ,
             〈◊〉
             the
             advice
             of
             his
             parliament
             .
          
           
             e
             〈◊〉
             Wemius
             ,
             page
             17.
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             putandum
             est
             ,
             quia
             solet
             〈◊〉
             ex
             modesta
             &
             prudenti
             virium
             suarum
             dissidentia
             non
             nisi
             de
             or
             dinum
             〈◊〉
             leges
             ferre
             ,
             absolutam
             ideo
             ei
             imponiejusque
             successoribus
             necessitatem
             illorum
             〈◊〉
             corsersus
             ,
             ac
             si
             nullo
             modo
             〈◊〉
             perse
             ,
             sine
             corundē
             〈◊〉
             ,
             bonas
             edere
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             quibus
             qua
             quaeso
             conscientia
             non
             parebunt
             omnes
             ,
             〈◊〉
             pag.
             19.
             
             In
             Monarchia
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             voluntas
             de
             substantialegis
             est
             :
             praevia
             cum
             populo
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             si
             utilis
             imò
             〈◊〉
             sit
             ,
             〈◊〉
             tamen
             non
             est
             .
             〈◊〉
             cum
             imperatore
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             dicendum
             videtur
             ;
             explosis
             ridiculosis
             ambiguitatibus
             ,
             verum
             conditorem
             &
             interpretem
             legum
             esse
             solum
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             ligem
             legislatoris
             ,
             non
             〈◊〉
             ,
             non
             ex
             vi
             con
             sensus
             &
             〈◊〉
             ,
             sed
             ex
             regia
             〈◊〉
             viobligantem
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             pag.
             8.
             
             Non
             〈◊〉
             Juristarum
             〈◊〉
             ,
             qui
             〈◊〉
             in
             〈◊〉
             ron
             obligare
             legem
             nisi
             à
             〈◊〉
             acceptetur
             ,
             cum
             mon
             〈◊〉
             fit
             legislator
             ,
             &
             lex
             〈◊〉
             qua
             lex
             obliget
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ut
             ad
             eam
             〈◊〉
             ,
             dam
             ,
             cogendi
             fint
             〈◊〉
             post
             legis
             à
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             publicationem
             ,
             temporisque
             quoad
             populi
             notitiam
             〈◊〉
             sufficientis
             lapsum
             ,
             potest
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             publica
             legis
             observatio
             praecise
             ingeri
             Heylens
             〈◊〉
             .
             p.
             
               66.
               
               The
               declaration
               of
               his
               〈◊〉
               pleasure
               in
               the
               case
               of
               S.
            
             Gregorie
             
               is
               to
               bee
               extended
               to
               〈◊〉
               other
               cases
               of
               the
               same
               nature
               .
               It
               is
               a
               maxime
               in
               the
               civill
               law
               ,
            
             Sententia
             Principis
             ,
             jus
             dubium
             declarans
             ,
             jus
             sacit
             quoad
             omnes
             .
             Item
             Quodcunque
             imperator
             per
             〈◊〉
             constituit
             ,
             vel
             〈◊〉
             decrevit
             ,
             legem
             esse
             constat
             .
             Id
             in
             his
             moderate
             answer
             pag.
             
               29.
               
               Onely
               these
               commands
               of
               the
               King
               are
               to
               be
               refused
               ,
               which
               are
               directly
               against
               Scripture
               ,
               or
               include
               marifest
               impiety
               .
               He
               learned
               this
               from
               his
               opposite
               the
            
             Lincolneshire
             Minister
             ,
             pag.
             
               68.
               
               I
               say
               that
               al
               commands
               of
               the
               King
               that
               are
               not
               upon
               the
               clear
               and
               immediate
               inference
               without
               all
               prosyllogismes
               ,
               contrary
               to
               acleare
               passage
               of
               the
               word
               of
               God
               ,
               or
               to
               an
               evident
               Sun-beame
               of
               the
               law
               of
               nature
               ,
               are
               precisely
               to
               bee
               obeyed
               ;
               nor
               is
               it
               enough
               to
               finde
               a
               remote
               and
               possible
               inconvenience
               that
               may
               ensue
               .
            
          
           
             f
             〈◊〉
             Wemius
             page
             23.
             〈◊〉
             ut
             &
             civium
             ad
             Comitia
             delegatos
             ,
             non
             ita
             absolutè
             à
             Baronum
             vel
             Civium
             〈◊〉
             pendere
             volumus
             ,
             ut
             non
             possit
             Rex
             ,
             quos
             〈◊〉
             maxime
             idoneos
             censuerit
             eligendos
             〈◊〉
             ,
             praesertim
             〈◊〉
             pro
             legibus
             ferendis
             〈◊〉
             quae
             administrationis
             〈◊〉
             publicae
             statuendis
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             sunt
             ,
             in
             quibus
             liberum
             denegare
             regi
             〈◊〉
             quos
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             quibuscum
             deliberet
             sibi
             in
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             esset
             ex
             Rege
             non
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             statuumque
             voluntati
             ad
             Regiae
             depressionem
             eminentiae
             nimis
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             g
             
               Joannes
               Wemius
            
             page
             19
             Omnia
             fatemur
             〈◊〉
             in
             regno
             sunt
             regis
             esse
             ,
             quarex
             est
             ,
             〈◊〉
             est
             ,
             qua
             〈◊〉
             regui
             dominus
             ,
             adeoque
             qua
             〈◊〉
             ipsius
             qua
             rex
             est
             ,
             aut
             publica
             regni
             conditio
             ,
             posse
             regem
             de
             〈◊〉
             bonis
             disponere
             ,
             praesertim
             ubi
             omnes
             in
             regno
             terrae
             in
             feuda
             concessae
             fuerint
             à
             rege
             ,
             aliquod
             penes
             se
             dominium
             retinente
             .
             Id.
             p.
             17.
             
             Licet
             non
             de
             jure
             omnium
             bona
             exigendo
             ,
             tamen
             dejure
             in
             omnes
             leges
             ferendo
             ,
             sine
             omnium
             consenso
             statuere
             potest
             .
             Montag
             .
             
               orig
               .
               p.
               320
            
             Omni
             lege
             ,
             divina
             ,
             naturali
             ,
             nationali
             ,
             vel
             politica
             licite
             semper
             reges
             &
             principes
             suis
             subditu
             tributa
             &
             〈◊〉
             ,
             &
             licitè
             quoque
             exegerunt
             ,
             cum
             ad
             patriae
             ,
             &
             reipublicae
             defensionem
             ,
             tum
             ad
             ipsorum
             &
             familiae
             honest
             amprocurationem
             .
             Hanc
             doctrinam
             accurate
             tuetur
             ecclesia
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             in
             qua
             sacerdotes
             licet
             magis
             gaudere
             &
             soleant
             ,
             &
             debeant
             ,
             immunitatibus
             tamen
             &
             frequentius
             ,
             &
             exuberantius
             ,
             &
             libentius
             ,
             quam
             〈◊〉
             dec
             marum
             decimas
             ,
             subsid
             a
             ,
             annatas
             primitias
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             h
             
               Joannes
               Wemius
               ,
               page
               136.
            
             
             Cum
             regis
             sit
             insuo
             regno
             judices
             ,
             &
             Magistratus
             constituere
             ,
             qui
             ipsius
             sint
             in
             judicando
             ,
             &
             jubendo
             vicarii
             ,
             potest
             rex
             〈◊〉
             judicandique
             jus
             ac
             Mag
             stratus
             judicesque
             constituendt
             potestatem
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             prout
             regno
             utile
             esse
             visum
             ei
             fuerit
             abutent
             〈◊〉
             us
             auferre
             ,
             &
             nulla
             〈◊〉
             est
             sub
             Rege
             patr
             monialis
             &
             haereditaria
             jur
             sdictio
             ,
             Rege
             solo
             jurisdictionem
             tanquim
             propriam
             habente
             ,
             aliisque
             quibus
             eam
             non
             dat
             ,
             sed
             communicat
             ,
             tanquam
             depositam
             〈◊〉
             .
             Igitur
             non
             ut
             terras
             ,
             ita
             &
             jurisdictionem
             simpliciter
             ,
             &
             ut
             loquuntur
             privative
             ,
             Rex
             alienare
             potest
             ,
             nisi
             Rex
             esse
             〈◊〉
             .
             
               Ibid.
               page
               157.
            
             
             Siiudices
             sint
             principum
             vicarii
             ,
             〈◊〉
             est
             eorum
             principe
             praesente
             potest
             as
             ,
             cum
             solius
             absentis
             teneat
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             &
             si
             quae
             est
             alicubi
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ron
             nisi
             jus
             est
             ,
             judicium
             regium
             volente
             Rege
             declarandi
             ;
             ut
             ita
             ex
             jud
             〈◊〉
             ore
             proferatur
             Regis
             sententia
             .
             
               Ibid.
               page
               17.
            
             
             In
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             non
             tam
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             psis
             quam
             ass
             stent
             bus
             imperium
             exercet
             Rex
             ,
             quandoquidem
             praesente
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             omnium
             〈◊〉
             derivata
             ,
             ut
             fluviorum
             〈◊〉
             nomen
             &
             potestas
             ,
             cum
             in
             mare
             〈◊〉
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
               143.
            
             
             Principis
             occasu
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             omnium
             tam
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             quam
             delagatorum
             jus
             .
             Negari
             non
             potest
             tam
             apud
             Romanos
             quam
             altos
             in
             usu
             suisse
             ,
             ut
             qui
             in
             demortuorum
             succederent
             locum
             reges
             ,
             〈◊〉
             regnorum
             guberracula
             capesserent
             ,
             〈◊〉
             iudicumque
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ut
             ostenderetur
             〈◊〉
             regibus
             nullam
             esse
             inferiorum
             authoritatem
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             tacitè
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             i
             
               Corbet
               ,
               p.
            
             45.
             
             There
             was
             no
             law
             in
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Scotland
             before
             〈◊〉
             gave
             it
             :
             for
             〈◊〉
             Fergus
             his
             〈◊〉
             wee
             were
             
               〈◊〉
               hominum
               agreste
               ,
               sine
               legibus
               ,
               〈◊〉
               imperio
               .
            
             Hee
             and
             his
             Successors
             gave
             lawes
             .
             
               ibid.
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             did
             conquer
             us
             .
          
           
             k
             
               Corbet
               ,
               p.
            
             25.
             
             Fergus
             &
             his
             Successours
             divided
             the
             whole
             land
             which
             was
             their
             owne
             ,
             and
             distinguished
             the
             orders
             of
             men
             ,
             &
             did
             establish
             a
             〈◊〉
             t
             :
             This
             is
             cleare
             
               ex
               〈◊〉
               regiis
               ,
               ubi
               satis
               constal
               regem
               esse
               dominum
               omnium
               〈◊〉
               directum
               ,
               omnes
               subditos
               esse
               ejus
               vassallos
               ,
               qui
               latifundia
               sua
               ipsi
               domino
               referant
               accepta
               ,
               sui
               〈◊〉
               obsequii
               ,
               &
               servitii
               praemia
               .
            
          
           
             l
             Ioannes
             Wemius
             ,
             p.
             18.
             
             
               Quo
               casu
               dicerem
               nonpreprie
               esse
               regnum
               ,
               sed
               ar
               stocratiam
               vel
               democratiam
               .
            
             Ibid.
             p.
             23.
             
             
               Hoc
               esset
               ex
               rege
               non
               regem
               cum
               facere
               .
            
             Ibid.
             p.
             38.
             
             
               Quodsi
               alicubi
               non
               habeat
               rex
               potestatem
               leges
               ferendi
               ,
               nisi
               ex
               〈◊〉
               comitiis
               consensu
               ,
               &
               sic
               fundamentaliter
               limitata
               ,
               proprie
               Rex
               non
               est
               ,
               ac
               non
               tam
               acceptans
               est
               populus
               quam
               cum
               Rege
               ,
               〈◊〉
               collega
               legem
               ferens
               .
            
             Ibid.
             p.
             53.
             
             
               Non
               est
               imperium
               illud
               vere
               〈◊〉
               ,
               sed
               principatus
               quidam
               ,
               &
               imperans
               ille
               ,
               non
               Monarcha
               aut
               .
               Rex
               ,
               sed
               tantum
               Princeps
               ,
               &
               ut
               Venetorum
               Dux
               residente
               in
               opt
               matibus
               ,
               aut
               populo
               〈◊〉
               summa
               .
            
          
           
             m
             Relat.
             of
             the
             Conference
             ,
             pag.
             The
             Statute
             Lawes
             which
             must
             bind
             all
             the
             Subjects
             ,
             cannot
             be
             made
             but
             in
             ,
             and
             by
             Parliament
             :
             the
             supreme
             Magistrate
             in
             the
             civill
             state
             ,
             may
             not
             abrogate
             Lawes
             made
             in
             Parliament
             .
             
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             158.
             
             Tiberius
             himselfe
             ,
             in
             the
             cause
             of
             Silanus
             ,
             when
             Dolabella
             would
             have
             flattered
             him
             into
             more
             power
             than
             in
             wisdome
             he
             thought
             〈◊〉
             then
             to
             take
             to
             himselfe
             ,
             he
             put
             him
             off
             thus
             :
             No
             ,
             the
             Lawes
             grow
             lesse
             when
             such
             power
             enlargeth
             ,
             nor
             is
             absolute
             power
             to
             bee
             used
             ,
             where
             there
             may
             be
             an
             orderly
             proceeding
             by
             Law.
             
          
           
             In
             no
             imaginable
             case
             ,
             〈◊〉
             wil
             have
             Tyrants
             resisted
             .
          
           
             n
             Ioannes
             Wemius
             ,
             
               pag.
               21.
            
             
             Teneri
             videtur
             subditus
             seipsum
             fame
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ut
             principem
             salvaret
             ,
             propter
             conservationem
             boni
             publici
             .
             singulis
             adempta
             est
             adversus
             principem
             quae
             naturalis
             dicitur
             iuris
             defensio
             ,
             scu
             iniuriae
             depulsio
             .
          
           
             o
             Canterb
             ,
             relat
             .
             p.
             205.
             
             Where
             the
             foundations
             of
             the
             faith
             are
             shaken
             by
             Princes
             ,
             there
             there
             ought
             to
             be
             prayer
             and
             patience
             ,
             but
             no
             opposition
             by
             force
             .
             
               Aberdeens
               Duplys
               ,
               pag.
            
             25.
             
             The
             way
             for
             all
             Christian
             Subiects
             to
             conquer
             Tyrants
             ,
             and
             the
             remedy
             provided
             in
             the
             New
             Testament
             against
             all
             persecutions
             ,
             is
             not
             to
             resist
             powers
             which
             God
             hath
             ordained
             ,
             lest
             we
             be
             damned
             ,
             but
             with
             all
             〈◊〉
             to
             suffer
             that
             we
             may
             be
             crowned
             .
             It
             is
             evident
             by
             Scripture
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             unlawfull
             for
             Subiects
             in
             a
             Monarchicall
             estate
             ,
             to
             take
             armes
             for
             religion
             ,
             or
             for
             any
             other
             pretence
             ,
             without
             warrant
             from
             the
             Prince
             .
             The
             renow
             ned
             Thebaean
             Legion
             of
             6666
             Christian
             Souldiers
             ,
             without
             making
             resistance
             as
             they
             had
             strength
             to
             have
             done
             ,
             suffered
             themselves
             rather
             to
             be
             slaine
             for
             their
             Christian
             profession
             by
             the
             Officers
             of
             Maximinian
             ,
             the
             Emperours
             executors
             of
             his
             cruell
             commandements
             against
             them
             .
             
               Corbet
               ,
               p.
            
             42.
             
             For
             your
             examples
             from
             reformed
             Churches
             ,
             since
             we
             live
             not
             by
             examples
             but
             by
             〈◊〉
             ,
             I
             will
             not
             stand
             upon
             them
             ,
             from
             facts
             to
             prove
             the
             lawfulnesse
             of
             resisting
             is
             ridiculous
             ;
             none
             of
             those
             by
             resisting
             ,
             gained
             so
             much
             as
             by
             suffering
             ,
             as
             experience
             too
             late
             doth
             thew
             .
          
           
             p
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             pag
             29.
             
             Such
             was
             the
             doctrine
             and
             practice
             of
             many
             other
             great
             lights
             ,
             which
             shined
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             Iulian
             the
             Apostate
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             the
             Arrian
             〈◊〉
             ,
             and
             
               Gothick
               Arrian
            
             Kings
             .
          
           
             q
             
               Corbet
               ,
               pag.
            
             26.
             
             
               Qui
               〈◊〉
               ,
               Caio
               〈◊〉
               ,
               qui
               Augusto
               ,
               ipse
               &
               〈◊〉
               ,
               qui
               〈◊〉
               ,
               vel
               patri
               ,
               vel
               filio
               ,
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ;
               &
               ne
               per
               〈◊〉
               ire
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ,
               qui
               Constantino
               Christiano
               ,
               ipse
               &
               apostatae
               Iuliano
               .
               Ibid.
               pag.
            
             36.
             
             If
             the
             Iewes
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             Assuerus
             had
             beene
             of
             this
             new
             Scottish
             humour
             ,
             when
             an
             utter
             extirpation
             was
             intended
             by
             Haman
             ,
             both
             of
             themselves
             and
             theirreligion
             ,
             they
             would
             have
             taken
             armes
             :
             but
             their
             prayers
             and
             teares
             were
             their
             defence
             in
             their
             greatest
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             What
             they
             give
             to
             Kings
             ,
             is
             not
             for
             any
             respect
             they
             have
             to
             Maiestie
             ,
             but
             for
             their
             owne
             ambitious
             and
             〈◊〉
             ends
             .
          
           
             r
             Ioannes
             We
             〈◊〉
             
               in
               his
               preface
               to
               the
               Duke
               of
            
             Buckingham
             ,
             Reges
             in
             〈◊〉
             sortem
             transcripti
             ,
             cute
             &
             〈◊〉
             tenus
             homines
             ,
             reipsa
             boni
             genii
             censendi
             sunt
             ,
             in
             quos
             ut
             bumanos
             Ioves
             divini
             honoris
             〈◊〉
             pene
             &
             consortes
             ,
             oculos
             animosque
             nostros
             desigi
             convenit
             .
             Tu
             Heros
             nobilissime
             coruscas
             ,
             velut
             inter
             ignes
             Luna
             minores
             ,
             quem
             in
             〈◊〉
             augustioris
             gloriae
             〈◊〉
             divina
             prorsus
             virgula
             constitutum
             nemo
             potest
             dissiteri
             .
          
           
             s
             Smart
             Sermon
             ,
             pag.
             1.
             
             M.
             Couzins
             uttered
             these
             trayterous
             speeches
             in
             an
             open
             and
             affirmative
             manner
             ,
             that
             the
             Kings
             Highnesse
             is
             no
             more
             supreme
             head
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             ,
             than
             the
             boy
             that
             rubs
             his
             horse
             heeles
             ,
             and
             this
             as
             we
             are
             credibly
             informed
             ,
             hath
             beene
             proved
             against
             him
             by
             the
             〈◊〉
             of
             two
             sufficient
             witnesses
             .
          
           
             t
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             .
             supra
             cap.
             ult
             .
             A.
             
          
           
             w
             〈◊〉
             .
             supra
             cap.
             3.
             
             O.
             
          
           
             x
             Montag
             .
             supra
             cap.
             tertio
             .
             (
             z
             )